Patron

Shri C. Neelap
Deputy Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

Regional Co-ordination & Compilation

Shri D. Patle
Asstt. Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

School Co-ordination
Shri S. Sarkar
Principal, KV IOC,
Noonmati, Guwahati
Shri V.D. Tailor
Principal, KV CRPF,
Amerigog, Guwahati

Subject Expert
Vijay Kumar
PGT(CS),
KV CRPF, Amerigog, Guwahati
 CONTENTS

S.NO. UNIT Page Number

1. Computer Basic 3

2. Fun with Paint Brush 10

3. More about Paint Brush 15

4. About Desktop and Computer Peripherals 19

5. MS – WORD 27

6. More about MS-WORD 32

7. Internet 42

8. Sample papers 45
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

UNIT-I
COMPUTER BASICS
You will learn

 Introduction to computer
 Identify the parts of computer
 Starting and shutdown the computer
 Computer Room Etiquettes
 Identify the keys of keyboard
 Do’s and Do not of while working on
computer
 Strengths and Limitation of Computer
Introduction to Computer

Computer is an electronic machine. It runs on electricity. It takes inputs from you. It uses
some program (set of instructions) to process these inputs. Finally it delivers output as per
your requirement. It can also store your data. You can retrieve this data later on.
Computer follows “Input-Process-Output” Cycle.

Parts of Computer and their functionality

Computer comprises of different parts which are connected with each other.
Each part of Computer plays very important role whenever we use a computer.
Main parts of computer are

1.
2.

Keyboard
Monitor/LCD Central Processing Unit It is set of typewriter like

It displays whatever you It controls the functioning which types the text through

type or draw on computer. of other components. keys.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 3

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Mouse Speaker Printer

It is used to point items and It is used for audio output It is used to take printout
select the text on the screen. from the computer. on the paper.

Starting and shutting down the computer

To start a computer we should flow the following steps
1. Plug in your computer and all peripheral (all devices attached).
2. Switch On your UPS which provide uninterrupted power supply to your computer.
3. Press power button of your CPU then computer will be boot up.
To Shut down your computer
1. To turn off your computer click on the start button.
2. Then in the lower right corner of the start button click on the shut down.
3. When you click shut down computer will ask to close all program you opened and
close them .

Computer Room Etiquettes

1. Remove your shoes before entering the Computer Room because your shoes contain
dust which can harmful for any electronic equipment including computer.

2. Open the door of Computer room slowly and enter it calm and quietly.
3. Never touch the computer parts and attached cables as they can be harmful for
both (Computer & you).

4. Do not push each other while standing near a computer.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 4

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

5. Sit down calm and quietly while seeing Demo on the computer. Ask questions
whenever you are given chance for it.

6. Never carry magnets inside the computer room.

7. Keyboard of your computer should be handled gently.

8. Please do not eat anything such as chewing gum, bubble gum and other sticking
things inside the computer room.

9. Never keep any things such as books, notebooks, pencil boxes on the monitor,
keyboard or CPU.

10. Always use soft and dry clothes to clear the various parts of a computer.

11. Always Shut down your computer properly and cover it with clean clothes before
leaving the computer room.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 5

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Identify the keys on keyboard- different keys on keyboard

Keyboard looks like a typewriter. It is made up of different types of Keys. These keys are
small buttons on the keyboard. Alphabets in Capital letters, numbers, some special
characters, are printed on the keys whenever we press the keys whatever is written on the
keys will printed on the screen.

Some of important keys

Alphabetical Keys:-A,B,C………………………………Z are alphabets keys. There are 26 alphabet

keys on the keyboard. Whenever we press these keys associated alphabet in small case is
written in the screen.

Numerical Keys:- 0,1,2,…………………………9 are numeric keys. There are 10 numeric keys on the
keyboard.

Special Keys: There are various special keys

Caps Lock: – This key is used whenever we want to type the entire sentence, whole word
and letter in a capitals. To use this key press it once and see the yellow light on the right
corner of keyboard where the Caps Lock is written on a button. If the light is on it means
the Caps Lock is active. If we want to write in small case then press this button again the
Caps Lock is off now.

Enter Key:- This key is used to finish a line and move to a next new line on the page.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 6

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Enter key is pressed after typing every command. There are two Enter key on the
keyboard.

Shift Key:-Shift key is present on both sides of the keyboard. The Shift key is
modifier key on a keyboard .The shift key is a modifier key on a keyboard, used to
type capital letters and other alternate "upper" characters. There are typically two shift
keys, on the left and right sides of the row below the home row.

Space Bar:-This key is used to insert the space between two word. It is the longest key on
the keyboard.

Backspace:-is used to delete any character before the current position of the cursor.

Arrow Keys:-is used to move the cursor position in all directions (left, right, up and down)
in the page.

Identify the buttons of Mouse- description of different buttons on the mouse.

1. Left mouse button is used to point to any menu, tool, icon and selection of text,
face, surface and we can select multiple entities by this button.
2. Wheel is used to scroll the page up and down.
3. Right mouse button is used to invoke the shortcut menu.

Do’s and Don’ts of Computer Lab

1. Remove your shoes before entering in the computer Lab.

2. Wash and dry your hands before touching computer parts.
3. No Food and Drink is allowed in the Computer Lab.
4. Work Quietly in the Computer Lab.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 7

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

5. Do not change any computer setting.

6. Do not install or download any software or modify or delete any system files on any lab
computers.

7. Search through internet must remain for academic purposes. Only Visit the approved
Websites through Internet.
8. Operate the computer equipment properly.

Strengths and LIMITATIONS of Computer

Strengths
1. Fast- Computers are much faster as compared to human being.
2. Accurate – Computer can perform all calculation accurately.
3. Store Large amount of data- We can store large amount of data in the
computer.
4. Reliability- Computers are more reliable than human.
5. Versatile-Computer can perform variety of operations on the same data set.

Limitations
1. No IQ level
2. Works on electricity
3. Cannot think by itself.
4. Unable to take decision.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 8

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Let us do practice now

TYPE-I (Short answers based questions)

1. Write down the function of the following keys
(i) Caps Lock Key (ii) Space bar key
2. What is the purpose of scroll button of the mouse?
3. Why should one take some precautions in the Computer room?
4. Draw / paste the picture of a Computer.
5. How can a computer be used for
6. (i) Education (ii) Medical?
7. Write down any two things you should do in the Computer room and also you should not
do.
8. State what would happen if
a. We clean the computer with a wet cloth.
b. We play with wires and clothes in the computer room.
c. We wear shoes in the computer room.
d. We are harsh in handling the keyboard.
e. We do not cover the computer with clean clothes when not using them.

TYPE-II (Fill in the blanks)

1. Computer has parts.

2. Monitor looks like a .
3. The computer is an machine.
4. In schools, computer is used to teach subjects.
5. Versatile means .

Type-III(True or False)

1. Computer can solve only mathematical problems. (True/False)

2. Mouse is used for clicking.(True/False)
3. Monitor is used for displaying output. (True/False)
4. The backspace key is used to insert characters. (True/False)
5. Computer is very slow machine. (True/False)
Lab Session

Type the following line

1. My name is .(your name)
2. I Live in .(your address)
3. I like my school very much.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 9

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

UNIT –II

FUN WITH PAINT BRUSH

You will learn

 Introduction
 How to start Paint brush.
 Home Tab
 Pencil, Eraser, Fill with color,
pickcolor, brush, Air brush
 Text tool, Shapes, Magnifier

Paintbrush is used for drawing, coloring and editing the pictures. We can use Paint Brush
like a digital sketchpad to make simple pictures. Files created in Paint Brush are saved as
bitmap files. The default file extension of a bitmap file is .bmp.

Steps To open Paint Brush

Click Start-> All Programs Accessories Paint.

Options on Home Tab- Paste, Cut, Copy, Select, Crop, Resize, Rotate, Brushes, Shapes, Line, Color
options

This tool draw a freeform line with the selected line width.
Width of the free form line

To draw a free form line.

1. Click the pencil tool in the tool

box.
Colour of
2. Select a colour from the color the line
box.
3. You can change the thickness Using pencil tool
of the line by selecting the
lines given in the line patterns.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 10

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Eraser/Color Eraser-

This tool is useful for erasing part of the

image.

To erase an image

1. Select the eraser tool from

toolbox.
2. Increase the size of the eraser
from size line given in the tool box.
3. Hold the eraser where you want to
erase a part of the image or whole
image.

Fill With color- This tool help to fill an area or object with selected colour.

Fill with color

1. Select a fill with color tool from

toolbox.
2. Choose a color you want to fill in a
picture from colour platelets.

3. Click fill with colour tool in the

image.

Pick Color- By this tool, Color is selected from one part of the object and can
be used to color other areas. Left click is used for back color and right click for
foreground color.

Before Selecting pick color- Back and front color After Selecting Pick color- Back and front color

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 11

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Brushes-This tool paints the image with various kinds of brushes available in toolbox.

Coloured with fill with colour

Using Airbrush.

Text- To add text to the drawing.

Steps to add Text

1. Click the text tool in the tool box.
2. Create a text frame by clicking and
dragging the mouse pointer across.
3. Then Text tab will be appear on the
top as menu shown above.
4. Choose the font style, size from the
font toolbar.
5. Click in the text frame, and type
your text.
6. To change the colour of the text,
click a colour in the Color box.
7. Click outside the text frame, once
text has been done.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 12

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Shapes- To draw different shapes click on the shape you want to draw
and drag the pointer across the drawing area.

Magnifier- is used to see the picture or object in enlarged form. Choose a

magnifier the left click mouse button will ZOOM In and right click will ZOOM
OUT the picture.

Magnifier- ZOOM OUT Magnifier- ZOOM IN

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 13

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Let us do practice now

TYPE-I (Short answers based questions)

1. Name and Draw few tools of Ms-Paint.

2. What is the effect of Magnifier tool ?
3. Name different options available on the text menu.
4. What is difference between paint brush and Air brush.

TYPE-II (Fill in the blanks)

1. is used to fill an area with color.

2. enlarges or reduces the picture.
3. is used to erase part of the picture.
4. is used like paint spray.

Type-III(Match the following)

SELECT

TEXT

ERASER

PENCIL

COLOR
PICKER

Lab Session

1. Draw the picture in Ms-Paint

2. Design one colored scenery with some text message.

3. Draw a rainy scene and describe in five lines.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 14

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

UNIT-III

MORE ABOUT PAINT BRUSH

You will learn

 Selection-Rectangular Selection,
Freeform Selection
 View Menu
 Zoom In
 Zoom Out
 Full Screen

Select- This tool is used to select the particular part of the image with different
shapes.

Selection shapes
1. Rectangular selection
2. Free-form selection

Rectangular selection

This tool is useful for selecting the whole or a part of an

object in a rectangular form.

Steps for using Select tool

Choose the select tool ->Click and drag on the part of picture, which you want to select.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 15

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

A dashed rectangle will appear around your selection, with the move cursor replacing
the cross-hair one. You can press this cursor down anywhere inside your selection and drag
to move it, or drag while holding the Ctrl key to make a copy of it.

Freeform selection

This tool is used to select an object in irregular form. Free-Form Select is also
understood in coloring parts of black and white images and vice versa.

Select the free form select tool by using mouse pointer->Point to the image to be
selected-> click and drag on the area, which you want to select.

After clicking Freeform selection, drag your mouse around the area you want, as though
you were drawing a line around it. When you release the mouse button, a selection
rectangle will appear and it may seem that unwanted parts of the drawing have been
included, but if you move the selection you'll see that this is not so.

View Menu-View Menu contains the following options

Zoom In, Zoom Out, 100%, Ruler, Full screen

Zoom In- This option is used to view image in enlarge mode. It represent the closer view
of a image.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 16

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Zoom Out- used to distant view of an image.

Full Screen-This option is used to see the Full View of the screen. You can also use Full
screen option by pressing F11. Only image will be displayed without any tools.You can
return back to original screen by clicking anywhere on the screen.

Let us do practice now

1. Write the function of Zoom option?

2. Make a list of options available in View menu?

3. What is difference between Free from Select and Rectangular Selection?

Lab Session

1. Make different shape in Ms-Paint view it in Zoom in and Zoom out.

2. Select images using free form selection – selecting flower.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 18

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

UNIT- 4
ABOUT DESKTOP
And COMPUTER PERIPHERALS
You will learn

1. Desktop 2.Purpose of Desktop 3. Identify the Icon on the Desktop

4. Start button and Taskbar 5. My computer 6. Recycle bin
7. Input and Output devices 8. Memory device 9. CPU

Desktop –
The desktop is the primary user interface of a computer. When we boot up a computer,
the desktop is displayed once the startup process is complete. Desktop is an area or
window on a computer screen in which small pictures (called icons) are arranged like
objects on top of a desk.
It includes the desktop background (or wallpapers), icons of files and folders we may
have saved on the desktop. In windows, the desktop includes a task bar, which is
located at the bottom of the screen by default.

Therefore, it may be helpful to store commonly used files, folders and application
shortcuts on your desktop.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 19

Display Properties
• To Change Desktop Background or Wallpaper in "Personalization"
Settings

1. Right click on an empty space on the desktop and click on Personalize. (see
screenshot below)

2. Click on the Desktop Background link at the bottom of the window. (see
screenshot below)

NOTE:The name in gray under Desktop Background is the current desktop

background file name.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 22

3. Select a Picture Location

A) Click on the drop down arrow menu to select from the list of available picture
folder locations, or click on the Browse button to navigate to the picture folder
location.)

NOTE:To use another regional wallpaper, see the yellow TIP box at the top of
the tutorial. To remove a folder from the Picture location (not clear)

B) Select the picture folder and click on Select Folder.

4. Select a Desktop Background

A) Right click on an available picture, or click (check) on the box in the upper left
corner of the picture, to select it. (see screenshot below step 7)

NOTE:You can continue to right click on the images to see it previewed on your
desktop until you decide which one you like best.

5. Select the Picture Position

A) Click on the drop down arrow menu, and click on the picture position you want
for the desktop background. (see bottom of screenshot below step 7)

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 23

 6. For a Desktop SlideShow
A) select more than one picture to create a Desktop Slideshow.

7. Click on Save changes to apply the changes. (see screenshots below)

Identify Icons on Desktop –

• An icon is a small graphic representation of a program or file that, when

clicked on, will be run or opened. Icons are used with Graphical User
Interface (GUI) Operating Systems such as Microsoft Windows and
the Apple Mac.
• When you double-click or open an icon the associated file or program will be opened.
For example, if you double-click on the My Computer icon, it will open Windows
Explorer and double-clicking a document or file icon it will open that document in
the associated program.
Start button and Taskbar

The start Menu is used to open programs and folders, search for things on
your computer and turn off your computer.

Task Bar

Task bar is a horizontal bar located at the bottom of the screen where running
programs are shown when minimized represented by icons.

My Computer – My Computer icon is a pictogram displayed on a computer screen in

order to help user navigate a computer system.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 24

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

My Computer Window Screen

My Computer icon that is available on the desktop is use to find out the resource of your pc.

My computer consists of number of icons.- Hard Disk Drive, Devices with Removable Storage and
Network location.

Recycle bin- The Recycle bin acts just like a dustbin. Whenever a file is deleted
automatically it goes to the recycle bin. Whenever a file is further needed it may be
recovered, it is done by simply pressing the restore button in the recycle bin.

Input and Output Devices

Input device- The input devices are used for transferring user’s data to the computer.
Some of the Input devices are

Keyboard

Light Pen, Touch Screen,

Output devices- An output device is any electronic or electromechanical equipment connected to

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 23

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

a computer and used to transfer data out of the computer in the form of text, images, sounds, or
other media. Examples of output devices include speakers, headphones, printer and
screen/monitor.

Monitor Speaker Printer

Processing
Working on data to get the meaningful information is called processing. In computer
calculation and manipulation is done inside the Central Processing Unit(CPU) . It act as
brain of the Computer.
The performance of your computer is based on simple mathematical operations.
CPU is the device, that controls all the operations. The CPU has integrated ALU
(Arithmetical Logical Unit). This unit is responsible for all mathematical and logical
operations.
Secondary Storage

Input ALU: Arithmetic Logic Unit Output

Device Device
Registers

Control Unit

In the CPU there are three separate units such as

1. Control Unit
2. Memory Unit
3. Arithmetic and Logical Unit

Control Unit:-The control unit is a component of a computer's CENTRAL PROCESSING

UNIT (CPU) which directs operation of the processor. It controls
communication and co-ordination between input/output devices. It
reads and interprets instructions and determines the sequence for
processing the data.

It directs the operation of the other units by providing timing and

control signals. All computer resources are managed by the CU (Control
Unit). It directs the flow of data between the Central Processing Unit

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 24

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

(CPU) and the other devices.

Memory Unit:- When a program is fed into the input unit, the information is
translated into the machine language and stored in the main memory
only on the instruction of the Control Unit. When the instruction is
given to the computer by the user to execute the program, the control
unit instructs the memory unit to supply the data and information to
ALU for processing. The processed date and results are sent back by
the ALU to the memory unit to store them in separate location for
future use by the instructions of Control Unit.

Arithmetic and Logic Unit:- This unit handles both arithmetic and logic operations. On
the instructions of the Control unit and data available
from the main memory, the ALU operates on the data and
sends the processed results back to the main memory to
store in separate locations. This unit does Mathematical
(+,-,X,/) relational(<,>,=,>=,<=,!=) logical operations(AND,
OR).

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 25

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Let us do practice now

Type-I (Short answered based questions)

1. What is function of Recycle bin?

2. Write the steps to delete the files on the desktop.

3. List any two Input and Output devices.

4. What is need of Icon and draw any two Icons.

5. What is brain of Computer?

Type –II (Fill in the blanks)

1. Mouse is a device.

2. CPU can do and .

3. Printer can give the output on .

4. The most common Character input device is .

5. is a dustbin of your computer.

Type –III (Match the Columns)

Monitor Central Processing Unit

Recycle Bin Monitor Application
CPU Output devices
Task Bar Printing device
Printer dustbin
Lab session

1. Save the word file on the different location of the computer.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 26

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

UNIT-V

MS-WORD
You will learn

 Introduction to Word Processor

 Features of Word Processor
 History of Word Processor
 Steps for starting Ms-Word
 Components of Word Screen
 Creating a new document
 Opening an existing document
 Editing text in Word Document
 Copy, Cut and Paste, Deleting
 Saving the Document

Introduction to word processor

Word processor processes words, paragraph, pages and entire papers. The first
word processor were basically computerized typewriters, which did little more than
place character on a screen, which could then be printed by a printer.

Modern word processing program includes features to customize the style of text,
change the page formatting and able to add header and footer, page number etc.

Some example of word processing programs include Microsoft Word, WordPerfect,

AppleWorks and OpenOffice.org.

Introduction to Ms-Word
Ms-Word - It is a program that is used for typing text. It is a part of MS-Office
package developed by Microsoft Corporation.
Ms-Word is part of Ms-Office Package which consists of MS-Excel, Ms Powerpoint
etc.

What can we do with the text in MS-WORD?

 You can change the writing style, size, colour of the text.
 The text can be highlighted by Bold, Italics and can be underline.
 Spelling and grammars are checked and converted automatically in MS-
Word.

Creating Document
In Word, we can create document by typing the text. The text we type is displayed
on the screen. When the text reaches the end of a line, Word automatically moves

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 27

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

to the new line and continue.

• Press the SPACE BAR, to give space between words.
• For a new line or paragraph, press the ENTER Key.
• If we want to delete a word or line, we can use Backspace or Delete keys.

To create a new Microsoft Word document

1. Click on start  ProgramMicrosoft Office Microsoft Word to open

Microsoft Word 2010.
2. Select File New or press Ctrl+N to open a new document.
3. Place the insertion point at the location where we want to type the text.

Components of MS-Word 2010

Cursor

Editing The Word document

Select the text

Select means choosing the text to be formatted. Just bring the cursor in the
beginning of the text, we want to select.
Press left mouse button Drag the mouse till the end.

The background of the selected text will become black and we will see the selected
text in white colour.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 28

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

• Changing the size of the text.

1. Select the text by putting the cursor in the beginning of the text drag it at the
end.
2. Choose the size by clicking on the arrow besides the font size box.

Default Font size is 12.

After selecting the text

use Ctrl+] and Ctrl+[

Copying and Moving

• Moving means to remove(cut) the selected text or graphic from one place and paste it on
another location.
Copying means to make a copy of the selected text or graphics and insert it to another
place leaving the original unchanged.

Cut – Cut operation will remove the content from its original place and move it to new
desired location.

Following is the procedure to CUT/COPY and PASTE the content in word.

1. Select a portion of the text using any of the text selection methods.
2. Press Ctrl+C for Copy or Press Ctrl+X for Cut .
3. Place the cursor at the desired location where you want to paste the text and press
Ctrl+V

Saving the Document- To save a document on disk

1. Click on office button tab. (Microsoft Word 2007 is used)
2. Drop down menu will be displayed click on the save option.
3. The Save as dialogue box will be displayed to type a name for the document.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 29

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

CLOSING WORD

Click the Office tab  close button.

To close word file,

click on close button

EXIT FROM WORD

For Exit click on

Close button

1. We can exit from MS Word by using close button of MS Window.

2. Or, by clicking on Office tab -> Exit option.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 30

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Let us do practice now

Type-I(Short Answers based Questions)

1. What is the default size of the text?

2. Name the box that contains font size, font colour, font style buttons.
3. What is purpose of MS-Word 2007?
4. Write the steps to save a document?
5. Write the shortcut key for cut, copy and paste.

TYPE-II (Fill in the blanks)

1. When we start word a new blank appears on the screen.

2. The text can be copy by using + key.
3. Bold, Italics, Underline buttons are placed under the tab.
4. is located below the title bar.
5. Formatting tool bar contains_ , , (not
applicable).

Type-III (Match the column)

Cut

Paste

Copy

Save

Lab Session

1. Type ten lines on about your school in Font size 16 and font face as Arial.
2. Type your favorite poem in font size 30 and font face as Times New Roman.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 31

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

UNIT-VI

MORE ABOUT MS-WORD

You will learn
 Formatting Toolbar
 Font attributes-size,style,color,sub/superscript
 Bold, Italic, Underline
 Numbering and Bullets
 Alignment-Left,right,center
 Change case-sentence, uppercase etc.
 Insert Menu –Word Art, Page Break, Images,
Clip art, shapes, date and Time

Formatting Text

The formatting text includes – Fonts, fonts Size, Underline Style, Bold, Italic etc.

1. Type the text.

2. Select the portion of the text using any selection procedure.

3. Change the font style ,font size, Grow font and shrink font of the text .

Using Bold, Italics and underline Options

All the three options are used to emphasize any word/ words.

1. For using the above option first write the sentence.

2. Then put the cursor in the beginning of sentence.
3. Select the text by Shift and mouse click or shift+ arrow key.
4. Then click on the bold button.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 32

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

BOLD

Select the text and click on

Button. Computer -----------------------
Computer

Italic

Select the text and click on the italics Button. The text will become italicized.
Computer------------------------Computer

Underline
You can underline any word/words with this button. Select the text and click on
this Button.
Computer -------------------------- Computer
• Superscript and subscript

When we have to display something like H2O or X3+Y3 what we should do ? The
subscript displays the character slightly below the normal printed text and
Superscript slightly above the printed text.

Step 1: Select the text where you want to place Subscript or Superscript.

Step 2: Click h2o(subscript) X2+Y2(Superscript)

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 33

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Numbering and Bullets

We find that while writing certain kinds of communication it is convenient to state

the ideas point by point.

Creating Bulleted and Numbered Lists

To create a bulleted list:
1. Select the lines of text
2. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Bullets button .
3. You can change the bullet symbol by clicking the Bullets arrow and making
selection from the Bullets gallery

To create a numbered list:

1. Select the lines of text

2. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Numbering button .
We can change the number style by clicking the Numbering arrow and
making a selection from the Numbering gallery.

Bullets Gallery Numbering Gallery

To remove bullets or numbers from a list:

1. Select the lines of text from which you want to remove bullets or numbers.
2. Do one of the following:
To remove bullets, click the Bullets arrow and select None from the
Bullets gallery
To remove numbers, click the Numbering arrow and select
None from the Numbering gallery.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 34

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Alignment of the text

The text can be aligned in the centre of the page, left, right or along both left and right
margins

We will find these buttons on the formatting Tool bar.

Left (Ctrl+L) Center (Ctrl+E) Right (Ctrl+R) Justify(Ctrl+J)

Left Alignment Center Alignment

Right Alignment Justify alignment

Change Case- Change case command in the HOME Tab allows you to change the case of
the characters in the text without having to retype them. Change all the selected text to
UPPERCASE, lowercase, or other common Capitalizations .

• Sentence case
• lowercase
• UPPERCASE
• Capitalize Each Word
• tOOGLE Case

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 35

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Sentence Case lowercase

UPPERCASE Capitalize Each Word

Inserting the special characters and symbols

Insert symbols that are not on your keyboard, such as copyright symbols,
trade mark symbols, paragraph marks and Unicode Characters.
Insert Menu

Word Art- Insert the decorative text in your document.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 36

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Page Break-start the next page at the current position (Ctrl+Return)

Clip Art-

Insert the clip Art into the document including drawing, movies, sounds or stock
photography to illustrate the specific concept.

Steps to find and insert clip art:

1. Display the slide on which you want to place the clip art.

2. On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click the Clip Art button Or click the
Clip Art button in the content placeholder. The Clip Art pane opens.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 37

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Images Group on the Insert Tab Content Placeholder

3. In the Search for box, enter a keyword related to the desired clip art

4. Click the Go button. Thumbnails of any clip art, movies, and sounds that
have the associated keyword appear in the pane.

5. Scroll down to see all the available clip art, and then click the thumbnail of
the desired clip art to insert it into the slide.

Clip Art Pane

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 38

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Shapes-

Insert the ready made shapes, such as rectangle and circle, arrow, arrow lines or flow
chart.

Steps:

1. Click on the Insert Menu.

2. Click on Shape Button it will show Lines, basic Shapes, Arrows and flowchart and
callouts etc.
3. Choose any one shape and drag it into where you want to insert a shape.

Text Box- Insert the preformatted text box.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 39

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Page number- insert page number to the document.

Date and Time- Insert the current date and time into your current document.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 40

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Let us do practice now

Type –I(Short Answer Question)
1. How do we select the line, word and letter in Ms-Word 2007?
2. How can we make our whole document in Uppercase?
3. List some special characters used in Ms-Word 2007?
4. Which button would you press to align the text on both left and right margins?
5. What is the purpose of page break?

Type-II (Identify the following buttons

Lab Session

1. Create a New Document.

2. Write few line about your favorite Game

3. Use BOLD,ITALICS,UNDERLINE for headings.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 41

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

UNIT-VII

INTERNET

Internet:- Internet is a worldwide network of computers, which allows sharing of

information. In this network, the computers are connected through cables or any other
devices. The Internet connects millions of computers around the world. Thus Internet is
global network or a worldwide network.

We need Internet for

1. Communication
2. Research
3. Education
4. Financial Transaction
5. Real Time Updates

Requirement for Internet Connection

Hardware- Apart from the monitor, keyboard and mouse, we have the following hardware
requirements

• Modem
• Network Interface Card
• 1 GB RAM

Software

• Operating System like Windows, Linux

• Web browser like Internet Explorer , google chrome, Mozilla firefox or Netscape
Navigator

Steps to open Web Browser

1. Click on the web browser icon.

2. Write the website name on the address bar .
3. Click on go or press enter.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 42

 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Address Bar

Search Engines-
Search engine is a software system that is designed to search for information on the
World Wide Web.

Search Engines like google, yahoo, alta vista.

Finding/ Downloading /Saving images-

We can search / download / save the images from the internet by using search engines.

Steps to search / download / save the images

1. Open the web browser and search engine.
2. Type the topic related to image you want to search.
3. Click on search button.
4. Many pictures will be displayed choose appropriate picture and double click on image
to enlarge its size.
5. Right click on the image and select Save the image option.
6. Save as dialog box will open, go to the location where you want to save image.
7. Click on save button.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 43

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL

Let us do practice now

TYPE-I (Short answers based questions)

1. Explain the following terms:
a. Internet
b. Website.
2. Write the uses of internet.
3. Write the name of your school website.
4. Name any two web browser.

Type –II(Fill in the blanks)

1. Google chrome is a .
2. Internet is a network of .
3. , is a search engine.
4. The World Wide Web is based on User Interface.
5. NIC stands for .

LAB SESSION

1. Visit the school website and gather the information about your school.
2. Visit the KVS website and collect the information about KVS.

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 44

 Sample Question Paper
FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT-III

Subject: Computer Class : III

Time : 2:00 Hours Max Marks : 40
___________________________________________________________________

Q1. Answer the following question?

1. What is computer ?

Ans:…………………………………………………………………………………………………

2. What are the four main parts of computer ?

Ans1………………………………… 2…………………………………
3………………………………… 4………………………………....

3. Write the name of 4 input device?

Ans
:1…………………………2……………………………3………………………..4………………………….

Q.2. Fill in the blanks

Shut down , drawing ,CPU,TV, Hard disk

1. Monitor looks like a ………………………………

2. Clicking on the __________________________ button shuts down the computer.
3. Ms Paint software use for ……………………………………..pictures .
4. ………………………is the brain of a computer.
5. ………………………….is the example of storage device

Q3. Identify the following Symbols

Q.4 Match the following

1. CPU 1. Output device
2.Monitor 2. Central Processing Unit
3. Ms-paint 3. Word Processing software
4.Ms-word 4.Drawing Software

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 45

Q.5. Identify the component of Ms-Words

Q6. Identify the parts of the desktop given below ?

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 46

 Sample Question Paper
SUMMITIVE ASSESSMENT- II
Subject : Computer Class: III
Time : 2:30 Hours Max Marks : 60
Name____________________________ Sec______ Roll No______________
Q1. Answer the following question?

1. Which of the following is an input device

A. Monitor B.Mouse C.Printer

2. Which of the following is an output device is

A. Keyboard B.Mouse C.Monitor D.Joystick
3. Which of the following is a storage device is
A. Mouse B.keyboard C.HARD Disk D. Printer
4. Which of the following is a word processing software
A. MS word B.MS Excel C. Paint

Q.2 FILL IN THE BLANKS

MS Word, printer, Calculator, Shift key, backspace key, output

A) __________________ is a program used for typing in the computers.

B) ________________________ is an output device.

C) A _________________________ is used to do calculations in the computer.

D) _______________________ key is used to type capital letters.

E) ________________________ key are used for erasing text in the computer.

F) Monitor is an _________________________ device.

Q.3 Identify the following icons

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 47

Q.5 Identify the components

Q.4 Find out TRUE and FALSE

1. We cannot draw picture on a computer

2. CPU is a brain of a computer

3. Man can do work faster than computer

4. Paint is text typing software

5. A computer helps diagnose diseases in hospitals

Q.5 Match the following

1. CTRL+C 1. Input device

2. CPU 2.Copy

3. KEYBOARD 3. Brain of a computer

4. MS Word 4.Drawing Software

5.Paint 5. Word processor

Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan Page 48

 Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan

Patron
Shri C. Neelap
Deputy Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

Regional Co-ordination & Compilation

Shri D. Patle
Asstt. Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

School Co-ordination
Shri S. Sarkar
Principal, KV IOC,
Noonmati, Guwahati

Shri Ghan Shyam Pandey

Principal, KV New Bongaigaon,Assam

Subject Expert
Shri Devmani Yadav
PGT(CS), KV New Bongaigaon,Assam

2
SL. No. UNITS CONTENTS NO. OF PERIODS
Quarter : April to June
1. Computer History 1.1 Understanding Generations
1.2 Classification of Computer 4
2. Word Processor 2.1 File Menu 6
2.1.1 Create a new file
2.1.2 Open an existing file
2.1.3 Save the current file
2.1.4 Save As – saving a file with different name
2.1.5 Close the file
2.2 View Menu
2.2.1 Print Layout
2.2.2 Full Screen
2.2.3 Web Layout
2.2.4 Zooming
2.2.5 Ruler

3. Exploring Windows 3.1 Starting Windows Explorer 4

3.2 Components of Windows Explorer
3.3 Panes of Windows Explorer
3.4 Working with folder in left pane
3.5 Managing files and folders
3.6 Modes of view
3.7 File naming convention
3.8 Searching files
3.9 Creating Shortcuts

Quarter : July to September

4. Powerpoint 4.1 Starting Powerpoint 24
Presentation 4.1.1 Create a new file
4.1.2 Open an existing file
4.1.3 Save the current file
4.1.4 Save As – saving a file with different name
4.1.5 Close the file
4.2 Formatting a Presentation 3
4.2.1 Changing the font
 4.2.4 Changing Text Alignment
4.2.5 Modifying Line Spacing
4.2.6 Creating Bulleted and Numbered Lists
4.2.7 Copying Formatting
4.3 Inserting Menu
4.3.1 Images
4.3.2 Table
4.3.3 Clip Art
4.3.4 Screen Shot
4.3.5 Shapes and SmartArt
4.3.6 Chart
4.3.7 Text Box, WordArt, Date & Time, Slide
Number, Symbols
4.3.8 Moving and Resizing an Image
4.4 Slide Show Menu
4.4.1 From Beginning
4.4.2 From Current Slide
4.4.3 Custom Slide Show
4.4.4 Setup Slide Show

Quarter : October to December

5. Excel Spreadsheet 5.1 Working in Excel 10
5.2 Introduction to Workbook and
Worksheet
5.3 Use in day to day life
5.4 Steps to start Excel
5.5 Components of Excel Screen
5.6 Various data types
5.7 Entering Data in Spreadsheet
5.8 About the Cell and Cell Address
5.9 Auto Sum
5.10 Formatting the Data in the Table

Quarter : January to March

6. Windows Accessories 6.1 Calculator 2
6.2 Onscreen Keyboard
6.3 Magnifier
6.4 Games
6.5 Virus & Anti-Virus

7. Control Panel 7.1 Display Properties 8

7.2 Setting of Mouse
7.3 Taskbar and Start Menu
7.4 Date and Time Settings

4
 PREFACE
In Class III, we learnt about the basics of a computer, its strength and
weaknesses. Also we learnt how to start and shut down a computer properly. We had
also seen and identified the various part/components and peripherals of a computer
system like Keyboard, Mouse and other input-output devices along with CPU and
Memory Devices. We had learnt the various do’s and don’t of Computer Lab and also
the precautions to be taken while opening and closing computer. We learnt to use
Paint Brush for making wonderful drawings using computer. We had also learnt a lot
about Word Processor like Microsoft Word and how to format a document using the
various features of the software. And lastly we learnt about ever growing concept of
Internet and its uses.

In Class IV, we will learnt about Computer History in Unit - I, how the computer
has been evolved since its inception by comparing the various generation of
computers and their classification.

In Unit –II , we will learn more about Word Processor especially the various
views of a word document by exploring View Menu. In Unit-III, we will learn about
one of the interesting concept/tool provided in Windows Operating System called
Windows Explorer. In this unit we will learn how the content of our computer system
can be viewed and managed from a single window.
In Unit-IV, we will learn to make simple but effective presentation and setting up slide
show by using the various tools available in Microsoft Powerpoint Presentation
software. In Unit-V , we will learn some basic concepts about Excel Spreadsheet ,
used to make tables and do simple calculations that are to be carried out in our day
to day activities. In Unit-VI, we will acquaint ourselves with the various components
available in Windows Accessories and how and when we can use them. And in the
last Unit-VII, we will try to explore Control Panel , and its use to manage various
settings of our computer system.

5
 Learning Objectives :
After learning the Unit the students will be able to:
 learn about the various inventions in computers
 understand the technological changes occurs in computer in terms of hardware and
software
 identify and classify computers in its various categories
 understand the basic difference between various types of computers
 differentiate computers according to the way they process data, according to their size
and the function performed.

As we have seen that since its inception computer has been evolved a lot for the last couple
of decades. In earlier days a computer was such a big machine that required space like a complete
room and hence its maintenance cost was very much far away from a common man. A common
man could not have thought to have a computer for his personal use. But now-a-days one in every
three person is using computer in one way or the other. From bulky machine to as small as like a
SIM card, this is possible because of the ever changing technological world.

The old adage “Necessity is the mother of inventions” holds true for computer also because
computers are invented as a result of man’s search for fast, accurate and reliable calculating
devices.
The Evolution of Computers is defined in terms of various eras. Let us take a look of them :

A) MANUAL ERA :
The earliest device that qualifies as a digital
computer is the ‘Abacus’. This device allows the user
to represent numbers by the position of beads on a rack.
Simple addition and subtraction can be carried out rapidly
and efficiently by positioning the beads on the rack
appropriately. Although Abacus was invented around
600 B.C. and was used by the Chinese and Egyptians, it is still
being used in Far East.
Another manual calculating device
to speed up the multiplication process was
John Napier’s bone or Cardboard Multiplication
Calculator developed by Scottish man named
John Napier. A complete set of Napier bone’s
consists of rods , one for each of the digit 0 to 9
called bones, with number carried on them.
It was designed in the 17th Century and they first
appeared in print in 1614.

B) MECHANICAL ERA :
The first mechanical calculator was developed by Wilhelm Schickhard , a professor at the
University of Tubingen.

In 1642, the young French philosopher and mathematician

Blaise Pascal developed another mechanical adding machine
called Pascaline, which could add and subtract numbers.

6
Pascaline used a system of gears and wheels.
Later in year 1671 Baron Gottfried Wilhelm Von Leibiniz of Germany developed a similar
mechanical calculator that could also perform multiplication and division.
In early 19th Century a Frenchman Joseph Jacquard invented a loom that used punched cards
to automatically control the manufacturing of patterned cloth.
Charles Babbage , a 19th Century professor at Cambridge University,
is considered to be the Father of Modern Digital Computers.
Babbage designed a Difference Engine in year 1822, which was
capable of performing automatic multistep calculation and
can produced reliable mathematical and statistical tables
automatically. In the year 1842, Babbage conceived the new
idea of Analytical Engine, that was intended to be completely
automatic. It was capable of performing the basic arithmetic
functions for any mathematical problem at an average speed
of 60 additions per minute. The Analytical Engine
incorporated many features of modern computers including
punched card instructions, internal memory , an arithmetic
unit to perform calculation any many other number of principals
which have been shown to be fundamental to the design of any digital computer.
Analytical Engine was programmable and in order to write program Babbage employed ada
Augusta Lovelace (daughter of poet Lord Byron) , who became the first programmer in the
world.
In the late 19th century a young statistician Harmen Hollerith,
the inventor of Punched Card Tabulating Machine , used it for
processing Census data. Later in 1911, by merging several
other firms, he formed IBM Corporation.
In 20th Century, under the direction of George Stibitz of
Bell Telephone Laboratories, five large scale computer
were developed by using Electromechanical Relays and were called as Bell Relay Computers.
These computers were capable to perform calculations with a high speed and accuracy.
The Mark-I computer, the world first general purpose mechanical digital computer was
developed by Howard H. Aiken, a professor of Physics at Harvard University, in collaboration with
IBM. Its designed was based on he technique already developed for punched card machinery. This
machine was also known as Automatic Sequence Controlled Calculator, and may be regarded as
the first realization of Babbages’ Analytical Engine.

C) ELECTRONIC ERA :
The first electronic computer using 45 vacuum tubes (valves) for internal logic and capacitors
for storage and having the concept of binary system was developed by John Vincent Atanasoff and
his assistant Clifford Berry in 1939. This prototype of automatic electronic calculator was known as
Atanasoff-Berry Computer or ABC, capable of solving variables with a high degree of accuracy.
In 1946, an all electronic version of Mark-I called Electronic Numerical Integrator And
Calculator (ENIAC) was developed by J. Presper Eckert and John W. Mauchly at the University of
Pennsylvania, USA. It was the first large scale fully electronic computer installed at Marryland to
cater the military need.
The basic behind the stored program digital computers was developed by Dr. John Von
Neumann. And in 1952 by using the concepts of stored program, John Von Neumann with his
collaborator H.H. Goldsteine designed Electronic Discrete Variable Automatic Calculator (EDVAC). It
was John Von Neumann who introduced the idea od storing both instructions and data in the binary
form.

7
 In 1949, at Cambridge University, a group of British Scientists headed by professor Maurice
Wilkes developed Electronic Delay Storage Automatic Calculator (EDSAC), that was capable of
performing Addition operation in 1500 microseconds and multiplication operation in 4000
microseconds.
The UNIversal Automatic Computer (UNIAC) was first digital computer, produced by many
companies like IBM, Universal Accounting Company, General Electronic Corporation etc . It was first
commercial large scale digital computer produced in 1951.
During the period of late 1940’s and early 1950’s many other stored program computers like
JOHNIAC, MANIAC, ILLIAC etc were developed.

1.1 GENERATION OF COMPUTERS

Generation in computer era provides a framework for the growth of computer industry and
generally characterizes the major developments in the computer industry. The modern computer
era can be divided into Five generations distinguished by the basic electronic component within the
computer. Each new logic unit let the computers faster in speed, smaller in size, more reliable and
less expensive than their predecessors. Modern computers came in a variety of shapes, sizes and
costs.
Computers were developed in Five different phases known as the Generation of Computers.
Let’s discuss one by one in a little detail :

First Generation (1942-1955) The computers of this generation used Electronic Valves
(an array of Vacuum Tubes) as the basic component for memory and circuitry for central processing
unit. These vacuum tubes were a fragile glass device like electric bulb, that could control and
amplify electronic signals. They produced a lot of heat and
were prone to frequent fusing/ damaging of the installations.
Therefore, they were used very expensive and could be
afforded onlyby very large organizations.

Advantages :
i) these computers were the fastest calculating device of their
time. They could perform computations in milliseconds.
ii) vacuum tube technology made possible the advent of
electronic digital computers.

Disadvantages :
i) Too bulky in size
ii) Air conditioning required to control the temperature
iii) Prone to frequent hardware failure.
iv) Commercial production was difficult and costly.
v) Slow input and output operations.

USEFUL POINTS :
• Period : 1942-1955
• Component used : Vacuum tubes
• Speed : milliseconds
• Maximum memory capacity : 2000 inch
• Mean-time before failure : minutes
• Peripherals :
o I/O : Punched cards, Paper tape, Magnetic tape, Printer (online)
o Secondary Storage : Punched Cards, Paper Tape, Magnetic Drum, Magnetic Disk etc

8
• Operating System : Mainly Batch Processing
• Languages : Machine Code and Electric Wired board
• Application Areas : Payroll Processing, Record Keeping etc.
• Example : ENIAC, EDVAC, EDSAC and IBM 650 ( the first modern digital computer produced on
mass scale)

Second Generation (1955-1964) The second generation computer used Semi-conductor

transistor instead of vacuum tubes after the invention of transistor by a team led by William
Shockley.
This generation computers used transistors which were cheaper,
consumed less power, more compact in size, more reliable and
faster than the vacuum tubes used in first generation computers.

Advantages :
i) Smaller in size as compared to first generation computers
ii) More reliable
iii) Less heat generated.
iv) Less prone to hardware failure
v) Wider commercial use

Disadvantages :
i) Air conditioning required
ii) Manual assembly of individual components into a functioning unit was a cumbersome task.

USEFUL POINTS :
• Period : 1955-1964
• Component used : Transistors
• Speed : microseconds
• Maximum memory capacity : 128000 inch
• Mean-time before failure : days
• Peripherals :
o I/O : Paper tape, Magnetic tape, Visual Display Unit
o Secondary Storage : Paper Tape, Magnetic Drum, Magnetic Disk etc
• Operating System : Multiprogramming, Time-Sharing and Real Time processing
• Languages : Assembly Language, High Level Languages like FORTRON, COBOL etc
• Application Areas : Batch –oriented application like Billing, Payroll processing, Updating
Inventory etc.
• Example : IBM 1401, IBM 7090, IBM 1620, IBM 7094, IBM 700 series, CDC 1604, CDC 3600,
UNIVAC 1108

Third Generation (1964-1975) The third generation computers used Integrated Circuits (or IC
Chips) in which many transistors, resistors, capacitors and other
components (circuit elements) are fabricated or integrated and packaged
together into a very small surface of silicon known as Chips.
This new microelectronic technology was called Integrated Circuits.
The IC was invented by Jack Kilby in 1958

9
Advantages :
i) Smaller in size as compared to previous generation
ii) More reliable than second generation computers
iii) Low maintenance cost
iv) Easily portable
v) Commercial production was easier and cheaper.

Disadvantages :
i) Air conditioning required in many case
ii) Highly sophisticated technology required for the manufacture of IC chips

USEFUL POINTS :
• Period : 1964-1975
• Component used : Integrated Circuits (IC)
• Speed : nanoseconds
• Maximum memory capacity : 4 million inch
• Mean-time before failure : weeks to months
• Peripherals :
o I/O : Typewriter terminal, Visual Display Unit, Optical Character Reader etc
o Secondary Storage : Magnetic Disk, Extended Core Storage, Mass Storage devices
• Operating System : Multiprogramming, Time-Sharing, Real Time processing and Remote
processing
• Languages : High Level Languages like FORTRON-II to IV , COBOL , BASIC, ALGOL-68,
PASCAL-1 etc
• Application Areas : Airline System, Market forecasting, Credit Card billing etc
• Example : IBM 360/370 series, ICL 1900 series, PDP 11, RCA Spectra 70 etc.

Fourth Generation (1975 onwards) Initially, the Integrated Circuits contained only about 10
to 20 components called Small Scale Integration (SSI). Later on with the advancement in technology
for manufacturing Integrated Circuit Silicon Chips (ICS), it became possible to integrate up to a
hundred components on a single chip called Medium Scale Integration (MSI).
Now the manufacture of integrated circuits became so advanced as to incorporate hundreds of
thousands of active components in volume of a fraction of inch, leading to Large Scale or Very Large
Scale Integration (VLSI).
Integrated Circuits which have the entire computer circuit on a
single silicon chip are called Microprocessors. The development
of microprocessors made it possible to place complete CPU of a
computer on a single chip.

The first Microprocessor Intel 4004 consisted of 2250 transistors

on a microprocessor was designed by Intel Corporation engineer
Ted Hoff in 1971. It was 4-bit microprocessor.

10
Advantages :
i) Smaller in size because of high component density
ii) Heat generated is negligible
iii) Much faster in computation then previous generations
iv) Less power consumption
v) No air conditioning is required in most cases

Disadvantages :
i) Highly sophisticated technology is required for the manufacturing of VLSI chips
ii) Highly skilled people are required in its manufacturing

USEFUL POINTS :
• Period : 1975 onward
• Component used : Very Large Scale Integrated Circuits (IC)
• Speed : picoseconds
• Maximum memory capacity : 200 million inch
• Mean-time before failure : months
• Peripherals :
o I/O : Visual Display Unit, Optical Character Reader, Magnetic Ink Character Reader,
Voice Recognition, Laser Printer etc
o Secondary Storage : Floppy disk , Hard Disk, CD-ROM, DVD etc
• Operating System : Time-Sharing, Real Time processing and Network Distribution
• Languages : All High Level Languages like C, C++, Java and other 4th generation languages
(declarative languages used in Database )
• Application Areas : Mathematical Modelling, Simuation, Electronic Fund Transfer, Computer
Aided Manufacturing and Design etc
• Example : CRAY-1, CRAY-2, IBM 3090/600, IBM AS/400 HP 9000, IBM ES/9000, VAX etc

Fifth Generation (Future Generation: 1991 onwards ) : the fifth generation computers are
under development stage. These computers will use Ultra Large Scale Integration (ULSI) chips
instead of VLSI. These will be employing two or more processors which compute in parallel.
The fifth generation machine are proposed to be based on Parallel Processing hardware and
Artificial Intelligence software with genuine I.Q. (Intelligence Quotient). That provide the ability to
reason logically and with real knowledge of the world like human do.

Characteristics of future generation computers :

i) Decreasing cost of hardware and software
ii) High speed processing
iii) Knowledge based processing system
iv) Development of natural language processing
v) Advancement in supercomputer technology
vi) Artificial Intelligence , think and behave like
human (humanoid)

11
1.2 CLASSIFICATION OF COMPUTERS : Depending upon the ways the data can be handled,
computers are basically classified into three categories (a) Analog (b) Digital and (c)
Hybrid , but the digital computers can further be categorized depending upon the purpose
they do and based on their size and performance. The exhaustive classification tree of
computers can be defined as below :

Types of computers according to the data they handle or process

(a) Analog Computers : are those computers in which data or number is represented in the
form of continuously varying physical quantities such as pressure, temperature, voltage,
current etc.
Analog computers measure things.
Application areas : Speedometer of a car, Gasoline pump etc

(b) Digital Computers : are those computers that solves problems by operating on discrete
data (numeric data) representing variables by performing arithmetic and logical processes
on data from a stored program.
Digital computers count things.
Application areas : home, educational institutions, office, scientific fields, business etc.

(c) Hybrid Computers : are analog computers controlled by digital computers instead of
human beings.
Application areas : Hospitals, Meteorology Department etc

Types of Digital computers according to the purpose they are used for
1) Special purpose computers: They are designed to do single specific task. The programs
or instructions to carry out the specific task are permanently stored in the machine. For
Example – computer for military application or purpose, computers at billing counter in
malls etc.
2) General purpose computers: They are designed to solve wide variety of problems
having different set of inputs. For Example – computers for banking, sales analysis etc.

12
 Types of Digital computers according to the size and performance

1) Embedded computers : are designed to be used within

the circuitry of appliances such as television, washing
machine, refrigerator, bike etc

2) Microcomputers : are designed to be used by single user

for performing basic operations like educational activities,
playing games. These are mainly used in homes, offices, shops,
school etc.
Microcomputers have the following three basic categories
i) Programmable Computers or Personal Digital Assistant or PDA : are designed to carry out
day to day task related to sharing or exchange of information by connecting to desktop
computers regardless of location. They are used as notepads and address book.
ii) Laptop or Desktop or Notebook or Personal Computers : are designed to carry out our
day to day personal task. They are used in business and at home.
iii) Workstations : are similar to personal computers but have greater memory and
processing capabilities. They are generally used in industrial, business and in scientific
environment that require high levels of computational abilities.
3) Mini computers : are more powerful computers than
microcomputers in terms of processing power and capabilities.
They are generally multi-user systems.
4) Mainframe computers : are designed to handle large
volumes of data and information. They are multi-user
and multi-processors systems.
5) Super computers : are designed to be used for doing extremely
complicated computations , that also in minimum possible time. They
are the fastest, the largest and most expensive digital computers
available today. They are best used in Weather forecasting,
Nuclear Science, Aerodynamic modeling etc.

PARAM series by CDAC (Centre for Development of Advanced Computing) and (Processor
for Aerodynamic Computation and Evaluation) by ANURAG (Hyderabad based Advanced
Numerical Research and Analysis Group) are supercomputers produced by India

13
Q 1. Name the first calculating device.

Q 2. Who is known as the father of modern digital computers ?

Q 3. Who is the world first computer programmer ?

Q 4. Name the technology or the basic component used in different generations of computers?

Q 5. Name any two supercomputers developed in India.

Q 6. What is the basic difference between a digital computer and an analog computer?

Q 7. Expand the following

i) EDSAC ii) UNIVAC iii) ENIAC iv) VLSI

Q 8. AI stands for ________________________________________ ?

Q 9. An ICU (Intensive Care Unit) of a hospital has _______________ computer to monitor the heart
beat of a patient .

Q 10. Name the category of the computer that we generally use at home or in Educational institution.

14
 Learning Objectives :
After learning the Unit the students will be able to:
 create and save a new file
 open the existing word file
 save the current file
 differentiate between Save and Save As
 work on different views

MS Word is a word processing software. It falls under the category of application software. It is used
to create and edit personal and business documents such as letters, reports etc. The default file
extension of MS Word 2007 is .docx. Given below is the basic Window that appears when we open
the MS Word –

15
2.1 File Menu : File menu contains all the options related to an open file

2.1.1 To create a new file, just type in the document area

The text insertion point is the place where the cursor stands and the document area is the place
where we can type our text. While typing texts, it is advisable to use the TAB key instead of SPACE
bar for inserting more than one space between words as it will provide uniform spacing.

16
2.1.2 To Open an existing file : Click on File menu and select Open or just press CTRL + O , a
window will pop up , locate your file in the computer and click Open button

2.1.3 Save the Current file : Save the file from the File tab or click on the Floppy sign above the
File tab or press CTRL + S. A window will pop up , locate the path where you want to save the file ,
give a valid name to your file and click Save button. This pop-up window will appear only once ,
when you are saving your file very first time , thereafter just press CTRL + S

17
2.1.4 Save As :The ‘Save As’ option under File menu provides us to save our file in different
formats or to save our existing file with different name. We can choose our desired format and then
save the file.

2.2 VIEW MENU : View menu allow us to view our document in different ways

18
2.2.1 Print Layout : To go to the Print Layout, we need to click on the file tab and then the
Print option. The various print menus as displayed below:

The Print Preview is show in the right pane of the window.

19
Here, we can select the type of Orientation we need our document to be printed on. Two
orientations are available –

 Portrait
 Landscape

2.2.2 Full Screen :To view a document in full screen mode, we need to follow the given below
steps:

 Click on the View tab

 Click on the “Full screen reading” button

2.2.3 Web Layout :The Web Layout view is used to conceptualize how our document appears
when it is published to the web. This view provides only approximation and not an exact match.

Go to – VIEW > Web Layout

The Web Layout view is encircled in red.

20
2.2.4 Zooming : Zooming i.e. Zoom-in and Zoom-out enlarges and reduces respectively the size
of the texts.

Go to – View > Zoom

21
In the above given image, dragging the control at the bottom right, to the left reduces the text size
and dragging to the right increases the text size.

2.2.5 Ruler :We can use the horizontal or the vertical rulers in Word to align text, graphics, and
other elements in our document.

The ruler appears only when it is turned on. To turn on this option follow the given below steps

 Click on the File tab

 Click on Words Options ( for MS Word 2007)
 Click on Advanced
 Click on Display and then check the ‘Set Vertical ruler in Print Layout Page’

22
Some of the important shortcuts are given below:

 Open a file – CTRL + O

 Create a new document – CTRL + N
 Close a document – CTRL + W
 Save a file – CTRL + S
 Display the ‘Save as’ dialog box – F12
 Copy – CTRL + C
 Paste –CTRL + V
 Cut – CTRL + X
 Undo – CTRL + Z
 Redo or repeat an action – CTRL + Y
 Cancel an action – ESC


 Q 1. What is a word processor? Write at least two uses of it.
 Q 2. What is the default file extension of MS Word 2007/2010/2013?
 Q 3. What is the shortcut to open the Print Dialog Box?
 Q 4. How many types of Page orientation are there in MS Word? Name them.
 Q 5. ............................ is the shortcut key to paste in MS Word.
 Q 6. CTRL + A selects all the texts and graphics in the working document. (True/False)
 Q 7. The Web Layout view is used to preview our document before printing. (True/False)
 Q 8. It is possible only to Zoom-in but not Zoom-out in MS Word. (True/False)
 Q 9. ............................... positions the texts according to margin.
 Q 10. MS Word falls under which category of software?


 1. Open MS Word and write Five sentences about yourself and save the file with your name
on the Desktop.
 2. Open the file that you have just created write two more sentence about your parents and
save the file with the name My Family in D: drive.
 3. Open the file that you have just created and set the page, margin and orientation of the
document for printing on a normal A4 size paper.
 4. Open the file that you have just created and increase the font size to 16 , font style Calibri and
save the file with the name MyFile in a folder.
 5. Create a new file say Ruler and write Five points ( 1 to 5 )about your country. Now adjust the space
between the text and the point number using the Ruler handles

23
 Learning Objectives :
After learning the Unit the students will be able to:
 create a folder
 delete a folder
 rename a folder
 move a folder
 make shortcut of a folder on desktop
 search particular file and folder in computer

3.1 STARTING WINDOWS EXPLORER

The Windows Explorer lets us view, open, copy and manage our files and folders in the Windows
operating system. In Windows 8, the live tiles can be seen by clicking on the Windows logo or
clicking on the left bottom corner of the window. The live tiles organizes various application into a
single window and also provides live feed.

24
The Windows Explorer can also be opened by clicking on the ‘Start’ button which appears when the
mouse is moved to the right bottom of the window.

Open File Explorer by swiping in from the right edge of the screen, and then clicking Search,
entering File Explorer in the search box, and then tapping or clicking File Explorer.

25
3.2 COMPONENTS OF WINDOWS EXPLORER The various components of the File Explorer
window are shown below:

1) Left pane – It is used to get to all kinds of locations and drives.

2) Back, forward and up buttons – These are used to navigate through locations or files.
3) Ribbon – The Ribbon can be used for copying, moving, creating new folders, e-mailings,
zipping items, changing views etc.
4) Address bar – It is used for entering or selecting a location.
5) File list – This is where the contents of the current folders are displayed.
6) Column headings – It is used to view the files according to our desired need like ‘Date
Modified’ option sorts the files according to dates on which they are created.
7) Search Box – It is used to enter a word or a phrase to look for an item in the current folder.
8) Status Bar – It can be used to view the total number of items in a location, or the number of
selected items and their total size.
9) Details/preview pane – It is used to view some common properties associated with the
selected file such as author, date etc.
3.3 PANES OF WINDOWS EXPLORER
On clicking the View menu you can see the various panes available in Windows 8 Explorer as shown
below
These panes are :
i) Preview Pane
ii) Details Pane
iii) Navigation Pane

26
3.4 WORKING WITH FOLDER IN LEFT PANE : On expanding a disk drive or clicking a
window/folder like Desktop, Downloads, Recent Places etc. you can get the content of the
window/folder on the Right Pane of the Windows Explorer. And on selecting and clicking a disk
drive , you can get the files and folders of that particular drive on the Right Pane of the windows
explorer and all the folders of that drive on Left Pane of the windows explorer. And now, you can
move files and folders from on place to another by dragging and dropping the same from left pane
to right pane and vice-versa.

3.5 MANAGING FILES AND FOLDERS IN WINDOWS EXPLORER : On selecting the folder
in left pane of the windows explorer you can view the files present in that folder. Similarly you can
view the content of a disk drive. You can even directly drag and drop file(s) or folder(s) from one
location to another location same like copy and paste.

3.6 MODES OF VIEW :

The content shown on the right pane of the windows explorer can be viewed in one of the following
modes Extra Large Icons, Large Icons, Medium Icons, Small Icons, List, Details, Tiles, Contents. Try it
to view the effect of these modes.

3.7 FILE NAMING CONVENTION All the file systems follow the same general naming
conventions for an individual file: a base file name and an optional extension, separated by a period.
However, each file system may have own naming convention. Some of the basic rules followed
while naming file sin Windows are listed below:

 Use a period to separate the base file name from the extension in the name of a directory or
file.
 Use a backslash (\) to separate the components of a path.
 Use a backslash as required as part of volume names, for example, the "C:\" in
"C:\path\file".
 Do not assume case sensitivity. For example, WINDOWS and windows should be treated
equal.
 Use any character in the current code page for a name, including Unicode characters and
characters in the extended character set (128–255) except for the following reserved
characters:

 < (less than)

 > (greater than)
 : (colon)
 " (double quote)
 / (forward slash)
 \ (backslash)
 | (vertical bar or pipe)
 ? (question mark)
 * (asterisk)

3.8 SEARCHING FILES One or more files can be search by using Wild Cards, ? (exclamation) for
one character and * (asterisk) for none, one or more characters. Searching of a file can be done
based on either its name or its file extension.
27
For Example : *.docx will search display all the document files or word files in the drive or path
selected. Similarly abc.docx will search and display word file having name abc

The Search Box is shown below:

3.9 CREATING SHORTCUTS A shortcut is a link to an item (such as a file, folder, or program)
on our computer. You can create shortcuts and then place them in a convenient location of our use.
Shortcuts can be distinguished from the original file by the arrow that appears on the icon.

To create a shortcut

1. Open the location containing the item that you want to create a shortcut to.

2. Right-click the item and then click Create shortcut. The new shortcut appears in the same
location as the original item.

3. Drag the new shortcut to the desired location.

28
 Clicking on Create Shortcut forms the short cut.

To delete a shortcut

 Right-click the shortcut that you want to delete, click Delete, and then click Yes. If
you're prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or
provide confirmation.

Q 1. What is Windows Explorer ?

Q 2. Write at least two points about the use of Windows Explorer.

Q 3. What is the benefit of creating a shortcut ? (Write two points)

Q 4. Why the file extension is important while saving it?

Q 5. How can you search the particular Word file in your system ?

1. Search and locate the files that you have created (MyFile.docx, Family.docx) and cut-paste or
drag-drop them in a new folder say My Work in D: drive using Windows Explorer

2. Search and find the number of audio files (.mp3) is there in your computer. Also find the total
volume of disk space occupied by them.

29
 Learning Objectives :
After learning the Unit the students will be able to:
 make an effective presentation
 format the presentation
 insert various objects in the powerpoint slide
 save the presentation in valid format
 run the presentation slides

Power point is an application software that helps us in presentation that supports text,
graphics, pictures and other multimedia. The default file extension of MS power Point 2010 is .pptx.

4.1 STARTING POWERPOINT

To start with, we get familiar with the various parts in a power point file.

30
File Tab: The file tab helps us to manage our power point file.

Ribbon: The Ribbon is composed of three components:

 Tabs: They form the top part of the ribbon. Home, Insert etc. are some tabs.
 Groups: The group organizes related commands. Eg. Commands related to fonts, size,
alignment etc.
 Commands: Each group has commands in it.

Slide area: The Slide area helps us to add, edit texts and other multimedia in the slide.

Title bar: It appears at the top of the window where the file name can be found.

Slide view: The Slide view helps us to switch between PowerPoint views:

 Normal Layout view: In this, the page is displayed in normal view. This view lets us to edit
individual slides and re-arrange them.
 Slide Sorter View: In this, the slides are displayed as matrix. This view lets us to re-arrange
slides but not edit them.
 Reading view: This view is similar to a slide show view.

4.1.1 CREATE A NEW FILE

To create a new slide, go to file>New or right click on the navigation pane and select New Slide or
press CTRL + N.

31
4.2 FORMATTING A PRESENTATION
PowerPoint lets us to format the presentation according to our needs and thereby enable us to
create customized and impressive presentations.

4.2.1 CHANGING THE FONT

The font management is shown below:

We can choose from the menu or right click on any text to format it.

32
4.2.2 CHANGING THE FONT SIZE, STYLE , COLOR

The above image shows the Font dialog that helps us in formatting font size, style and colour.

33
4.2.3 FORMATTING PARAGRAPHS

Font face and its formatting is shown in the image below. We need to select our desired font face
and choose the font size and also view the preview of the selected type.

34
4.2.4 CHANGING TEXT ALIGNMENT

PowerPoint allows various text alignments to organize our content.

For example the text in the above example is aligned right.

35
Paragraph Indentation:

Paragraph Indentation helps us to present our data in a visually appealing manner.

36
4.2.5 MODIFYING LINE SPACING

PowerPoint offers line spacing option to help us change the space between lines of text.

37
4.2.6 CREATING BULLETED AND NUMBERED LISTS

To create Bullet and Numbering, we need to right click on the area where we need to insert the
bullets or numbering and then choose the desired bullet or number.

4.2.7 COPYING FORMATTING

One of the most power and useful feature of the PowerPoint is the Format Painter tool. Once we
have selected a particular format which fits our need, it helps us to copy the format to a series of
presentations.

38
4.3 INSERT MENU AND OTHER MULTIMEDIA CONTENTS
PowerPoint allows us to insert multimedia in our slide. It allows us to insert two types of pictures:
Clipart – the ones that are online picture collections and can be searched from the clipart and the
other is Picture: the ones that are available in our computer.

4.3.1 IMAGES : In order to insert or add images in your powerpoint slide select Picture option
under Insert menu and browse and select the desired image to be inserted from your computer

4.3.2 TABLES : To insert or add a Table in your slide select Table option under Insert menu. You can
either directly define the number of rows and number columns required in your table or you can
draw the table directly on the slide on your own. You can also insert excel sheet table in your slide
using Insert menu as shown below

39
4.3.3 CLIP ART : Microsoft Powerpoint provides some pre-defined category wise basic images that
can be used by the user directly by choosing Clip Art option under Insert menu as shown below on
the right side

4.3.4 SCREEN SHOT : This option under Insert menu can be used to insert the recently taken Screen
Shots. You just need to click on the drop down arrow and select the desired screen shot to be
inserted in your slide.

40
4.3.5 SHAPES AND SMART ART : Microsoft Powerpoint provides some important mathematical and
geometrical shapes to be used in powerpoint slides.

Shapes option under Insert menu : used to insert basic geometrical and other shapes

Smart Art option under Insert menu : used to insert Mathematical 2-D and 3-D shapes

41
4.3.6 CHART : You can also insert various types of mathematical charts in your presentation

4.3.7 TEXT BOX , WORDART, DATE & TIME , SLIDE NUMBER, SYMBOLS : We can also make use of
Textbox, Header & Footer, WordArt, Date & Time, Slide Number and various symbols in our
powerpoint presentation by selecting the desired option from the below select options under Insert
menu.

42
We can also insert video and audio in our slide.

4.3.8 MOVING & RESIZING AN IMAGE:

To resize an image it is advisable to drag from its corners as it will uniformly increase or decrease
the length and breadth of the image.

An in order to move an Image just selects the image and drags and moves the image while pressing
the left mouse button.

43
4.4 SLIDE SHOW MENU

To start a slideshow, we can go to the menu and select Start Slideshow or we can press F5 to do so.
Some of the important shortcuts are mentioned below:

 Go to a particular slide - <number> + ENTER

 Start slideshow from beginning – F5
 Start slideshow from current slide – SHIFT + F5
 To get out from the slide show – ESC

4.4.1 FROM BEGINNING : To show the presentation from the beginning of the presentation or from
the very first slide select FROM BEGINNING under SLIDE SHOW MENU

4.4.2 FROM CURRENT SLIDE: To show the presentation from the current position of the
presentation or from the current slide select FROM CURRENT SLIDE under SLIDE SHOW MENU

44
4.4.3 CUSTOM SLIDE SHOW

PowerPoint lets us present custom slide show. For that we need to select from the menu

Slide Show > Custom Slide Show and then select the type.

4.4.4 SETUP SLIDE SHOW : After creating the presentation and in order to present the slides in
effective ways MS Powerpoint provides us the features to Setup our slide slow as per our
requirement.

To access the option select Set up Slide Show under Slide Show menu as indicated below

45
Q 1. MS PowerPoint is a/an............................. software.

Q 2. The default file extension of MS PowerPoint 2007/2010/2013 is .................... .

Q 3. Write about the uses of PowerPoint.

Q 4. PowerPoint allows various text alignments to organise our data. (True/False)

Q 5. How can we insert pictures and audio in PowerPoint?

Q 6. What is the function of the format painter tool?

Q 7. The shortcut to start slideshow from beginning is ......................... .

Q 8. The shortcut to get out from the slide show is ............................... .

Q 9. What are the two types of pictures we can insert in PowerPoint?

Q 10. An individual page in a PowerPoint presentation is called a .................. .

1. Open MS Powerpoint and write Five sentences about yourself in five different slides and save the
file with your name on the Desktop.

2. Open the file that you have just created add two more slides having one-one sentence about
your parents and save the file with the name My Family in D: drive.

3. Open the file that you have just created and increase the font size of normal text to 16 ,and heading
to 24 , font style for heading is Times New Roman and for normal text it is Calibri and save the file with the
name MyFile in a folder.

4. Create a powerpoint presentation having two sildes , write Five points (1 to 5) about your best friend on
one slide and five points (bulleted) about your brother/sister.

5. Create a presentation to display Ten basic facts about your country. All the slides must have name of the
place and at least one image of that place.

Note : Name of the place must be written using WordArt. All the slides must have slide number and should
also display date and time during the Slid Show. Next slide will come after 3 seconds only.

46
 Learning Objectives :
After learning the Unit the students will be able to:
 create a file in excel
 identify components of excel screen
 make a simple mark sheet on spreadsheet
 auto generate series like serial no, days, months, date etc
 do some auto computations like sum, average, maximum, minimum etc.

5.1 WORKING IN EXCEL

Excel is one of the most used software application. It is an application software. Working in Excel is
very easy once we get to know about the various menus, features and the shortcut keys. The file
extension of the Microsoft Excel 2007/2010/2013 is .xlsx .

Excel finds its use in various aspects of our life. It can be used in educational, financial and
mathematical or statistical calculations. It also helps analyzing data with the help of various charts.

Ribbon: The Ribbon contains many tabs. They are File, Home, Insert, Page Layout, Formulas,
Data, Review and View. The most frequently used features are contained in the Home tab.

We can minimize the Ribbon according to our need. To do so, we need to Right Click
anywhere on the Ribbon and then Click ‘Minimize’ or press CTRL+F1.

47
The Ribbon can also be customized. It means that we can create our own tab and add commands to
the tabs.

5.2 INTRODUCTION – WORKBOOK AND WORKSHEET

A workbook is a file that contains one or more worksheets that can be used to organize related
information all at one place.

To open a new workbook –

 Go to the FILE or OFFICE button(MS Excel 2007)

 Select new Blank Workbook.

The worksheets can be seen in the red encircled region. In MS 2007, by default 3 work
sheets are provided. A Worksheet is a collection of cells where we can enter our data and can
perform various operations on it. We can add new worksheets by clicking on Insert Worksheet or by
pressing Shift + F11. We can also rename our worksheet by right clicking on the sheet and selecting
‘Rename’.

48
KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS:

Keyboard shortcuts help us to perform our work quickly without having to us the mouse. Various
keyboard shortcuts are listed below:

 To select a range of cells we use CTRL + A

Note: Using the CTRL + A one more time helps us to select the entire worksheet.

 To copy we use CTRL + c and to cut we use CTRL + x .

The copied or cut portion can be pasted with CTRL + v.
To undo any operation we use CTRL + z.
 To move quickly to the bottom of a selected range of cells we use CTRL + ↓.

Similarly using the right arrow will take us quickly the right of the selected cells.

 To select cells while moving down, hold down SHIFT and press down arrow key till the
numbers of required cells is selected.

Similarly we can use the right, left, and up keys to select cells.

5.3 USE IN DAY TO DAY LIFE : Excel spreadsheet has many advantages that we can use it in our
day to day life. It can be used to do simple calculations like addition, subtraction etc. and other
mathematical computations. It can also be used to make a record of our daily activities or daily
expenditure that can easily be managed and maintained. It can also be used to maintain the record
of our school friends, their hobbies and interest etc. in easily manageable tabular format.

In short, Excel spreadsheet provides all the tools required to solve mathematical problems.

49
5.4 STEPS TO START EXCEL: In order to work with excel , we required to open a blank
workbook first. This can be done either of the two ways :

First Way : Go to Start > All Programs > Microsoft Office > Microsoft Excel 2010

Second Way : Write Excel in Windows Search text field / box and press enter

5.5 COMPONENTS OF EXCEL SCREEN : The various basic components of MS Excel 2007 are
shown below

50
5.6 VARIOUS DATA TYPES
In Excel, data type means the type of values that a cell can hold. Three types of values can be
entered in a cell. They are –

 Labels (text) – These are descriptive information and they usually include alphabet
characters. E.g. name, months etc.

 Values (numbers) – These are generally numbers and dates.

 Formula – These are certain instructions for the Excel to perform calculations.

5.7 ENTERING DATA IN SPREADSHEET : A data in Excel spreadsheet is entered at the

intersection of a row and a column. This intersection of a row and a column defines a cell in excel an
this cell can be formatted as per our own required. A cell in Excel is accessed by its Column letter an
Row number. For Example the very first cell of an excel worksheet is referenced or named as A1
where A is the First Column Letter and 1 is the first row number.

You can enter as many characters in a cell as supported by the version of the MS Excel. And you can
change the format of the data in a cell by right clicking on the cell and selecting Format Cells from
the context menu

And after formatting the

Cell as per the requirement
you can start entering the
data.

51
5.8 ABOUT THE CELL AND CELL ADDRESS
The individual units of a worksheet are known as the cell. In other words, an Excel worksheet is
composed of cells. Each cell has an address.

In the above given image, the address of the cell with the text KVS is F7 where F is the column
number and 7 is the row number. Various formulas and calculations are done on the basis of these
cell addresses.

5.9 AUTO SUM

The Auto Sum feature helps us to automatically sum a range of cells. In the above image, the
encircled region in the red is the Auto Sum. To get the sum, we first need to select the range of cells
for which we want the sum and then click on the Auto Sum button.

5.10 FORMATTING THE DATA IN THE TABLE

The Excel tables help us to view and organize data. And on the organized data we can apply many
features like sorting and filtering.

52
To insert a table in a worksheet, follow the given below steps:

 Click on the Ribbon, click on the Insert tab.

 In the Tables group, click the tables command. Give the data. Click on ‘ My table has
headers’.
 Click OK

The heading cells of the table has drop down arrows that can be used to sort or filter data.

When the table is created, it is given a default name. We can later change the name. The steps are
as follows –

 Select any cell in the table.

 On the Ribbon, under the Table Tools tab, click the design tab.

53
  Click in the table Name Box and type the new name.

We can create a table with a specific style.

 In the Styles group, click Format as table.

 Click on the style that you want.

While selecting the table format always keep in mind its presentation and look. It is advisable to
select the table format that suits your data best.

54
Q 1. MS Excel is a/an ...................... software.

Q 2. Write about the uses of Excel.

Q 3. The shortcut key for inserting a worksheet in a workbook is ................................. .

Q 4. How do we find the address of a cell in Excel?

Q 5. By default, how many worksheets are there in a workbook?

Q 6. Tables in Excel help us to organise data. (True/False)

Q 7. The file extension of Microsoft 2007 is ......................... .

Q 8. The ........................ feature automatically helps us to sum a range of cells.

Q 9. In Excel, the intersection of row and column is called ............................ .

Q 10.The maximum number of rows and columns in Excel are ...................... and ......................
respectively.

1. Open an Excel workbook and create/insert Five Excel sheets. Rename the sheets as the name of
five fruit having different color (Apple for red color , Orange for orange color, Mango for yellow
color, Grapes for green color, Strawberry for purple color)

2. Create a table in MS Excel to calculate total expenditure on your studies ( say School fee,
Uniform, Shoes, Books, Copies, Geometry box, school bag etc. )

S.No. Name of Article Quantity Price Total Cost

Note : Price and Total Cost must show amount in rupee and paisa

3. Create a table in MS Excel to calculate total marks scored by you in various subjects

English Hindi Maths EVS

FA 1
FA 2
SA 1
TOTAL
FA 3
FA 4
SA 2
TOTAL
GRAND TOTAL

55
 Learning Objectives :
After learning the Unit the students will be able to:
 use various tools available in Accessories
 use Simple and Scientific calculator in their day to day life
 type without keyboard by using on-screen keyboard
 zoom in and zoom out the content displayed on the screen
 access and play the PC games available
 understand the basic concepts about computer virus and the use of anti-virus

Microsoft Windows Operating System provides various useful tools or software that can be
used as and when we required. In order to access these tools goto

Start>All Programs>Accessories

56
6.1 CALCULATOR : The calculator is very handy tools that will help you to do simple arithmetic
calculations by using Simple Calculator and in order to do certain other mathematical computations
you can use the Scientific calculator , that can be accessed by selecting Scientific option under View
menu

a) Simple Calculator b) Scientific Calculator

6.2 ONSCREEN KEYBOARD : Sometimes it happen that your keyboard is not working, in such case
you can use On-Screen keyboard to enter simple text by just clicking the particular keys using the
mouse. The on-screen keyboard can be found under Ease of Access under Accessories section

57
6.3 MAGNIFIER : You can magnify the content of the screen by using Magnifier tool that can be
accessed under Ease of Access of Accessories
This is a text of font size 6

6.4 GAMES : We all love to play computer game, for that we need to either install it or directly play
from the CD or DVD. Microsoft in his various Operating Systems gives us the ways to play some
popular PC games that are pre-installed with the operating system like Chess, Playing Cards etc. You
can access these games by going under the Accessories.

6.5 VIRUS & ANTI-VIRUS : As we all know a computer virus can do a lot of harm to our computer
system. It can corrupt our files and folders, it can corrupt the operating system and can also make
some hardware components un-available to the user, that force use to format our computer
system.
A computer virus is a program designed to harm or cause harm VIRUS stands for Vital
on an infected computer. Its spreads through e-mail Information Under Siege
attachments, portable devices, websites containing
malicious/harmful scripts and file downloads. A computer virus attaches itself to
the host files and always activate whenever you open the infected files. The virus can replicate itself
and then infect the other files on your computer causing more damage.
Some types of a virus are : File Infector viruses, Boot Infector viruses, Macro viruses, Polymorphic
viruses etc.
In order to prevent our computer from getting infected
with a computer virus, we need to install Anti-Virus software.
Anti-Virus prevents our system from virus and also it can
repair our files and folders if they are already infected. But
in order to make an anti-virus effectively work, we need to
update it regularly. Some of the anti-virus software available
in the market are QuickHeal, Norton, Kaspersky, AVG, McAfee,
K7 etc. Some antivirus software for Home or Educational
purposes are also available on internet for freely downloadable such as Avast, Avira, Panda etc.

58
Q 1. What is virus ?

Q 2. Write the different categories of viruses.

Q 3. Why we need Anti-virus?

Q 4. What is the use of Magnifier? How it can help to people having vision problem?

Q 5. Write the name of at least two games that you play on PC. Also write 2-2 points about those
games.

Q 1. Evaluate the following using Calculator and compare the result

a) 12+4-65/2*9

b) 4-65/2*9+12

c) 12-65/2*9+4

Q 2. Write a paragraph about your village using only on-screen keyboard.

Q 3. Write Roll no and name of your ten good friends using on-screen keyboard only

59
 Learning Objectives :
After learning the Unit the students will be able to:
 change the screen resolution
 change the desktop background and set a screen saver
 change and adjust the settings of mouse
 change the view of start menu and customize the task bar
 change the system date and time

In order to customize the desktop screen of a computer system, you can make use of Control Panel
provided by an operating system, that provides all the options required for the organization and
maintenance of your computer both in terms of hardware and software.

You can access the Control Panel in either of the two ways:

Firstly by writing Control Panel in the Search box and press Enter key, secondly by locating the Control Panel
option in Start Menu

After opening the Control Panel window, you can view and use various options available for
various different purposes

Category Large
view icons
view

60
7.1 DISPLAY PROPERTIES : You can change the display of your computer , you can also increase and
decrease the brightness and contrast of the display panel or monitor by changing the settings called
Display properties. You can change these settings by clicking on Display option in the Large Icons
view of the Control Panel. OR you can directly access it by right clicking on the desktop.

7.2 SETTING OF MOUSE : A mouse is a useful pointing and selecting device. By default it is to be
used by left hand. But a user can change its settings such as Double Click speed , mouse pointer
movement speed, scheme or shape of mouse pointer and various other settings related to mouse
buttons and mouse wheel or center button.
You can change these settings by clicking on
Mouse option in the Large Icons view of the
Control Panel. OR by locating and clicking on
Mouse under Hardware and Sound option in the
Category wise view of the Control Panel

7.3 TASKBAR AND START MENU : The bottommost bar or strip displays on the Desktop screen is a
taskbar. It shows the currently active and open application along with other options like Date &
Time, Start Menu. A taskbar can have Start Menu, Quick Launch icons, System Tray icons etc.

61
By right clicking on the taskbar you will get many options that can be used for various purposes

Start Menu
On clicking this you will get system tray icons

Start Menu helps you to locate and select a program from the group of all available pre-installed
and user installed programs.

7.4 DATE AND TIME SETTINGS : System date and time is one of the most important thing that one
has to keep in mind because it maintains the date and time wise your computer activities. It also
helps in selecting and sorting files and folders based on their date of creation or modification.
Hence it is advisable to keep the system date and time correct. You can set the date and time by
simply right clicking on displaying Date & Time on the right most side on the taskbar and selecting
Adjust Date and Time option as shown below.

62
 You can also change the way the date and time is to be displayed and many other thing. And the most
important thing is Time Zone. In order to let the system automatically update Date and Time correctly , you
have set the correct Time Zone. For India it is +5.30 as shown above.

Q 1. How many buttons are there on a typical mouse?

Q 2. How can change the desktop background?

Q 3. What is the purpose / significance / importance of taskbar?

Q 4. The collection of Icons on the left most side before the Start menu on task bar is called
_____________.

1. Change the wallpaper or desktop background of your computer

2. Change the date and time of your computer to the date and time of your birth.

3. One of your friend uses his left hand to operate mouse, but he is not feeling comfortable in doing so. Help
him by changing the settings of the mouse, so that he can use his left hand to operate the mouse
comfortably.

***

63
64
65
66
67
1
 Patron
Shri C. Neelap
Deputy Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

Regional Co-ordination & Compilation

Shri D. Patle
Asstt. Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

School Co-ordination
Shri S. Sarkar
Principal, KV IOC, Noonmati, Guwahati
&
Shri Munna Lal
Principal, KV HPCL Jagiroad, Assam

Subject Expert
Shri. Ashish Kumar Joshi
PGT(CS), KV HPCL Jagiroad,Assam

2
3
4
5
6
 INDEX
UNIT UNIT NAME PAGE NO

Unit I TABLE CREATION IN WORD

1.1 Inserting Tables
1.1.1 Selecting no of rows and Columns
1.1.2 Inserting new row and Column
1.1.3 Merging the cells. 11
1.1.4 Filling the color in cells.
1.1.5 Alignment in the table(vertical and horizontal)
1.1.6 Table borders
1.2 Draw Table
Unit II MORE IN WORD
2.1 Manipulating Paragraph
2.1.1 Selecting
2.1.2 Moving
2.1.3 Copying
2.1.4 Page Layout menu 18
2.1.5 Margins Setting
2.1.6 Orientation
2.1.7 Paper size (Legal & A4)
2.1.8 Page Borders
2.2 Indentation
2.3 Wrap Text / Positioning Image
Unit III WORKING IN EXCEL
3.1 Working with Sheets
3.1.1 Creating/Deleting Sheets
3.1.2 Renaming Sheets
3.1.3 Copying / Moving Sheets
3.2 Inserting New Row and Column
3.3 Deleting/Hiding the Rows and Columns
28
3.4 Changing the width and height of the column and row.
3.5 Find and Select the data in a given range.
3.6 VIEW MENU
3.6.1 Gridlines
3.6.2 Freeze Panes
3.6.3 View side by side
3.6.4 Synchronous Scrolling
Unit IV MULTIMEDIA
4.1 Introduction to Multimedia
4.1.1 Definition
4.1.2 Uses of Multimedia 44
4.1.3 Hardware and Software required
4.2 Media Player
4.2.1 How to open and use
7
 4.3 Sound recorder
4.3.1 How to open and use
4.4 Movie Maker
4.4.1 Inserting Image
4.4.2 Setting timeline
4.4.3 Publishing movie
Unit V MAKING A POWERFUL PRESENTATION
5.1 Design Menu
5.1.1 Slide Designs
5.2 Transition Menu
5.2.1 Different Effects on Slides
5.3 Animation Menu
5.3.1 Different Effects on Object
50
5.4 Viewing Presentation in Different ways
5.4.1 Managing Slides in the Slide Sorter View
5.4.2 Running a Presentation in the Slide Show View
5.5 Previewing and Printing a Presentation
5.5.1 Selecting Page Setup Options
5.5.2 Printing a Presentation
5.6 Showing presentation using Projector
Unit VI INTERNET
6.1 Review of Internet
6.1.1 Introduction to Internet
6.1.2 Web Browsers
6.1.3 Websites
6.1.4 Search Engines 58
6.2 Exploring the different websites
6.2.1 KVS Website
6.2.2 Vidyalaya’s Website
6.2.3 Wikipedia
6.2.4 Edustrokes
Sample Papers 63

8
 Unit 1: TABLE CREATION IN WORD

Minimum Level of learning

 Student should be able to create a time table of their class in word.
 Student should be able to create a greeting card using page borders and other options.

In This unit
1.1 Inserting Tables
1.1.1 Selecting no of rows and Columns
1.1.2 Inserting new row and Column
1.1.3 Merging the cells.
1.1.4 Filling the color in cells.
1.1.5 Alignment in the table(vertical and horizontal)
1.1.6 Table borders
1.2 Draw Table

Introduction:-
Dear Students, in this unit, we will learn about the tables in MS-word. First we are going to see “what is
MS-word actually”
Microsoft Word or MS-WORD (often called Word) is a graphical word processing program that users can
type with. It is made by the computer company Microsoft. The purpose of the MS Word is to allow the
users to type and save documents. Similar to other word processors, it has helpful tools to make
documents.

Microsoft Word 2007

9
Students currently there are many version of MS-Word is available in the market like Office 2003, 2007.
2010, 2013 etc. here we are considering MS-word 2007 version.

1.1Inserting Tables

In Microsoft Office Word 2007, you can insert a table by choosing from a selection of preformatted
tables — complete with sample data — or by selecting the number of rows and columns that you want.
You can insert a table into a document, or you can insert one table into another table to create a more
complex table. There are 3 ways by which you can insert a table in the document and these 3 ways are as
following:-

1.1.1 Selecting no of rows and Columns

(i) Use table templates

You can use table templates to insert a table that is based on a gallery of preformatted tables. Table
templates contain sample data to help you visualize what the table will look like when you add your
data.
1. Click where you want to insert a table.
2. On the Insert tab, in the Tables group, click Table, point to Quick Tables, and then click the
template that you want.

10
(ii) Use the Table menu
1. Click where you want to insert a table.
2. On the Insert tab, in the Tables group, click Table, and then, under Insert Table,
drag to select the number of rows and columns that you want.

(iii) Use the Insert Table command

You can use the Insert Table command to choose the table dimensions and format before you
insert the table into a document.
1. Click where you want to insert a table.
2. On the Insert tab, in the Tables group, click Table, and then click Insert Table.
3. Under Table size, enter the number of columns and rows.
4. Under AutoFit behavior, choose options to adjust the table size.

11
1.1.2 Inserting new row and Column:-
After inserting a table if you want to add/insert new row or new column then you can follow the following
procedure:-
Add a row above or below
1. Click in a cell above or below where you want to add a row.
2. Under Table Tools, on the Layout tab, do one of the following:
 To add a row above the cell, click Insert Above in the Rows and Columns group.
 To add a row below the cell, click Insert Below in the Rows and Columns group
Add a column to the left or right
1. Click in a cell to the left or right of where you want to add a column.
2. Under Table Tools, on the Layout tab, do one of the following:
 To add a column to the left of the cell, click Insert Left in the Rows and Columns group.
 To add a column to the right of the cell, click Insert Right in the Rows and Columns group.

1.1.3 Merging the cells.

Merge (Combine/Join) cells
You can combine two or more table cells located in the same row or column into a single cell. For
example, you can merge several cells horizontally to create a table heading that spans several columns.
1. Select the cells that you want to merge by clicking the left edge of a cell and then dragging across
the other cells that you want.
2. Under Table Tools, on the Layout tab, in the Merge group, click Merge Cells.

12
1.1.4 Filling the color in cells.
You can fill any color in a specific cell or group of cell to make it distinct from the other cell in the table by
follow the following procedure;-
1. Select the cells that you want to fill with color by clicking the left edge of a cell and then dragging
across the other cells that you want.
2. Under Table Tools, on the Design tab, click shading then select any color of your choice.

1.1.5 Alignment in the table (vertical and horizontal):-

Aligning text in columns and rows in Word is a matter of choosing how you want the text to line up
vertically and how you want it to line up horizontally. Follow these steps to align text in a table:

1. Select the cells, columns, or rows, with text that you want to align (or select your entire table).
2. Go to the (Table Tools) Layout tab.
3. Click an Align button (you may have to click the Alignment button first, depending on the size of
your screen).

Word offers nine ways to align text

13
 1.1.6 Table borders:-
When you add a border to a picture, text, or page, you can make those elements in your document stand
out. You can do the same with the tables in your documents. You can add a border to a table by using the
Border Styles, you can design your own custom border, or you can apply a pre-designed table style.

Add table borders

1. Under Table Tools, click the Design tab.

2. In the Table Styles group, click Borders, and then do one of the following:
o Click one of the predefined border sets.
o Click Borders and shading, click the Borders tab, and then choose the options that you want.

Remove table borders from the whole table

1. Under Table Tools, click the Design tab.

2. In the Table Styles group, click Borders, and then click No Border.

1.2 Draw Table:-

You can draw a complex table — for example, one that contains cells of different heights or a varying
number of columns per row.
1. Click where you want to draw the table.
2. On the Insert tab, in the Tables group, click Table.

3. Click Draw Table.

The pointer changes to a pencil.
14
4. To define the outer boundaries of the table, draw a rectangle.
5. Draw column and row lines inside the rectangle.

6. To erase a line or block of lines, under Table Tools, on the Design tab, in the Draw Borders group,

click Eraser .
7. Click the line that you want to erase. When you are finished, click Draw Table to continue drawing
the table.
8. When you finish drawing the table, click in a cell and start typing or insert a graphic.

Assignments:-
 Create a time table of your class in word using tables.
 Create a greeting card using page borders and other options.

15
 Unit 2: MORE IN WORD

Minimum Level of learning

 Student should be able to create a time table of their class in word.
 Student should be able to create a greeting card using page borders and other options.

In This unit:-
2.1 Manipulating Paragraph
2.1.1 Selecting
2.1.2 Moving
2.1.3 Copying
2.1.4 Page Layout menu
2.1.5 Margins Setting
2.1.6 Orientation
2.1.7 Paper size (Legal & A4)
2.1.8 Page Borders
2.2 Indentation
2.3 Wrap Text / Positioning Image

Introduction:-
A paragraph in Word is any text that ends with a hard return. You can insert a hard return anytime by
pressing the Enter key. Paragraph formatting lets you control the appearance. For example, you can
change the alignment of text from left to center or the spacing between lines form single to double.

16
2.1 Manipulating Paragraph:-

2.1.1 Selecting:-
You can select a paragraph on one page and a sentence on a different page. you can select the
paragraph by using mouse or by using the keyboard.

Select text by using the mouse:-

(i) To select an entire document, do one of the following:

• On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All.

• Move the pointer to the left of any text until it turns into a right-pointing arrow, and then
triple-click.

(ii)

To select Do this
Any amount of Click where you want to begin the selection, hold down the left mouse button,
text and then drag the pointer over the text that you want to select.
A word Double-click anywhere in the word.
A line of text Move the pointer to the left of the line until it changes to a right-pointing arrow,
and then click.
A sentence Hold down CTRL, and then click anywhere in the sentence.
A paragraph Triple-click anywhere in the paragraph.
Multiple Move the pointer to the left of the first paragraph until it changes to a right-
paragraphs pointing arrow, and then press and hold down the left mouse button while you
drag the pointer up or down.
A large block of Click at the start of the selection, scroll to the end of the selection, and then hold
text down SHIFT while you click where you want the selection to end.
An entire Move the pointer to the left of any text until it changes to a right-pointing arrow,
document and then triple-click.
Headers and In Print Layout view, double-click the dimmed header or footer text. Move the
footers pointer to the left of the header or footer until it changes to a right-pointing
arrow, and then click.
Footnotes and Click the footnote or endnote text, move the pointer to the left of the text until it
17
To select Do this
endnotes changes to a right-pointing arrow, and then click.
A vertical block Hold down ALT while you drag the pointer over the text.
of text
A text box or Move the pointer over the border of the frame or text box until the pointer
frame becomes a four-headed arrow, and then click.

(iii) Select text in different places

You can select text or items in a table that are not next to each other. For example, you can select a
paragraph on one page and a sentence on a different page.

1. Select some text or an item in a table.

2. Hold down CTRL while you select any additional text or item in a table that you want.

Select text by using the keyboard

Select text in the body of a document

NOTE To select an entire document, press CTRL+A.

To select Do this
One character to the right Press SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW.
One character to the left Press SHIFT+LEFT ARROW.
A word from its beginning Place the insertion point at the beginning of the word, and then press
to its end CTRL+SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW.
A word from its end to its Move the pointer to the end of the word, and then press
beginning CTRL+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW.
A line from its beginning to Press HOME, and then press SHIFT+END.
its end
A line from its end to its Press END, and then press SHIFT+HOME.
beginning
One line down Press END, and then press SHIFT+DOWN ARROW.
One line up Press HOME, and then press SHIFT+UP ARROW.
A paragraph from its Move the pointer to the beginning of the paragraph, and then press

18
To select Do this
beginning to its end CTRL+SHIFT+DOWN ARROW.
A paragraph from its end Move the pointer to the end of the paragraph, and then press
to its beginning CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW.
A document from its end Move the pointer to the end of the document, and then press
to its beginning CTRL+SHIFT+HOME.
A document from its Move the pointer to the beginning of the document, and then press
beginning to its end CTRL+SHIFT+END.
From the beginning of a Move the pointer to the beginning of the window, and then press
window to its end ALT+CTRL+SHIFT+PAGE DOWN.
The entire document Press CTRL+A.
A vertical block of text Press CTRL+SHIFT+F8, and then use the arrow keys. Press ESC to turn
off the selection mode.
The nearest character Press F8 to turn on selection mode, and then press LEFT ARROW or
RIGHT ARROW; press ESC to turn off the selection mode.
A word, a sentence, a Press F8 to turn on selection mode, and then press F8 once to select a
paragraph, or a document word, twice to select a sentence, three times to select a paragraph, or
four times to select the document. Press ESC to turn off the selection
mode.

2.1.2 Moving:-
• Moving is also known as Cut and Paste. It allows you to remove selected text from the
document/paragraph and place it to different location.

To cut and paste a block of text:

• Select the text you want to move.

• Click the Cut button on the Standard toolbar. or in Keyboard Press Ctrl + X
• Place the insertion point where you want the text inserted.

• Click the Paste button. in Keyboard Press Ctrl + V

2.1.3 Copying
Copying text can be useful if you need to duplicate words you have already typed as it saves time and
effort. Follow these step-by-step instructions to copy and paste text
Step 1: Open an existing Word document or start a new document and type your text.

19
 Step 2: To copy text, it will need to be selected or highlighted with the mouse first. When the mouse
pointer is moved over a text area, the pointer will change from an arrow to a ‘text select’ or ‘I-beam’
icon.

Step 3: Select your text so that it’s highlighted.

Step 4: Copy the text by clicking on the copy icon at the left-hand side of the formatting ribbon.

Step 5: Use the mouse to move the cursor to where you wish to paste the copied text.
Step 6: Click Paste to insert the copied text in its new place in your text.

20
Step 8: Your text will now be duplicated in the new position in your document.
Step 9: Once text is highlighted, it’s also possible to copy and paste it using a keyboard shortcut
instead of the mouse, which some people find easier.
To copy, press and hold Ctrl (the control key) on the keyboard and then press the C on the keyboard.
( Ctrl+C )
To paste, press and hold down Ctrl and then press V. ( Ctrl+V )

2.1.4 Page Layout menu

Page layout is the term used to describe how each page of your document will appear when it is
printed. In Word, page layout includes elements such as the Themes, Page Setup, Page
Background, Paragraph setting etc.

2.1.5 Margins Setting

Page margins are the blank space around the edges of the page (Top, Bottom, Left, and Right) in
general, you can insert text and graphics in the printable area between the margins. However, you
can position some items in the margins — for example, headers, footers, and page numbers.

21
Change or set page margins

1. On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group, click Margins.

2. Click the margin type that you want. For the most common margin width, click Normal.
When you click the margin type that you want, your entire document automatically changes to
the margin type that you have selected.

3. You can also specify your own margin settings. Click Margins, click Custom Margins, and then
in the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right boxes, enter new values for the margins.

2.1.6 Orientation:-
You can choose either portrait (vertical) or landscape (horizontal) orientation for all or part of your
document.

1. On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group, click Orientation.

2. Click Portrait or Landscape.

22
2.1.7 Paper size (Legal & A4):-
Page size refers to the area of your Paper or sheet, size is the size of the paper used for
printing.

Choose a page size

In the Page Setup dialog box, click the icon that represents the page size that you want. For
example, click Letter 8.5 x 11".

The default paper size in Microsoft Word is 8.5 x 11 inches –the standard size (called Letter)

Some more standard paper size are:-

A-4 8.27 x 11.69".

Legal 8.5 x 14".

2.1.8 Page Borders:-

You can put a border around the page.

On the Page Layout tab, in the Page background group, click Page Borders.

In the Borders and Shading box, design your border:

a. Under Setting, choose the border style you want.

b. Under Style, click the line style you want.
c. Click the arrow under Color and choose a border color.
d. Click the arrow under Width and choose the width you want.
e. If you want a clip-art border instead, click the arrow under Art and choose a border graphic.

23
 2.4 Indentation:-
Indentation determines the distance of the paragraph from either the left or the right margin. Within the
margins, you can increase or decrease the indentation of a paragraph or group of paragraphs.

1. Click in front of the line that you want to indent.

2. On the Page Layout tab, click the Paragraph Dialog Box Launcher, and then click
the Indents and Spacing tab.

2.5 Wrap Text / Positioning Image:-

Microsoft Office Word enables you to wrap text easily around pictures, shapes, and tables with any
position or style that you want.

Wrap text around a picture or drawing object

1. If the picture or object is on a drawing canvas, select the canvas. If the picture or object is
not on a drawing canvas, select the picture or object.
2. On the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Position.

If the Arrange group is collapsed and Position isn't visible, click the Arrange button, and then
click Position.
Click the wrapping position that you want to apply.

24
TIP Drag the picture or object if you want to change its position on the page. The text wrapping adjusts to
the object in its new location.

3. To change how the text flows around the object, or make other changes to the wrap
settings, in the Arrange group, click Text Wrapping and then click the option that looks best.

Assignments:-
 Design a Page with many Paragraphs and manipulate the paragraph by using Selection,
Move, Copy, Margins, Orientation, Size, Border, and Indentation.
 Design a Page with picture and text and perform Wrap Text with Picture.

25
 Unit 3: WORKING IN EXCEL

Minimum Level of learning

 Student should be able to create a sheet with his/her own name.

In This unit:-
3.1 Working with Sheets
3.1.1 Creating/Deleting Sheets
3.1.2 Renaming Sheets
3.1.3 Copying / Moving Sheets
3.2 Inserting New Row and Column
3.3 Deleting/Hiding the Rows and Columns
3.4 Changing the width and height of the column and row.
3.5 Find and Select the data in a given range.
3.6 VIEW MENU
3.6.1 Gridlines
3.6.2 Freeze Panes
3.6.3 View side by side
3.6.4 Synchronous Scrolling

Introduction:-
Excel is a spreadsheet program that allows you to store, organize and analyze information, in this unit,
you will learn about the MS-Excel 2007 environment.

The Excel Interface:-

26
3.1 Working with Sheets:-
What is worksheet/sheet: - A worksheet is a collection of cells where you keep and manipulate the data.
By default, each Excel workbook contains three worksheets.
3.1.1 Creating/Deleting Sheets:-
When you open Excel, Excel automatically selects Sheet1 for you. The name of the worksheet
appears on its sheet tab at the bottom of the document window.

To select one of the other two worksheets, simply click on the sheet tab of Sheet2 or Sheet3.

Insert a Worksheet
You can insert as many worksheets as you want. To quickly insert a new worksheet, click the Insert
Worksheet tab at the bottom of the document window.

Result:

27
 Delete a Worksheet
To delete a worksheet, right click on a sheet tab and choose Delete.
1. For example, delete Sheet4, Sheet2 and Sheet3.

Result:

3.1.2 Renaming Sheets:-

By default, the worksheets are named Sheet1, Sheet2 and Sheet3. To give a worksheet a more
specific name, execute the following steps.
1. Right click on the sheet tab of Sheet1.
2. Choose Rename.

28
3. For example, type Sales 2010.

3.1.3 Copying / Moving Sheets:-

Copy a Worksheet
Imagine, you have got the sales for 2010 ready and want to create the exact same sheet for 2011,
but with different data. You can recreate the worksheet, but this is time-consuming. It's a lot
easier to copy the entire worksheet and only change the numbers.
1. Right click on the sheet tab of Sales 2010.
2. Choose Move or Copy...

The 'Move or Copy' dialog box appears.

3. Select (move to end) and check Create a copy.

29
 4. Click OK.
Result:

Note: you can even copy a worksheet to another Excel workbook by selecting the specific
workbook from the drop-down list (see the dialog box shown earlier).
Move a Worksheet
To move a worksheet, click on the sheet tab of the worksheet you want to move and drag it into
the new position.
1. For example, click on the sheet tab of Sheet4 and drag it before Sheet2.

Result:

30
3.2 Inserting New Row and Column:-
Insert Row, Column
To insert a row between the values 20 and 40 below, execute the following steps.
1. Select row 3.

2. Right click, and then click Insert.

Result:

Note: - You can perform the same operation for inserting column.

31
3.3 Deleting/Hiding the Rows and Columns:-
Deleting the Rows and Columns:-
To delete a row between the values 20 and 40 below, execute the following steps.
1. Select row 3.

2. Right click, and then click delete.

Result:

32
 Hiding the Rows and Columns:-
To hide a row between the values 20 and 40 below, execute the following steps.
1. Select row 3.

2. Right click, and then click Hide.

3. Result:

3.4 Changing the width and height of the column and row:-
On a worksheet, you can specify a column width of 0 (zero) to 255. This value represents the number of
characters that can be displayed in a cell that is formatted with the standard font. The default column
width is 8.43 characters. If a column has a width of 0 (zero), the column is hidden.
33
You can specify a row height of 0 (zero) to 409. This value represents the height measurement in points (1
point equals approximately 1/72 inch or 0.035 cm). The default row height is 12.75 points (approximately
1/6 inch or 0.4 cm). If a row has a height of 0 (zero), the row is hidden.

Set a column to a specific width

1. Select the column or columns that you want to change.

2. On the Home tab, in the Cells group, click Format.
3. Under Cell Size, click Column Width.
4. In the Column width box, type the value that you want.

Set a row to a specific height

1. Select the row or rows that you want to change.

2. On the Home tab, in the Cells group, click Format.
3. Under Cell Size, click Row Height.
4. In the Row height box, type the value that you want.

34
3.5 Find and Select the data in a given range.-
Supposing you have a data range as following screenshot, and now you want to find or select cells based
on certain criteria information in Excel, for example, you will find or select the cells which contain the
numbers between 80 and 100. How could you quickly solve this task?

You can solve this task by following methods:-

(i) Filter cells based on certain criteria with Filter function

(ii) Find cells based on certain criteria with Conditional Formatting

(i) Filter cells based on certain criteria with Filter function

With Filter function of Excel, you can display the cell rows that you need and hide the unwanted rows.
You can finish it with the following steps:

1. Highlight the column that you want to select the certain cells.
2. Click Data > Filter, see screenshot:

3. And a small triangle will display at the bottom right corner of the title, click the small triangle,
and a menu will appear. Choose Number Filter > Custom Filter… See screenshot:
35
 4. And a Custom AutoFilter dialog box will pop out. Then specify the criteria that you need as
following screenshot:

5. Click OK. And all of the cells which fit to the criteria have been displayed, and the others have been
hidden.

With this method, the other cells which don’t accord with the criteria will be hidden.
36
(ii) Find cells based on certain criteria with Conditional Formatting

Conditional Formatting utility can help you to find and format the cells which match your criteria in
Excel, please do as this:

1. Select the data range that you want to use.

2. Click Home > Conditional Formatting > New Rule, see screenshot:

3. In the New Formatting Rule dialog box, select Format only cells that contain option under Select a
Rule Type, and then specify the criteria you need under Format the Rule Description, see screenshot:

37
5. Then click Format button, in the Format Cells dialog, click Fill tab, and select one color you like
to shade your cells. See screenshot:

6. Click OK to close the dialogs, and the cells between 80 and 100 have been highlighted at once.

38
3.6 VIEW MENU
3.6.1 Gridlines:-
Gridlines are the faint lines that appear around cells in Excel 2007. They are used to distinguish
cells on the worksheet.

Note: - Gridlines do not print by default.

Show/Hide gridlines on a worksheet

(i) Hide gridlines on a worksheet:-

If the design of your workbook requires it, you can hide the gridlines:

1. Select one or more worksheets.

2. On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, clear the Gridlines check box.

(ii) Show gridlines on a worksheet

If the gridlines on your worksheet are hidden, you can use the following procedure to show them again.

1. Select one or more worksheets.

2. On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select the Gridlines check box.

39
3.6.2 Freeze Panes
To keep an area of a worksheet visible while you scroll to another area of the worksheet, you can lock
specific rows or columns in one area by freezing or splitting panes.

When you freeze panes, you keep specific rows or columns visible when you scroll in the worksheet. For
example, you might want to keep row and column labels visible as you scroll.

A solid line indicates that row 1 is frozen to keep column labels in place when you scroll.

Freeze panes to lock specific rows or columns:-

1. On the worksheet, do one of the following:

• To lock rows, select the row below the row or rows that you want to keep visible
when you scroll.
• To lock columns, select the column to the right of the column or columns that you
want to keep visible when you scroll.

To lock both rows and columns, click the cell below and to the right of the rows and columns that
you want to keep visible when you scroll.
2. On the View tab, in the Window group, click the arrow below Freeze Panes.

3. Do one of the following:

40
 • To lock one row only, click Freeze Top Row.
• To lock one column only, click Freeze First Column.
• To lock more than one row or column, or to lock both rows and columns at the same
time, click Freeze Panes.

3.6.3 View side by side:-

You can quickly compare two worksheets in the same workbook or in different workbooks by
viewing them side by side.

View two worksheets in the same workbook side by side

1. On the View tab, in the Window group, click New Window.

2. On the View tab, in the Window group, click View Side by Side .
3. In the workbook window, click the worksheets that you want to compare.

3.6.4 Synchronous Scrolling:-

If you want to compare the data simultaneously, throughout the Excel files. To do that, there is an option
called Synchronous Scrolling, which is under View Side by Side. Just click Synchronous Scrolling. This
option lets you scroll both files at the same time.

NOTE this option is available only when View Side by Side is turned on.

When you scroll, you will see both windows are scrolling at the same time so that comparing the two is
quite simple.

Assignment:-
 Create five sheets workbook and named them First, Second, Third, Fourth, Fifth.
 Design a Worksheet having S.No, Name of Student, Marks obtained Column and filled
the data for at least 20 students. Find the Records having marks between 50 to 60.

41
 Unit 4: MULTIMEDIA

Minimum Level of learning

o Student should be able to create an album of CCA activity using movie maker.

In This Unit:-
4.1 Introduction to Multimedia
4.1.1 Definition
4.1.2 Uses of Multimedia
4.1.3 Hardware and Software required
4.2 Media Player
4.2.1 How to open and use
4.3 Sound recorder
4.3.1 How to open and use
4.4 Movie Maker
4.4.1 Inserting Image
4.4.2 Setting timeline
4.4.3 Publishing movie

4.1 Introduction to Multimedia:-

Multimedia has become an important part of any presentation. It has found a variety of applications right
from entertainment to education. The evolution of internet has also increased the demand for
multimedia content.
4.1.1 Definition:-
Multimedia is the media that uses multiple forms of information content and information
processing (e.g. text, audio, graphics, animation, video, interactivity) to inform or entertain the
user. Multimedia also refers to the use of electronic media to store and experience multimedia
content.

4.1.2 Uses of Multimedia:-

Multimedia finds its uses in various areas including advertisements, art, education, entertainment,
engineering, medicine, mathematics, business, scientific research and spatial, temporal
applications.

4.1.3 Hardware and Software required:-

Hardware required:-
A good multimedia system should have a Pentium 1.6 Ghz (or the one with similar capabilities)
onwards processor, at least 256 MB of RAM, 40 GB onwards hard disk drive, 1.44 MB Floppy drive,
17 inch onwards SVGA monitor, 32MB AGP card, 52 X CD-ROM drive, a 32 bit sound card, high
wattage sub-woofer speakers, 104 PS/2 keyboard, PS/2 mouse and 56K fax data voice modem. If
you wish you can add a CD-recorder, scanner, printer, digital camcorder and a video-capture card.

42
 Remember, there is no set rule to define the exact hardware combination of a good multimedia
computer. The combination is dependent on the nature and contents of the multimedia project
you are dealing with.

Software required
The basic tool set for building a multimedia project can be divided into five categories: Painting
and drawing tools, 3-D Modeling and animation tools, Image editing tools, Sound editing tools,
Animation Video Digital Movie tools. The software in your multimedia toolkit and your ability to
use it will determine the quality of your multimedia work.

4.2 Media Player:- Windows Media Player provides an intuitive, easy-to-use interface to play digital
media files, organize your digital media collection, burn CDs of your favorite music, rip music from CDs,
sync digital media files to a portable device, and shop for digital media content from online stores.

4.2.1 How to open and use:-

Open/Start Windows Media Player

To start Windows Media Player, click the Start button , click All Programs, and
then click Windows Media Player
Interface of window media player:-

43
 How to Play File:-
Go to File->Open then select the desired audio/ video file to play.

4.3 Sound recorder:-

You can use Sound Recorder to record a sound and save it as an audio file on your computer. You can
record sound from different audio devices, such as a microphone that's plugged into the sound card on
your computer. The types of audio input sources you can record from depend on the audio devices you
have and the input sources on your sound card.

4.3.1 How to open and use:-

To record audio with Sound Recorder

1. Make sure you have an audio input device, such as a microphone, connected to your computer.

2. Open Sound Recorder by clicking the Start button . In the search box, type Sound Recorder, and
then, in the list of results, click Sound Recorder.

3. Click Start Recording.

4. To stop recording audio, click Stop Recording.

44
 5. (Optional) If you want to continue recording audio, click Cancel in the Save As dialog box, and then
click Resume Recording. Continue to record sound, and then click Stop Recording.

6. Click the File name box, type a file name for the recorded sound, and then click Save to save the
recorded sound as an audio file.

4.4 Movie Maker:-

You can import photos and videos from many different kinds of cameras and devices to your PC using
Movie Maker. When you import photos and videos, they are copied from the camera or device to your
PC. After that, you can use them in your movies in Movie Maker, and they'll appear in Photo Gallery too.

Here are some devices that you might import photos or videos from:

• A digital camera or phone that's connected to your PC with a USB cable

• A Secure Digital (SD), mini SD or CompactFlash storage card that's in a card reader
• A data CD or DVD
• A video camera that records to an internal hard drive or flash storage card
• A videotape that's in a digital video (DV) camera or High-Definition Video (HDV) camera
If you have a webcam built into your PC or connected to your PC with a USB cable, you can record live
video from a webcam and add it to Movie Maker.

To use Windows Movie Maker, you have to download/installed the software from Microsoft website.
Windows Movie Maker 12 is included in Windows Essentials 2012 software. The website link is given
below:-
http://windows.microsoft.com/en-in/windows/movie-maker

After successful installation. Movie maker will come in all program list as shown below:-

45
Movie Maker Interface:-

4.4.1 Inserting Image:- The first step to making a movie in Movie Maker is to add videos
and photos. There are a few different ways to add them.

1. In Movie Maker, on the Home tab, in the Add group, click Add videos and photos.

2. In the Add Videos and Photos dialog box, open the folder that contains the photos or videos
that you want to add, select the video files and photos, and then click Open.
46
 To select multiple photos and videos, press and hold the Ctrl key, and then click each photo
and video you want.

4.4.2 Setting timeline:- For different images, you can set the time duration for which it can
display.
In Movie Maker, on the Edit tab, in the Adjust group, click Duration and set the desired duration
for particular image.

4.4.3 Publishing movie:-

After you're done editing your project in Movie Maker, you can share your movie with family and
friends by publishing it on the web.

To publish a movie on the web from Movie Maker

1. On the Home tab, in the Sharing group, click the website where you want to publish your movie.
2. Enter your user name and password, and then follow the steps to publish your movie.
OR alternatively you can save your movie in your computer by having many inbuilt format
using save movie option in Home Tab.

Assignment:-
Create an album of CCA activity using movie maker.

47
 Unit 5: MAKING A POWERFUL PRESENTATION

Minimum Level of learning

 Student should be able to select a perfect design for his/her PowerPoint file based on
project given by different subject teachers.
 Student should be able to apply different animation effects on different objects used in
slides.
 Student should be able to give proper setting for printing the document in page setup.

In this Unit:-
5.1 Design Menu
5.5.1 Slide Designs
5.2 Transition Menu
5.2.1 Different Effects on Slides
5.3 Animation Menu
5.3.1 Different Effects on Object
5.4 Viewing Presentation in Different ways
5.4.1 Managing Slides in the Slide Sorter View
5.4.2 Running a Presentation in the Slide Show View
5.5 Previewing and Printing a Presentation
5.5.1 Selecting Page Setup Options
5.5.2 Printing a Presentation
5.6 Showing presentation using Projector

Introduction:-
A PowerPoint presentation is made up of a series of slides that can contain charts, diagrams, pictures,
SmartArt diagrams, bulleted lists, eye-catching text, multimedia video and sound clips, and more.

PowerPoint 2007 provides a variety of professionally designed templates, themes, and style galleries to
help you create great-looking presentations.

To start PowerPoint 2007 from the Start Menu

• Click on the Start button, point to All Programs then Microsoft Office and click on Microsoft Office
PowerPoint 2007.
• The first screen that you will see a new blank presentation begins automatically with one slide.

48
5.1 Design Menu:- Sometimes we need to design your presentation slides and make them look
nice. You may present slides’ theme, such as change its color, font, and effect. Sometimes you may need
to changes slides’ background, page setup, and more. So you need to find out those slide designing
features before your modifying.
5.5.1 Slide Designs:-
Design tab is set and groups all slide design features. In Design tab, you can easily modify and
customize your slides’ theme, background, and more:

5.2 Transition Menu:-

The Transitions allow you to get creative with your slides. Adding transitions allows you to add a little flair
between the slides. Transitions are visual effects when moving from one slide to the next slide. For
example, you can make one slide dissolve slowly away as the next slide appears. You can get more

49
creative and make one slide push the old slide out or even use an effect that looks like doors opening to
your next slide.

5.2.1 Different Effects on Slides:-

If you click on the Animation tab, on the top of the ribbon, you will see that there are many different
transitions you can apply to one slide or to all slides at the same time. Just select the slide for your
transition and click on the transition effect. You even get a preview of what it will look like. Click on Apply
to All to add the transition to all slides at once.

5.3 Animation Menu:- Animations will allow you to add visual effects and movement to text,
Objects and graphics.

5.3.1 Different Effects on Object:-

To apply a built-in animation effect in Office PowerPoint 2007, do the following:

1. Select the text or object that you want to animate.

2. On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, select the animation effect that you
want from the Animate list.

50
Create and apply a custom animation effect to text or objects

You create custom animations in the Custom Animation task pane. The Custom Animation task
pane shows important information about an animation effect, including the type of effect, the
order of multiple effects in relation to each other, and a portion of the text of the effect.

5.4 Viewing Presentation in Different ways

5.4.1 Managing Slides in the Slide Sorter View:- In the Slide Sorter view, you see a miniature of
each slide. The Slide Sorter view not only gives you a great view of your presentation as a whole, but it
also lets you rearrange and hide your slides. If you wish to increase or decrease the size of the slides you
are reviewing, you can adjust the view by zooming in and out as necessary.

5.4.2 Running a Presentation in the Slide Show View:- After making your complete
presentation, you need to present it/run it.it can be easily done by Slide show Menu.

51
 You can click on “From Beginning” for running the slide show from first slide or you can click on
“From Current Slide” if you want to run the slide show from current slide.

5.5 Previewing and Printing a Presentation:-

Previewing a Presentation
The Print Preview feature lets you see how your PowerPoint slides will appear before you print
them. To use the PowerPoint Print Preview feature, choose Office— Print — Print Preview.

From the Print Preview screen, you can zoom in to examine the preview more closely by clicking
anywhere in the preview area.

5.5.1 Selecting Page Setup Options

The PowerPoint 2007 Page Setup group consists of a Slide Orientation control so you can display your
PowerPoint presentation in Landscape mode (the default) or Portrait mode. You should use Portrait mode
only if you intend to print the slides on transparency masters and project them with an overhead
projector, or present the slide show on a computer screen with a portrait orientation.

Click the Page Setup button in the Page Setup group to display the Page Setup dialog box. This dialog box
gives you extra control over your presentation’s page setup.

52
 Click the Page Setup button to open the Page Setup dialog box.

The following list describes the controls in this dialog box:

• Slides Sized For: This drop-down list lets you set the size of your slides based on how you plan
to present them. The most common is to present the slides on a standard computer screen, which
has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Other options on this drop-down list include different screen ratios,
suitable for wide-screen displays, standard sized paper, and even 35-mm slides. A Custom option lets
you set any width and height.

• Width: Set a custom width for your slides.

• Height: Set a custom height for your slides.

• Number Slides From: If your slides include numbers, this option lets you set the number for
the first slide. The default is 1.

• Orientation: Set the orientation to portrait (tall and skinny) or landscape (short and fat). You
can set the setting separately for your slides, handouts, and notes. The most common setting is for
the slides to use landscape orientation and the notes and handouts to use portrait.

5.5.2 Printing a Presentation

Printing a Presentation: - The simplest way to print your presentation is to print your slides on
regular paper.

Click on the OFFICE BUTTON then on PRINT to open the Print dialog.

53
5.6 Showing presentation using Projector:-
To configure Microsoft PowerPoint to work with a projector in presentation mode, follow these steps:

1. Open PowerPoint and select Slide Show from the menu at the top, then select the Set Up
Show option.
o If you are on a laptop, press the Fn key and F8 key simultaneously to enable your laptop's
secondary video output.

54
 2. In the Set Up Show options, select the second monitor choice under Display slide show on, i.e.
anything besides Primary Monitor.

3. Now select the check box for Show Presenter View. This will enable the presenter mode on the
monitor that is selected.

Run the presentation, your laptop screen should display an image with your slideshow and an area for
your presenter notes at the bottom; while the projector should display only the slideshow.
Assignment:-
 Create a Presentation, select a perfect design for your PowerPoint file based on project
given by different subject teachers.
 Apply different animation effects on different objects used in slides.
 Give proper setting for printing the document in page setup.

55
 Unit 6: INTERNET

Minimum Level of learning

 Student should be able to open educational websites and can copy a paragraph in their
PowerPoint Presentation.

In this Unit:-
6.1 Review of Internet
6.1.1 Introduction to Internet
6.1.2 Web Browsers
6.1.3 Websites
6.1.4 Search Engines
6.2 Exploring the different websites
6.2.1 KVS Website
6.2.2 Vidyalaya’s Website
6.2.3 Wikipedia
6.2.4 Edustrokes

6.1 Review of Internet:-

6.1.1 Introduction to Internet: - The Internet or simply the Net is a worldwide network of computer
networks. It is an interconnection of large and small networks around the globe.

The uses of the Internet

• Send/Receive e-mail messages.
• Send (upload) or receive (down load) files between computers.
• Participate in discussion groups, such as mailing lists and newsgroups.
• Surfing the web.
• Online Chat
• Video-conferencing
56
 • E-Commerce
• Social Networking

How to access the Internet?

• Many schools and businesses have direct access to the Internet using special high-speed
communication lines and equipment.
• Students and employees can access through the organization’s local area networks (LAN)
or through their own personal computers.
• Another way to access the Internet is through Internet Service Provider (ISP).

6.1.2 Web Browsers:-

• Once you have your Internet connection, then you need special software called a web browser
to access the Web.
• Web browsers are used to connect you to remote computers, open and transfer files, display
text and images.
• Web browsers are specialized programs.
• Examples of Web browser: Netscape Navigator (Navigator) and Internet Explorer, google
crome.

6.1.3 Websites:-
• The Web (World Wide Web) consists of information organized into Web pages containing text
and graphic images.
• It contains hypertext links, or highlighted keywords and images that lead to related
information.
• A collection of linked Web pages that has a common theme or focus is called a Web site.
• The main page that all of the pages on a particular Web site are organized around and link
back to is called the site’s home page.

6.1.4 Search Engines:-

• A number of search tools have been developed and available to you on certain Web sites
that provide search services to help you to find information.
• Examples:
 Yahoo  www.yahoo.com
 Google  www.google.com
 Ask.com  www.ask.com
 AltaVista  www.altavista.com
MSN WebSearch  www.search.msn.com

You can find information by two basic means.

• Search by Topic and Search by keywords.
 Search by Topic
You can navigate through topic lists

57
  Search by keywords
You can navigate by entering a keyword or phase into a search text box.

www.google.com in internet explorer web browser

6.2 Exploring the different websites:- After knowing information about the internet. Now
you can open any website and get the desired information from the website.
Opening a website requires internet connection in your computer.
Steps to open any website:-
1. Open any web browser installed on your computer example Internet Explorer, Google crome,
Mozilla Firefox etc.
2. Type the website address in URL space or if you don’t know the website name then you can
open any search engine and then find the address from it.
There are several websites that helps you to get information from the internet. Let try some important
websites
6.2.1 KVS Website:- KVS HQ NEW DELHI website is the important website of the Kendriya Vidyalaya
Sangathan which provide lots of information about the KVS like Important announcements, Management
information, Organization Chart, different circulars, admission, Fees, transfer, result analysis,
PIS(Personal Information System),Recruitments, Finance, RTI(Right to Information),Contacts etc..
To open KVS hq new delhi website, you have to type the URL http://kvsangathan.nic.in/ directly on web
browser or you can found the web address of KVS website by searching keyword ”KVS” in
www.google.com
Then you can open the different web links available in the website to get the desired information.

58
 6.2.2 Vidyalaya’s Website:-
Same like KVS HQ website, you can open your vidyalaya website also. Vidyalaya website consist
many information about your vidyalaya like: Important announcements, Exams information, Date
Sheet, Result Analysis, Staff details, TC information, Contacts, VMC details, Students Enrollments,
Students/Teachers achievers, Alumni, Photo Galley, Admission, Fee information etc. Ask your
teacher about the web address of your Vidyalaya and open it. Open the different web pages of the
website to get the desired information.

6.2.3 Wikipedia: - Wikipedia is a free encyclopedia, written collaboratively by the people

who use it. It is a special type of website designed to make collaboration easy, called a wiki.
You can open the Wikipedia by the web address https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Main_Page
In Wikipedia, you can search for anything for which you required information.

6.2.4 Edustrokes:- edustrokes is an educational website which provide interactive study

material for Science and Mathematics. This is an innovative and unique program makes you learn
important concepts in Mathematics and Science easily by using the medium of Sports.
You can open the following web links to use the content of edustrokes website:-
http://www.edustrokes.com
http://kv.edustrokes.com/

59
Assignment:-
 Open educational websites and copy paragraphs in their PowerPoint Presentation.

60
 SAMPLE PAPER FOR FA-1(40)
Q1. Multiple Choice Questions:- (1x5=5)
a) Which is the short key to copy the text
a. Alt+E b) Alt + F4 c)Ctrl+ C d) Ctrl+V
b) Micro soft word is a …………………………………
a. System software b) Application software c) Microsoft excel d)Non of them
c) The combination of table consist ?
a. Table & border b. Row & cell c. Row & Column d. None of these
d) To open a new MS word file which short key will you press?
a. Ctrl+O b) Ctrl + N c) Alt+ O d)Alt+N
e) Which features helps to inserts you to insert the contents of the clip board as text without any
formatting
a. Paste special b. Format Printer c. Page setup d. Style
b. Save document

Q2. Answer the following question (2x5=10)

a) What is the use of table in MS_word for displaying information?
b) Write Steps to create table using table templates with 9 row and 10 column
c) Write Steps to move text in Ms- word one page to another page?
d) What are the contents available in table menu?
e) How many cell , Row and Column are there in the table given below?

Q 3. Give the instruction to solve the following task. (3x5=15)

a. What instruction will you give to make a table as given below?

b. Write Steps to fill the color in table cell?

c. Write Steps to apply border style in a table?
d. What are the cell text alignments in a table?
e. What are the paragraph alignments?

Q 4 Answer the following question (2x5=10)

a. What do you mean paragraph in MS_word?
OR
Write the steps of inserting and deleting column.
b. Steps to select an entire document in MS_Word?
OR
What is page layout in MS_Word?

61
 SAMPLE PAPER FOR SA-1(60)
Q1 Multiple Choice Questions: - (1x10=10)
1. Which page size normally used to print by the people
a. A5 b) Legal c) A4 d) Letter
2. Which is not a MS_word page view .
a. Print layout b) Web layout c) Draft d)Normal
3. How many margin present by default in MS_ word?
a. 6 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5
4. What is the short key to copy the text
b. Alt+E b) Alt + F4 c)Ctrl+ C d)Ctrl+V
5. Which one the MS_word document page orientation.
b. Page Border b) Portrait c) Margin d) Print layout
6. Name the publishing movie software in windows operating system?
7. What do you mean publishing movie?
8. Write steps to copy a table in another MS-word file?
9. What are the hardware and software required to run multimedia software?
10. Microsoft excel is an/a …………………………………. software .(Application/system)

Q2. Answer the following questions:- (2x6=12)

a. What is multimedia software?
b. What is Microsoft word?
c. Write the Step to save the excel file.
d. What do you mean margin setting in word file?
e. What is sound recorder?
Q3. Answer to the following questions:- (3x6=18)
a. What step to be taken to apply border in a word.
b. What do you mean indentation in a word file?
c. What steps to be taken to type over the picture?
d. What steps to be taken to find and replace data in a given range of sheet?
e. What are the way to create a table in MS_word?
f. What hardware is required for sounder recorder? What to be taken for recording?

Q4. a. Answer to the following questions. (4x5=20)

62
 i. Write the steps to delete column B to E.
ii. What is the cell reference of mango, apple and school?
iii. Write the steps to delete column B.
iv. Steps to hide column G and H.

b. What are the uses of multimedia software? Give four multimedia software?
c. Answer to the following questions:-
I. Write the steps to add new sheet in MS_Excel file?
II. Write the steps to rename a sheet in MS_Excel file?
d. Answer to the following questions:-
I. Write the steps to open existing file in MS- Excel?
II. Write the Step to save the excel file .

63
 SAMPLE PAPER FOR FA3(40)
Q.1 Answer the following question:- (1x5=5)
I. Write the steps to insert image in slide?
II. Which two ways for inserting image in slide?
III. What are the views in MS_PowerPoint windows?
IV. How to add new slide in presentation.
V. Name the power point icon given below?

Q.2 Answer the following question (2x5=10)

I. Name any two types of slides in a presentation?
II. Write Steps to delete active slide in a presentation?
III. What do you mean transition in powerpoint?
IV. What step to insert an image as background for a slide?
V. Write the steps to hide slide back ground?
Q3. Write the instruction to solve the following task. (3x5=15)
a. Which key is used to run a presentation?
b. Steps to start presentation from current slide.
c. Steps to printing presentation?
d. What steps to be taken to play presentation in projector?
e. Name the location pointed in below screenshot in PowerPoint window?
3
1 2

6 10
Q4 Answer the following question (2x5=10)
a. Write Steps to apply all slide color background?
OR
Write Steps to add text box in a slide?
b. Write Steps to insert or add WordArt in a slide?
OR
How to play user sound in slide?

64
 SAMPLE PAPER FOR SA2(60)
Q.1 Answer the following questions:- (1x10=10)
a. Name Edustrokes web site?
b. Name two Transition effect in PowerPoint ?
c. What is the default web browser of windows operating system.
d. What is the full form of WWW?
e. What are the slide orientation in PowerPoint?
f. Write the steps to change the transition effect first in PowerPoint slide?
g. What is Microsoft Power Point ?
i. What is slide design in Microsoft PowerPoint?
j. Give an example of search engine.
k. Name any two web browser.

Q2. Answer the following question (2x6=12)

a. Write the stapes to apply one transition effect to all slides?

b. Write the steps to add text box in a slide?
c. What is animation in Microsoft Power Point?
d. Write two main advantages of internet?
e. Write the steps to apply slide design in one particular one slide?
f. What is Search Engine?

Q3. Answer to the following question. (3x6=18)

a. Write the steps to apply word art in your text?

b. What is the different viewing of slide presentation?
c. What do you mean websites in internet? Give two examples of website?
d. What is internet? What are its uses?
e. What do you mean by web browser?
f. What are the requirements on internet connection?

Q4. Answer to the following question. (4x5=20)

a. . What are the information available in your vidyalaya website. Suggest the way by which you
can explore your vidyalaya website?
b. How Edustrokes website helps you. How you can utilize its content.
c. What do you mean by Animation of an object in PowerPoint? Explain in details.
d. How Internet is useful to enhance your studies? Suggest some website and the way by which
you can enhance your studies.

65
 Patron
Shri C. Neelap
Deputy Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

Regional Co-ordination & Compilation

Shri D. Patle
Asstt. Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

School Co-ordination
Shri S. Sarkar
Principal, KV IOC,
Noonmati, Guwahati

Subject Expert
Shri Rajendra Shakyawal
PGT(CS),
KV IOC, Noonmati, Guwahati
 Table of Contents
.
1. Month wise Syllabus 1

2. Fundamental of Computer 2

3. Word Processing (MS Word) 18

4. Spreadsheet (MS Excel) 38

5. Advance features of MS PowerPoint. 59

6. Adobe Presenter 70

7. HTML 77

8. Internet and Networks 81

9. Sample Papers 91
SN Unit/Chapter Contents No. of periods
Quarter - April to June
1 Fundamental of Review & Brief history of computer, Basic components of
Computer computer, Different I/O Devices, Computer Language, Software
6
definition and its types, Computer Memory,
Different types of Printers.
2 Word Processing Header and footer, Formatting of paragraph, Mail merge, Envelop
6
(MS Word) and labels, Page column, Hyperlink, Drop cap.
Formative Assessment-1
Quarter - July to September
3 Spreadsheet (MS Table creating in MS Excel and implementation various Charts,
Excel) Cell reference in MS Excel, Sorting of data in MS Excel, Filtering
18
data in MS Excel, Conditional Formatting, Workbook and
worksheet, Protection of workbook and worksheet.
Formative Assessment-2 & Summative Assessment-1
Quarter - October to December
4 Advance features Inserting different objects (i.e. images, Word Arts, audio & video
of MS etc.), Transitions in slide. Custom Animation with text, Adobe 14
PowerPoint. Presenter.
5 HTML Introduction to HTML, Uses of HTML, HTML Tags, HEAD, TITLE,
3
BODY, Empty and Container Tags.
Formative Assessment-3
Quarter – January to March
6 Use of Internet. Overview of Internet, Intranet, Different types of websites, Web
Browsers, Opening of web pages and Web sites, Use of search
13
engine, Creation of an Email and using it, Advantages and
Disadvantages of Social Media sites, Networking and Networks.
Formative Assessment-4 & Summative Assessment-2

1
Chapter 1

Fundamental of Computer

Inside this chapter : Brief history of computer, Basic components of computer, Different I/O Devices,
Computer Language, Software definition and its types, Computer Memory, Different types of Printers.

A computer is an electronic device which consists of hardware and software.

Hardware components describe the physical parts of the computer and software
controls hardware and run the operating system, different programs & applications like
Microsoft Windows, Microsoft word, Microsoft Excel etc.

Review of brief history of Computer

1. The history of computers starts out about 2000 years ago in Babylonia (Mesopotamia),
at the birth of the abacus, a wooden rack holding two horizontal wires with beads
strung on them.
2. Blaise Pascal has credited the first digital computer
in 1642. The basic principle of his calculator is still
used today in water meters and modern-day
odometers.
3. Punched cards, which were first successfully used with computers in 1890 by Herman
Hollerith and James Powers. They developed devices
that could read the information that had been
punched into the cards automatically, without human
help.
4. Punch-card using computers created by International Business
Machines (IBM), Remington, Burroughs. These computers used
electromechanical devices in which electrical power provided
mechanical motion -- like turning the wheels of an adding
machine. Such systems included features to:
o feed in a specified number of cards automatically
o add, multiply, and sort

2
 5. In 1942, John P. Eckert, John W. Mauchly, and their
associates at the Moore school of Electrical Engineering
of University of Pennsylvania decided to build a high -
speed electronic computer to do the job. This machine
became known as ENIAC (Electrical Numerical
Integrator And Calculator) and it occupied the entire
thirty by fifty feet room.
6. ENIAC was therefore about 1,000 times faster than the
previous generation of relay computers. ENIAC used
18,000 vacuum tubes about 1,800 square feet of floor
space, and consumed about 180,000 watts of electrical
power.
7. In 1950 magnetic core memory and the Transistor -
Circuit Element of digital computers. RAM capacities
increased from 8,000 to 64,000 words in commercially
available machines by the 1960s, with access times of 2
to 3 MS (Milliseconds).
8. In the 1980's manufacturing of semiconductor chips
was done, The Intel and Motorola Corporations were very competitive into the 1980s,
although Japanese firms were making strong economic
advances, especially in the area of memory chips. By the
late 1980s, some personal computers were run by
microprocessors that, handling 32 bits of data at a time.

3
Basic components of Computer

Input Unit
The devices which are used to input the data and programs in the computer are known
as "Input Devices". Input unit accepts instructions and data from the user and converts these
instructions and data in computer acceptable format which are sent to computer system for
processing.

Keyboard: Keyboard is most common input device. The data and

instructions are input by typing on the keyboard. The message typed on
the keyboard reaches the memory unit of a computer. It is connected to
a computer via a cable. Apart from alphabet and numeral keys, it has
other function keys for performing different functions.

Mouse: It is a pointing device. The mouse is rolled over the mouse pad,
which in turn controls the movement of the cursor in the screen. You can
click, double click or drag the mouse. Its sensor notifies the speed of its
movements to the computer, which in turn moves the cursor/pointer on the
screen.

4
Scanner: Scanners are used to enter information directly in to the
computer memory. This device works like a Xerox machine. The
scanner converts any type of printed or written information including
photographs into digital pulses, which can be manipulated by the

computer.

Track Ball: Track ball is similar to the upside- down design of the mouse.
The user moves the ball directly, while the device itself remains
stationary. The user spins the ball in various directions to effect the
screen movements.

Light Pen: This is an input device which is used to draw lines or figures on
a computer screen. It is touched to the CRT screen where it can detect
raster on the screen as it passes.

Optical Character Reader (OCR): It is a device which detects alpha

numeric characters printed or written on a paper. The text which is to
be scanned is illuminated by a low frequency light source. The light is
absorbed by the dark areas but reflected from the bright areas. The
reflected light is received by the photocells.

Bar Code Reader: This device reads bar codes and coverts them into
electric pulses to be processed by a computer. A bar code is nothing but
data coded in form of light and dark bars.

Voice Input Systems: It converts spoken words to machine language

form. A microphone is used to convert human speech into electric signals.
The signal pattern is then transmitted to a computer when it is compared
to a dictionary of patterns that have been previously placed in a storage
unit of computer. When a close match is found, the word is recognized.

Digital Camera: It converts graphics directly into digital form. An electronic

chip in used in camera, when light falls, on the chip though the lens, it
converts light waves into electrical waves.

5
Output Unit
Output Device produces the final results of computer into human understandable form.
Output unit accepts the results produced by the computer which are in coded form and it
converts these coded results to human readable form.

Monitor: The monitor looks like a television screen. It is also called

Visual Display Unit (VDU) and it is used to display information from the
computer. There are coloured as well as black and white monitors. The
monitor displays text and graphics. Based on the technology used,
monitor is classified into two types. They are Cathode Ray Tube (CRT)
monitor and Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) monitor.

Printer: A printer is used for transferring data from the computer to

the paper. There are colour printers as well as black and white
printers. The different types of printers are Dot Matrix Printers, Inkjet
Printer and Laser Printers.

Dot matrix Printer Inkjet Printer Laser Printer

6
 Types of Printers

Dot Matrix Printer Inkjet Printer Laser Printer

Prints characters in the Prints fully formed Prints fully formed characters.
form of dots. characters.

Speed: 200-540 Speed: 4-8 pages per Speed: 4-20 pages per minute.
characters per second. minute.

Not very expensive. Moderately priced. Expensive.

Touch Screen: A touch screen is a display screen that is sensitive to human touch. It allows
the user to interact with the computer by touching pictures or words
displayed on the screen. Touch screens are used to display the output
information on the screen as well as to give input by touching the words
or pictures on the screen. Thus it is an input/output device. Touch
screens are normally used when information has to be accessed with
minimum effort.

Plotter: Plotter is very large in size and is used to produce graphical

output on papers. It uses single or multi color pens to draw pictures as
blue print, posters etc.

Storage Unit

The data and instructions that are entered into the computer
system through input units have to be stored inside the computer
before the actual processing starts. Similarly, the results produced
by the computer after processing must also be kept somewhere
inside the computer system before being passed on to the output
units. The Storage Unit or the primary / main storage of a
computer system is designed to do all these things. It provides space for storing data and
instructions, intermediate results and for the final results.

7
Central Processing Unit (CPU)

The main unit inside the computer is the CPU. This unit is responsible for all events
inside the computer. It consists of Control Unit and Arithmetic and Logic unit. The CPU is the
brain of any computer system. In a human body, all major
decisions are taken by the brain and the other parts of the
body function as directed by the brain. Similarly, in a
computer system, all major calculations and comparisons are
made inside the CPU and it activates and controls the
operations of other units like Hard disk, Printer etc. of a computer system.

Arithmetic and Logic Unit (ALU): The arithmetic and logic unit (ALU) is the part where actual
computations take place. It consists of circuits that perform arithmetic operations (e.g.
addition, subtraction, multiplication, division over data received from memory and capable to
compare numbers (less than, equal to, or greater than etc).
Control Unit: The control unit acts as a central nervous system for the components of the
computer. It manages and coordinates the entire computer system. It obtains instructions from
the program stored in main memory, interprets the instructions, and issues signals that cause
other units of the system to execute them. the control unit directs and controls the activities of
the internal and external devices.

Computer Language
A language is defined as the medium of expression of thoughts. All the human beings in
this world communicate with each other by a language. Similarly, computer also needs some
expression medium to communicate with others.
A computer follows the instructions given by the programmer to perform a specific job.
To perform a particular task, programmer prepares a sequence of instructions, known as
program. A program written for a computer is known as Software.

1)First Generation Languages -1GLs (Machine language):When the human being stared
programming, the computer the instruction were given to it in a language that it could easily
understand is called as machine language. The binary language of 1 and 0 is known as
Machine language. Any instruction in this language is given in the form of 1s and 0s.

8
2) Second Generation Languages- 2GLs (Assembly Language):The first language similar to
English was developed in 1950 which was known as Assembly Language or Symbolic
Programming Languages. An assembly language is a low-level programming language for
microprocessors (CPU) and other programmable devices.

3) Third Generation Languages- (3GLs ) (High Level Languages):The languages developed

which were nearer to the English language in 1960 were known as High Level languages. The
different high level languages are FORTRAN, COBOL, BASIC, PASCAL, PL-1 and many others.

4) Fourth Generation Languages- (4GLs) (Query languages):The 3GLs are procedural in

nature means HOW the problem get programmed and the procedures require the knowledge
of HOW the problem will be solved. .4GLs are non-procedural that focuses on WHAT of the
problem is coded means ‘WHAT is required’. The main aim of 4GLs is to be cut down on
developed and maintenance time and making it easier for users. Example of 4GL is SQL
(Structured Query Language).

5) Fifth Generation Language-(5GLs):The 5GLs are designed to make the computer

“Smarter”. The use of 5GLs language touches on expert systems, computerized collection of
the knowledge of many human experts, artificial intelligence and independently smart
computer systems. Examples of 5GL are Prolog, OPS5 and Mercury.

Graphical User Interface (GUI) based languages: These are the languages which use a
Graphical User Interface to write, compile & execute the program with ease. Some of them are-

Visual Basic
Visual C++
C# (Pronounced as C sharp)
Visual Basic.NET
Visual Basic 2005

Software
Computer software also called program is a set of instructions that directs a computer
to perform specific tasks or operations. Computer software consists of computer programs and
libraries.

9
System software: Software that directly operates the computer hardware to provide basic
functionality needed by users and other software and to provide a platform for running
application software. System software includes:
Operating system (OS): Operating system manages resources of computer system like
memory, CPU, hard disk, printer etc. also provides an interface between user and
computer system & provides various services to other software.
Language Processor & Device drivers: All the devices like mouse, keyboard, modem
etc needs at least one corresponding device driver. A device driver is a program that
controls a device. A language processor is a hardware device designed or used to
perform tasks, such as processing program code to machine code. Language processors
are found in languages such as Fortran and COBOL

Application software: Software that performs special functions or provides entertainment

functions beyond the basic operation of the computer itself. There are many different types of
application software.
General purpose: Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, MS PowerPoint, Photoshop etc.
Customized: Invoice Management System, Airline Reservation System etc.
Utilities: Antivirus, Memory tester, Disk partitioning and Disk defragmenter etc.

Computer Memory:
A memory is just like a human brain. It is used to store data and instructions. Computer
memory is the storage space in computer where data is to be processed and instructions
required for processing are stored.

10
Memory is primarily of three types
Cache Memory
Primary Memory or Main Memory
Secondary Memory

Cache Memory: Cache memory is a very high speed

semiconductor memory which can speed up CPU. It acts as
a buffer between the CPU and main memory. It is used to
hold those parts of data and program which are most
frequently used by CPU. The parts of data and programs are
transferred from disk to cache memory by operating system from where CPU can access them.
Advantages
The advantages of cache memory are as follows:
• Cache memory is faster than main memory.
• It consumes less access time as compared to main memory.
• It stores the program that can be executed within a short period of time.
• It stores data for temporary use.

Disadvantages
The disadvantages of cache memory are as follows:
• Cache memory has limited capacity.
• It is very expensive.

Primary Memory (Main Memory): Primary memory is also

known as main memory. It holds only those data and
instructions on which computer is currently working. It has
limited capacity and data is lost when power is switched off. It is
generally made up of semiconductor device.
Characteristics of Main Memory
• These are semiconductor memories
• It is known as main memory.
• Usually volatile memory.
• Data is lost in case power is switched off.
• Faster than secondary memories.

11
 • A computer cannot run without primary memory.
Primary memory can be divided into RAM (Random Access Memory) and ROM (Read Only
Memory).

RAM ROM

Random Access Memory. Read Only Memory.

It is Volatile or temporary memory. It is Non Volatile or permanent memory

Data gets erased when power supply off. Data stored permanently.

Faster memory. Slow memory.

It is used in the normal operations of a A ROM chip is used primarily in the start-up
computer after starting up and loading process of a computer.
the operating system.

Secondary Memory
It is also known as external memory or non-volatile memory. It is slower than main
memory. These are used for storing data or information permanently. For example: hard disk,
CD-ROM, DVD etc.
Characteristic of Secondary memory
• These are magnetic and optical memories
• It is non-volatile memory which is used for storage of data in a computer.
• Data is permanently stored even if power is switched off.
• Computer may run without secondary memory.
• Slower than primary memories.

12
Printers
Printers are output devices which are used to prepare permanent output on paper.
Types of Printers

Printers can be divided into two main categories:

Impact Printers: It uses hammers or pins strike against a ribbon and paper to print the text.
This mechanism is known as electro-mechanical mechanism. They are of two types.
Character Printer
Line Printer
Character Printer: It prints only one character at a time. It has relatively slower speed. e.g. Dot
matrix printers.
Dot Matrix Printer: It prints characters as combination of
dots. These have a matrix of pins on the print head of the
printer which form the character. There is a carbon
between the pins & the paper. The words get printed on

the paper when the pin strikes the carbon. There are generally 9
or 24 pins.
Line Printer The line printer is an impact computer printer that prints
one entire line of text at a time. It is mostly associated with unit record
equipment and the early days of digital computing, but the technology is
still in use.
Non-Impact Printers: There printers use non-Impact technology such as ink-jet or laser
technology. There printers provide better quality of output at higher speed. These printers are
of two types:
Ink-Jet Printer: It prints characters by spraying patterns of ink on the
paper from a nozzle or jet. It prints from nozzles having very fine holes,
from which ink is pumped out to create various letters and shapes.

13
Laser Printer: It utilizes a laser beam to produce an image on a drum. The light of the laser
alters the electrical charge on the drum wherever it hits. The drum is then
rolled through a reservoir of toner, which is picked up by the charged
portions of the drum. Finally, the toner is transferred to the paper through a
combination of heat and pressure. They are much quieter than dot-matrix.
They are also relatively fast. The speed of laser printers ranges from about 4 to 20 pages of
text per minute (ppm).

14
 WORKSHEET
Identify the following peripherals as INPUT device or OUTPUT device.
1. Monitor
2. Keyboard
3. Scanner
4. Laser Printer
5. Mouse
6. Speakers
7. Digital Camera
Fill in the blank with the correct answer from the box. Some may be used more than
once or not at all.
CPU BIOS power supply hard drive network card
Motherboard RAM USB Port ROM video card
1. I connect computers and allow them to talk to each other.
2. I wake up the computer and remind it what to do.
3. I am the brain of the computer.
4. Information is stored on my magnetic cylinders.
5. I hold all of the other circuit boards.
6. I handle the graphics that are displayed on the monitor.
7. I am the type of port used by flash drives

Fill in the blanks with the vocabulary words from the box. Use each word only once.
information flash drive CD primary DVD secondary
Windows operating system graphics upgraded user friendly
1. ________________________ memory is stored on chips located on the motherboard.
2. _________________________memory is stored on the hard drive.
3. A _______________________can hold information greater than a CD or DVD.
4. A _______________________usually holds up to 650 to 700 MB.
5. A _______________________holds even more information at least 7 GB.
6. The purpose of storage in a computer is to hold ____________________or data.

15
7. A computer that is easy to operate is called
8. is the most common operating system for PCs.
9. Operating systems are constantly being as technology advances.
10.A Graphical User Interface (GUI) uses to help the user navigate within
the computer system.

Label the parts of the Computer System correctly.

Solve the crosswords using the words from the lesson

O M

P T R
C U
T M M Y

K B D
A A C S

16
Match the following

1 CD a Impact printer

2 Laser printer b Output device

3 Dot matrix printer c Primary memory

4 Abacus d Non-Impact printer

5 ROM e Input device

6 Monitor f System software

7 RAM g Read only memory

8 Mouse h Application software

9 Operating system i Babylonia

10 MS Word j Optical media

17
Chapter 2

Word Processing (MS Word)

Inside this chapter : Header and footer, Formatting of paragraph, Mail merge, Envelop and labels, Page
column, Hyperlink, Drop cap.

Microsoft word or MS-Word (often called word) is a graphical word processing program
by Microsoft Corporation. The purpose of the MS Word is to allow the users to type and save
documents. Similar to other word processors, it has various helpful tools to make documents.

How to start MS Word

Click on start menu and find Microsoft Office ->Microsoft Word 2010

18
 You will see the application window of MS Word as below

After starting MS Word, you will see the menu bar items as below

Working with Headers and Footers

Headers and footers can help keep longer documents organized and make them easier
to read. Text entered in the header or footer will appear on each page of the document. Let us
see a demonstration.

1. Click on Insert menu

19
 2. Find Header and Footer

3. Click on Header and select Blank (Three Columns) option

The Design tab will appear on the Ribbon, and the header or footer will appear in the
document.
Here you can place Date & Time, Page number, Picture Clip Art and other desired
information.
When you have finished editing, click Close Header and Footer in the
Design tab, or hit the Esc key.
After you close the header or footer, it will still be visible, but it will be locked. To edit it again,
just double-click anywhere on the header or footer margin and it will become unlocked for
editing.

To insert the date or time into a header or footer:

1. Double-click anywhere on the header or footer to unlock it. The Design tab will
appear.
2. From the Design tab, click the Date & Time command.
3. Select a date format in the dialog box that appears.
4. Place a check mark in the Update Automatically box
if you would like it to always reflect the current date.
Otherwise, it will not change when the document is
opened at a later date.
5. Click OK. The date and time will appears in the
document.

20
Paragraph
MS Word includes many features designed to assist you in placing text on the page just
the way you want it. You can align text left to right using tabs or alignment options, or you can
adjust your text vertically using line spacing options. Following are some of the available
paragraph formatting choices.
Aligning Text:
Alignment arranges the text to line up at one or both margins, or in center between the
margins. Alignment applies to entire paragraphs. You can align text to the left, right, or center,
or you can justify your text, which means that the text becomes evenly spaced across the page
from the left margin to the right margin. Apply alignment options by selecting the text you
want to align, then choosing Home > Paragraph and clicking one of the following alignment
buttons:

• Align Text Left: The text aligns evenly at the left margin. This is the default choice.
• Center: The text centers evenly between the left and right margins.
• Align Text Right: The text aligns along the right document margin.
• Justify: The text fills with micro spaces so it aligns evenly on both the left and right
margins.
Following picture illustrates a document with text matching each alignment option.

21
Adding Paragraph Borders
Word includes borders that you can apply to any size block of text, which draw the
reader’s eye to specific areas for a “quick read.”
A border can cover the entire area or be any combination of lines around the text, such
as above and/or below the text. Select the text you want bordered and choose Home >
Paragraph.
Click the drop-down arrow next to the Borders button, which displays a list of options
like the one you see in following picture. Choose the border option you want.

Shading Text
Shading helps you distinguish headlines and important passages, such as sidebars, by
creating a screen, which is typically light gray shading against the standard black text.
Click anywhere in the paragraph you want shaded and choose Home > Paragraph >
Shading. Choose a color from the resulting Shading gallery, as shown in following picture.
Adding dark blue shading caused Word to change the font color to white.

22
 If you want to add a shading pattern ranging from a light 5%
shade to patterns, such as diagonal stripes or polka dots, you can
choose Home > Paragraph, and then click the Borders drop-down
arrow. From the list, select Borders and Shading, which then displays
the Borders and
Shading dialog box.

Click the Shading

tab then click the Fill drop-down arrow to select a fill color. Choices
are available in themes or standard colors. You can then click the
Style drop-down list to select a pattern.

23
Indenting Text
Typically, text runs between the left and right margins, but you may want to indent
particular paragraphs. Click anywhere in the paragraph you want to indent, and then choose
Home > Paragraph > Increase Indent. Each click of the Increase Indent button indents the text
one-half inch from the left margin. Click the Decrease Indent button to move the text back one-
half inch.
If you want to indent from the right margin or you want to manually set how much
indentation Word applies, you can use the Format Paragraph dialog box. Click the Paragraph
Dialog Box Launcher, which displays the Paragraph dialog box shown in following picture.

Click the spinner arrows for the Left or the Right text boxes to specify the number of
inches to indent the left and right edge of the paragraph. The Preview box at the bottom
shows the effects of your settings. Optionally, click the Special dropdown list and select an
indenting option:
• First line: This option indents only the first line of the paragraph and leaves the rest of
the paragraph even with the left margin.
• Hanging: This option indents all lines except the first line of the paragraph.
Click OK after you finish making selections. Word applies the paragraph indentation settings
you selected.
Another way to control indention is by dragging the indentation icons on the ruler:
If you don’t see the ruler, choose View > Show > Ruler.
Left Indent Hanging Indent First Line Indent Right Indent

24
Mail Merge
Mail merge is a very important tool which allows you to create form letters, mailing
labels, and envelopes by linking a main document to a set of data or data source. The main
document is linked to the data source by common fields of data, called merge fields.
For example, in a form letter, your main document would be the letter informing the
parents to be called for a parent teacher meeting. The data source is where the fields of
information on each parent receiving the letter are located. The data source would contain
names, addresses, phone number etc.
If you were printing envelopes or address labels, the main document would be the
envelopes or the sheet with labels on it; the data source would be the addresses that are to be
placed on these envelopes or labels of sheets.
When you are performing a Mail Merge, you will need a Word document (you can start
with an existing one or create a new one) and a recipient list, which is typically an Excel
workbook.
Exploring Mail Merge practically:
1. Open an existing Word document, or create a new
one.
2. Click the Mailings tab.
3. Click the Start Mail Merge command.
4. Select Step by Step Mail Merge Wizard.
The Mail Merge task pane appears and will guide you through the six main steps to
complete a merge. The following is an example of how to create a form letter and merge the
letter with a recipient list.
Step 1:
1. Choose the type of document you want to create. In this
example, select Letters.
2. Click Next: Starting document to move to Step 2.
Step 2:
1. Select Use the current document.
2. Click Next: Select recipients to move to Step 3.

25
Step 3:
Now you'll need an address list so Word can automatically place each address into the
document. The list can be in an existing file, such as an Excel workbook, or you can type a new
address list from within the Mail Merge
Wizard.
1. From the Mail Merge task pane,
select Use an existing list, and then
click Browse.
2. Locate your file in the dialog box
(you may have to navigate to a
different folder), then click Open.
3. If the address list is in an Excel

workbook, select the worksheet that

contains the list, and then click OK.

4. In the Mail Merge Recipients dialog

box, you can check or uncheck each
recipient to control which ones are used in the merge. When you're done, click OK to
close the dialog box.

5. From the Mail Merge task pane, click Next: Write your letter to move to Step 4.
Step 4:
Now you are ready to write your letter. When it's printed, each copy of the letter will basically
be the same, except the recipient data like the name and address will be different on each one.

26
You'll need to add placeholders for the recipient data so Mail Merge knows exactly where to
add the data. If you're using Mail Merge with an existing letter, make sure the file is open.

To insert recipient data:

1. Place the insertion point in the document where you want
the information to appear.
2. Select Address block, Greeting line, Electronic postage, or
More items from the task pane.

3. Depending on your selection, a dialog box may appear with

various options. Select the desired options, then click OK.

4. A placeholder appears in your document (for example: «AddressBlock»).

5. Repeat these steps each time you need to enter information from your data record.
6. From the Mail Merge task pane, click Next: Preview your letters to move to Step 5.
For some letters, you'll only need to add an Address block and Greeting line. Sometimes,
however, you may want to place recipient data within the body of the letter to further
personalize it.
Step 5:
1. Preview the letters to make sure information from the recipient list appears correctly in
the letter. You can use the left and right scroll arrows to view each document.

27
 2. Click Next: Complete the merge to move to Step 6.

Step 6:
1. Click Print to print the letters.
2. The Merge to Printer dialog box opens. Click All, then click OK.

3. The Print dialog box will appear. Adjust the print settings if
needed, then click OK.

28
Envelops and Labels

There are times when you may need to print several envelopes that have the same
delivery address, or you may need to keep an envelope on file for future use. The developers
at Word provided the capability to add an envelope to your current document, but not to
create a new document that contains just an envelope.
Let’s see how to create and use envelopes and labels
1. Open an existing document that contains
the address you want to use on your
envelope.
2. Highlight the address and copy it to the
Clipboard by pressing Ctrl+C.
3. Create a new document.
4. Display the Mailings tab of the ribbon.
5. Click Envelopes in the Create group.
Word displays the Envelopes and Labels
dialog box.
6. Make sure the Envelopes tab is selected.
7. Place the insertion point in the Delivery Address area.
8. Press Ctrl+V to paste the address you copied in step 2.
9. Using the Options button you can change the orientation and formatting.
10. Click on the Add to Document button. Your envelope is ready

Your envelope is ready and it can be saved & printed.

29
Labels
As I mentioned in the Envelopes section, the envelopes and labels feature can be found
in the same place: the Mailings tab.

This time, we are going to click Labels:

There are two types of labels you can print: pages of labels containing the same address, or
pages of labels where each label contains a different address.
Labels with the same address (return address labels)
1. Open Word and click Mailings on the menu line. Then click Labels on the ribbon.
2. In the "Print" section of the Labels window (not the Print button at the bottom), choose
"full page of the same labels."
3. Click the Options button at the bottom of the window. Select the product number from
the list, and click OK.
4. Still on the Labels window, type the address in the address box. To change font
properties, highlight the address, right-click, and click Font. Make your changes, and
click OK.
5. Still on the Labels window, click the New Document button at the bottom. A Word
document will appear containing the labels.

30
 Your labels with same address are ready and it can be saved & printed.

Labels with different addresses (Mailing labels)

First we will create the list of different addresses so open a new blank document and click
mailings on the menu line .

1. Enter few addresses for address list.------

2. Press Ok and Save the list to Desktop.
3. Start Mail Merge from the ribbon, and
click Labels.

4. Click Select Recipients and choose "Use

Existing List…” and select the address file
which you have prepared in step 4, click
Open button.

31
Now, Type “To” in the Label and click on Mailing tab -> Insert Merge Fields->Title.
Repeat this step to insert other Fields, like
First_Name, Last_Name. Now copy these
Inserted fields to other label (after <<Next
Record>>)
Finally, your window should be as below

5. Now, Click on Preview Results button

Your labels with different addresses are ready, save this document.

32
Page Column

Columns are used in many types of documents, but they are most commonly used in
newspapers, magazines, academic journals, and newsletters. Columns are also used in your
NCRT Textbooks. In this lesson, you will learn how to insert columns into a document and
create column breaks.

Inserting Columns
Columns and column breaks can improve your document's organization and increase its
readability. They also allow you to utilize all of the available space on the page.
How to add columns?
1. Select the text you want to format.
2. Click the Page Layout menu tab.
3. Click the Columns command. A drop-down menu will appear (as shown below).

4. Select the number of columns

you want to insert. The text will then format into columns.

33
If you want to remove the columns, click the Columns command and
select One for the number of columns.

Hyperlink
A hyperlink is a word, phrase, or image that you can click on to
jump to a new document or a new section within the current
document. Hyperlinks are found in nearly all Web pages, allowing
users to click their way from page to page. Hypertext is text with
hyperlinks.
There are two ways that you can insert a hyperlink in Word 2010.
Using the first method, you type out the text for the link then select it and click the
Insert tab, then click the Hyperlink command in the Links group.
In the Insert Hyperlink window that opens, you can type in the website URL
into the address box if the link is to a website. (as shown below)

after pressing OK button you will see the text appers blue and underlined. Your
hyperlink is ready. Click on the link see the result.-----------
However, you could also link to the following:
• An existing file on your computer
• A location in the current document
• A new document
• An email address
Each of the above options can be used by clicking on its
corresponding button on the left of the Insert Hyperlink
window.

34
Drop Cap
A drop cap is a large capital letter at the beginning of a text block that has the depth of
two or more lines of regular text.

Let’s see how you can do it. Open a document Word document and select the letter
you want to insert as drop cap. Click on the "Insert"
tab, and in the "Text" group you can find "Drop Cap"
button. Click it, and hold the mouse pointer over your
choice to see a preview in your document.

The steps to decide the size and modify the drop cap are the same as the steps.

35
 WORKSHEET

Formatting, labels, Mailings, header, Ribbon, Insert, Word processing

Answer the following questions.

1. …………is the act of creating, editing and producing a text document.
2. The ………….provides access to commands which are grouped together into tabs according
to the tasks you perform in Word.
3. The ……….tab contains the pages, Tables, Illustrations, Links, Header and Footer,
15. The ……….tab consists of the Create, Start Mail Merge, Write and Insert Fields, Preview
Results and Finish groups.
4………………..is the act of customizing a document to fit your needs by adjusting pieces of
the document, such as page layout and design.
5. A ……….is text which is printed at the top of each page of a document.
6 Microsoft Word allows you to easily create envelopes and ………..by using Create group on
the Mailings tab.

Lab Assignment / Project:

1. Design a Mark Sheet of your class friends by using Mail Merge.
Hint: Use MS Word for Mark Sheet Display and MS Excel for Data.(see following
pictures)

36
This way you can create a Marksheet with ease.

Solve the crosswords using the words from the lesson

D
I D E T
O C H
D
E V L P
A L M R E
P R
B N
I
L
K

37
Chapter 3

Spreadsheet (MS EXCEL)

Inside this chapter : Table creating in MS Excel and implementation various Charts, Cell reference in MS
Excel, Sorting of data in MS Excel, Filtering data in MS Excel, Conditional Formatting, Workbook and
worksheet, Protection of workbook and worksheet.

Microsoft Excel is a powerful spread sheet application that is perfect for maintaining
long lists of data, budgets, sales figures and other data. In this chapter you will learn some
important and interesting features of Excel like Table, Cell reference, inbuilt functions, sorting
of data etc. Let’s discuss these features one by one.
Creating a bar or column chart
To learn how to create a Column and Bar chart in Excel, let's use a simple example of
marks secured by some students in Science and Maths that we want to show in a chart format.
Note that a column chart is one that presents your data in vertical columns. A bar chart is very
similar in terms of the options you have, but presents your data in horizontal bars. The steps
below take you through creating a column chart but you can also follow them if you need to
create a bar chart.
Preparing chart data
The table below shows the data we want to chart. It is important that your data be
presented correctly in order to create a good looking chart.

Creating your column chart

Once your data has been prepared correctly, you are ready to create your chart. This is a
quick process, but it does involve a number of steps:
• First select your data, making sure that you include all of the data that is to be included
in the chart.

38
 → In our example above, that means selecting the range of cells from B5:D13.
→ It's important to remember to include the row headings if you want to use those
values as axis labels on your finished chart.
• Next, click Insert in the menu. The ribbon will change, and will include a number of
chart options(as shown below)

• In our case we are creating a Column chart and Bar

chart, so click the Column button first. The following
options will then be displayed. As you can see, there are
many options available. Select 3D Clustered Column
Chart. We can change it to one of the other chart types
later if we decide that this one doesn't suit our
requirements.
Once you select a chart type, Excel will automatically
create the chart and insert it onto your worksheet.

Now again select the data (cells from B5:D13) and this time select 3D Clustered Column
Chart in Bar chart option and your Bar chart will be ready.

39
 • Note the following points about this chart:
→ Excel has automatically put labels on an angle to fit neatly into the space
available.
→ The legend to the right of the chart contains the column heading from our
spreadsheet. You can change them by editing the headings in our data table.
→ Excel has chosen these colours based on a default theme. You can change the
theme if you need to, and the colours will change automatically. You can also
override the colours manually if you need to.
→ There is no title on the chart by default. You can add one manually, or choose a
chart layout that includes one.

Absolute and Relative references in excel formula

You can use three types of cell references in Excel formulas: relative, absolute, and
mixed. Using the correct type of cell reference in formulas ensures that they work as expected
when you copy them to another location in the worksheet. Formulas and functions are at their
most useful when using references, so you need to understand them.
Relative reference: Excel is dynamic when it comes to cell addresses. If you have a cell with a
formula that references a different cell's address and you copy the formula from the first cell
to another cell, Excel updates the cell reference inside the formula. Try an example:
1. In cell B2, enter 100.
2. In cell C2, enter =B2*2.
3. Press Enter. And you will see that Cell C2 returns the value 200.
4. Now Select cell C2.
5. Press Ctrl+C or click the Copy button on the Home tab.
6. Click cell C3.

40
 7. Press Ctrl+V or click the Paste button on the Home tab.
8. If you see a moving marquee around cell C2, press the Esc key.
Cell C3 should be the active cell, but if it is not, just click it once on C3. Look at the
Formula bar. The contents of cell C3 are =B3*2, and not the =B2*2 that you copied.

What happened? Excel assumed that if a formula in cell C2 references the cell B2 one
cell to the left then the same formula put into cell C3 is supposed to reference cell B3 also one
cell to the left. Relative references adjust when you copy a formula.
By default, Excel uses relative reference. Let’s see another example. See the formula in cell
D2 below. Cell D2 references (points to) cell B2 and cell C2. Both references are relative.

1. Select cell D2, click on the lower right corner of cell D2 and drag it down to cell D5.

Cell D3 references cell B3 and cell C3. Cell D4 references cell B4 and cell C4. Cell D5
references cell B5 and cell C5. In other words: each cell references its two neighbours on the
left.
Absolute cell reference: Sometimes you don't want relative addressing but rather absolute
addressing: making a cell reference fixed to an absolute cell address so that it doesn't change

41
when the formula is copied. In an absolute cell reference, a dollar sign ($) precedes both the
column letter and the row number. See the following example
1. To create an absolute reference to cell H3, place a $ symbol in front of the column letter
and row number of cell H3 ($H$3) in the formula of cell E3.

2. Now we can quickly drag this formula to the other cells.

The reference to cell H3 is fixed (when we drag the formula down and across). As a result, the
correct lengths and widths in inches are calculated.
Mixed reference: You can also have a mixed reference in which the column is absolute and
the row is relative or vice versa. To create a mixed reference, you use the dollar sign in front of
just the column letter or row number. Here are some examples:
Cell Reference Types
Reference Type Formula After copying the Formula
Relative =A1 Both the column letter A and the row number 1 can change.
Absolute =$A$1 The column letter A and the row number 1 does not change.
Mixed =$A1 The column letter A does not change. The row number 1 can change.
Mixed =A$1 The column letter A can change. The row number 1 does not change.

42
Built in functions
MS Excel has many built in functions which we can use in our formula. To see all the
functions by category choose Formulas Tab » Insert Function. Then Insert function Dialog
appears from which we can choose function.

Some important functions of excel by categories

• Text Functions
o LOWER : Converts all characters in a supplied text string to lower case
o UPPER : Converts all characters in a supplied text string to upper case
o CONCATENATE : Joins together two or more text strings
o LEFT : Returns a specified number of characters from the start of a supplied text
string
o RIGHT : Returns a specified number of characters from the end of a supplied
text string
• Date & Time
o TIME : Returns a time, from a user-supplied hour, minute and second
o NOW : Returns the current date & time
o TODAY : Returns today's date
• Statistical
o SUM : Returns the sum of a supplied list of numbers
o MAX : Returns the largest value from a list of supplied numbers
o MIN : Returns the smallest value from a list of supplied numbers
o COUNTIF : Returns the number of cells (of a supplied range), that satisfy a given
criteria
• Logical
o AND : Tests a number of user-defined conditions and returns TRUE if ALL of the
conditions evaluate to TRUE, or FALSE otherwise
o OR : Tests a number of user-defined conditions and returns TRUE if ANY of the
conditions evaluate to TRUE, or FALSE otherwise

43
 o NOT : Returns a logical value that is the opposite of a user supplied logical value
or expression i.e. returns FALSE is the supplied argument is TRUE and returns
TRUE if the supplied argument is FALSE)
• Mathematical
o SQRT : Returns the positive square root of a given number
o POWER: Returns the power of a number raised to second number.
How to insert a function in excel
Every function has the same structure. For example, SUM(A1:A4). The name of this
function is SUM. The part between the brackets (arguments) means we give Excel the range
A1:A4 as input. This function adds the values in cells A1, A2, A3 and A4. It's not easy to
remember which function and which arguments to use for each task. Fortunately, the Insert
Function feature in Excel helps you with this.
To insert a function, execute the following steps.
1. Select a cell.
2. Click the Insert Function button.
The 'Insert Function' dialog box appears.
3. Search for a function or select a function from a
category. For example, choose COUNTIF from the
Statistical category.
4. Click OK.
The 'Function Arguments' dialog box appears.

5. Click in the Range box and select the range A1:C2.

6. Click in the Criteria box and type >5.
7. Click OK.
Result. Excel counts the number of cells that are higher
than 5.

44
Sorting in Excel
Sorting is a common task that allows you to change or customize the order of your
spreadsheet data. For example, you could organize your class student’s birthday list will
make you easier to find what you are looking for. Custom sorting takes it a step further, giving
you the ability to sort multiple levels—such as Name first, then birthdate etc.
To sort in alphabetical order:
1. Select a cell in the column you want to sort by. In this
example, we'll sort by Name.
2. Select the Data tab, then locate the Sort and Filter
group.
3. Click the ascending command to Sort A to Z or the
descending command to Sort Z to A.

4. The data in the spreadsheet will be organized alphabetically. (as shown below)

45
Sorting options can also be found on the Home tab, condensed into the
Sort & Filter command.
To sort in numerical order:
1. Select a cell in the column you want to sort by.(In our example C6)

2. From the Data tab, click the ascending command to Sort Smallest to Largest or the
descending command to Sort Largest to Smallest.
3. The data in the spreadsheet will be organized numerically.

Filters in Excel
If your worksheet contains a lot of content, it can be difficult to find information
quickly. Filters can be used to narrow down the data in your worksheet, allowing you to view
only the information you need.
Filtering data: In the following example, I am applying a filter to an equipment log worksheet
to display only the laptops and projectors that are available for checkout.
1. In order for filtering to work correctly, your worksheet should include a header row,
which is used to identify the name of each column. In our example, our worksheet is
organized into different columns identified by the header cells in row 1: ID#, Type,
Equipment Detail, and so on.

46
 2. Select the Data tab, and then click the Filter command.

3. A drop-down arrow will appear in the header cell for each column.
4. Click the drop-down arrow for the column you want to filter. In our example, we will
filter column B to view only certain types of equipment.

5. The Filter menu will appear.

6. Uncheck the box next to Select All to quickly
deselect all data.
7. Check the boxes next to the data you want to
filter, and then click OK. In this example, we
will check Laptop and Tablet to view only
those types of equipment.

47
 8. The data will be filtered, temporarily hiding any content that doesn't match the criteria.
In our example, only laptops and tablets are visible.

Filtering options can also be accessed from the Sort & Filter
command on the Home tab.

Applying multiple filters:

Filters are cumulative, which means you can apply multiple filters to help narrow down
your results. In this example, we've already filtered our worksheet to show laptops and
projectors, and we'd like to narrow it down further to only show laptops and projectors that
were checked out in August.
1. Click the drop-down arrow for the column you want to filter. In this example, we will
add a filter to column D to view information by date.

2. The Filter menu will appear.

3. Check or uncheck the boxes depending on the data you want to filter, and then click
OK. In our example, we'll uncheck everything except for August.

48
 4. The new filter will be applied. In our example, the worksheet is now filtered to show
only laptops and tablets that were checked out in August.

How to clear a filter:

After applying a filter, you may want to remove or clear it from your worksheet so you'll be
able to filter content in different ways.
1. Click the drop-down arrow for the filter you want to clear. In our example, we'll clear
the filter in column D.

2. The Filter menu will appear.

3. Choose Clear Filter from [COLUMN NAME] from the Filter
menu. In our example, we'll select Clear Filter from "Checked
Out".
4. The filter will be cleared from the column. The previously
hidden data will be displayed.

49
Conditional formatting in Excel
Excel conditional formatting is a really powerful feature which helps you highlight the
most important information in your spreadsheets and identify variances of cells' values with a
quick glance. Conditional formatting in Excel is very straightforward and easy to use. So now
let’s discuss it with an example.
For a start, let's see where you can find the conditional formatting feature in MS Excel
2010. See Home tab -> Styles group.
Conditional formatting in Excel

1. In your Excel spreadsheet, select the cells you want to

format.
For this example, I've created a small table listing the Marks
obtained by the students out of 40. What we want is to
highlight the cells (C5:C22) which have less than 13 marks.
2. Select the cells C5:C22
3. Now, Go to the Home tab > Styles group and click
Conditional Formatting. You will see a number of different
formatting rules, including data bars, color scales and icon
sets.
4. Since we need to apply conditional formatting only to the
numbers less than 13, we choose Highlight Cells Rules > Less
Than...
You can go ahead with any other rule type such as:
• Format values greater than, less than or equal
to.
• Highlight text containing specified words or
characters.
• Highlight duplicates.
• Format specific dates.

50
 5. Enter the value in box in the right-hand part of the window under "Format cells that are
LESS THAN", in our case we type 13.

As soon as you have entered the value, Microsoft Excel will highlight the cells in the
selected range that meet your condition.
Worksheet
A worksheet is a collection of cells where you keep and manipulate the data. By default,
each Excel workbook contains three worksheets. An Excel worksheet is a single spreadsheet
that contains cells organized by rows and columns. A worksheet begins with row number 1
and column A. In Excel 2010, the maximum size of a worksheet is 1,048,576 rows by 16,384
columns.
Select a Worksheet
When you open Excel, Excel automatically selects Sheet1 for you. The name of the
worksheet appears on its sheet tab at the bottom of the document window.

To select one of the other two worksheets, simply click on the sheet tab of Sheet2 or Sheet3.
Rename a Worksheet
By default, the worksheets are named Sheet1, Sheet2 and Sheet3. To give a worksheet a more
specific name, execute the following steps.
1. Right click on the sheet tab of Sheet1.
2. Choose Rename.
3. For example, type Class VI.

51
 

Insert a Worksheet
You can insert as many worksheets as you want. To quickly insert a new worksheet, click the
Insert Worksheet tab at the bottom of the document window.

Move a Worksheet
To move a worksheet, click on the sheet tab of
the worksheet you want to move and drag it
into the new position.
1. For example, click on the sheet tab of Sheet4
and drag it before Sheet2.

Delete a Worksheet
To delete a worksheet, right click on a sheet tab and choose Delete.
For example, delete Sheet4.

52
Copy a Worksheet
Imagine, you have Class VI ready and want to create the exact same sheet for Class VI
Games, but with different data. You can recreate the worksheet, but this is time-consuming. It's
a lot easier to copy the entire worksheet and only change the numbers.
1. Right click on the sheet tab of Class VI.
2. Choose Move or Copy...
The 'Move or Copy' dialog box appears.

3. Select (move to end) and check Create a copy.

4. Click OK.

Now Rename this sheet as Class VI Games

53
Workbook
Excel 2010 includes a Protect Workbook command that prevents others from making
changes to the layout of the worksheets in a workbook. You can assign a password when you
protect an Excel workbook so that only those who know the password can unprotect the
workbook and change the structure or layout of the worksheets.
Now, let’s see protections one by one with example.
How to protect an excel workbook
This example teaches you how to protect the workbook structure and windows in Excel.
Protecting Structure
If you protect the workbook structure, users cannot insert, delete, rename, move, copy, hide or
unhide worksheets anymore.
1. Open a workbook.
2. On the Review tab, click Protect Workbook.

3. Check Structure, enter a password and click OK.

4. Re-enter the password and click on OK.
Users cannot insert, delete, rename, move, copy, hide or unhide
worksheets anymore.

54
Protecting windows
If you protect the workbook windows, users cannot move, change the size and close windows
anymore.
1. Open a workbook.
2. On the Review tab, click Protect Workbook.

3. Check Windows enter a password and click OK.

4. Re-enter the password and click on OK.

You cannot move, change the size and close windows anymore.

To unprotect the workbook, click Protect Workbook and enter the password.

55
Protect Sheet
Sometimes you may want to protect a worksheet to help prevent it from being changed.
Follow these steps to protect the worksheet.
1. Right click a worksheet tab.
2. Click Protect Sheet.

3. Enter a password.
4. Check the actions you allow the users of your
worksheet to perform.
5. Click OK.
6. Confirm the password and click OK.

Your worksheet is protected now. To unprotect a

worksheet, right click on the worksheet tab and
click Unprotect Sheet.

56
 WORKSHEET

Fill in the blank with correct option

Bar chart, Worksheet, $, Autosum, formula bar, Sorting, =, Logical operator, now, three

1. …………………Tests a number of user-defined conditions.

2. Workbook is a collection of ………………
3. You can sum a large range of data by simply selecting a tool button called …………………
4 .……………………… is method of arranging the data in ascending or descending order.
5.………………………… can be created in Excel easily.
6. …………………………… function displays current date and time in MS Excel.
7. In the formula, ……………………………….symbol specifies the fixed columns or rows.
8. Excel displays the current cell address in the ………………………
9. By default, a workbook have ………………….. worksheets
10.Formulas in Excel start with……………………

Lab Assignment / Project

1. In Microsoft Excel , Mr. Shubham putting the sum of 3 cells in a 4th cell. If the sum is
greater than 10, he would like the sum to be the color red. If the sum is less than 10, I
would like the sum to be the color blue. Is this possible? If yes, How to achieve it?

2. You have an Excel spreadsheet and you would like to filter more than types of criteria
from a single column. How can filter a single column based on one or more criteria?

3. You are trying to put some data in alphabetical order. There are 4 columns and over
2,000+ rows of information. I need to sort the data by column B in alphabetical order.
How do you do this?

57
Solve the crosswords using the words from the lesson

A S R T

S S R M X
T
F R M L

L G T A Y

E T C L
R
F
O W R
T

58
Chapter 4

Advance features of MS PowerPoint

Inside this chapter : Inserting different objects (i.e. images, Word Arts, audio & video etc.), Transitions in
slide, Custom Animation with text.

PowerPoint is a presentation software program of the Microsoft Office package.

PowerPoint uses a graphical approach to presentations in the form of slide shows that
accompany the oral delivery of the topic. This program is widely used in business and
classrooms and is an effective tool when used for training purposes. It provides “Power to
your Point. PowerPoint is one of the simplest computer programs to learn.
PowerPoint presentations can be made into photo albums, complete with music or
narrations, to distribute on CDs or DVDs. All in all, PowerPoint is a "one-stop-shop" to create
successful presentations for the business world, the classroom or just for your own personal
use.
In this chapter we will discuss some advance features of PowerPoint.

Inserting different objects in PowerPoint slide

1. Inserting a picture
There are two ways to insert a picture on your slide in PowerPoint:
Using Content placeholder
1. Launch PowerPoint. Most of the time,
PowerPoint already has a new slide, change
the layout of this slide to Title and Content
by selecting the Home tab | Layout | Title
and Content option. These results in the
slide layout you see in the Picture.
Click on the Insert Picture from File button
in the Content placeholder, as highlighted
in red.

59
Using Insert picture tool
If you want to add a picture on an existing slide that has no Content placeholder, you can
select the Insert tab of the Ribbon, and click the Picture button.

Either way, you will open the Insert Picture dialog box. Navigate to the folder where your
pictures are located, you will see the icons or thumbnails of the pictures as shown in following
picture. Select the picture you need, and click on the Insert button highlighted in red.

As soon as you click the Insert button, you will see the selected picture placed on the
PowerPoint slide.

Now, the picture can be edited by resizing, moving, rotating, etc.

60
 2. Inserting Word Art
WordArt offers additional effects like outline text, fill, gradient, 3D effects and shadows etc.
If you want to, you can add WordArt using the WordArt command on the Insert tab in the
Text group.
1. On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click WordArt. The WordArt Styles gallery opens.

2. Click on the style you want to insert, and a text box appears with the text “Your text
here”, with the WordArt style you selected applied to it.

3. Edit the text to whatever you want it to be.

At this point, you’ll see a Drawing Tools Format context tab. Here you’ll find the WordArt
Styles group.

61
This contains the Preset styles gallery, and drop downs for controlling the Text Fill, Text
Outline, and (most fun) Text Effects.

As you can see, there are a lot of possibilities to explore.

Adding Slide Transitions

Transitions between slides cover much more than some movement between one slide and the
next. Slide transitions in PowerPoint many option including timings and sounds.
In either the Slide Sorter or Normal view, select the slide or slides which you want to apply the
transition to. Now, lets do it practically.
1. From the menu ribbon, select the Transitions tab.

62
 2. The most commonly used animations will appear in the center. To preview more
transition options, click the down arrow.

3. Select a transition from the list. Clicking it will apply the transition to the slide. You
can also select Apply to All to apply the same transition to all your slides.
4. In the Duration option, enter the speed at which you want the transition to play.

5. In the Sound field, use the drop-down menu to select a sound to play during a slide
transition, if desired.

6. Indicate how you want the slide transition to occur by selecting an option under the
Advance Slide heading. Select On mouse Click if you want the transition to take place
when you click the left mouse button.
Select Automatically After if you want the transition to occur after a specified time. Use
the up and down arrow keys in the blank box to specify the number of seconds which
should pass before the transition takes place.

Animation with Text

In PowerPoint you can animate text and objects such as clip art, shapes, and pictures.
Animation or movement on the slide can be used to draw the audience's attention to specific
content or to make the slide easier to read.

63
Types of animations
There are many different animation effects you can choose from, and they are organized into
four types:
• Entrance: These control how the object enters the slide. For example, with the Bounce
animation, the object will drop onto the slide and then bounce several times.

• Emphasis: These animations occur while the object is on the slide and are often
triggered by a mouse click. For example, you can set an object to Spin when you click
the mouse.

• Exit: These control how the object exits the slide. For example, with the Fade animation,
the object will simply fade away.

• Motion Paths: These are similar to Emphasis effects, except the object moves within
the slide along a predetermined path, like a circle.

How to apply animation to Text

1. Select the text.
2. Click the Animations tab.
3. In the Animation group, click the More drop-down arrow to view the available
animations.

64
 4. Select the desired animation effect.

5. The text will now have a small number next to it to show that it has an animation. Also,
in the Slide pane, the slide will now have a star symbol next to it.

Some effects will have options you can change. For example, with the Fly In effect, you can
control which direction the object comes from. These options can be accessed from the Effect
Options command in the Animation group.

You can apply more than one animation effects for a text

65
Animation Painter:
Sometimes you may want to apply the same effects to more than one object. You can do this
by copying the effects from one object to another using the Animation Painter.
1. Click the object that has the effects you want to copy.
2. From the Animations tab, click the Animation Painter command.

3. Click the object you want to copy the effects to. The effects will be applied to the object.

Animation pane
The Animation pane allows you to view and manage all of the effects that are on the current
slide. You can modify and reorder effects directly from the Animation pane, which is especially
useful when you have several effects.
To open the Animation pane:
1. From the Animations tab, click the Animation Pane command.

2. The Animation pane will open on the right side of the window. It will show all of the
effects for the current slide in the order they will appear.

66
To reorder effects from the Animation pane:
1. On the Animation pane, click and drag an effect up or down.

2. The effects will reorder.

To preview effects from the Animation pane:
1. From the Animation pane, click the Play button.

2. The effects for the current slide will play. On the right side of the Animation pane, you
will be able to see a timeline that shows the progress through each effect.

The Effect options dialog box

From the Animation pane, you can access the Effect Options dialog box, which contains more
advanced options you can use to fine tune your animations.

67
To open the Effect Options dialog box:
1. From the Animation pane, select an effect. A drop-down arrow will appear next to the
effect.
2. Click the drop-down arrow, and select Effect Options. The Effect Options dialog box will
appear.
3. From here, you can add various enhancements to the effect:
o Sound: This adds a sound effect to the animation.
o After animation: This changes the color after the animation is over.
o Animate text: If you are animating text, you can choose to animate it all at once,
one word at a time, or one letter at a time.

To change the effect timing:

1. From the Effect Options dialog box, select the Timing tab.
2. From here, you can add a delay before the effect starts, change the duration of the
effect, and control whether the effect repeats.

68
 WORKSHEET

Fill in the blanks with correct option

Animation Painter, Auto clipart, Slide transition, drag, F5

1…………….is the term used when you press and hold the left mouse key and move the

mouse around the slide.

2. The entry effect as one slide replaces another in a show is called……………

3. ………………is a feature that automatically places clipart in your presentation.

4. ………………key can be used to view Slide show.

5. We can copy the effects from one object to another using……………………

Lab Assignment / Project

1. Create a PowerPoint presentation on Input and Output devices of Computer System.

2. Create a PowerPoint presentation with animation on Types of Printers.

Solve the crosswords using the words from the lesson

I A G

P W P I T

T R N S T O
U
O O N
W

69
Chapter 5

Adobe Presenter

Inside this chapter : Adding audio and editing audio, adding and recording audio, creating a quiz with
interaction, publishing adobe presenter presentation.

Adobe Presenter is eLearning software developed by Adobe Systems which is available on the
Microsoft Windows platform as a Microsoft PowerPoint plug-in, and it is mainly targeted
towards learning professionals and trainers. In addition to recording one's computer desktop
and speech, it also provides the option to add Quiz and track performance by integrating with
learning management systems.

Note: Adobe presenter software must be installed on your computer

Now lets explore the Abobe presenter features.
Prepare your slides
You need to create your PowerPoint slides and add any animations before you use Adobe
Presenter.
Adding Audio
You can record a narration for your slides by clicking on Record in the
Audio group on the Adobe Presenter tab using Presenter. You can also
import an audio file and do some limited editing on the audio
.Edit Audio
You can edit the audio, for example to add or remove a pause, remove sections of the
recording or alter the volume etc.
1. Click Edit in the Audio group on the Adobe Presenter tab.

70
 To add a pause, click Insert Silence
To alter the volume, click Adjust Volume
Click Save to save your changes

Synchronise Audio with Slides

If you have recorded or imported narration for a slide, you may need to synchronise the audio
with your slide animations.
1. Click Sync in the Audio group of the Adobe Presenter ribbon.
2. Click the Sync->change timings button to
start synchronising.
3. While listening to the audio, click the Next
Animation button when you want the next slide
animation to appear.
4. Click Stop when you have finished.
5. Choose whether to Save or Discard your
changes.
6. Click the cross on the top right to close the Sync window and return to PowerPoint.

71
Adding Video
You can import a video onto a slide in Presenter or record a video of you narrating your
presentation.
Import video
1. Click the Video button in the Insert group on the Adobe
Presenter tab, or choose Swf to import an animation
2. Browse to find the video file
3. Choose which slide to import the video to
4. Choose whether to import the video onto the slide itself or onto
the Sidebar, for example to show a ‘talking head’

Record video
Click the Record button in the Video group on the Adobe Presenter tab to record a video of
you narrating your presentation.
Create a Quiz or Survey
1. Click Manage in the Quiz group on the Adobe Presenter tab to start the Quiz Manager

2. To add a new question: a. Click the arrow next to the Add Question button

b. Choose the type of question you want to create

72
c. Enter your question and possible answers. The details will depend on which type of question
you are creating.

d. Click OK
3. Click OK when you have created all your questions. A new slide will be created for each
question

4. In the Slide Manager, change the Advance by User

option to Yes.
5. To preview the whole presentation, click Preview in
the Presentation group on the Adobe Presenter tab
To preview just the current slide, the next 5 slides or the
rest of the presentation, click the arrow under Preview
and choose the appropriate option.

73
Interactions
You can add other interactive features to your presentation by adding an Interaction.
1. Add a new blank slide to your presentation
2. On the Design tab, choose Hide Background Graphics

3. Click Interaction in the Insert

group on the Adobe Presenter
tab
4. Choose an interaction. For
example, searching a Word in
Alphabet’s Matrix allows
people to click on alphabets to
make a word.
5. In the Slide Manager, change
the Advance by User option to Yes.

74
 6. Click the arrow under Preview and choose the appropriate option.

Publish your Presentation

You need to publish your presentation, so click on Publish button and save the presentation to
Desktop or somewhere else.

Double click on the swf file which is saved to desktop to run this Interactive
presentation.

75
 WORKSHEET

Fill in the blanks with correct option

Sync, Manage, Adobe presenter, swf, Record

1……………………………… provides the option to add quizzes and track performance by

integrating with learning management systems.
2. You can record a narration for your slides by clicking on ……………. in the Audio group.
3. Quiz Manager can be started by clicking on ……………button.
4. Audio files can be synchronised by clicking………… the Audio group of the Adobe
Presenter ribbon.
5.. Adobe Presenter presentation published in……………format.

Lab Assignment / Project

1. Create a General Knowledge Quiz using adobe presenter by adding questions like fill in the
blanks, multiple choice etc.
2. Create a small video lesson for narrating your lesson using Adobe presenter.

Solve the crosswords using the words from the lesson

A B E
M

P R S N R

C
Q I E

W V D O

76
Chapter 6

HTML

Inside this chapter : Introduction to HTML, Uses of HTML, HTML Tags, HEAD, TITLE, BODY, Empty and
Container Tags.

What is HTML?
HTML is a computer language invented to allow website creation. The websites can then be
viewed by anyone else connected to the Internet. It is relatively easy to learn, with the basics
being accessible to most people in one sitting and quite powerful in what it allows you to
create. HTML is used to build the websites or web based applications.
HTML stands for Hyper Text Markup Language.
• HyperText is the method by which you move around on the web by clicking on special
text called hyperlinks which bring you to the next page.
• Markup is what HTML tags do to the text inside them. They mark it as a certain type of
text for example italicized text.
How does it work?
HTML consists of a series of short codes typed into a text-file called as tags. The text is then
saved as html file, and viewed through a browser like Internet Explorer. This browser reads
the file and translates the text into a visible form, hopefully rendering the page as the author
had intended.
Some of the most popular HTML editors, such as FrontPage or Dreamweaver will let you
create pages more or less as you write documents in Word or whatever text editor you are
using.
Essential HTML Tags
There are four sets of HTML tags that form the basic structure needed for every HTML file:
• <html></html>
• <head></head>
• <title></title>
• <body></body>

77
<html> </html>
This basically defines the document as web page. It also identifies the beginning and
end of the HTML document. All other tags must fall between the html tags.
<head> </head>
The header contains information about the document that will not appear on the actual
page, such as the title of the document, the author etc.
<title> </title>
The title tag defines the title that will appear in the title bar of your web browser. The
title must appear between the head tags.
<body> </body>
The body tags contain all the information and other visible content on the page. All
your images, links and plain text must go between the <body> and </body> tags.
You may also be interested in the basic tags for adding content and headings.
Example:
Below is a basic html document. Notice that everything falls between the html tags, the title
appears within the head of the document, and that the body comes after the head.
1. Open Notepad.
2. Type the HTML program as given below.
3. Click file->Save as

4. Select Desktop, type the file name as myfile.html

and select All files in Save as type box and Click on
save.
Your HTML file will be save to desktop
5. Double click on the file(as shown below) and
your webpage is ready for display.

78
Empty tag and Container tag
A container tag has two ends (an opening and a closing) whereas an empty tag doesn't.
The paragraph tag is an example of a container tag:
<p>Our paragraph text here.</p>
The image tag is a good example of an empty tag.
<img src="kvslogo.png" >
See how the initial paragraph tag (<p>) has a corresponding end tag? The text in between is
"contained" by the tag.
The majority of tags are "container" tags. They have an opening and a closing tag.
However, a few tags are "self-contained" or "empty" tags in that they have an opening tags but
not a closing one.
They common ones are:
• <br> = break
• <img> = image
• <meta> = metadata within an HTML document.

79
 WORKSHEET

Fill in the blanks with correct option

<BR>, <HTML>, header, .html, container, tag, title, body, empty , web programming

1. Extension of a HTML file is……………………

2. Predefined command in HTML is knows as…………………
3. HTML is a ………………………language.
4. All HTML programs must have………………tag the begging of program.
5. The ………………contains information about the document that will not appear on
the actual page.
6. The ………… tag must appear between the head tags.
7. The ……………tags contain all the information and other visible content on the page.
8. A ……….……………tag has an opening and a closing end.
9. A…………………tag doesn't have a closing end.
10....................is an example empty tag.

Lab Assignment / Project

1. Create a HTML page that contains your name, class, father’s name, mother’s
name etc. Save this HTML file to Desktop and test the result.

Solve the crosswords using the words from the lesson

H L

H
W E P G

D A R U

H E L K

80
Chapter 7

Internet & Networks

Inside this chapter : Overview of Internet, Intranet, Different types of websites, Web Browsers, Opening of
web pages and Web sites, Use of search engine, Creation of an Email and using it, Advantages and
Disadvantages of Social Media sites, Networking and Networks.

Internet is a collection of computers connected by network

cables or through satellite links. Internet is a network of networks. It
is also knows as Super Network. There are millions of computing
devices that are connected to this network either permanently or for a
short duration. These devices run network applications that
communicate through copper or fiber optic cables, radio or satellite
transmission.
The Internet connectivity is provided by Internet Service Providers (ISP) like BSNL,
Airtel, Reliance, Aircel Vodafone etc.

Advantages
Internet covers almost every aspect of life. Here, we will discuss some of the advantages of
Internet.

81
 Internet allows you to communicate with the people sitting at remote locations using
we site and applications like Facebook,Twitter,Yahoo,Google+,Flickr,Orkut etc.
You can find any kind of information on any topic over the internet such as Technology,
Health & Science, Social Studies, Geographical Information, Information Technology,
Products etc.
It also provides entertainment through various modes like online television, online
games, songs, videos, social networking apps.
Internet also allows us to use many services like Internet banking, matrimonial services,
online shopping, online ticket booking, online bill payment, data sharing, e-mail etc.
Disadvantages
However, Internet has proved to be a powerful source of information in almost every field, yet
there exists many disadvantages discussed below:

82
 There are always chances to loose personal information such as name, address, credit
card number. Therefore, one should be very careful while sharing such information.
Spamming corresponds to the unwanted e-mails in bulk. These e-mails serve no
purpose and lead to block of entire system.
Virus can easily be spread to the computers connected to internet.
There are many pornographic sites that can be found, which indirectly affects your
healthy and mental life.

Intranet: An intranet is a private network

accessible only to an organization's staff.
Intranet is system in which multiple PCs are
connected to each other. PCs in intranet are
not available to the world outside the
intranet. Usually each company or
organization has their own Intranet network
and members of that company can access the
computers in their intranet.
Similarities in Internet and Intranet
Intranet uses the internet protocols such as TCP/IP and FTP.
Intranet sites are accessible via web browser in similar way as websites in
internet. But only members of Intranet network can access intranet hosted sites.
In Intranet, own instant messengers can be used as similar to yahoo messenger/
Gtalk over the internet.
Differences in Internet and Intranet
Internet is general to PCs all over the world whereas Intranet is specific to
few PCs.
Internet has wider access and provides a better access to websites to large
population whereas Intranet is restricted.
Internet is not as safe as Intranet as Intranet can be safely privatized as per
the need.

83
Types of websites: There are various types of website available in Internet. Here we will
discuss some basic types.
Website Type Definition Example
Personal Used for sharing personal
http://www.sachintendulkar.in
Websites information.
Photo Sharing
Used for sharing photographs. https://www.flickr.com
Websites
A Website for sharing information,
Blogs http://www.narendramodi.in
ideas and views.
Informational Provides information on various
https://www.wikipedia.org
Websites topics.
Directory A Source to access all Websites at
https://goidirectory.nic.in
Websites all levels and from all sectors.
E-commerce
Business Websites https://www.irctc.co.in
Websites

Web browser: A browser is a software application used to locate, retrieve and display content
of Web pages, images, video and other files. The browser contacts the Web server and
requests information and Web server sends the
information back to the Web browser which displays the
results on the computer. Example of Web browser are
Mozilla firefox, Internet explorer, Google chrome ,epic etc.

Opening of Webpages and websites: Opening a website is very easy process. First of all you
must have a working internet connection on your computer.

Search a browser which installed in your computer like Mozilla firefox, Internet
explorer, Google chrome ,Epic, opera etc. double click on the icon of browser and type

84
 the name of website in address bar which you want to open. E.g
www.kvsangathan.nic.in (See below).

Use of Search Engine: Search engines are websites that sea rch the internet for you
and give you a list of search results. Search engines can
search for more than just written information. Depending
on the search engine you’re using, you might also be able
to search for other online content like images, video
content, books and news, as well as products and services.
You do not always have to know a website’s address in
order to use the Internet. It is important to know how to
search for information. One of the best methods to search is to use a search engine. You
can use a search engine to help you find what you're looking for. You can also search
for online maps and directions to help plan your travel from one place to another.
Example: Google, Infoseek, Excite, Lycos, AltaVista etc.

85
Email (Electronic Mail): Email is like sending a letter,, you can send the email and it
get to the other person's email account within seconds. If you have an email address,
you can email anyone else who has an email address, including government agencies
and lots of different kinds of businesses.
You can create one or more email addresses. When you create a new email account,
you'll have to pick email addresses that haven't already been chosen by someone else.
Let’s see how you can create an Email account.
In the following example I am creating a new email account in rediff.com but you can
your create email account through any website
which offers free email creation like Google,
yahoo, Hotmail etc.

1. Open website www.rediffmail.com and

click on
2. Now, click on Create a new account
3. Type username ,check the availability of
this Email ID and type password and other
mandatory information for your email
account(See below)
4. Finally, click on Create my account.
5. Your email account creation is over.

86
 Now, you can send or receive emails with this ID. For writing new email, use Write Mail
or Compose option and to check the Incoming Email list, see the option Inbox.

Social media sites: A social media site is a platform to build social networks and social
relations among people who share similar interests, activities, backgrounds or real-life
connections. Social media sites are web-based services that allow individuals to create a
public profile, create a list of users with whom to share
connections, and view and cross the connections within
the system. Social media sites incorporate mobile
connectivity, photo & video sharing and blogging. Some
popular social media sites are Facebook, twitter,
LinkedIn, Google Plus+, Instagram and Flickr.
Advantages of Social Media sites:
1. Social networking provides medium for self-expression.
2. Social media sites helps people stay in touch that might not do it otherwise.
3. Social media sites are used to help advertise goods and services.
4. Social media sites provide platform for job searches.

87
Disadvantages of Social Media sites:
1. Social media sites takes time away from other activities and can take over from real
time interaction.
2. Social media sites extend the gap between people who have access to computer
technology and those that don't.
3. Social media sites can be used to promote organized crime.
4. When social media sites are used excessively or in the wrong way, it could have
serious detrimental outcomes on both mental and even physical health of individuals.

Networking and Networks:

Computer Network: A computer network allows computers to
exchange data, Information and share resources. The connections
between computers (nodes) are established using either cable
media or wireless media.
Types of Network
There are many types of computer networks, including the following:
Local-Area Network (LAN): The computers are connected in a building or office.
Wide-Area Network (WAN): The computers are connected by telephone lines or
radio waves across country or continent.
Metropolitan-Area Network MAN): A network designed for a town or city.
Personal Area Network (PAN): A network contained within a user's home that
connects a person's digital devices.

88
 WORKSHEET

Fill in the blanks with correct option.

WAN, inbox, ISP, social media, directory, MAN, super, LAN, blog, search engine

1. Internet is also known as………………network.

2. Network within a building is knows as ………

3. Internet is a …………type of network.

4. Internet connectivity is provided by…………

5. ……………website used for sharing information, ideas and views.

6.…………website is a Source to access all Websites at all levels and from all sectors.

7. Google is a popular…………………………

8. Incoming email list can be viewed through …………………

9. Facebook is a………………site.

10. A network which designed for a town or city is known as …………

Match left side terminology with the correct option from right side.

1. Twitter a. Browser.

2. PAN b. Internet Service Provider.

3. BSNL c. Social media website.

4. Firefox d. Private network at home.

89
Solve the crosswords using the words from the lesson

L
G O L E

M A
W I P
A
N T R N T
R
P N B
B N
E W O K
E T T

F A B O K W E S T E
R
L K

90
 Sample Papers

Formative Assesment-1 (Chapter 1 & 2)

Max. Marks 40 Max.Time 1½ Hrs.

1 Write the full form of LCD. 1

2 What do you mean by Computer? 1

3 Give an example of application software. 1

4 Expand RAM. 1

5 Give an example of Output device. 1

6 What do you mean by OS? 2

7 What do you mean by hyperlink? 2

8 What is Drop cap in MS word? 2

9 What is Input Device? Explain with an example. 2

10 Draw a block diagram of Computer System. 2

11 Differentiate between RAM and ROM 5

12 What are the main functions of Operating system? 5

13 Differentiate between Impact and Non-Impact printer. 5

14 What is Main memory, Define its characteristics. 5

15 What are the main functions performed by the CPU? Explain in brief. 5

91
 Summative Assesment-1 (Chapter 1,2&3)
Max. Marks 90 Max.Time 2½ Hrs.

1 Formula in MS Excel begins with ----------- sign. 1

2 Name a GUI based Computer language. 1
3 Which Inbuilt function is used to display Date and Time in MS Excel? 1
4 By default, MS Excel has -----------------------Worksheets. 1
5 In Excel ---------------- function return smallest value in a selected range of cells. 1
6 What is mail merge? 2
7 Write any two types of text alignment available in MS Word? 2
8 What do you mean by OS? 2
9 Give an example of 4th Generation language & 5th Generation language. 2
10 Name a Device which is used for Input and Output both. 2
11 Write down steps to convert a paragraph into two Columns in MS Word. 3
12 What is Computer Language? Give an example. 3
13 Define System Software with an example. 3
14 Give three examples of Output Device? 3
15 What are the main characteristics of Secondary memory? 3
16 What do you mean by Conditional formatting in MS Excel? 3
17 Define Workbook and Worksheet of MS Excel. 3
18 Draw a labeled block diagram of Computer System. 4
19 Explain CPU in brief. 4
20 What do you mean by Application software? Explain with an example. 4
21 What do you mean by Cache memory? Write its main functions. 4
22 Write a short note on Dot matrix printer. 4
23 What do you mean by Sorting? How can we sort data in MS Excel? 4
24 Give differences between RAM and ROM. 5
25 How can we create hyperlink in MS Word? Explain with an example. 5
26 Differentiate between Impact and Non-Impact printer with example. 5
27 What do you mean by Header and Footer in MS Word? How can we insert 5
these in a document?
28 What do mean by Absolute and Relative reference ? Give example of each. 5
29 What do you mean by Input device? Explain any three. 5

92
 Formative Assesment-3 (Chapter 4,5&6)
Max. Marks 40 Max.Time 1½ Hrs.

1 Write the file extension of HTML web page. 1

2 Expand HTML. 1

3 Name the shortcut key to show or view a PowerPoint presentation. 1

4 Write the file extension used for PowerPoint presentation. 1

5 Adobe Presenter presentation published in……………format. 1

6 Write the purpose of <title> tag of HTML. 2

7 What do you mean by a Markup language? 2

8 Write down steps to Insert a Picture in PowerPoint. 2

9 What is the function of Animation painter in MS PowerPoint? 2

10 What do you mean by Slide Transition of MS PowerPoint? 2

11 Write a short note on Microsoft PowerPoint. 5

12 Why should we use Adobe presenter? Write its features. 5

13 What do you mean by WordArt? How to insert WordArt in MS PowerPoint? 5

14 What do you mean by Empty and Container tag of HTML? Give example. 5

15 Write down steps to Animate a text or object in PowerPoint. 5

93
 Summative Assesment-2 (Chapter 4,5,6 & 7)

Max. Marks 90 Max.Time 2½ Hrs.

1 Expand HTML. 1
2 Adobe Presenter presentation published in……………format. 1
3 Write the file extension used for PowerPoint presentation. 1
4 The webpage is can be viewed through……………(Name the software) 1
5 Give an example of Slide Transition of MS PowerPoint. 1
6 Why we use Adobe presenter in MS PowerPoint? 2
7 What do you mean by Web browser? 2
8 Name any two E-commercial website. 2
9 What is Intranet? 2
10 Name any two types of Animation which are provided by MS PowerPoint. 2
11 Name any three popular search engines. 3
12 What is the function of Animation painter in MS PowerPoint? 3
13 Differentiate between Internet and Intranet. 3
14 Define PAN in brief. 3
15 What do you mean by Slide Transition of MS PowerPoint? 3
16 What is Email? 3
17 Write the purpose of <head> tag of HTML. 3
18 What do you mean by Instant (Chat) messenger? Give an example. 4
19 What are the advantages of disadvantages of Internet? Write any two of them. 4
20 Differentiate between LAN and WAN. 4
21 What do you mean by markup language? Give an Example. 4
22 Write short note on MAN. 4
23 Write down the process to open a website in computer. 4
24 Write some advantages and disadvantages of Social media site 5
25 Write down steps to Insert a Picture in PowerPoint. 5
26 What do you mean by Empty and Container tag of HTML? Give example. 5
27 Write down the steps to add a video in MS PowerPoint through Adobe 5
presenter.
28 What are various types of website available in Internet? Explain any three. 5
29 What do you mean by WordArt? How to insert WordArt in MS PowerPoint? 5

94
 Chief Patron
ShriSantosh Kumar Mall, IAS
Commissioner, KVS

Patron
Shri. G.K. Shrivastava, IAS
Additional Commissioner (Admin)

Shri. U.N. Khaware

Additional Commissioner (Acad)

Regional Patron
Shri C.Neelap
Deputy Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

Co-ordination, Compilation& Guidance

Shri D. Patle
Asstt. Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

School Co-ordination
Shri. K. AlungKhumba
Principal,KV NFR,Maligaon,Guwahati

Subject Expert
Dr. K. K. Motla, PGT(CS),
KV NFR,Maligaon,Guwahati
Sh. RajendraGavahle, PGT(CS),
KV NFR,Maligaon,Guwahati
Syllabus Content VII
Quarter – April to June
Sl. Units Contents No. of Periods
No.
1 1. Computer 1.1 Threats to computer QUR
2. Security 1.2 Virus and its types
1.3 Anti Virus software and examples
1.4 Firewall and its use
1.5 Cyber Crime and Computer Ethics
1.6 Hackers and crackers
1.7 Cyber law and importance
1.8 Backup and Restore
2 3. HTML 2.1 Heading (H1 to H6) 9
2.2 <Br>, <hr> ,<comment>
2.3 Background Color ,font tag(size, face, color)
2.4 Text alignment (center, left , right)

Minimum level of learning

Child should be able to secure his/her computer from various threats
Can tell what is cyber crime and understand the importance of cyber law
Formative Assessment – 1
Quarter – July to September
3 4. HTML 3.1 Paragraph formatting Tags 10
3.2 List Tags
3.3 Order (start and type
attribute) and Un order List
3.4 Background Image and other
Image Insertion in Web Page
with alignment
3.5 Creation of table
3.6 Anchor Tag
3.7 Hyper Link

5. Photoshop 4.1 DTP and its softwares 12

4 Introduction 4.2 Starting Photoshop
4.3 Tool Palette
4.4 How to create a new file
4.5 How to save a file
4.6 How to open an Existing file
Using Layers 4.7 How to use Photoshop tools
4.8 Using Layers
4.7.1 Learning Layer Basics
4.7.2 Using Layers palette
4.7.3 Rearranging Layers
4.7.4 Applying a Layer Style
4.7.5 Flattening and saving
files

Minimum level of learning

Child should be create a web page using tags taught in the class
Formative Assessment – 2
Summative Assessment – 1
 Quarter – October to December
5 Photoshop 20
(continued)
5.1 Rectangular Rectangular Marquee
Marquee 5.1.1. Elliptical Marquee
5.2.1. Single column Marquee
5.3.1. Single Row Marquee

5.2 Lasso Lasso

5.1.2. Polygonal Lasso
5.2.2. Magnetic Lasso
5.3.2. Quick Selection
5.4.2. Magic Wand
5.3 Crop and Slice Crop and Slice tools
tools 5.3.1 Crop
5.3.2 slice
5.3.3 Slice Select
5.4 Measuring Measuring tools
tools 5.4.1 Eyedropper
5.4.2 color Sampler
5.4.3 Ruler
5.4.4 Note
5.4.5 Count
5.5 Retouching
Retouching tools
tools
5.5.1 Spot Healing Brush
5.5.2 Healing Brush
5.5.3 Patch
5.5.4 Red Eye
5.5.5 Magic Eraser
5.5.6 Blur
5.5.7 Sharpen
5.5.8 Smudge
5.5.9 Dodge
5.5.10 Burn
5.5.11 Sponge

Minimum level of learning

Introduction of tool with its use to be demonstrated to students
Practical exercise to be given to students so that they can learn the specified tool

Child should be able to understand the use of Photoshop

Should be able to identify various tools and where to use the tool
Should be able to make changes in the picture using tools taught in the class

Formative Assessment – 3
 Quarter – January to March
6 Painting Tools in 6.1 Brush 12
Photoshop 6.2 Pencil
6.3 Color Replacement
6.4 Mixer Brush
6.5 History Brush
6.6 Art History Brush
6.7 Gradient
6.8 Paint Bucket

Minimum level of learning

Should be able to identify various tools and where to use the tool
Should be able to make changes in the picture using tools taught in the class
Introduction of tool with its use to be demonstrated to students
Practical exercise to be given to students so that they can learn the specified tool

Formative Assessment – 4
Summative Assessment – 2

Projects to be completed in the session :-

Work Experience :-
1. Chicken Coop Design

Art Education:-
1. Composition, Animal Poster

2. Shapes, Small Park Design

Contents
Computer Security 1
Photoshop 40
Threats to computer Rectangular Marquee
Virus and its types Elliptical Marquee
Anti-Virus software and examples Single column Marquee
Firewall and its use Single Row Marquee
Cyber Crime and Computer Ethics
Hackers and crackers Lasso
Cyber law and importance Polygonal Lasso
Magnetic Lasso
Html 12 Quick Selection
Magic Wand
Heading (H1 to H6) Crop and Slice tools
<Br>, <hr> ,<comment> Crop
Background Color ,font tag(size, face, color) slice
Text alignment (center, left , right) Slice Select
Measuring tools
Html 21 Eyedropper
color Sampler
Paragraph formatting Tags Ruler
List Tags Note
Order (start and type attribute) and Un order List Count
Background Image and other Image Insertion in
Web Page with alignment Retouching tools
Creation of table Spot Healing Brush
Anchor Tag Healing Brush
Hyper Link Patch
Red Eye
Photoshop Introduction 31 Magic Eraser
Blur
Sharpen
DTP and its softwares
Smudge
Starting Photoshop
Dodge
Tool Palette
Burn
How to create a new file
Sponge
How to save a file
Brush
How to open an Existing file
How to use Photoshop tools Painting Tools in Photoshop 53
Using Layers
Learning Layer Basics Pencil
Using Layers palette Color Replacement
Rearranging Layers Mixer Brush
Applying a Layer Style History Brush
Flattening and saving Brush
Art History file
Gradient
Paint Bucket
 Lesson-1
Computer Security
Threats to computer Security
What do they mean by a threat?
A threat, in the context of computer security, You will learn

refers to anything that has the potential to  Threats to computer

 Virus and its types
cause serious harm to a computer system.  Anti Virus software
A threat is something that may or may not and examples
 Firewall and its use
happen, but has the potential to cause serious  Cyber Crime and
Computer Ethics
damage. Threats can lead to attacks on computer
 Hackers and crackers
systems, networks and more. A threat can be  Cyber law and
important
either "intentional"(i.e., intelligent; e.g., an individual  Backup and Restore
crackerora criminal organization) or "accidental"
(e.g., the possibility of a computer malfunctioning,
or the possibility of a natural disaster such as an
earthquake, a fire, or a tornado) or otherwise a
circumstance, capability, action, or event.
Virus
Computer Virus are nothing but computer program that do unwanted things with your computer
resources e.g. you are working on PC and you are repeatedlyreceiving annoying message

 Viruses:A virus is a small piece of software that piggybacks on real programs. For example, a virus
might attach itself to a program such as a spreadsheet program. Each time the spreadsheet program
runs, the virus runs, too, and it has the chance to reproduce (by attaching to other programs) or
wreak havoc.

 E-mail viruses: An e-mail virus travels as an attachment to e-mail messages, and usually replicates
itself by automatically mailing itself to dozens of people in the victim's e-mail address book. Some e-
mail viruses don't even require a double-click -- they launch when you view the infected message in
the preview pane of your e-mail software.

Page |1
 Trojan horses: A Trojan horse is simply a computer program. The program claims to do one thing (it
may claim to be a game) but instead does damage when you run it (it may erase your hard disk).
Trojan horses have no way to replicate automatically.

 Worms:A worm is a small piece of software that uses computer networks and security holes to
replicate itself. A copy of the worm scans the network for another machine that has a specific security
hole. It copies itself to the new machine using the security hole, and then starts replicating from there,
as well.

 Virus Origins (http://computer.howstuffworks.com/virus1.htm)

Why they are called Virus?
Computer viruses are called viruses because they share some of the traits of biological viruses. A
computer virus passes from computer to computer like a biological virus passes from person to
person.
Similar to the way a biological virus must hitch a ride on a cell, a computer virus must piggyback on
top of some other program or document in order to launch. Once a computer virus is running, it can
infect other programs or documents.

What /who make virus?

who:People write computer viruses. A person has to write the code, test it to make sure it spreads
properly and then release it. A person also designs the virus's attack phase, whether it's a silly
message or the destruction of a hard disk.
Why:
1. The first is the same psychology that drives vandals and arsonists. For some people, that seems to
be a thrill. If that sort of person knows computer programming, then he or she may funnel energy into
the creation of destructive viruses.
2. The second reason has to do with the thrill of watching things blow up. Some people have a
fascination with things like explosions and car wrecks. Creating a virus is a little like that -- it creates a
virtual bomb inside a computer, and the more computers that get infected, the more "fun" the
explosion.
3. The third reason involves bragging rights. Sort of like Mount Everest -- the mountain is there, so
someone is compelled to climb it. If you are a certain type of programmer who sees a security hole
that could be exploited, you might simply be compelled to exploit the hole yourself before someone
else beats you to it.
Page |2
4. And then there's cold, hard cash. Viruses can trick you into buying fake software, steal your
personal information and use it to get to your money, or be sold on the digital equivalent of the black
market. Powerful viruses are valuable -- and potentially lucrative -- tools.

Virus History
Traditional computer viruses were first widely seen in the late 1980s,
Some Virus the Melissa virus in March 1999 was spectacular in its attack. Melissa spread in Microsoft
Word documents sent via e-mail.
The ILOVEYOU virus, which appeared on May 4, 2000, was even simpler. It contained a piece of
code as an attachment. People who double-clicked on the attachment launched the code. It then sent
copies of itself to everyone in the victim's address book and started corrupting files on the victim's
machine.

Worms:A worm is similar to a virus by design and is considered to be a sub-class of a virus. Worms
spread from computer to computer, but unlike a virus, it has the capability to travel without any human
action. A worm takes advantage of file or information transport features on your system, which is what
allows it to travel unaided.

Worms use up computer processing time and network bandwidth when they replicate,
and often carry payloads that do considerable damage.
Some example of worms:A worm called Code Red made huge headlines in 2001.
The Slammer worm (which caused mayhem in January 2003) exploited a hole in Microsoft's SQL
server.
A worm called Storm, which showed up in 2007, immediately started making a name for itself. Storm
used social engineering techniques to trick users into loading the worm on their computers.

Trojan Horse:A Trojan Horse is full of as much trickery as the mythological Trojan Horse it was
named after. The Trojan Horse, at first glance will appear to be useful software but will actually do
damage once installed or run on your computer. Some Trojan are designed to be more annoying
thanmalicious (like changing your desktop, adding silly active desktop icons) or they can cause
serious damage bydeleting files and destroying information on your system. Trojans are also known
to create
Page |3
a backdoor on your computer that gives malicious users access to your system, possibly allowing
confidential or personal information to be compromised. Unlike viruses and worms, Trojans do not
reproduce by infecting other files nor do they self-replicate.

How to protect your system

 Keep The Operating System Updated

 Use a Firewall
 Anti-virus software is crucial to preventing virus attacks, but this strategy only works if users
update their software.
 Know that the only way a virus spreads is either by launching an infected file or by booting an
infected disk. You cannot get a virus by simply being online or by reading e-mail.
 Anti-Virus Software: vast, Avira,McAfee, Nortan and many more

Firewall

A firewall is a system designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from a private network. Firewalls
can be implemented in both hardware and software, or a combination of both. All messages entering
or leaving the intranet pass through the firewall, which examines each message and blocks those that
do not meet the specified security criteria.

Hardware and Software Firewalls:

Firewalls can be either hardware or software but the ideal firewall configuration will consist of both.
Hardware firewalls can be purchased as a stand-alone product but are also typically found in
broadband routers, and should be considered an important part of your system and network set-up.
Most hardware firewalls will have a minimum of four network ports to connect other computers, but for
larger networks, business networking firewall solutions are available.

Page |4
Common Firewall Techniques:
There are several types of firewall techniques that will prevent potentially harmful information from
getting through:

1. Packet Filter
Looks at each packet entering or leaving the network and accepts or rejects it based on user-defined
rules. Packet filtering is fairly effective and transparent to users, but it is difficult to configure. In
addition, it is susceptible to IP spoofing.

2. Application Gateway
Applies security mechanisms to specific applications, such as FTP and Telnet servers. This is very
effective, but can impose a performance degradation.

3. Circuit-level Gateway
Applies security mechanisms when a TCP or UDPconnection is established. Once the connection
has been made, packets can flow between the hosts without further checking.

4. Proxy Server
Intercepts all messages entering and leaving the network. The server effectively hides the true
network addresses.
In practice, many firewalls use two or more of these techniques in concert. A firewall is
considered a first line of defense in protecting private information.

Cyber Crime

Cybercrime encompasses any criminal act dealing with computers and networks (called hacking).
Additionally, cybercrime also includes traditional crimes conducted through the Internet. For example;
hate crimes, telemarketing and Internet fraud, identity theft, and credit card account thefts are
considered to be cybercrimes when the illegal activities are committed through the use of a computer
and the Internet.

Page |5
Computer as a target
These crimes are committed by a selected group of criminals. Unlike crimes using the computer as a
tool, these crimes require the technical knowledge of the perpetrators. There are numerous crimes of
this nature committed daily on the internet:
Crimes that primarily target computer networks or devices include:
 Computer viruses
 Denial-of-service attacks
 Malware (malicious code)

Computer Ethics

Computer Ethics is set of moral principles that regulate the use of computers. Some common issues
of computer ethics include intellectual property rights (such as copyrighted electronic content), privacy
concerns, and how computers affect society.

1. You shall not use a computer to harm other people.

2. You shall not interfere with other people's computer work.
3. You shall not snoop around in other people's computer files.
4. You shall not use a computer to steal.
5. You shall not use a computer to bear false witness
6. You shall not copy or use proprietary software for which you have not paid.
7. You shall not use other people's computer resources without authorization or proper
compensation.
8. You shall not appropriate other people's intellectual output.
9. You shall think about the social consequences of the program you are writing or the system
you are designing.
10. You shall always use a computer in ways that ensure consideration and respect for your fellow
humans.

Page |6
Hackers and Crackers

A hacker is a person intensely interested in the arcane and recondite workings of any computer
operating system. Hackers are most often programmers. As such, hackers obtain advanced
knowledge of operating systems and programming languages. They might discover holes within
systems and the reasons for such holes. Hackers constantly seek further knowledge, freely share
what they have discovered, and never intentionally damage data.

A cracker is one who breaks into or otherwise violates the system integrity of remote machines with
malicious intent. Having gained unauthorized access, crackers destroy vital data, deny legitimate
users service, or cause problems for their targets. Crackers can easily be identified because their
actions are malicious.

1. A white hat hacker breaks security for non-malicious reasons, perhaps to test their own
security system

2. A "black hat" hacker is a hacker who "violates computer security for little reason beyond
maliciousness or for personal gain"

3. A grey hat hacker lies between a black hat and a white hat hacker. A grey hat hacker may surf
the Internet and hack into a computer system for the sole purpose of notifying the administrator
that their system has a security defect,

4. A social status among hackers, elite is used to describe the most skilled.
5. A blue hat hacker is someone outside computer security consulting firms who is used to bug-
test a system prior to its launch, looking for exploits so they can be closed

CyberLaw

Cyber means the use of Internet technologies and computers it includes computers, networks,
software, data storage devices, Internet, websites, emails, ATM machines etc. To protect the
cybercrime over Internet, this law is Passed to protect the Internet cybercrime. This law is approved
by the government.

Page |7
Cyber law Includes:

1. Cybercrimes
2. Electronic and Digital Signatures
3. Intellectual Property
4. Data protection and privacy

Importance of Cyber Law: Companies now be able to carry out electronic commerce using the legal
infrastructure provided by the Act allows Government to issue notification on the web thus heralding
e-governance Protect Computer fraud and Unauthorized access. Consumers are now increasingly
using credit cards for shopping. Most people are using email, cell phones and SMS messages for
communication as well as Deal with Internet Banking Transactions.

Backup and Restore

Backup and Restore (formerly Windows Backup and Restore Center) is a component of Microsoft
Windows introduced in Windows Vista and included in later versions that allows users to create
backups and restore from backups.

There are two different types of backup supported: File backup and system image.

1. File backups are saved to ZIP files. Two methods of file backup are supported: The first,
normal backup, stores everything selected for backup. The second, incremental backup stores
only files that are changed after a previous backup.
2. System image: The image-based full system backup option, called Complete PC Backup in
Windows Vista or system image in Windows 7, allows for the imaging of the entire system
including operating system and data volumes. The backed up image can later be restored
through the Windows Recovery Environment either to the same computer or to a new
computer of different brand and type.

Page |8
To back up your files

1. Open Backup and Restore by clicking the Start button , clicking Control Panel,
clicking System and Maintenance, and then clicking Backup and Restore.

2. Do one of the following:

 If you've never used Windows Backup before, click Set up backup, and then follow the
steps in the wizard.
 If you've created a backup before, you can wait for your regularly scheduled backup to
occur, or you can manually create a new backup by clicking Back up now.

Restore files from a backup

1. Open Backup and Restore by clicking the Start button , clicking Control Panel,
clicking System and Maintenance, and then clicking Backup and Restore.

2. Do one of the following:

 To restore your files, click Restore my files.

 To restore the files of all users, click Restore all users' files. If you're prompted for an
administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.

SUMMARY

1. A threat, in the context of computer security, refers to anything that has the potential to cause
serious harm to a computer system.

2. Computer Virus are nothing but computer program that do unwanted things with your computer
resources e.g. you are working on PC and you are repeatedly receiving annoying message.
3. Viruses are of many types like Email viruses, Trojan Horse, Worm, ILOVEYOU.
4. We can protect our system by Keeping The Operating System Updated, Use a Firewall,
Anti-virus software is crucial to preventing virus attacks, but this strategy only works if users
update their software.
5. A firewall is a system designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from a private network.
Firewalls can be implemented in both hardware and software, or a combination of both.
6. Common Firewall techniques are Packet Filter, Application Gateway, Circuit-level Gateway,
Circuit-level Gateway, and Proxy Server.

Page |9
 7. Any criminal act dealing with computers and networks (called hacking). Additionally, cybercrime also
includes traditional crimes conducted through the Internet referred to as Cyber Crime.
8. Computer Ethics is set of moral principles that regulate the use of computers.
9. A hacker is a person intensely interested in the arcane and recondite workings of any
computer operating system. Hackers are most often programmers.
10. A cracker is one who breaks into or otherwise violates the system integrity of remote
machines with malicious intent.
11. Cyber means the use of Internet technologies and computers it includes computers, networks,
software, data storage devices, Internet, websites, emails, ATM machines etc.
12. Backup and Restore (formerly Windows Backup and Restore Center) is a component of
Microsoft Windows introduced in Windows Vista and included in later versions that allows
users to create backups and restore from backups.
13. Two different types of backup supported: File backup and system image.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks:

i. ____________ has the potential to cause serious harm to a computer system.

ii. A threat can be ____________ and ___________.
iii. ____________Uses computer networks and security holes to replicate itself.
iv. ____________program can erase your hard disk.
v. Computer viruses were first widely seen in the late___________.
vi. Crime conducted with internet called ____________.
vii. ____________ is one who breaks into or otherwise violates the system integrity of
remote machines with malicious intent.
viii. File backup and System image are two ___________________methods.

P a g e | 10
B. Find true or false:
i. Computer viruses are nothing but computer program that do unwanted things.
ii. A hacker is hacking software which access in sensitive information from your
computer.
iii. Backup and Restore is a component of Microsoft Windows.
iv. Cyber means the use of internet technologies and computers.
v. We shall use a computer to harm other people is one of the ethics of computer.

C. Short answer questions:

i. What is threat in computer?
ii. Give one difference between Trojan Horse and worms?
iii. What is Firewall in windows?
iv. List two ethics of computer?
v. Give one difference between Hackers and Crackers?
vi. Why we need Backup?
vii. What are the types of Backup? Write name of each.
viii. What do you mean by Restore? How it is helpful for you?

P a g e | 11
Lesson-2
Hyper Text Markup Language (HTML)
HTML:
You will learn
HTML is the building block for web pages.
Prerequisites: You will need a text editor,
such as Notepad and an Internet browser,  Heading (H1 to H6)
 <Br>, <hr>
such as Internet Explorer or Netscape. ,<comment>
 Background Color
,font tag(size, face,
What is an html File? color)
 Text alignment
i. HTML is a format that tells a computer
(center, left , right)
how to display a web page.
ii. An HTML file is a text file containing
small markup tags
iii. The markup tags tell the Web browser
how to display the page
iv. An HTML file must have an htm or html
file extension

What are HTML tags?

i. HTML tags are used to mark-up HTML elements.
ii. HTML tags are surrounded by the two characters< and >.
iii. HTML tags normally come in pairs like <b> and </b>.
iv. The first tag in a pair is the start tag, the second tag is the end tag.
v. HTML tags are not case sensitive,<b> means the same as <B>.

P a g e | 12
Tag Description

<html> This tag marks the start of an html document

<head>...</head>This tag represents the document's header which can keep other HTML tags like
<title>, <link> etc.

<title> The <title>tag is used inside the <head> tag to mention the document title.

<body> This tag represents the document's body which keeps all the contents of a web page- text,
images, sound etc.

<Hn> This tag represents the heading tags of different sizes.

Where n is the number start from 1…6
Like <H1>,<H2>……..<H6>

<center> This tag is used to write a line or text in center

<p>This tag represents a paragraph.

<p align=left/right/center>This tag is used to write paragraph alignment in html.

<br> This tag is used to insert new line or insert enter in html

Bold, Italics, Underline :<b> tag is used to make a text bold in html.

<i>tag is used to make a text italics in html.

<u>tag is used to make a text underlined in html.

P a g e | 13
Background color and text color: <body bgcolor ="yellow" > tag is used to change the
background color of an html page and <body text=”red”> changes text color.

How to create webpages?

1.click Start-> All Programs->Accessories. Open notepad and type the code given below

<html>

<head>

<title>My First Webpage

</title>

</head>

<body>

<center><h1> Webpage </h1></center>

This is my first homepage.

<b>This text is bold</b>

<i>This line is in italics text. </i>

<u>This line is in underline text. </u>

<br>This is the 1st line.

<br>This is the 2nd line.

</body>

</html>

2. Click File, Click Save as

3.Type a Name of your webpage dot html.e.g.: -mypage.html
P a g e | 14
4. Open the Place where you saved your file. Double click on the file.

Assignment Question

Q. Write the code to create the following Webpage with background color ‘green’ and text color ‘red’

My School
Im a student of K.V,NFR Maligaon. I read in class 7.

<html>

<head>

<title>My Webpage

</title>

</head>

<body bgcolor ="yellow" text=”red”>

<center><h1> My School </h1></center>

<p align=left>Im a student of K.V,NFR Maligaon. I read in class 7. </p>

</body>

</html>

Q. Write an html code to show the working of various Paragraph alignment tags

P a g e | 15
<html>

<head>

<title>

Paragraph in html

</title>

</head>

<body>

This is an html document.

<p align=left>This is a left paragraph in html </p>

<p align=right>This is a right paragraph in html </p>

<p align=center>This is a center paragraph in html </p>

</body>

</html>

Inserting Images in Webpage:

We can insert images to our Html pages to make it look more beautiful. <img> tag is used to insert
images in webpage. There are two ways to insert images in a webpage:

1. Internal:

Steps: 1. Open My Pictures or Sample Pictures or any folder containing pictures Copy the
picture you want

2. Create a folder on the Desktop or in My Documents

3.Open the Folder, and paste the Picture.

4.Rightclick, and click new and click text document.

P a g e | 16
 5.Open the text document and type the code given below.

<html>

<head>

<title>

Webpage with Pictures

</title>

</head>

<body bgcolor="yellow">

<imgsrc=Name of image.jpg>

</body></html>

4.Save the file giving a name with dot html(mypage.html).

5.Openthe webpage using browser

2. External: Here we type the location or address of the picture where it is, instead of simply
writing the name of the picture.

Steps:

1.Open a text document and type the code given below.

<html>

<head>

P a g e | 17
 <title>

Webpage with Pictures

</title>

</head>

<body bgcolor="yellow">

<imgsrc=c:\Windows\Web\Wallpaper\Name of image.jpg>

</body>

</html>

2.Save the file giving a name with dot html(mypage.html).

3.Open the webpage using browser

To insert images with adjusted height and width: We can change the width and height of the
inserted image in our webpage by simply writing the ‘width’ and ‘height’ options inside the <img> tag

<imgsrc=Name of image.jpg width=50 height=50>

SUMMARY

1. HTML is a format that tells a computer how to display a web page; it is the building block for
web pages.
2. HTML tags normally come in pairs like <b> and </b>.
3. <html> This tag marks the start of an html document
4. <head>...</head>This tag represents the document's header which can keep other HTML tags
like <title>, <link> etc.
5. <title> The <title>tag is used inside the <head> tag to mention the document title.
6. <body> This tag represents the document's body which keeps all the contents of a web page-
text, images, sound etc.
7. <h1> ,<h2>,……<h6>This tag represents the heading tags of different sizes.

P a g e | 18
 8. <center> This tag is used to write a line or text in center
9. <p>This tag represents a paragraph.
10. <img> tag is used to insert images in webpage

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. _____________ is the building block of HTML
ii. HTML document must have .html or ___________ extensions.
iii. _____________tag is used to write line or text in center.
iv. _____________tag is used to set paragraph.
v. To insert image ___________tag is used.

B. Find true or false

i. HTML tags are case sensitive.
ii. <h1><h2>……..<h6> tags represent heading tags of different size.
iii. <p> tag is used to insert new line or insert enter in HTML.
iv. <img> tag is used to insert images in webpage.
v. <B> tag is used to make text italics.

C. Short answer question

i. What is HTML?
ii. Name any two attributes used with the BODY tag.?
iii. Write the HTML code to set the background color to yellow.?
iv. How would you insert image in an Html document?
v. What does the ‘n’ in the <Hn> tag indicate?

P a g e | 19
In the lab

1. Ankita has made the HTML document shown below, which displays headings in different
Sizes. Write the HTML code for creating a similar document.

2. Anita wants to create simple Web page on Input devices. Help her by listing the steps required
for creating the web page.

P a g e | 20
Lesson-3
HTML LISTS You will learn

Lists in HTML  Paragraph formatting Tags

 List Tags
1. Unordered Lists- An unordered list has no  Order (start and type
attribute) and Un order
specific numbering or ordering. It starts with
List
the<ul> tag. Each list item starts with the <li>  Background Image and
tag.Example: Create the following List in HTML other Image Insertion in
Web Page with alignment
<html>  Creation of table
 Anchor Tag
<head>  Hyper Link
<title>

Unordered list

</title>

<head>

<body>

<h2><b>Unordered List with Bullets</b></h2>

<ul>
Unordered List with Bullets
<li>Coffee</li>
I like to drink the following:
<li>Tea</li>
 Coffee
<li>Milk</li>
 Tea
</ul>  Milk

</body>

</html>

Unordered list styling- <ul style="list-style-type:circle"> OR <ul style="list-style-type:square">

P a g e | 21
 11. Ordered Lists- An ordered list can be numerical or alphabetical in a specific order.

Example: Create the following List in HTML

<html>
Ordered List with Numbers
<head>
I like to drink the following:
<title>
1. Coffee
Ordered list 2. Tea
3. Milk
</title>

</head>

<body>

<h2><b>Ordered List with Numbers</b></h2>

<ol>

<li>Coffee</li>

<li>Tea</li>

<li>Milk</li>

</ol>

</body>

</html>

Ordered list styling- To change the starting number from default 1 to any number we use the ‘start’
option.

To Change from numbers to alphabet or to roman numbers we use the ‘type’ option.

Example: <ol start="10” type=i >

x. Coffee
<li>Coffee</li> xi. Tea
xii. Milk
<li>Milk</li>

P a g e | 22
 </ol>

TABLES IN HTML:
HTML tables allow web authors to arrange data like text, images, links, other tables, etc. into rows
and columns of cells. The HTML tables are created using the <table> tag in which
the <tr> tag is used to create table rows and <td> tag is used to create data cells.

Example: Create the following List in HTML

Month Saving
January $100
February $75

<html>
<head>
<title>
Table in html
</title>
</head>
<body>
<table>
<tr>
<td>Month</td>
<td>Savings</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>January</td>

P a g e | 23
 <td>$100</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>February</td>
<td>$75</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>

1. Table Border:We add border option in <table> tag i.e.<table border=”1”>

2. Bordercolor: It specifies the color of the table’s border.

Syntax: <table border=3 bordercolor=red>

3. Cellspacing:It is the space between cells.

4. Cellpadding: It is the distance between cell border and the cell

contents.

Syntax: <table border=3 bordercolor=redcellspacing=10 cellpadding=10>

5. Background: It is used to give image in the background. This attribute takes URL of the file as its
value.

Syntax: <table background=”path”

6. Bgcolor:It is used to give colour in the background of the table.

Syntax: <table bgcolor=”red”>

7. Height and Width:These attributes are used to specify the height and width of the table in pixel

Syntax: <table height=200 width=300 >

ROWSPAN AND COLSPAN ATTRIBUTES OF TABLE TAG

P a g e | 24
Stretching a cell over multiple rows or columns is refered to as spanning. Two or more adjacent rows
can be combined together to form a single row using the rowspan attribute. Two or more adjacent
columns can be combined together to form a single columns using the colspan attribute.

<html>

<Table border=1>

<caption> PRICE LIST</caption>

<tr><thcolspan=2>Activity Name</th><th>Monthly Charges</th></tr>

<tr><td rowspan=2>INDOOR Activities</td><td>Indian Dance</td><td>Rs.

250</td></tr>

<tr><td>Dramatics</td><td>Rs. 350</td></tr>

<tr><td rowspan=2>OUTDOOR Activities</td><td>Skating</td><td>Rs.

150</td></tr>

<tr><td>Horse Riding</td><td>Rs. 400</td></tr>

</Table>

</html>

Output :-

P a g e | 25
Anchor Tag:
The ‘a’ or anchor tag. Hyperlinks, or links, are how you move around the web. An <a> or anchor tag is
how you make hyperlinks in HTML. The ‘a’ or anchor tag is an elegantly simple and powerful tool.
There are two ways two insert hyperlinks in html:
1. Internal link –
Steps: 1. Open My Pictures or Sample Pictures or any folder containing pictures or songs or any
file, Copy the file you want

2. Create a folder on the Desktop or in My Documents

3.Open the Folder, and paste the file.

4.Right click, and click new and click text document.

5.Open the text document and type the code given below.

<html>

<head>

<title>

Links in HTML

</title>

</head>

<body>

<p><a href=Name of the file. extension>Click here to download</a></p>

P a g e | 26
 </body>

</html>

4.Save the file giving a name with dot html(mypage.html).

5.Open the webpage using browser.

2. External: Here we type the location or address of the picture or file where it is, instead of
simply writing the name of the picture.

Steps:

1.Open a text document and type the code given below.

<html>

<head>

<title>

Webpage with Pictures

</title>

</head>

<body>

<p><a href=c:\User\Name of the file. extension>Click here to download</a></p>

P a g e | 27
 </body>

</html>

4.Save the file giving a name with dot html(mypage.html).

5.Open the webpage using browser

To open webpages using hyperlinks: We can open different webpages by simply clicking on a
hyperlink by providing the address of the webpage using <a> tag

<a href="http://www.yahoo.com">Visit Yahoo</a>

To change HTML Link Color: We can change the color of the hyperlinks by using the following
options in the <body> tag.

link="color" For the a page that hasn't been to visited yet

vlink="color" For the visited link color
alink="color" For the active link color

<body link="blue" alink="blue" vlink="red">

SUMMARY

1. Each list item starts with the <li> tag.

2. In HTML List are of three types Ordered list, Unordered list, Definition list.
3. An ordered list can be numerical or alphabetical in a specific order.
4. An unordered list has no specific numbering or ordering. It starts with the <ul> tag.
5. HTML tables allow web authors to arrange data like text, images, links, other tables, etc. into
rows and columns of cells.
6. HTML tables are created using the <table> tag.
7. In HTML <tr> tag is used to create table rows and <td> tag is used to create data cells.
8. Cellspacing is the space between the cells.
9. Cellpadding is the distance between cell border and the cell contents.
10. Stretching a cell over multiple rows or columns is refered to as spanning.

P a g e | 28
 11. Two or more adjacent rows can be combined together to form a single row using the rowspan
attribute.
12. Two or more adjacent columns can be combined together to form a single columns using the
colspan attribute.
13. An <a> or anchor tag is how you make hyperlinks in HTML.
14. There are two ways two insert hyperlinks in html : Internal Link, External Link.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. __________list can be numerical or alphabetical in a specific order.
ii. Each list item should start with_____________tag.
iii. We can create table in HTML by using___________tag.
iv. __________tag is used to create table row whereas ___________tag is used to create
Data cells.
v. Space between the cells is_____________.
vi. ___________is the distance between the cell border and the cell content.

B. Find true or false

i. We use Table border to change the color of border.
ii. Background is to give image in the background.
iii. <A HREF=”Lotus.html”> here ‘A’ stands for anchor tag.
iv. HREF attribute is used to set URL of the page.
v. <TD> tag is used to create table row.

C. Short Answer Questions

i. What is List in HTML?
ii. What are the types of List in HTML?
iii. Give one difference between Ordered list with Unordered list.?
iv. What is cellpadding?
P a g e | 29
 v. Give one difference between rowspan with colspan.?
vi. What is cellspacing?
vii. What is the use of <A> tag in HTML? Give syntax.
viii. List four attributes of <A> tag.
ix. What are the types of Hyperlink?
x. Identify the error in code given below:
<imgsrc=”mypage.html”

In the lab

1. The student of Lotus Public School wants to create the following web page related to the
outdoor activities help them to create the code in HTML.

2. Create your class time table with class teacher name using <TABLE> in HTML , You are free to
use colors of your own choice.

3. Anita is trying to create two web pages computer.html and definition.html where computer.html
is the name and are linked to definition.html. She wants that a click on name and it should

P a g e | 30
 display the web page definition.html. Try this assignment to yourself to see whether you get
output correctly.

Lesson-4
Photoshop Introduction

Desktop publishing
You will learn

 DTP and its softwares

Desktop publishing (DTP) is the creation of documents  Starting Photoshop
 Tool Palette
using page layout skills on a personal computer. Desktop  How to create a new file
 How to save a file
publishing software can generate layouts and produce  How to open an Existing
file
typographic quality text and images comparable to traditional  How to use Photoshop
tools
typography and printing. This technology allows individuals, Using Layers
 Learning Layer Basics
businesses, and other organizations to self-publish a wide  Using Layers palette
 Rearranging Layers
range of printed matter.  Applying a Layer Style
 Flattening and saving files
DTP skills and software used for common paper

and book publishing are sometimes used to create graphics

for point of sale displays, promotional items, trade show

exhibits, retail package designs and outdoor signs.

P a g e | 31
DTP applications - List of desktop publishing software.

Adobe Frame Maker, Adobe Home Publisher, Adobe

Illustrator, Adobe InDesign, Adobe PageMaker

Adobe Photoshop, CorelDraw, Microsoft PowerPoint

PHOTOSHOP
An image editing software developed
and manufactured by Adobe Systems
Inc. Photoshop is considered one of the
leaders in photo editing software. The
software allows users to manipulate,
crop, resize, and correct color on digital
photos. The software is particularly
popular amongst professional
photographers and graphic designers.

Tool Palette:

P a g e | 32
CREATING A NEW DOCUMENT: To create a new document you choose Menu >File >New. This
opens a window that requires some input:

• Size…We will use 8 inches by 11 inches

• Background…We will use white.
• Resolution…We will use 150.
NOTE: Resolution specs
Web Resolution = 72
Print resolution = 150 or 300
Film Resolution = 600

Steps:
1. Menu > File > New
2. Put in a Size ( 8 inch by 11 inch)
3. Background is White
4. Resolution is 150 this time.

SAVE DOCUMENT AND THE FORMAT

Formats:
1. .PSD Thisis the Photoshop format and it preserves layers.
P a g e | 33
 2. .JPG Thisis for the web and is used for graphics on the web.
3. .GIF Thisis also for the web but is best for text.
4. .TFF Agreat cross platform format that preserves all quality for printing.
5. .PCT Anothergood format for print and cross platform.

Steps:
1. Open Photoshop
2. Click File >Open navigate to document, click once on it, click OK.
3. Next let us perform some editing on the image or document
4. Next save it as Work.jpg on the desktop or any other folder
5. Click> File > Save As Change name, navigate to desired save location, Click OK

OPENING A FILE: Opening a file is easy, just do Menu > File > Open…Navigate to the file and
highlight it, then click OK.
Steps:
1. Open Photoshop
2. click File > Open >navigate to document, click once on it

How to use Photoshop tools

Solarize an image
P a g e | 34
1. Open an image on your canvas click File>Open and browse the image you want to open.
2. Click on Filter>Stylize>Solarize.
3. Click on OK

Painting Effect

1. Open an image
2. Click on Filter>Brush Stroke>Spatter. Give the values as follows: Spatter, Spray Radius - 10,
Smoothness - 5.

3. Next, click on Filter>Blur>Blur.

4. Click on OK and here is your result.

Cross-Stitch Effect

1. Open a new file.

2. Go to Filter>Texture>Patchwork. A new window opens; give the values Square Size - 5 and
Relief - 6.
3. Click on OK and here is your result.

REDUCING AN IMAGE SIZE

1. Open an image on your canvas by clicking on File>Open and browse for the image you want
to open.
2. click image, click image size-width 2cm, height 2cm (as given in online instruction)
3. click file save as, click save, enter the quality value to reduce the size
4. Save the photo.

Creating Photo Collage

1. Step 1. Open the image that will be your background or use any texture in Photoshop

Note: To use texture: click file->new, then click layer->new fill layer.

2. Step 2. Click File, click Place and select the image

P a g e | 35
 3. Step 3. Resize the Image and move it position, right click and select place.

4. Step 4. Click File, click Place and select another image…Repeat step 3.

5. Step 5. Click layer->layer style, then click stroke or outer glow. To make it look attractive

Layers

Learning Layer Basics

One of the most useful features of applications like Photoshop is the ability to work with layers.
Layers allow you to have several pieces of images in the same file, which can be arranged on top of
each other to create a complete image.

Using Layers palette

P a g e | 36
Creating new Layers: From the Layers menu select New
and then Layer

Rearranging Layers: The stacking order is determined by the order in the layer’s palette. In the

layer’s palette, drag the circle layer so that it is above the rectangle layer.

Blending Layers/Layer Style

Once you have an image with more than one layer, the layers can be
blended together in a variety of ways. One way is to use modes. By
default, a layer will block out any sections of layers that it covers.
Blending modes allow you to combine layers in a variety of ways. Another
way is to use layer transparency settings to simply make a layer partially
transparent. A layer mask can also be used to hide parts of a layer a bit more selectively.

Select the Circle layer. Locate the Opacity option on the layer’s palette. To use this option, you
can either click the arrow and drag the slider or you can enter amounts in the box. Higher amounts
mean the layer will be more opaque. Lower amounts mean the layer will be more transparent.

Flattening and saving files

When you finish editing all the layers in your image, you can merge or flatten layers to reduce the file
size. Flattening combines all the layers into a single background layer. However, you cannot edit
layers once you’ve flattened them, so you shouldn’t flatten an image until you are certain that you’re
P a g e | 37
satisfied with all your design decisions. Rather than flattening your original PSD files, it’s a good idea
to save a copy of the file with its layers intact, in case you need to edit a layer later.

NOTE: If the sizes do not appear in the status bar, click the status bar pop-up menu arrow, and
choose Show > Document Sizes.

SUMMARY

1. Desktop publishing (DTP) is the creation of documents using page layout skills on a personal
computer.
2. Adobe Frame Maker, Adobe Home Publisher, Adobe Illustrator, Adobe InDesign, Adobe
PageMaker and Adobe Photoshop these all are DTP applications.
3. An image editing software developed and manufactured by Adobe Systems Inc. Photoshop is
considered one of the leaders in photo editing software.
4. .PSD, .JPG, .GIF, .TFF,.PCT these all are different Photoshop formats.
5. Layers allow you to have several pieces of images in the same file, which can be arranged on
top of each other to create a complete image.

EXERCISES
A. Fill in the blanks
i. DTP means_____________________
ii. Corel Draw is an example of________________.
iii. Photoshop support____________________formats.
iv. ____________allows you to have several pieces of images in the same file.
v. ____________is for the web but is best for text.

B. Find true or false

P a g e | 38
 i. DTP allows you to have several pieces of images in the same file.
ii. .TFF format is good format for print and cross platform.
iii. Photoshop is considered one of the leaders in photo editing software.
iv. By default, a layer blocks out any sections of layers that it covers.

C. Short Answer Question:

i. What are layers?
ii. What do you mean by DTP?
iii. Give two example of DTP applications.?
iv. What are the Photoshop formats?

In the lab

1. Sunita wants to reduce the image size in Photoshop but she could not achieve it. Can you help
her to?

2. Create Photo Collage of your friends using Photoshop.

P a g e | 39
Lesson-5
Photoshop (Continued)
You will learn
Rectangular Marquee Tool
The rectangular marquee tool counts among the most Rectangular Marquee
 Elliptical Marquee
often tools in Photoshop. Whether it’s making a selection,  Single column Marquee
cropping out an image, or adding a color fill, you’ll frequently  Single Row Marquee
Lasso
find yourself turning to the marquee tool. The marquee tool  Polygonal Lasso
itself offers four options:  Magnetic Lasso
 Quick Selection
 Magic Wand
Crop and Slice tools
 Crop
 slice
 Slice Select
Measuring tools
 Eyedropper
 color Sampler
 Ruler
Rectangular marquee tool: Used to create rectangular/  Note
square selections  Count
Retouching tools
Single column marquee tool: Creates a 1-pixel wide  Spot Healing Brush
selection that spans the height of the image  Healing Brush
 Patch
Single row marquee tool: Creates a 1-pixel high selection  Red Eye
that spans the width of the image  Magic Eraser
 Blur
Elliptical marquee tool: Used to create elliptical/circular  Sharpen
 Smudge
P a g e | 40
 Dodge
 Burn
Sponge
selections

Practical use of some Tools

Rectangular Marquee Tool

1. Start by opening any image in Photoshop

2. Select the rectangular marquee tool. It will be the second icon from the top in the
toolbox on the left.
3. If you click and hold on this icon, you should be able to see the rest of the three
selection options (elliptical, single row and single column).
4. With the rectangular marquee tool selected, click and drag a box around any part of the
image (in this case, the otter’s head).
5. The blinking black and white lines indicate that a selection has been made.
We can now modify this selection as per our requirements.
6. If you hit ENTER, Photoshop will crop out the rest of the image.

Lasso Tool :

The lasso tool creates a custom, free-hand selection. It is usually used to cut out, or
select specific sections of a pre-existing picture. Access the lasso tool by clicking on the
icon located on the tool bar, or press the keyboard shortcut

Polygonal Lasso
The Polygonal Lasso tool is handy for selecting objects with many
angles because it draws only straight lines; you simply click when
you want to change directions.

P a g e | 41
Magnetic Lasso
Magnetic Lasso Tool is an edge detection tool, meaning that it actively searches for the edge
of the object as you are moving around it, then snaps the selection outline to the edge and
clings to it like a magnet!

Quick Selection
The Quick Selection Tool is somewhat similar to the Magic Wand
in that it also selects pixels based on tone and color. However,
the Quick Selection Tool goes far beyond the Magic Wand's
limited abilities by also looking for similar textures in the image,
which makes it great at detecting the edges of objects. And unlike
the Magic Wand where we click on an area and hope for the
best, the Quick Selection Tool works more like a brush, allowing us to select areas simply by
"painting" over them
Magic Wand
The Magic Wand tool (W) also creates selections based on color (its icon looks like a wizard’s
wand). Click once on the color, you want to select and Photoshop grabs all the contiguous pixels that
are similarly colored

Practical use of some Tools

Magic Wand tool

P a g e | 42
 1. Choose the Magic Wand tool
2. On the Options bar:
 Choose a Tolerance value (use the scrubby slider) to control the range of colors the tool
selects (for a starting value, try between 30 and 40).
 Check Anti-alias to allow the tool to add semitransparent pixels along the edges of the
color areas it detects. This will produce smoother edge transitions for your image edits.
 Check Contiguous to limit the selection to areas that are connected to the first pixel you
click, or uncheck this option to allow the tool to select similarly colored, noncontiguous
(unconnected) areas throughout the image with the same click.
 To select possible occurrences of a similar color on all visible layers, check Sample All
Layers, or uncheck this option to select colors on just the current layer.
3. Click a color in the image.

Magnetic Lasso tool

1. Select the Magnetic Lasso tool.

2. Specify one of the selection options in the options bar.

Selection options

A. New B. Add To C. Subtract From D. Intersect With

3. (Optional) Set feathering and anti-aliasing in the options bar.

4. Set any of these options:

Width

To specify a detection width, enter a pixel value for Width

Contrast

P a g e | 43
 To specify the lasso’s sensitivity to edges in the image, enter a
value between 1% and 100% for Contrast

Frequency

To specify the rate at which the lasso sets fastening points, enter
a value between 0 and 100 for Frequency.

Stylus Pressure

If you are working with a stylus tablet, select or deselect the Stylus
Pressure option. When the option is selected, an increase in stylus
pressure decreases the edge width.

5. Click in the image to set the first fastening point. Fastening points anchor the
selection border in place.

6. Release the mouse button or keep it pressed, and then move the
pointer along the edge you want to trace.

7. When your starting and ending points the portion will be selected

Crop and Slice tools

Crop
The Crop tool (C) lets you trim distracting elements from the edges of your image, as well as
change the size of your image. Simply use it to draw a box around the part of the image you
want to keep and then press Enter to delete everything outside the box.
slice
The Slice tool allows you to divide an image into smaller sections, which fit together like a
jigsaw (but with straight edges). There are two tools: Slice (which creates the slices) and Slice
Select (which enables you to select and modify existing slices).

Slice Select

P a g e | 44
 Select your image slices and adjust the size of the slices by moving the handles. Hold down
the Shift key to select multiple slices at once.

Practical use of some Tools

Photoshop Slice Tool

1. Select the slice tool in the toolbox.

2. Click and drag over the area you wish to make into a slice.
3. Release the mouse button –
4. Using the slice select tool, you can move and resize slices by dragging inside a
slice, or by dragging the handles.
5. Click File > Save for Web from the Photoshop menu. When you save the file, you
will have the option to save the images and/or a new HTML page to contain the
images.

Crop a photo

1. From the toolbar, select the Crop Tool .

2. Draw a new cropping area or drag the corner and edge handles to
specify the crop boundaries in your photo.

3. (Optional) Specify the Crop options using the Control bar.

P a g e | 45
 A. Aspect Ratio Menu B. Swap Width and Height Values C.
Overlay Options
Size and proportions
Choose a ratio or size for the crop box. You can also choose a preset, enter your own, or even
define your own preset values for later use.

Overlay Options
Choose a view to display overlay guides while cropping. Guides such as Rule of Thirds,
Grid, and Golden Ratio are available.

4. Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac OS) to crop the photo.

Measuring tools

Eyedropper
The Eyedropper tool samples color to designate a new
foreground or background color. You can sample from the
active image or from anywhere else on the screen.

color Sampler
Color Sampler Tool allows you to view color values in defined
spots of your image:

1. In the Toolbox, select the Color Sampler Tool.

2. Click on the image where you want to set the first sampler.
3. You can set up to 4 color samplers on your image.
4. In the Options bar, you can change sample size (sampler's range).
5. You can move samplers with Color Sampler Tool to any other spot to read color values
from.

Ruler

P a g e | 46
 The Ruler tool helps you position images or elements precisely. The Ruler tool calculates the
distance between any two points in the workspace. When you measure from one point to another, a
nonprinting line is drawn,

The options bar and Info panel show the following information:

 The starting location (X and Y)

 The horizontal (W) and vertical (H) distances traveled from the x and y axes
 The angle measured relative to the axis (A)
 The total length traveled (D1)
 The two lengths traveled (D1 and D2), when you use a protractor

Note
Like post-it notes, but digital. You can use this tool to add small little note boxes to your image.
Count
The Count tool is used to count objects in an image. To count objects manually, you click the
image with the Count tool and Photoshop tracks the number of clicks. The count number is
displayed on the item and in the Count tool options bar. Count numbers are saved when you
save a file.
Photoshop can also automatically count multiple selected areas in an image, and
record the results in the Measurement Log panel.

Practical use of some Tools

Eyedropper tool

1. Select the Eyedropper tool.

2. In the options bar, change the sample size of the eyedropper
3. Selecting a foreground color with the Eyedropper tool
Choose one of the following from the Sample menu:
 All Layers: Samples color from all layers in the document.
 Current Layer: Samples color from the currently active layer.

P a g e | 47
 4. Do one of the following:
a. To select a new foreground color, click in the image.
b. To select a new background color, Alt-click (Windows) in the image. Or position
the pointer over the image, press Alt-click (Windows) press the mouse button,
and drag anywhere on the screen.

Color Sampler Tool

1. In the Toolbox, select the Color Sampler Tool.

2. Click on the image where you want to set the first sampler.
3. You can set up to 4 color samplers on your image.
4. In the Options bar, you can change sample size (sampler's range).
5. You can move samplers with Color Sampler Tool to any other spot to read color values
from.

Ruler tool

Measure between two points

1. Select the Ruler tool. (If the Ruler is not visible, hold down the Eyedropper tool.)
2. Drag from the starting point to the ending point. Hold down the Shift key to constrain
the tool to 45° increments.
3. To create a protractor from an existing measuring line, Alt-drag (Windows) at an angle
from one end of the measuring line, or double-click the line and drag. Hold down the
Shift key to constrain the tool to multiples of 45°.

Retouching tools:
Spot Healing Brush
The spot healing brush can be used to clone areas from an image and blend the pixels from
the sampled area seamlessly with the target area. The basic principle is that the texture from
the sample area is blended with the color and luminosity surrounding wherever you paint.

The main difference between this and the standard healing brush is that the spot healing brush
requires no source point. You simply click on the blemishes you want to get rid of and the spot
healing brush works out the rest for you.
P a g e | 48
Healing Brush
The healing brush lets you sample part of the photograph and use it
to paint over another part. Once
you're finished, Photoshop will examine surrounding areas and try
to blend what you painted in with the
rest of the picture.
Patch
The patch tool uses the same complex algorithm as the healing brush to carry out its blend
calculations, but the patch tool works with selection-defined areas instead of a brush. When
the patch tool is selected, it initially operates in a lasso selection mode that can be used to
define the area to patch from or patch to
The Patch Tool retouches image using sampled pixels or pattern. It works as a
combination of the Healing Brush with the Lasso Tool
Red Eye
The undesirable effect in flash photography of people appearing to have red eyes, caused by a
reflection from the retina when the flashgun is too near the camera lens.

Magic Eraser
When you click in a layer with the Magic Eraser tool, the tool changes all similar pixels to
transparent. If you are working in a layer with locked transparency, the pixels change to the
background color. If you click in the background, it is converted to a layer and all similar pixels
change to transparent.
Blur
When you click on the blur tool your cursor turns into a circle and it acts as a paint brush. You
just paint over the part of the image you wish to blur. You can adjust the size of the brush and
the hardness (how much blur you want) at the top of your screen.

Sharpen
Sharpening enhances the definition of edges in an image. Whether your images come from a
digital camera or a scanner, most images can benefit from sharpening.
P a g e | 49
Smudge
The smudge tool is an interesting painting tool to work with because it can be used to smear
pixels the same way as one might mix paints together. The smudge tool basically smears the
pixels (rather than distort them the way the Liquefy filter does) and for best results.

Dodge
The Dodge tool lighten areas of the image. This tool is based on a
traditional darkroom technique for regulating exposure on specific
areas of a print. Photographers hold back light to lighten an area on
the print (dodging).

Burn
The Burn tool darken areas of the image. This tools is based on a
traditional darkroom technique for regulating exposure on specific
areas of a print. Photographers hold back light to increase the exposure to darken areas on a
print (burning).

Sponge
The Sponge tool on an image in suitable ways to reduce the saturation in selected areas for an
interesting effect. The Sponge tool lets you reduce the color saturation of that area to allow the
other sections of your image to come to the forefront.

SUMMARY

1. Rectangular marquee tool used to create rectangular/square selections.

2. Single column marquee tool creates a 1-pixel wide selection that spans the
height of the image
3. Single row marquee tool creates a 1-pixel high selection that spans the
width of the image
P a g e | 50
 4. Elliptical marquee tool used to create elliptical/circular selections
5. The lasso tool creates a custom, free-hand selection. It is usually used to cut out, or
select specific sections of a pre-existing picture.
6. The Polygonal Lasso tool is handy for selecting objects with many angles because it
draws only straight lines.
7. Magnetic Lasso Tool is an edge detection tool, meaning that it actively searches for
the edge of the object as you are moving around it.
8. The Crop tool (C) lets you trim distracting elements from the edges of your image, as
well as change the size of your image.
9. The Slice tool allows you to divide an image into smaller sections, which fit together like
a jigsaw (but with straight edges).
10. The Eyedropper tool samples color to designate a new foreground or background color.
11. The Ruler tool helps you position images or elements precisely. The Ruler tool
calculates the distance between any two points in the workspace.
12. The Dodge tool lighten areas of the image. This tool is based on a traditional darkroom
technique for regulating exposure on specific areas of a print.
13. The Burn tool darken areas of the image. This tools is based on a traditional darkroom
technique for regulating exposure on specific areas of a print.
14. The Sponge tool on an image in suitable ways to reduce the saturation in selected
areas for an interesting effect.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

1. ____________Marquee tool uses to create elliptical/circular selection.
2. ____________tool is an edge detection tool.
3. Single row marquee tool creates___________ high selection that spans the
width of the image.
4. __________tool lets you trim distracting element from the edges of your image.
5. __________tool help you position images or elements precisely.
6. This tool darken areas of the image_____________.
7. When you click on ___________your cursor turns into a circle and it acts as

P a g e | 51
 Paint brush.

B. Find true or false

i. Sharpen enhances the definition of edge in an image.
ii. Patch tool uses the same complex algorithm as the red eye.
iii. Count tool is used to count the objects in an image.
iv. To specify Detection width we enter a % value for width.
v. Quick selection tool is similar to magic wand tool.

C. Short Answer Questions.

i. Write the names of marquee tool present in photoshop.

ii. Write the use of Lessotool.?
iii. What is magic wand in Photoshop?
iv. Give one difference between crop and slice tool.?
v. What is Red Eye in Photoshop?
vi. Write the uses of Eyedropper in Photoshop.?
vii. What is the use of Dodge tool in Photoshop?
viii. Give one difference between Doge tool and Burn tool.?
ix. What is sponge tool?
x. What is patch in Photoshop?

In the lab

1. Using Rectangular marquee tool crop out an image in Photoshop and save it with .jpg
extension.

2. Using Eyedropper tool change the foreground/background color of an image in

Photoshop.

P a g e | 52
 3. Change the color of an object using Magic wand tool.

Lesson-6

Painting Tools in Photoshop

Painting Tools
Adobe Photoshop provides several tools for painting You will learn

and editing image color. The Brush tool and the Pencil
 Brush
tool work like traditional drawing tools applying color
 Pencil
 Color Replacement
with brush strokes. Tools like the Eraser tool, Blur tool,
 Mixer Brush
 History Brush
and Smudge tool modify the existing colors in the image.  Art History Brush
 Gradient
In the options bar for each of these painting tools, you  Paint Bucket

can set how color is applied to an image and choose from

preset brush tips.

You can save a set of brush options as a preset so you can

quickly access brush characteristics you use frequently. Photoshop includes several sample brush
presets. You can start with these presets and modify them to produce new effects. Many original
brush presets are available for

download on the web.

Healing Brush tool

1. Select the Healing Brush tool in the Tools panel (it’s a hidden tool of the Spot Healing Brush tool).

P a g e | 53
2. Find an area in the image that looks good and then Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) to
sample that area.

For example, if you want to eliminate wrinkles on a face, choose a wrinkle-free area of skin near
the wrinkle. (Try to choose an area relatively close in skin tone.)

Position the mouse cursor over the area to be repaired and start painting.
The Healing Brush tool goes into action, blending and softening to create a realistic repair of the
area.

3. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as necessary to repair the blemish, wrinkles, or scratches.

Patch Tool

There are 2 methods to retouch using sampled pixels.

Method 1:

1. In the Toolbox, select the Patch Tool.

2. Drag in (select) a damaged area with the Patch Tool(exactly like with Lasso Tool)
3. On the Options bar, choose the Source mode.
4. Drag the selection (cursor inside the selection) onto a repair-source area (movie).

Method 2:

5. Drag in a repair-source area with the Patch Tool*.

6. On the Options bar, choose the Destination mode.
7. Drag the selection (cursor inside of selection) onto a damaged area (movie).

Red eye Removal tool

1. Open up a picture in Photoshop.

2. Click and hold the bandage icon on the left side of the screen. Select the option Red Eye Tool
that slides out as an extra feature.
3. Select the area you want to correct with the Photoshop Red Eye Tool.
4. Release the area that you selected. The program will cover the pupil with a darker color.
5. Do the same for the other eye.
P a g e | 54
Magic Eraser tool

1. Select the Magic Eraser tool.

2. Do the following in the options bar:
3. Enter a tolerance value to define the range of colors that can be erased. Select Anti-
aliased to smooth the edges of the area you erase.
4. Select Contiguous to erase only pixels contiguous to the one you click, or deselect to
erase all similar pixels in the image.
5. Select Sample All Layers to sample the erased color using combined data from all
visible layers.
6. Specify an opacity to define the strength of the erasure. An opacity of 100% erases
pixels completely.
7. Click in the part of the layer you want to erase.

Blur Tool

1. In the Toolbox, select the Blur Tool.

2. Choose brush size and style.
3. Set the tool's strength.
4. Drag on the image.
5. In the Options bar, you can also specify the effect's "Mode".

Dodge tool or Burn tool

1. Select the Dodge tool or the Burn tool .

2. Choose a brush tip and set brush options in the options bar.
3. In the options bar, select one of the following from the Range menu:
 Midtones Changes the middle range of grays
 Shadows Changes the dark areas
 Highlights Changes the light areas
4. Specify the exposure for the Dodge tool or the Burn tool.

P a g e | 55
 5. Click the airbrush button to use the brush as an airbrush. Alternatively, select the Airbrush
option in the Brush panel.
6. Select the Protect Tones option to minimize clipping in the shadows and highlights. This option
also tries to keep colors from shifting hue.
7. Drag over the part of the image you want to lighten or darken.

Brush
The Brush tool is a basic painting tool. It works like a traditional drawing tool by applying the
color using strokes. It's located in the standard Tool Bar and its default shortcut is the letter B.

Pencil
The pencil tool is nothing more than a rip off from the brush tool. In
fact, all it really consists of is a 1-pixel brush tool tip. Nearly all the
same options and tools are available to the Pencil tool as are
available with the brush tool.
Color Replacement
It enables us to change the color of an object in a photo without a lot of fuss or hassle. The
Color Replacement Tool is not the most professional way to change colors in an image and will
not always give you the results you need, but it usually works well for simple tasks and it is
such an easy tool to use

Mixer Brush
The Mixer Brush creates realistic painting techniques such as mixing colors on the canvas,
combining colors on a brush, and varying paint wetness across a stroke.
The Mixer Brush has two paint wells, a reservoir and a pickup. The reservoir stores the final
color deposited onto the canvas and has more paint capacity. The pickup well receives paint
only from the canvas; its contents are continuously mixed with canvas colors.

History Brush
The History Brush tool used to apply an image area from a different state or snapshot to your
current state. Use this tool to restore a portion of an image to an earlier state, while leaving the

P a g e | 56
 rest of the modified image alone. The History Brush has an advantage over the Eraser tool
because the History Brush allows access too many blend modes.

Art History Brush

The Art History Brush tool is an interesting variation on the plain old History Brush tool. Both
tools paint over an image by using information from a previous state.

The Art History Brush tool, however, includes several choices on the Options bar that
let you apply brush-stroke effects to your image when you paint:

 Style: The Style menu contains various-shaped brush stroke styles, such as Tight Short,
Loose Medium, Dab, or Loose Curl.

 Area: This option controls the area that the paint stroke covers, independent of the
brush size you select. The larger the brush size, the more area it covers.

 Tolerance: This option adjusts the amount of the change applied to your image. A low
tolerance value lets you apply strokes anywhere in the image, regardless of color
values. A high tolerance value limits Art History strokes to areas that are very different
from the source state or snapshot, making your image less dramatically different from
the original.

Gradient
The Gradient tool creates a gradual blend between multiple colors. You can choose from
preset gradient fills or create your own.

Paint Bucket
The paint bucket tool fills an area of an image based on color similarity. Click anywhere in the
ima
ge
and

P a g e | 57
the paint bucket will fill an area around the pixel you clicked.

The exact area filled is determined by how similar each adjoining pixel is to the pixel you
clicked on. You can adjust this setting in the options toolbar by changing the tolerance value (make
sure the paint bucket tool is selected first). A low tolerance means only very similar colors will be
affected, a high tolerance means more pixels will be affected. The range is 0 (exact color matches
only) to 255 (all colors).

Practical use of some Tools

Color Replacement Tool

1. Open the image in Photoshop

2. Select The Color Replacement Tool from toolbox by clicking on brush tool.
3. You can adjust the size, hardness of the circle as you want from above
4. Increase the Tolerance value to 50% for smooth edges
5. Select the Foreground color from the color swatch
6. Color the object you want to change color

Mixer Brush

1. Select the Mixer Brush tool from the Tools panel.

2. To load color into your reservoir, Alt+click where you wish to sample that color. You can
also choose your desired Foreground color from the Tools panel.
3. Choose a brush from the Brush Presets panel.
4. Set your desired options in the Options bar.
a) Current Brush Load Swatch:
b) Load Brush after Each Stroke.
c) Blending Brush Combinations:
d) Specify percentages of Wet, Load, Mix, and Flow

P a g e | 58
 e) Sample All Layers:
5. Drag on your image to paint.

Art History Brush tool

1. Select the Art History Brush tool .

2. Do the following in the options bar:
 Choose a brush from the Brush Presets picker, and set brush options.
 Choose a blending mode from the Mode menu.
 Choose an option from the Style menu to control the shape of the paint
stroke.

3. For Area, enter a value to specify the area covered by the paint strokes. The
greater the size, the larger the covered area and the more numerous the
strokes.

4. For Tolerance, enter a value to limit the regions where paint strokes can be
applied. A low tolerance lets you paint unlimited strokes anywhere in the image.
A high tolerance limits paint strokes to areas that differ considerably from the
color in the source state or snapshot.

5. Click and drag in the image to paint.

Gradient the Canvas

1. Select the paint bucket tool (G then shift+G).

2. Click and drag a gradient path to fill the canvas with a gradient.

To create a gradient

1. Choose the Gradient tool and click the Gradient Editor button on the Options bar.
2. Click a stop and click the color swatch to the right of the word Color to open the Color Picker
and assign a different color to the stop.
3. Click anywhere below the gradient preview to add more color stops.
4. Drag a color stop off the Gradient Editor dialog box to delete it.

P a g e | 59
 5. Click the top of the gradient preview to assign different stops with varying opacity.
 Assigning varying amounts of opacity using the stops on top of the gradient slider.
 Assigning varying amounts of opacity using the stops on top of the gradient slider.
6. When you’re finished editing the gradient, name it and then click the New button.
7. The new gradient is added to the preset gradient choices.
8. To apply your gradient, drag across a selection or image with the Gradient tool.
Magic Eraser tool

1. Select the Magic Eraser tool.

2. Do the following in the options bar:
3. Enter a tolerance value to define the range of colors that can be erased. Select Anti-
aliased to smooth the edges of the area you erase.
4. Select Contiguous to erase only pixels contiguous to the one you click, or deselect to
erase all similar pixels in the image.
5. Select Sample All Layers to sample the erased color using combined data from all
visible layers.
6. Specify an opacity to define the strength of the erasure. An opacity of 100% erases
pixels completely.
7. Click in the part of the layer you want to erase.

SUMMARY

1. The Brush tool and the Pencil tool work like traditional drawing tools applying colorwith

brush strokes.

2. The Brush tool is a basic painting tool. It works like a traditional drawing tool by applying the
color using strokes.
3. The pencil tool is nothing more than a rip off from the brush tool. In fact, all it really consists of
is a 1-pixel brush tool tip.

4. The Mixer Brush creates realistic painting techniques such as mixing colors on the canvas,
combining colors on a brush, and varying paint wetness across a stroke.

P a g e | 60
 5. The History Brush tool to apply an image area from a different state or snapshot to your
current state.

6. The Art History Brush tool is an interesting variation on the plain old History Brush tool. Both
tools paint over an image by using information from a previous state.

7. The Gradient tool creates a gradual blend between multiple colors. You can choose from
preset gradient fills or create your own.

8. The paint bucket tool fills an area of an image based on color similarity. Click anywhere in the
image and the paint bucket will fill an area around the pixel you clicked.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. _____________tool is basic painting tool.
ii. _____________enables us to change the color of an object in a photo without

a lot of fuss or hassle.

iii. ____________brush tool is an interesting variation on the plain old History

Brush tool.

iv. ____________tool creates a gradual blend between multiple colors.

v. ____________fills an area of an image based on color similarity.

B. Find true or false

i. Paint bucket tool creates a gradual blend between multiple colors.

ii. History brush tool used to apply an image area from a different state or

Snapshot to your current state.

P a g e | 61
 iii. Mixer brush tool enables you to change the color of object in a photo.
iv. Midtones of Dodge tool changes the middle range of groups.

C. Short Answer Questions

i. What is Brush tool in Photoshop?

ii. Write the use of color replacement in Photoshop.?
iii. Write one difference between History brush and Art History brush.?
iv. What is Gradient?
v. Write the use of Paint bucket tool.?
vi. Write about painting tools of Photoshop.?

In the lab

1. Try to replace the color of a Photo using Color replacement tool.

2. Sunita have one photo of her family in photo her father eye get infected with

red spot. Help Sunita to remove Red eye from that Photo.

P a g e | 62
 Chief Patron
ShriSantosh Kumar Mall, IAS
Commissioner, KVS

Patron
Shri. G.K. Shrivastava, IAS
Additional Commissioner (Admin)

Shri. U.N. Khaware

Additional Commissioner (Acad)

Regional Patron
Shri C.Neelap
Deputy Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

Co-ordination, Compilation & Guidance

Shri D. Patle
Asstt. Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

School Co-ordination
Shri. K. AlungKhumba
Principal,KV NFR,Maligaon,Guwahati

Subject Expert
Dr. K. K. Motla, PGT(CS),
KV NFR,Maligaon,Guwahati
Sh. RajendraGavahle, PGT(CS),
KV NFR,Maligaon,Guwahati
Syllabus Content VIII
Quarter – April to June

Sl. No. Units Contents No. of Periods

1 1. Algorithm 1.1 Use of algorithm in programming 6
Developing algorithm to solve a
particular problem
2 2. Flow chart 2.1 About flow chart 8
2.2 Various types of box used in flow
chart and their use(terminal box,
input/output box, processing box,
decision box)
2.3 Question based on sequence ,
selection and iteration
Minimum level of learning
Child should be able to develop a solution of a problem and can create its algorithm and
flow chart

Formative Assessment – 1
Quarter – July to September
3 3. Photoshop Review Topics studied in class VII (Rectangular marquee 5
Toole, Lasso, Quick Selection, Crop ,measuring
,retouching , Painting)
4 More on Photoshop 17
4 Drawing and type tools
4. Tools 4.1 Pen(P)
Freeform Pen
Add Anchor point
Delete Anchor point
Convert Point
4.2 Horizontal Type
Vertical Type
4.3 Rectangle
Rounded Rectangle
Ellipse
Polygon
Line
Custom Shape
 4.1 Working with Working with Masks
Masks 4.1.1 Working with masks and channels
4.1.2 Creating a quick mask
4.1.3 Editing a quick mask
4.1.4 Saving a selection as a mask
4.1.5 Viewing channels
4.1.6 Adjusting individual channels
4.1.7 Loading a mask as a selection
4.1.8 Applying effects using a gradient
mask
4.1.9 Resizing the canvass
4.1.10 Moving layers between documents
4.1.11 Colorizing with an adjustment layers
4.1.12 Grouping and clipping layers
4.1.13 Applying a mask from a saved
selection
4.1.14 Using type as a mask

Minimum level of learning

Should be able to identify various tools and where to use the tool
Should be able to make changes in the picture using tools taught in the classDrawing and type
toolsIntroduction of tool with its use to be demonstrated to studentsPractical exercise to be
given to students so that they can learn the specified tool
Formative Assessment – 2
Summative Assessment – 1
Quarter – October to December
5 5. Photoshop  Photoshop Vector tools 10
(Continue…) 5.1.1 Basic Vector paths
5.1 Photoshop 5.1.2 Drawing shapes
Vector tools 5.1.3 Combining vector paths
5.1.4 Converting shapes to selections
5.1.5 Manipulating vector paths
 Type in Photoshop
5.2 Type in Photoshop 5.2.1 Typographic design
5.2.2 Creating a clipping mask from
type
5.2.3 Creating a design element from
type
5.2.4 Using interactive formatting
5.3 Output from controls
Photoshop 5.2.5 Wrapping font type
5.2.6 Designing a paragraph of type
 Preparing file for print

5.3.1 Preparing file for web output

File compression
6 6. Flash  What is flash and its uses 10
 Creating animation
 About symbols and instances
 Types of symbols(graphic,
button,movie clip etc.)
 Converting an object to a symbol
 Introducing time line and its use
in animation
 Frames and key frame
 About layers (inserting a new
layer, renaming & deleting layer)
 Types of animation (frame and
tweened)
Minimum level of learning
Should be able to identify various tools and where to use the tool
Should be able to make changes in the picture using tools taught in the class
Should be able to create a simple flash file using his/her own creativity
Formative Assessment – 3
 Quarter – January to March
7 1. Flash continued… 1.1 Motion tweening (using and 4
without using motion guide)
1.2 Shape tweening (simple shape
and using text strings)
8 2. E-Commerce 8.1 EDI(Electronic Data Interchange) 2
E-Greeting 8.2 What is E-Commerce and E-
Greetings ?
8.3 Influence on user
8.4 What factor one should keep in
mind while doing e-commerce,
Websites Example
9 3. Chatting 9.1 Definition 2
9.2 Example
10 4. Downloading/Uploading 10.1 Downloading/Uploading Speed 2
10.2 Difference
10.3 Example
10.4 Concept of Bandwidth and
protocol
11 5. Audio and Video  What is it 2
Conferencing  Use of It
 Factors affecting Video Quality
 Usefulness of Video Conferencing
Minimum level of learning
Child should be able to create simple flash file having different types of motion
Child should be able to understand the e-commerce and its various websites and
what to keep in mind while doing online purchasing
chatting, downloading and uploading
Use of video conferring and its advantage
Formative Assessment – 4
Summative Assessment – 2
ICT Projects to be completed in the session :-

Work Experience :-
1.Smartphone Accessory

Art Education
2 Chair Design
3 Lamp Design
Contents
 Working with Masks
Algorithm 1 Working with masks and channels
Creating a quick mask
 Use of algorithm in programming Editing a quick mask
 Developing algorithm to solve a Saving a selection as a mask
particular problem Viewing channels
Adjusting individual channels
Flow Chart 6 Loading a mask as a selection
Applying effects using a gradient mask
Resizing the canvass
 About flow chart Moving layers between documents
 Various types of box used in flow Colorizing with an adjustment layers
chart and their use(terminal box, Grouping and clipping layers
input/output box, processing box Applying a mask from a saved selection
, decision box) Using type as a mask
 Question based on
sequence , selection and iteration
Photoshop Continued 36
Photoshop Review 11  Photoshop Vector tools
Basic Vector paths
 Topics studied in class VII (Rectangular Drawing shapes
marquee Toole, Lasso, Quick Selection, Combining vector paths
Crop ,measuring ,retouching , Painting) Converting shapes to selections
Manipulating vector paths
More on Photoshop 17  Type in Photoshop
Typographic design
 Drawing and type tools Creating a clipping mask from type
Pen(P) Creating a design element from type
Freeform Pen Using interactive formatting controls
Add Anchor point Wrapping font type
Delete Anchor point Designing a paragraph of type
Convert Point  Preparing file for print
 Horizontal Type Preparing file for web output
Vertical Type File compression
 Rectangle
Rounded Rectangle
Ellipse
Polygon
Line
Custom Shape
Flash 57 Downloading/Uploading 81
 What is flash and its uses  Downloading/Uploading Speed
 Creating animation  Difference
 About symbols and instances  Example
 Types of symbols(graphic, button,movie clip etc.)  Concept of Bandwidth and protocol
 Converting an object to a symbol
 Introducing time line and its use in animation
 Frames and key frame
 About layers (inserting a new layer, renaming Audio and Video Conferencing
& deleting layer)
 Types of animation (frame and tweened)
87
Flash Continued 67  What is it
 Use of It
 Motion tweening (using and without using  Factors affecting Video Quality
motion guide)  Usefulness of Video Conferencing
 Shape tweening (simple shape and using
text strings)

E-Commerce E-Greeting 71
 EDI(Electronic Data Interchange)
 What is E-Commerce and E-Greetings ?
 Influence on user
 What factor one should keep in mind while
doing e-commerce, Websites Example

Chatting 78
 Definition
 Example
Lesson-1
Algorithm You will learn

 Use of algorithm in
Use of algorithm in programming programming

 Developing algorithm
to solve a particular
Developing algorithm to solve particular problem problem

In mathematics and computer science, an algorithm is

a step-by-step procedure for calculations. Algorithms
are used for calculation, data processing, and automated
reasoning.Algorithms resemble recipes. Recipes tell you
how to accomplish a task by performing a number of steps.
For example, to bake a cake the steps are: preheat the
oven; mix flour, sugar, and eggs thoroughly; pour into a baking pan; and so forth.

Goals of Algorithm Study

 To develop framework for instructing computer to perform tasks
 To introduce notion of algorithm as means of specifying how to solve a problem
 To introduce and appreciate approaches for defining and solving very complex tasks in
terms of simpler tasks;

Simple Questions based on Algorithm

Algorithm: Calling a friend on the telephone

Input: The telephone number of your friend.

Output: None

1|Page
Steps:
1. Pick up the phone and listen for a dial tone
2. Press each digit of the phone number on the phone
3. If busy, hang up phone, wait 5 minutes, jump to step 2
4. If no one answers, leave a message then hang up
5. If no answering machine, hang up and wait 2 hours, then jump to step 2
6. Talk to friend
7. Hang up phone

Algorithm to create Maggie noddle:

Step 1: Start
Step 2: Take pan with water
Step 3: Put pan on the burner
Step 4: Switch on the gas/burner
Step 5: Put magi and masala
Step 6: Give two minutes to boil
Step 7: Take off the pan
Step 8: Take out the magi with the help of fork/spoon
Step 9: Put the Maggi on the plate and serve it
Step 10: Stop.

Algorithm: To find (a + b)2=(a + b)* (a + b)

Input: Two numbers a and b.

Output: Result of (a + b)2

Steps:
1. Take numbers a, b, c.
2. Input the values of a and b

2|Page
 3. C=a+b
4. Print c*c

Algorithm: To find Perimeter of rectangle

Input: Two numbers l and b.

Output: Result l*b

Steps:
1. Take numbers l, b, c, d.
2. Input the values of l and b
3. c=l*b
4. d=2*c
5. Print d

Conditions in Algorithm

Algorithm: To check whether a person can vote or not

Input: A number age.

Output: Yes or No

Steps:
1. Take a number age.
2. Input the age of the person
3. If(age>=18) goto step 4

3|Page
 Else
Goto step 5
4. Print ―You can vote‖
5. Print ―You can’t vote‖

Algorithm: To give a bonus of Rs 1000 to those employees whose salary is more than
Rs5000

Input: Salary.
Output: New Salary

Steps:
1. Take numbers salary and total.
2. Input the salary of the person
3. If(salary>=5000) goto step 4
Else
Goto step 5
4. total=salary+1000
5. total=salary+0
6. Print total

4|Page
SUMMARY

1. An algorithm is a step-by-step procedure for calculations.

2. To develop framework for instructing computer to perform tasksos one of the goal of
Algorithm.

EXERCISES

A. Short Answer Question

1. What is an algorithm?
2. Write few goals of an algorithm.?
3. Write an algorithm to find Area of square?

5|Page
Lesson-2
Flow Char You will learn
 About flow chart
 Various types of box
used in flow
About flow chart chart and their
A flowchart is a type of diagram that represents an algorithm or use(terminal box,
input/output box,
process, showing the steps as boxes of various kinds, and their processing box
, decision box)
order by connecting them with arrows. This diagrammatic
 Question based on
representation illustrates a solution to a given problem. sequence , selection
and iteration

6|Page
Various types of box used in flow chart:

7|Page
Question based on sequence, selection and iteration
Q 1. Draw a flowchart to find the sum of two numbers

Q 2. Draw a flowchart to find the simple interest.

8|Page
Q 2. Draw a flowchart to find bigger number among two numbers (selective)

Q3. Draw a flow chart to find factorial of any number. (iteration)

9|Page
SUMMARY
1. A flowchart is a type of diagram that represents an algorithm or process, showing the

steps as boxes of various kinds, and their order by connecting them with arrows.

2. Flowline symbol used to connect the symbols and indicate the flow of logic.

3. Terminal symbol is used to represent the beginning (Start) or end (End) of task.

4. Input/Output symbol used to represent reading or writing operations.

5. Processing symbol used for arithmetic and data manipulation operations.

6. Decision making symbol used to represent any logic and comparisons operations.

EXERCISES

1. What is flowchart?

2. What is the use of flowchart?

3. Draw the flowchart for

a) Find the addition of two number.

b) Find whether a people eligible to give vote or not.

c) Find given number even or odd.

d) Find whether a people drive car or not.

10 | P a g e
Lesson-3
Photoshop Review
You will learn
 About flow chart
 Various types of box
used in flow
Review of Photoshop chart and their
use(terminal box,
An image editing software developed and manufactured input/output box,
processing box
by Adobe Systems Inc. Photoshop is considered one of , decision box)
 Question based on
the leaders in photo editing software. The software allows sequence , selection
users to manipulate, crop, resize, and correct color and iteration

on digital photos. The software is particularly

popular amongst professional photographers and
graphic designers.

11 | P a g e
Toolbox in detail

Marquee Tools: The Marquee tool selects a section of the document based on the shape of the
chosen tool.

Move Tool: The Move tool moves items in the document, such as selections, layers, and
guides.

Lasso Tools: The Lasso tools allow you to select a section of the document either by freehand,
polygonal, or magnetic selections.

12 | P a g e
 • The Lasso tool will close the selection will close
automatically when the mouse is unclicked.

• The Polygonal Lasso tool and Magnetic Lasso tool need the ends of the selection to be
joined for the section to become selected.

Magic Wand Tool: The Magic Wand tool selects areas of similar colors.

Crop Tool: The Crop tool trims images.

Healing Tools: The Healing tools fix up issues in the document such as blemishes and red eye.

• The Spot Healing Brush removes blemishes and objects.

• The Red Eye tool removes the red reflection caused by a
flash.

Drawing Tools: The Drawing tools let you draw in your document.

• The Brush tool paints brush strokes.

• The Pencil tool paints hard-edged strokes.
• The Color Replacement tool replaces a selected color with a new color.

Eraser Tools: The Eraser tools erases pixels in the document.

• The Eraser tool will restore parts of an image to a

previously saved state or will display the background color.
• The Background Eraser tool will turn the erased areas into a transparency.
• The Magic Eraser tool will erase everything of the same color into a transparency.

13 | P a g e
Fill Tools: The Fill tools fill color into areas of the document.

• The Paint Bucket tool fills in areas of similar color with the
foreground color.
• The Gradient Tool creates a smooth straight-line change from the foreground color to
the background color.

Text Tools: The Type tools add text to a document.

• The type tools create type on top of an image.

• The type mask tools make a selection of the document in the shape of type.

Shape Tools: The Shape tools draw shapes and lines in a normal layer or a
shape layer.

• The Shape tools will create a solid color shape of their type.
• The Line tool will create a solid color line.
• The Custom Shape tool makes customized shapes selected from a custom shape list.

Color Picking and Measuring Tools: The Color Picking and Measuring tools do
not actually change the document in any way.

• The Eyedropper tool changes the foreground color to the color

that is clicked on.
• The Color Sampler tool is an advanced tool.
• The Measure tool measures the distance, location, and angle between to points in the
document.

14 | P a g e
Hand Tool: The Hand tool moves an image within its window.

Zoom Tool: The Zoom tool magnifies and reduces the view of an image.

SUMMARY

1. Photoshop is considered one of the leaders in photo editing software.

2. The Marquee tool selects a section of the document based on the shape of the chosen tool.
3. The Move tool moves items in the document, such as selections, layers, and guides.
4. The Magic Wand tool selects areas of similar colors.
5. The Color Picking and Measuring tools do not actually change the document in any way.
6. The Hand tool moves an image within its window.
7. The Zoom tool magnifies and reduces the view of an image.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. ____________moves images within its window.

ii. Shapes tool draw __________ in a normal layer.
iii. _________tool fill color into area.
iv. _________lets you draw in your document.
B. Find true or false
i. Marquee tool moves item in the document.
15 | P a g e
 ii. The zoom tool magnifies and reduces the view of an image.
iii. The color picking and measuring tools moves an image within its window.
iv. Ms Paint is an example of Photoshop application.
C. Short Answer Questions
i. What is Photoshop?
ii. Write the features of Photoshop.?
iii. Write the use of
a) Move tool.
b) Drawing tool.
iv. Write one advantage of zoom tool.

In the lab

1. Crop image upto your suitable part of an image and save it.
2. Insert text some quote on an image using Photoshop tools and save it.
3. Cut some portion of image and use it in another image using Move tool.

Lesson-4
16 | P a g e
 More on Photoshop
You will learn

Rectangular Marquee
Drawing and type tools  Elliptical Marquee
 Single column Marquee
 Single Row Marquee
The Drawing and Type tools create and alter vector objects.
Lasso
Drawing tools work on vector paths, which are vector-based  Polygonal Lasso
 Magnetic Lasso
outlines you can turn into selections. Using the Options bar,
 Quick Selection
choose whether to draw paths or shape layers. Type is  Magic Wand
Crop and Slice tools
created in type layers that can be transformed, warped,  Crop
and even set along paths.  slice
 Slice Select
Pen(P) Measuring tools
 Path Selection (A): Use this tool to move entire paths  Eyedropper
 color Sampler
around the canvas as a single object. The path or shape  Ruler
 Note
layer retains its shape.  Count
Retouching tools
 Direct Selection (A): Use this tool to select and move  Spot Healing Brush
 Healing Brush
individual points and Bezier handles of a path or shape  Patch
 Red Eye
layer.  Magic Eraser
 Blur
 Pen (P): Create paths with the Pen tool (shown in  Sharpen
 Smudge
Single-click to create individual points to form the path.  Dodge
 Burn
Click, hold, and drag to create a Bezier curve when Sponge
drawing a path.

 Freeform Pen (P): With this tool, click, hold, and

draw a path. Points of the path are created automatically.

17 | P a g e
  Add Anchor Point (P): Use this tool to click part of a path to add a point to the path. Adding an
anchor point to your path or shape layer allows for more detail in the path or shape.

 Delete Anchor Point (P): Use this tool to click a point of a path to remove that point from the
path.

 Convert Anchor Point (P): Single-click a point of a path to convert it to a corner point. Or click
and drag to convert it to a curve point. Or Option-click (Mac users) or Alt-click (Windows users)
and drag to convert it to a combination point.

Horizontal Type(T):
The Horizontal Type tool is the default Type tool. Click and drag to

make a text box. Type your text with the keyboard to create text in the

foreground color. Use the Options bar to set the font, size, and other

text properties. Open the Character and or Paragraph palettes for

more typography options.

 Vertical Type (T): This tool is similar to the Horizontal Type tool

except that the type stacks vertically, and the text direction goes from right to left for Asian

languages.

 Horizontal Type Mask (T): This tool is similar to the Horizontal Type tool, but a selection area is

created rather than actual type. Although you can paint within the type selection area, adjusting

the type options is not allowed after type is created.

 Vertical Type Mask (T): This tool is similar to the Vertical Type tool, but a selection area is

created rather than actual type. Although you can paint within the type selection area, adjusting

the type options are not allowed after type is created.

18 | P a g e
Rectangle
There are quite a few predefined vector-based shapes in Adobe Photoshop, all of which can
be easily added to graphics. There are 6 different kind of Shape Tools in all.

 Rectangle Tool – Creates a rectangle shape (or square if constraining proportions by holding
shift).

 Rounded Rectangle Tool – Creates a rectangle with rounded corners. The roundness of the
corner can be controlled by setting a radius in the options bar.

 Ellipse Tool - Creates an ellipse shape (or perfect circle if constraining proportions by holding
shift).

 Polygon Tool – Creates a polygon shape with a specified number of

sides set in the options bar.

 Line Tool – Creates a line shape.

 Custom Shapes – Use predefined shapes (or user created ones) in your graphic.

To create a shape in your image, simply select the shape tool you want to use, adjust the

settings for that tool in the options bar, and then drag our your shape in the active image area

(in the same fashion you’d create a selection with one of the selection tools).

Working with Masks

Working with masks and channels

19 | P a g e
 Photoshop masks isolate and protect parts of an image,
just as masking tape protects window panes or trim from
paint when a house is painted. When you create a mask
based on a selection, the area you have not selected
is masked, or protected from editing. With masks, you can
create and save time-consuming selections and then use
them again. In addition, you can use masks for other
complex editing tasks—for example, to apply color
changes or filter effects to an image.

In Photoshop, you can make temporary masks, called quick masks, or you can create
permanent masks and store them as special grayscale channels called alpha channels. Photoshop
also uses channels to store an image’s color information. Unlike layers, channels do not print. You
use the Channels panel to view and work with alpha channels.

Creating a quick mask

Quick Mask mode lets you edit any selection as a mask without using the Channels palette and while
viewing your image. The advantage of editing your selection as a mask is that you can use almost
any Photoshop tool or filter to modify the mask. For example, if you create a rectangular selection
with the marquee tool, you can enter Quick Mask mode and use the paintbrush to extend or contract
the selection.

Quick Masks are temporary, so if you create one you really like, be sure to choose Select→Save
Selection at the end.

Follow these steps to create your very own Quick Mask:

1. Open a new document and, using any selection tool, select the element you want in your
image.

 You can fine-tune your selection after you have the Quick Mask in place. Click the
Edit in Quick Mask Mode button in the Tools panel (or press the Q key).

20 | P a g e
  If your Quick Mask settings are at the default, a color overlay covers and protects
the area outside the selection. The selected pixels are unprotected.

2. Refine the mask by using a painting or editing tool.

 Paint with black to add to the mask, thereby making the selection smaller. Even
though you are painting with black, your strokes show up as a red overlay. Paint
with white to delete from the mask, making the selection larger.

3. After you finish editing your mask, click the Edit in Standard Mode button in the Tools
panel to exit the Quick Mask.

You can also press the Q key.

The overlay disappears, and a selection outline appears. Your selection is ready and waiting for
your next command. The selection outline correlates with the unmasked or selected areas of the
Quick Mask.

Editing a quick mask

The advantage of editing your selection as a mask is that you can use almost any tool or filter to
modify the mask. (You can even use selection tools.)

In Quick Mask mode, you do all of your editing in the image window. Photoshop automatically
defaults to Grayscale mode. The foreground color defaults to black, and the background color
defaults to white. When using a painting or editing tool in Quick Mask mode, keep these principles in
mind:

 Painting with white erases the mask (the red overlay) and increases the selected area.
 Painting with black adds to the mask (the red overlay) and decreases the selected area.
 Painting with gray areas lighter areas are more subject to change than darker areas.

Saving a selection as a mask

21 | P a g e
Quick masks are temporary. They disappear as soon as you deselect. However, you can save a
selection as an alpha-channel mask so that your time-consuming work won't be lost and you can
reuse the selection in this work session or a later one. You can even use alpha channels in other
Photoshop image files.

Masks are saved in channels, which can be thought of as storage areas for color and selection
information in an image.

To avoid confusing channels and layers, think of channels as containing an image's color and
selection information; think of layers as containing painting and effects.

You can edit a mask once it has been saved in a channel by painting on it in a channel using black,
white, and shades of gray. Black areas completely protect an image from changes. White areas are
completely subject to change. In gray areas, lighter areas are more subject to change than darker
areas.

Note If you save and close a file while in Quick Mask mode, the quick mask will show in its own
channel the next time you open the file. If, however, you save and close your file while in Standard
mode, the quick mask will be gone the next time you open
your file.

Viewing channels
The first step is accessing channels by choosing Window→Channels. The Channels panel appears

Selecting a channel in the Channels panel automatically makes it appear in the image window. To
select a channel, click the channel thumbnail or name in the panel. To select more than one channel,
Shift-click. To show or hide a channel, click in the eye column in the
far left of the panel. You can also drag through the column to hide or
show the channels quickly.

22 | P a g e
Adjusting individual channels

You can select one or more channels in the Channels panel. The names of all selected,
or active, channels are highlighted

Selecting multiple channels

A. Not visible or editable
B. Visible but not selected for editing
C. Selected for viewing and editing
D. Selected for editing but not viewing

 To select a channel, click the channel name. Shift-click to select (or deselect)
multiple channels.
 To edit a channel, select it and then use a painting or editing tool to paint in the
image. You can paint on only one channel at a time. Paint with white to add the
selected channel’s color at 100% intensity. Paint with a value of gray to add the
channel’s color at a lower intensity. Paint with black to fully remove the channel’s
color.

Loading a mask as a selection

23 | P a g e
The channel mask remains stored in the Channels palette even after you've loaded it as a selection.
This means that you can reuse the mask whenever you want. To apply a saved mask to an image or
selection choose Select > Load Selection and then select the mask (alpha channel) you want to use.

Loading a selection into an image using shortcuts

You can reuse a previously saved selection by loading it into an image. To load a saved selection
using shortcuts, do one of the following in the Channels palette:

 Select the alpha channel, click the Load Channel as Selection button at the bottom of the
palette, and then click the composite color channel near the top of the palette.
 Drag the channel that contains the selection you want to load onto the Load Channel as
Selection button.
 Ctrl-click (Windows) or Command-click (Mac OS) the channel containing the selection you
want to load.
 To add the mask to an existing selection, press Ctrl-Shift (Windows) or Command-Shift (Mac
OS), and click the channel.
 To subtract the mask from an existing selection, press Ctrl-Alt (Windows) or Command-Option
(Mac OS), and click the channel.
 To load the intersection of the saved selection and an existing selection, press Ctrl-Alt-Shift
(Windows) or Command-Option- Shift (Mac OS), and select the channel.

Applying effects using a gradient mask

How to Create a Transparent Gradient in Photoshop?

1. Create a Photoshop file with two layers - one blank and the other containing the image

to be made transparent. Select the image's layer.

2. Click the Add layer mask icon at the bottom of the layer’s palette.

3. A layer mask is created in the image layer.

24 | P a g e
 4. Select the gradient tool and apply a black/white gradient to the
image layer.

In the example below, a gradient is applied to the photo from right to left.

(1) The original image. (2) With the gradient applied, you can
see the checkered pattern which
indicates the blank layer.

25 | P a g e
 (3) To fade the photo to white, fill the (4) To fade the photo into another
blank layer with solid white. image, place the second image in a
layer below the photo.

Resizing the canvass

The canvas size is the full editable area of an image. The Canvas Size command lets you increase
or decrease an image’s canvas size. Increasing the canvas size adds space around an existing
image.

Decreasing an image’s canvas size crops into the image. If you increase the canvas size of an
image with a transparent background, the added canvas is transparent. If the image doesn’t have a
transparent background, there are several options for determining the color of the added canvas.

1. Choose Image > Canvas Size.

2. Do one of the following:

 Enter the dimensions for the canvas in the Width and Height boxes. Choose the units of
measurement you want from the pop-up menus next to the Width and Height boxes.

26 | P a g e
  Select Relative, and enter the amount you want to add or subtract from the image’s
current canvas size. Enter a positive number to add to the canvas, and enter a negative
number to subtract from the canvas.

3. For Anchor, click a square to indicate where to position the existing image on the
new canvas.

4. Choose an option from the Canvas Extension Color menu:

 Foreground to fill the new canvas with the current

foreground color
 Background to fill the new canvas with the current
background color
 White, Black, or Gray to fill the new canvas with that color
 Other to select a new canvas color using the Color Picker

5. Click OK.

Moving layers between documents

You can copy any layer, including the Background layer, from one image to another. Keep in mind
that the resolution of the destination image determines how large the printed copy of the layer can
be. Also, if the pixel dimensions of the two images are not the same, the copied layer may appear
smaller or larger than you’d expect.

1. Open the two images you want to use.

2. In the Layers panel of the source image, select the layer that you want to copy.

3. Do one of the following:

 Choose Select > All to select all of the pixels in the layer, and choose Edit > Copy.
Then make the destination image active, and choose Edit > Paste.

27 | P a g e
  Drag the layer’s name from the Layers panel of the source image into the
destination image.
 Use the Move tool (Select section of the toolbox), to drag the layer from the source
image to the destination image.

Duplicate one or more layers in another image

You can take any layer, including the Background layer, from one image and duplicate it in another.
Keep in mind that the pixel dimensions of the destination image determine how large the printed
copy of the duplicated layer can be. Also, if the pixel dimensions of the two images are not the same,
the duplicated layer may appear smaller or larger than you’d expect.

1. Open the source image. If you plan to copy a layer to an existing image rather
than a new one, open the destination image as well.

2. In the source document’s Layers panel, select the name of the layer or layers
you want to duplicate. To select more than one layer, hold down the Ctrl key
(Command key in Mac OS) and click each player’s name.

3. Choose Layer > Duplicate Layer, or choose Duplicate Layer from the More
menu in the Layers panel.

4. Type a name for the duplicate layer in the Duplicate Layer dialog box, and
choose a destination document for the layer, and then click OK:

 To duplicate the layer in an existing image,

choose a filename from the Document
pop-up menu.

 To create a new document for the layer,

choose New from the Document menu, and
enter a name for the new file. An image
created by duplicating a layer has no
background.

28 | P a g e
Colorizing with an adjustment layers
The Color Range feature, which is useful for creating a selection area based on sampled colors in an
image, can also be used to create an adjustment layer mask.

1. In the Layers panel, select the layer to which you want to apply the
adjustment layer.

2. Choose Layer > New Adjustment Layer, and choose an

adjustment type.

3. In the Masks section of the Properties panel, click Color Range.

4. In the Color Range dialog box, choose Sampled Colors from the

5. Select menu.

6. Select Localized Color Clusters to build a mask based on different

color ranges in the image.

7. Set the display option to Selection, and Selection Preview to

None.

8. Click a color area in the image.

As you click on image areas, you can preview the mask in the Color Range dialog box. White
areas are unmasked pixels, black areas masked, and gray areas partially masked.

9. Use the Fuzziness slider to increase or decrease the range of colors around your sample
colors that are included in the masked area. Use the Range slider to control how far or near a
color must be from the sample points to be included in the mask. After adjusting the mask,
click OK to close the Color Range dialog box.

10. Modify the adjustment as needed in the Properties panel.

29 | P a g e
Grouping and clipping layers
Grouping layers helps organize your projects and keeps your Layers panel uncluttered. By linking
layers, you establish a relationship between them, even if they aren't next to each other in your layer
order.

Group and ungroup layers

1. Select multiple layers in the Layers panel.

2. Do one of the following:

 Choose Layer > Group Layers.

 Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Mac OS) layers to the folder icon at the bottom
of the Layers panel to group the layers.

3. To Ungroup the layers, select the group and choose Layer > Ungroup Layers.

Add layers to a group

 Do one of the following:

 Select the group in the Layers panel and click the Create a New Layer button .

 Drag a layer to the group folder.

 Drag a group folder into another group folder. The group and all of its layers move.

 Drag an existing group to the New Group button .

CLIPPING MASKS

A clipping mask is a group of layers to which a mask is applied.

The bottommost layer, or base layer, defines the visible
boundaries of the entire group. For example, suppose you have a

30 | P a g e
shape in the base layer, a photograph in the layer above it, and text in the topmost
layer. If the photograph and text appear only through the shape outline in the base
layer, they also take on the opacity of the base layer.

You can group only successive layers. The name of the base layer in the group is underlined, and
the thumbnails for the overlying layers are indented. Additionally, the overlying layers display the
clipping mask icon.

The shape in the bottom layer of the clipping mask determines what area of the photo layer above
shows through.

Create a clipping mask

1. Do one of the following:

 Hold down Alt (Option in Mac OS), position the pointer over the line dividing two layers
in the Layers panel (the pointer changes to two overlapping circles), and then click.

 In the Layers panel, select the top layer of a pair of layers you want to group, and
choose Layer > Create Clipping Mask.

2. When making a clipping mask from an existing layer and one you are about to create, first
select the existing layer in the Layers panel.

Then choose New Layer from the Layer menu or the Layers panel More menu. In the New
Layer dialog box, select Use Previous Layer to Create Clipping Mask, and click OK.

Applying a mask from a saved selection

To be demonstrated in practical class by teacher.

31 | P a g e
Using type as a mask
Using the Type Mask tool in Photoshop Elements epitomizes the combination of type and image. The
Type Mask tool doesn’t create a new layer. Instead, it creates a selection on the active layer. This is
the tool of choice for filling text with an image or cutting text out of an image so that the background
shows through.

Here are the steps to create a type mask:

1. In Edit Full mode, open the image of your choice.

2. Convert your background into a layer by double-clicking the word

Background on the Layers panel; and then click OK.

3. Choose the Horizontal Type Mask tool from the Tools panel.

4. Specify your type options (such as font family, style, and size) on

the Options bar.

Horizontal Type Mask tool settings on the Options bar.

5. Click the image and type your desired text. When you’re done, click the Commit button on the
Options bar.

A selection border in the shape of your type appears on your image.

6. Choose Select→Inverse, which deselects your letter selections and selects everything else.

7. Press the Backspace (Delete on a Mac) key to delete everything outside your selection border.

Your type is now filled with your image.

8. Choose Select→Deselect.

9. Experiment with applying layer styles to your type.

32 | P a g e
SUMMARY

1. The Drawing and Type tools create and alter vector objects. Drawing tools work on vector
paths, which are vector-based outlines you can turn into selections.
2. The Horizontal Type tool is the default Type tool. Click and drag to make a text box.
3. Rectangle tool createsa rectangle shape (or square if constraining proportions by holding
shift).

4. Photoshop masks isolate and protect parts of an image, just as masking tape protects window
panes or trim from paint when a house is painted.
5. Quick Mask mode lets you edit any selection as a mask without using the Channels palette
and while viewing your image.
6. Grouping layers helps organize your projects and keeps your Layers panel uncluttered.
7. A clipping mask is a group of layers to which a mask is applied. The bottommost layer, or base
layer, defines the visible boundaries of the entire group.
8. Using the Type Mask tool in Photoshop Elements epitomizes the combination of type and
image.
9. Path Selection tool use to move entire paths around the canvas as a single object. The path or
shape layer retains its shape.
10. Direct Selection tool use to select and move individual points and Bezier handles of a path or
shape layer.

11. Vertical type tool is similar to the Horizontal Type tool except that the type stacks vertically,
and the text direction goes from right to left for Asian languages.

12. Horizontal TypeMask is similar to the Horizontal Type tool, but a selection area is created
rather than actual type.

13. Custom Shapes Use predefined shapes (or user created ones) in your graphic.

33 | P a g e
EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. ___________ use this tool to move entire path around the canvas as a single
Object.
ii. __________ is the default type tool.
iii. __________ is predefined vector based shapes in adobe photoshop.
iv. __________create line Photoshop.
v. __________ mode lets you edit any selection as a mask without using the channels
Palette while viewing your channel.
vi. You can edit a ______________ once it has been saved in a channel by pointing on
It in a channel using black, white and shades of gray.
vii. The first step in accessing the channels by choosing window____________.

B. Find true or false

i. The canvas size is the full editable area of an image.
ii. We cannot copy any layer.
iii. The color range feature can also be used to create an adjustment layer mask.
iv. Grouping layer helps organize your projects and keeps your layer panel
uncluttered.
v. The drawing and type tools does not create and alter vector objects.
vi. Photoshop masks edit any selection as a mask without using the channels palette
and while viewing your image.
vii. Path selection tool use to move entire image from one location to other.
viii. Direct selection tool use to select and move individual points and Bezier handles
Of a path.

C. Short Question Answers

i. What is clipping mask?
34 | P a g e
 ii. Write the steps to Group and Ungrou0p layers.?
iii. Write the steps to access channels.?
iv. What do you mean by Quick Mask?
v. Write one difference between Horizontal type Mask with Vertical type Mask?

In the lab

1. Apply gradient mask to a image with two different images.

2. Create one Clipping mask on a image.

35 | P a g e
Lesson-5
Photoshop Continued
You will learn

Photoshop Vector tools  Photoshop Vector tools

 Basic Vector paths
 Drawing shapes
Vector shapes are lines and curves you draw using the  Combining vector paths
shape or pen tools. Vector shapes are resolution-  Converting shapes to selections
 Manipulating vector paths
independent—they maintain crisp edges when resized,  Type in Photoshop
printed to a PostScript printer, saved in a PDF file, or  Typographic design
 Creating a clipping mask from
imported into a vector-based graphics application. You type
can create libraries of custom shapes and edit a shape’s  Creating a design element from
type
outline (called a path) and attributes (such as stroke, fill  Using interactive formatting
color, and style).Paths are outlines that you can turn into controls
 Wrapping font type
selections, or fill and stroke with color. You can easily  Designing a paragraph of type
change the shape of a path by editing its anchor points.  Preparing file for print
 Preparing file for web output
A work path is a temporary path that appears in the Paths  File compression
panel and defines the outline of a shape.
You can use paths in several ways:
Use a path as a vector mask to hide areas of a layer

 Convert a path to a selection.

 Fill or stroke a path with color.

Designate a saved path as a clipping path to make

part of an image transparent when exporting the
image to a page-layout or vector-editing application

36 | P a g e
Basic Vector paths
A path consists of one or more straight or curved segments. Anchor points mark the end points of
the path segments. On curved segments, each selected anchor point displays one or two direction lines,
ending in direction points. The positions of direction lines and points determine the size and shape of a
curved segment. Moving these elements reshapes the curves in a path.

A. Curved line segment

B. Direction point
C. Direction line
D. Selected anchor point
E. Unselected anchor point
A path

A path can be closed, with no beginning or end (for example, a circle), or open, with distinct end
points (for example, a wavy line).
Smooth curves are connected by anchor points called smooth points. Sharply curved paths are
connected by corner points.

Smooth point and corner point

When you move a direction line on a smooth point, the curved segments on both sides of the point are
adjusted simultaneously. By comparison, when you move a direction line on a corner point, only the curve
on the same side of the point as the direction line is adjusted.

37 | P a g e
 Adjusting a smooth point and a corner point

A path does not have to be one connected series of segments. It can contain more than one distinct and
separate path component. Each shape in a shape layer is a path component, as described by the layer’s
clipping path.

Drawing shapes

Straight line paths

Drawing a straight line is easy, you could use the line tool or the pen tool.

1. Choose the Pen tool on the toolbox.

2. Select the drawing option from the options bar to draw either a path, Shape layer or fill pixels.
3. Click once to mark the starting point, then Ctrl-click somewhere else (without dragging) to mark
the ending point. A straight line connects the dots.
4. You can also keep clicking to keep adding straight line segments—to create,
5. Choosing the pen tool will enable you to draw paths easily. Choosing a different kind of pen
tool will give you a different behavior.

38 | P a g e
U-shaped curves

To create a U-shaped curve:

1. Drag downward. As you drag you will notice that two handles
are being created.
2. Move your pointer to the right, parallel with the first point that you made; click and drag
upward.
Click and drag up and you will now see a U shaped curve being generated. The curve goes
in the direction that you are dragging.

Simple S curves

Creating a simple S-curve. Notice that as you change the angle of your
drag, the shape of the curve also changes.

An S-curve is only slightly more complex:

1. Drag to the left.
The direction handles are being created.
2. Position your pointer underneath the first point. Drag to the left again.

M curves

The M curve is a little trickier because it involves a new tool: The Convert
Point tool. The convert point tool is found under the pen tool in the tool box

1. From your starting point, drag upwards. You are creating the
direction handle.
2. Move to the right and parallel, drag downward. You are creating an

inverted U curve right now.

3. Now the tricky part: Hold the Alt (Option) Key and drag upward. First you define a direction with
39 | P a g e
 a direction handle (The initial drag of the mouse). The next click actually draws the curve based

on the direction of the first drag and the second. If you want a sharp curve (called a cusp), you

need to first change the direction of the handle without affecting the previously drawn curve. The

Convert point tool, is such the tool for this task. The Alt (Option) Key is a quick way to temporarily

choose the Convert Point tool.

1. Position your pointer to the right of the second point and drag down

You’ve just made an M curve.

Closed paths

A closed path. X marks the start/end point. To help in creating your

curves, you may want to show the grid under the View>Show menu.

The paths described so far are open paths—that is, they’re not fully
enclosed shapes. They’re just lines, and therefore you can’t use them to
select areas of your image, or fill them up with solid colors

A closed path, on the other hand, can be filled with color, texture or
patterns. It can be turned into a selection to use on an image.

1. Repeat the steps for the M curve.

2. Click to add a point beneath the other three points.In the middle, the shape of the heart begins
forming.
3. Finally, point to the first point you created, without clicking.
 A small circle appears by the pointer. It tells you that your mouse is hovering over the
initial starting point. Click on the circle to close the path and form a closed loop.
4. Click the point to close the path and complete your heart.

Combining vector paths

40 | P a g e
If you’re using the Pen tool (P), and you’ve created multiple paths within your document, these paths
are totally separate, and are moved independently of one another. However, if you want these paths
to move as one unit—combine them. Just switch to the Path Selection tool (Shift-A until it comes up),
then go up to the Options Bar and click on the Combine button. Now when you move one path, all the
combined paths move right along with it.

Converting shapes to selections

Convert paths to selection borders

Paths provide smooth outlines that you can convert into precise selection borders. You can also
convert selection borders into paths, using the Direct Selection tool for fine-tuning.

You can define any closed path as a selection border. A closed path can be added to,
subtracted from, or combined with the current selection.

Convert a path to a selection border using the current settings

1. Select the path in the Paths panel.

2. To convert the path, do one of the following:

 Click the Load Path as a Selection button at the bottom of the Paths panel.
 Ctrl-click (Windows) or Command-click (Mac OS) the path thumbnail in the Paths
panel.

Convert a path to a selection border and specify settings

1. Select the path in the Paths panel.

2. Do one of the following:

 Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac OS) the Load Path As A Selection button
at the bottom of the Paths panel.

41 | P a g e
  Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Mac OS) the path to the Load Path As A
Selection button.
 Choose Make Selection from the Paths panel menu.

3. In the Make Selection dialog box, select a Rendering option:

Feather Radius

Defines how far inside and outside the selection border the feather edge extends. Enter a
value in pixels.

Anti-aliased

Creates a finer transition between the pixels in the selection and the surrounding pixels.
Make sure the Feather Radius is set to 0.

4. Select an Operation option:

New Selection

Selects only the area defined by the path.

Add To Selection

Adds the area defined by the path to the original selection.

Subtract From Selection

Removes the area defined by the path from the current selection.

Intersect With Selection

Selects the area common to both the path and the original selection. If the path and selection
do not overlap, nothing is selected.

5. Click OK.

Manipulating vector paths

42 | P a g e
You can reorder saved paths that are not Shape, Type, or Vector Mask paths in the Paths panel.

 In the Paths panel, drag the path to the position you want. In Photoshop CC, you can select
and drag more than one path simultaneously.

Duplicate paths

1. In the Paths panel, select the path you want to duplicate. In Photoshop CC, you can select
more than one path.

2. Do any of the following:

 Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag the paths.

 Choose Duplicate Path from the panel menu.

Adjust path segments

You can edit a path segment at any time, but editing existing segments is slightly
different from drawing them. Keep the following tips in mind when editing segments:

 If an anchor point connects two segments, moving that anchor point always changes both
segments.
 When drawing with the Pen tool, you can temporarily activate the Direct Selection tool so
that you can adjust segments you have already drawn; press Ctrl (Windows) or Command
(Mac OS) while drawing.
 When you initially draw a smooth point with the Pen tool, dragging the direction point
changes the length of the direction line on both sides of the point. However, when you edit
an existing smooth point with the Direct Selection tool, you change the length of the
direction line only on the side you are dragging.

Move straight segments

1. With the Direct Selection tool , select the segment you want to adjust.

2. Drag the segment to its new position.

43 | P a g e
Adjust the length or angle of straight segments

1. With the Direct Selection tool, select an anchor point on the

segment you want to adjust.

2. Drag the anchor point to the desired position. Shift-drag to constrain the
adjustment to multiples of 45°.

Adjust the position or shape of curved segments

1. With the Direct Selection tool, select a curved segment, or an anchor point
on either end of the curved segment. Direction lines appear, if any are present.
(Some curved segments use just one direction line.)

2. Do any of the following:

 To adjust the position of the segment, drag the

segment. Shift-drag to constrain the adjustment to
multiples of 45°.

Click to select the curve segment. Then drag to adjust.

 To adjust the shape of the segment on either side

of a selected anchor point, drag the anchor point
or the direction point. Shift-drag to constrain
movement to multiples of 45°.

Drag the anchor point, or drag the direction point.

Type in Photoshop

44 | P a g e
 Type in Photoshop consists of mathematically defined shapes that describe the letters,
numbers, and symbols of a typeface. When you add type to an image in Photoshop, the characters
are composed of pixels and have the same resolution as the image file. However, Photoshop
preserves the vector-based type outlines and uses them when you scale or resize type, save a PDF
or EPS file, or print the image to a PostScript printer.

Typographic design

1. Choosing your image and preparing the canvas

Start by choosing a portrait image you’d like to turn into a Typography Poster. It’s best
to choose a large image so you can see all the features of the face clearly.

2. Adding in Color Range Shadows and Mid Tones

To select the appropraite areas on the face you’ll be using the Color Range Tool. This will select all
the different tones on the face. Each time a Color Range is selected you’ll copy and paste it onto a
new layer. You’ll be removing the original image from view to have a transparent background.

45 | P a g e
 3. Converting to Black and White and Merging the 2 Color Range Layers

You’ll then to converting the 2 Tones into Black and White and merging the two layers together.

4. Create a new Canvas and add Text

Next you create a new canvas with the same size

as the portrait image. Write out the text you’d like in
the Typography Portrait; a poem or quote might add
a nice touch rather than meaningless words.

5. Adding in yout Text

The text is then turned into a Brush and clicked onto the portrait canvas into a new layer using varient
brushes sizes. A mask layer it then placed on the text layer. Go to your portrait layer and copy the
image, the mask layer is click where you paste in the image. The portrait image on the mask layer is

46 | P a g e
then inverted. You then click back onto the original text layer and remove the original portrait layer
from view to see the new typographic portrait.

6. Gradient and Final Touches

A Gradient Option is added using Blending Options and a soft brush is selected and brushed on
certain areas of the face using the color black and an opacity of 33% to enhance certain areas.

47 | P a g e
Creating a clipping mask from type

A clipping mask is an object or a group of objects whose shape masks other artwork so that only
areas that lie within the shape of the masking object are visible. In effect, you are clipping the artwork
to conform to the shape of the object (or mask). In Photoshop, you can create a clipping mask from
shapes or letters.

Creating a design element from type

To be demonstrated in practical class by teacher

Using interactive formatting controls

The Character palette in Photoshop contains many options to help

you set beautiful type, but not all of the choices and controls are
obvious—as in the trick of scrubbing the Tracking icon to
choose a tracking value.

Select text in the image window, and in the Character palette or on the Type tool options bar you can
do the following:

 Scrub the Size, Leading, Tracking, Kerning, Scaling, and Baseline Shift values.

48 | P a g e
  Select some type in the image window, click the font displayed in the Font Family pop-up
menu, and press the up and down arrow keys to cycle through the available fonts and watch
them preview interactively in the image window.

Wrapping font type

Warping lets you distort type to conform to a variety of shapes, such as an arc or a wave. You can
change a layer's warp style at any time to change the overall shape of the warp. Warping options
give you precise control over the orientation and perspective of the warp effect.

Designing a paragraph of type

In Photoshop, you will often use point type - a few discrete words or lines – which are added by
clicking once with the Type tool and then adding some text. Often, however, a design may call for full
paragraphs of text. You can design complete paragraphs of type in Photoshop and you don't have to
switch to page-layout program to get paragraph type
control. In this short tutorial I'll show you how to do it.

Step 1
Open or create an image that you want to add a
paragraph of text to. I'm using this picture of a couple of
pears.

49 | P a g e
Step 2
Select the Horizontal Type tool (), and in the Character palette, choose a typeface. I'm using Century,
I've set the Size to 12 points, Leading to Auto, Tracking to 0, and text Colour to white.

Step 3
Click the Paragraph tab to bring the Paragraph palette forward, and click the Justify Last Left button.

Step 4
Select the Horizontal Type Tool from the toolbox and instead of just clicking once on the document
window, click and drag out a rectangular marquee.

50 | P a g e
This creates a text box into which your text will flow.

You will notice a small flashing cursor inside the text box. Start typing in your text, or if you have
copied some text from another document or web page, press Ctrl+V (windows) to paste the text that
you copied into the text box. Your text will now flow neatly from one side of the text box to the other,
because you selected Justified from the paragraph
palette.

51 | P a g e
Step 5

Once your text is in the text box, you can use the Move tool to drag the text to wherever you want on
the image.

Preparing file for print

 Always transform your images in their native application. Size, crop, rotate, shear, and reflect
art in Photoshop.
 Ensure that images can first print from Photoshop. Do this before importing the images into an
illustration or page layout program.
 When saving Photoshop images for print purposes, stick to TIFF, EPS, native PSD, or PDF
file formats.
 Make sure that you use the proper color mode. For example, use CMYK for color separations
for offset printing and RGB for photographic prints.
 Create vector shapes and paths efficiently. Use the fewest number of anchor points possible
to create the path and delete any unnecessary or stray points.
 Make sure that all scanning is at the appropriate resolution.
 If your image is to bleed (extend to the edge of the printed page), take that into account when
creating your image. Note that you need to allow for 1/8 to 1/4 of an inch on any side that will
bleed to allow for slippages when the paper is cut.
 When using spot colors, always specify colors from a Pantone color swatch chart and then
select the color, whether process or spot, in Photoshop.
 Print and provide laser or inkjet prints of your file, both separations (if warranted), and a
composite print.
 Provide all fonts used in your file. Provide both screen and PostScript printer fonts, if
applicable.
 Choose File→Save As for your final save to squeeze down to the smallest file size.
 Organize your files into folders.

52 | P a g e
Preparing file for web output

What Makes a Graphic “Web-Ready” image in Photoshop

1. Resolution is 72 dpi
2. Color mode is RGB
3. Generally reduced in file size for faster
4. Format is mainly jpeg, bmp or gif

This process utilizes five steps:

1. Downsize the image.

2. Sharpen the image.
3. Save a copy of the image with the layers.

4. Convert the color space/flatten the image.

5. Convert to eight-bit image.
6. Save the JPEG image.

File compression

1. Open an image to experiment with.If you copy an image from the clipboard, choose File -->
New from Clipboard.

2. Choose File --> Save As (Ctrl+Shift+S) to save the original image.

3. Choose File --> Save For Web (Alt+Shift+Ctrl+S) or choose the Save For Web icon in the
Shortcuts bar.

4. Inspect the settings contained in the Save For Web dialog box.

5. The JPEG quality setting is set to Maximum/100 by default

6. Adjust the quality settings — High (60%), Medium (30%), and Low (10%) — in the Settings
drop-down list and then fine-tune the numeric settings in the Quality text box.

53 | P a g e
 7. Type a number, such as 40 or 50 percent, to make additional changes to the numeric
setting.

8. Photoshop and Photoshop Elements use lower compression values to indicate more
compression and a smaller file size (100 = least compression, 1 = most);

9. Click OK when you're ready to save your image.

SUMMARY

1. Vector shapes are lines and curves you draw using the shape or pen tools.
2. Vector shapes are resolution-independent—they maintain crisp edges when resized, printed to
a PostScript printer, saved in a PDF file, or mported into a vector-based graphics application.
3. A path consists of one or more straight or curved segments. Anchor points mark the end points
of the path segments.
4. Type in Photoshop consists of mathematically defined shapes that describe the letters,
numbers, and symbols of a typeface.

5. A clipping mask is an object or a group of objects whose shape masks other artwork so that
only areas that lie within the shape of the masking object are visible.
6. Warping lets you distort type to conform to a variety of shapes, such as an arc or a wave. You
can change a layer's warp style at any time to change the overall shape of the warp.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. ___________ consist of one or more straight or curved segment.

ii. A path can be ____________, with no beginning or and or open with distinct end
points.

54 | P a g e
 iii. A closed path X marks the _________point.
iv. When saving Photoshop images for print purpose stick to TIFF, EPS,
native ______________, _______________.
v. To save Photoshop original image type Ctrlc +_________+_________.
vi. The JPEG quality setting is set to maximum __________by default.
vii. Quality setting of Photoshop ________%, ________%,__________% in the
setting drop down list.

B. Find true or false

i. Choose File Save for web(Shiftc + Alt + S).

ii. Typographic design means image reflect text.
iii. M curves is a little tricker because it involves a new tool : the covert point tool.
iv. To draw U curve you change the angle of your drag, the shapes of the curve
Also changes.
v. A path cannot be closed.
vi. Vector shapes are lines and curves you draw using shapes or pen tools.

C. Short Answer Question

i. What is vector tool?

ii. Write about path of Photoshop.?
iii. How to draw U and S shapes.?
iv. What is typographic design?
v. What do you mean by wrapping font in Photoshop?
vi. Write few points to prepare file for print?
vii. Write the steps for preparing file for web output.?
viii. What is file compression?

55 | P a g e
In the lab

1. Create typography design on an image and save it.

2. Sunil wants to add Quotes on an image but he is getting trouble in it. Can you help
Sunil to achieve his solution?
3. Draw closed path line using vector tool.

56 | P a g e
Lesson-6
Flash You will learn

 What is flash and its uses

What is flash and its uses  Creating animation
 About symbols and
instances
Flash 8 is a powerful tool created by Macromedia that has  Types of symbols(graphic,
overcome the best expectations of its creators. Macromedia button,movie clip etc.)
 Converting an object to a
Flash was originally created in an effort to realize colorful symbol
animations for the web as well as to create animated GIFs.  Introducing time line and its
use in animation
Designers, web professionals and amateurs  Frames and key frame
have selected Flash 8 by many reasons.  About layers (inserting a
new layer, renaming &
deleting layer)
 Types of animation (frame
and tweened)

Why should I use FLASH 8?

The possibilities of Flash are extraordinary, each new version has outstripped the previous one,
and the present Flash 8 is not an exception. Although its common usage is to create animations
has far more applications. They are so numerous that all web designers should learn how to use
Flash.

Flash has been made up in order to fix the great lack in the Internet: that is, Dynamism. This
dynamism does not imply only animations but rather interactive animations, which allow users to
see the web as something attractive, not static (unlike most of the pages that are made by the use
of the HTML language). With Flash we can easily and quickly create animations of all types.

It is easy to learn how to handle Flash, it has a friendly environment that invites us to sit down and
spend hours making whatever our imagination suggests, but that is not sufficient to be preferred
by professional designers

57 | P a g e
Features of flash

 Attractive Designs: Flash 8 allows the using of visual effects that will ease the creation of
animations, presentations and forms more attractive and professional
 Font Optimization: It also includes some readability options for small sized fonts, what makes
our texts more comfortable to read.
 Consolidated Libraries: Now you can search any object existent in our movies faster, browsing
our open libraries from a single panel.
 More powerful animation: Flash 8 allows much more control of the interpolations setting a new
edition mode form which you will edit the velocity the rotation, shape, color and movement are
applied.
 More powerful graphics: Avoid the unnecessary representation of vectorial objects setting an
object as a bitmap.
 Improvements in video importing: To ease the working with video formats, Flash 8 provides
high-quality new independent codec, completely skinnable.
 Metadata Compatibility: Include your SWF files in searching engines defining a title, description
and/or keywords.
 Mobile devices Emulator: Preview your Flash Lite compatible mobile devices movies oriented
with the new emulator Flash 8 includes.

Creating animation

One of the main characteristics of Flash 8 is its simplicity, the

straightforwardness in its use allows to create animations in
an effective and quick way.

Let's suppose you want to create an animation in which a

globe goes up and down. It may seem a job for long hours,
but it is not as bad. Let's see how easy is to handle it with
Flash.

At first glance, it seems logical to draw the globe at each moment, so that growing number of
moments makes the movement more real: the more drawn instants, the more realistic movement.
58 | P a g e
 Nevertheless, with Flash it is sufficient to create only 3 frames: firstly, we will draw the globe at the
initial instance (above all), secondly, we will draw the globe at the moment when it touches the
ground and then the globe will come back to its initial position (actually you can create this frame
by making a copy of the first one).So far as we see now, most part of the work (drawing objects) is
already done.

Now, the duration of each movement is determined

by setting the time between the moments when the globe
is at the top and at the bottom, and finally Flash is pointed
out to create an animation of movement between those
two frames. It is easy, isn't it?

About symbols and instances

The Symbols come from objects that we've created using the tools that Flash 8 provides us. When
transforming these objects into symbols, they are included in a library at the moment of creation that
allows us using them on several occasions, either in the same or another movie

When we create a symbol, Flash saves it to a library. Every time we use this object in a movie, it's
converted into an instance.

Although they seem to be the same, there is an important distinction: when using a symbol, after
we've created it for our movie, on modifying it the instance will be updated, whereas the object will
continue being intact, as it was at the moment of its creation, so then we'll be able to return to use it
at another moment.

Types of symbols (graphic, button, movie clip etc.)

Graphic symbols
59 | P a g e
Graphic symbols are the simplest and most obvious type of symbol. When you create a Flash movie,
you create objects on the Stage. Some objects may remain still, such as backgrounds

You create graphic symbols to reduce the size of your file and to make it easier to add multiple copies
of a graphic to your movie. Symbols are stored in the Library and are available to not only the movie
in which you created them but also any other movie. Therefore, using symbols is a good way to store
graphic images for use in Flash movies.

Movie Clip Symbols

A movie clip is like a movie within a movie that you can manipulate by using interactive controls (also
called actions, created with ActionScript). A movie clip doesn't take place on the main Timeline;
instead, it has its own Timeline. For example, you can go to a movie clip at any time, play it, and then
return to where you left off on the Timeline. You can also attach movie clips to buttons.

Flash comes with several components, special movie clips that allow you to add user interface
elements — such as radio buttons, check boxes, and scroll bars — to your movies.

Button Symbols

Button symbols create buttons — those little graphics that you click in Web sites to take you to other
places on the site or the Internet. In Flash, you can use buttons in the same way, but you can also
use buttons to let viewers decide whether they want to see a movie — when they click the button, the
movie starts.

Converting an object to a symbol

 We select the object that we want to convert to a symbol. We open the dialog box of Symbol
Properties, acceding to the menu Insert → New Symbol or just by pressing Ctrl + F8 or F8.

60 | P a g e
  Type a name of the symbol, which we are going to create.
 The only that remains is to select the type of symbol or behavior into which we convert our
object. We can choose between Movie Clip, Button and Graphic..
 Click OK to create our symbol.

Introducing time line and its use in animation

The Timeline represents a simple mode of visualization. It consists of two parts:

1) The Frames that are limited by vertical lines (forming rectangles)

2) The Numbers of frames that allow us to know the assigned number of each frame, its
duration and when it will appear in the movie.

Moreover, there are some tools on the bottom to work with Onion paper and its information
about the Number of current frame (1 in the image), the frame Speed (12.0 in the image) and
the Time of the movie (0.0 in the image).

On the definition level, ―the Timeline represents the succession of frames in the Time‖. The
Flash movie will not be only the frames that appear on the Timeline one after another in the order
established by the same Timeline

61 | P a g e
Frames and key frame

A frame represents the content of the movie at one moment of time. So far, an animation is nothing
more as a succession of frames. You can control all these from the Timeline, but not all the frames
have the same behavior and can be treated equally.

Key Frame They are frames with specific contents that are created to insert into the movie inexistent
content. You can identify them by the black point that is in the centre or by the black vertical line.

About layers (inserting a new layer, renaming & deleting layer)

A Layer could be defined as one independent movie of only one level. That is to say,
one layer contains its own Timeline (with endless frames)

The objects that are at one Layer share a frame and due to this fact they can "get mixed up" among
themselves. Frequently it could be interesting, but other times it is convenient to separate the objects
in order that they do not interfere among them. For this, we will create as many layers as necessary.

62 | P a g e
Insert Layers : As its name indicates, it is used for Inserting layers in the present scene. It inserts
normal layers (in the following point the different types from layers will be
seen).

Erase Layer : Erase the selected layer.

Change Name: To change Name: of a layer, it is enough to double click the current name.

Layer Properties: If we double click the icon , we'll be able to access a panel with
the properties of the layer we've clicked. We'll be able to modify all the options that we've previously
commented and some more of lesser importance.

Show /Hide Layers : This button allows us to show and hide all layers of the movie. It is very
helpful when we have many layers and we want only to see one of them. In order to activate the view
of a concrete layer (or to hide it) it is enough to click the corresponding layer in the point (or in the
cross) that is under the icon "Show/Hide layers"

63 | P a g e
Block Layers : It blocks the edition of all the layers, so we'll not be able to edit them until
unblocking them. In order to block or to unblock a concrete layer, we'll proceed like in the previous
point, clicking on the point or icon "Lock" located in the current layer under the icon "Block Layers".

Types of animation (frame and tweened)

Frame-By-Frame Animation

Frame-by-frame animation is the way cartoons have been animated since the early days of
animation. Using this method, the animator draws a figure or
scene one frame at a time, drawing slight differences between
each frame. When the frames are then viewed in rapid
sequence, the differences between them create the illusion of
change or motion. In Flash, animators impose frame by frame
animations over still images or other types of animation to avoid redrawing an entire scene for every
animation frame.

SUMMARY
1. Flash 8 is a powerful tool created by Macromedia that has overcome the best expectations of
its creators.
2. Flash has been made up in order to fix the great lack in the Internet: that is, Dynamism.
3. Dynamism does not imply only animations but rather interactive animations, which allow users
to see the web as something attractive, not static
4. One of the main characteristics of Flash 8 is its simplicity, the straightforwardness in its use
allows to create animations in an effective and quick way.
5. The Symbols come from objects that we've created using the tools that Flash 8 provides us.

6. When we create a symbol, Flash saves it to a library. Every time we use this object in a
movie, it's converted into an instance.
7. Graphic symbols are the simplest and most obvious type of symbol. When you create a Flash
movie, you create objects on the Stage. Some objects may remain still, such as backgrounds

64 | P a g e
 8. A movie clip is like a movie within a movie that you can manipulate by using interactive
controls (also called actions, created with ActionScript).
9. Button symbols create buttons — those little graphics that you click in Web sites to take you to
other places on the site or the Internet.
10. The Timeline represents a simple mode of visualization. It consists of two parts: a
(a)The Frames that are limited by vertical lines and (b)The Numbers of frames that allow us to
know the assigned number of each frame, its duration and when it will appear in the movie.
11. A frame represents the content of the movie at one moment of time.
12. Key Frame is frames with specific contents that are created to insert into the movie inexistent
content.

13. A Layer could be defined as one independent movie of only one level. That is to say,
one layer contains its own Timeline (with endless frames)

14. Insert Layers is used for Inserting layers in the present scene.
15. Frame-by-frame animation is the way cartoons have been animated since the early days of
animation.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. ___________ layer erase the selected layer.
ii. If we double click on the ______________properties icon we’ll be able to access a
panel with the properties of the layer.
iii. ____________layer blocks the edition of all the layer.
iv. Using ____________ method , the animator draws a figure or scene one frame at a
time.
v. _____________ does not imply only animations but rather interactive animations.
vi. _____________ is one of the main characteristics of Flash 8.
vii. A ____________ represents the content of the movie at one moment of time.
viii. Flash 8 has been made up in order to fix the great lack in the_____________.

65 | P a g e
 B. Find true or false

i. The symbols come from objects that we’ve created using the tools that Flash 8 provides
us.
ii. The created symbol is saved into our created file.
iii. The time line represents complex mode of visualization.
iv. Graphic symbols are like a movie within a movie that you can manipulate by using
interactive controls.
v. A layer could be defined as one independent movie of only one level.

C. Short Answers Questions

i. What is Flash 8?
ii. What is key frame?
iii. Write one difference between Frame and Key frame.?
iv. Write the use of insert layer.?
v. What is time line?
vi. Name the two parts of time line.?
vii. What is Movie clip?
viii. What is show/hide layer in flash?
ix. Write the steps to start Flash 8.?
x. Write two features of Flash.?

In the lab

1. Teachers are suggested to give introductive practical on Flash for familiar with all the tools of
Flash 8.
2. Teachers are suggested to show basics practical, which makes animation in Flash 8.

66 | P a g e
Lesson-7
Flash Continued
You will learn
Motion Tween
 What is flash and its uses
Motion tweens transport a still object across a scene. In Flash,  Creating animation
an object is animated this way by selecting its start position and  About symbols and
instances
first animation frame as well as its end position and last animation  Types of symbols(graphic,
frame within the program. When run, the animation displays the button,movie clip etc.)
 Converting an object to a
object in a different section of the scene for each frame, creating symbol
the illusion of motion. Motion tweens are also used to move  Introducing time line and its
use in animation
background images, which creates the illusion that still images  Frames and key frame
 About layers (inserting a
in the foreground are in motion. Motion tweens also move two
new layer, renaming &
or more objects in a scene relative to each other. deleting layer)
 Types of animation (frame
and tweened)

Shape Tween

A shape tween changes the shape of an object over a series of frames. In Flash, this is used to
accomplish a number of effects. Notably, shape tweens are used to animate opening and closing
mouths or blinking eyes. Melting ice cream is created using a shape tween, as are expanding liquid
puddles and other similar effects. As with motion tweens, shape tweens are accomplished by placing
one shape in one animation frame and another shape in a subsequent end frame. When the

67 | P a g e
animation is played, Flash generates a shape somewhere between the other two in each intermittent
frame, creating the image of a smooth transformation between shapes.

Motion tweening

1. Draw a Shape
2. Select the shape using Selection tool
3. Right click on the Shape, click convert into symbol, give a name, select button and click
ok
4. click on the 25th or 30th frame, then click insert, click timeline, insert key frame
5. Rotate the shape or change its direction as you want.
6. Click on any frame between 1 and 25, right click and select convert to Motion Tween.
7. play the animation

Shape tweening

1. Draw a Shape
2. click on the 25th or 30th frame, then click insert, click timeline, insert key frame
3. Draw another shape over the 1st Shape or after erasing the 1st shape.
4. Click on any frame between 1 and 25
5. Click window, click properties, and again click properties.
6. Set the tween option below as - Shape
7. play the animation

68 | P a g e
SUMMARY

1. Motion tweens transport a still object across a scene.

2. A shape tween changes the shape of an object over a series of frames. In Flash, this is used
to accomplish a number of effects.
3. Shape tweens are used to animate opening and closing mouths or blinking eyes.
4. Shape tweens are accomplished by placing one shape in one animation frame and another
shape in a subsequent end frame.
5. In Flash, an object is animated this way by selecting its start position and first animation frame
as well as its end position and last animation frame within the program. When run, the
animation displays the object in a different section of the scene for each frame, creating the
illusion of motion.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. Animation displays the object in a different section of the scene for each frame by
creating the _____________of motion.
ii. Shape tweens are used to animate ________ and _________ mouths or blinking
eyes.
iii. Shape tween changes the ___________ of an object.

69 | P a g e
 B. Short Answer Questions

i. What is Motion tweens?

ii. Why shape tween is require in Flash animation?
iii. Write the steps for shape tweening.
iv. Write the steps for motion tweening

In the lab

1. Create an animation by using Shape tweeinig by creating Smiley.

2. Create an animation by using Motion tweeinig by creating Smiley.

70 | P a g e
Lesson-8
E-Commerce
You will learn
EDI(Electronic Data Interchange)
 EDI(Electronic Data
Interchange)
Electronic data interchange (EDI) is an electronic communication  What is E-Commerce and E-
Greetings ?
method that provides standards for exchanging data via any  Influence on user
 What factor one should keep
electronic means. Two different companies or organizations, in mind while doing e-
commerce, Websites
even in two different countries, can electronically exchange Example
documents (such as purchase orders, invoices, shipping notices,

and many others). EDI implies a sequence of messages between

two parties, either of whom may serve as originator or recipient.

The formatted data is transmitted via telecommunications or

physically transported on electronic storage media using wires

What is E-Commerce and E-Greetings?

E-CommerceItreferstoanyform oftransaction(exchange)thatusesanelectronicmediumto
facilitatethetransaction.

Social impacts of E- Business:

 Reductions in transactions and other costs.

 Increase in the internet users.
 Un-shortened supply chain.

71 | P a g e
  Improved customer service.
 Increased productivity/efficiency.
 Access to international markets.

SomeE-Businesswebsitesare:

NameofWebsite Purpose
www.irctc.co.in It providesonlinerailwayticketreservationinIndia.

www.licindia.com Insurancecompanyof India.

www.ebay.in India’smostpopularonlineshoppingmallprovidingfre
eonlineauctions.
www.amazon.com OnlinestoreforBooks,CD’s,DVD’s,MP3’setc.
www.yatra.com Onlineflightticketbookingservice.

An E-card is similar to a postcard or greeting card, with the primary difference being that it is created

using digital media instead of paper or other traditional materials. E-cards are made available by

publishers usually on various Internet sites, where they can be sent to a recipient, usually via e-mail.

It also considered more environmentally friendly compared to traditional paper cards. E-card

businesses are considered environmentally friendly because their carbon footprint is generally much

lower compared to paper card companies and because paper is not used in the end product.

E-cards can be easily sent to many people at once or extensively personalized by the sender

Typically, an E-card sender chooses from an on-line catalog of E-cards made available on a

publisher's web site. After selecting a card, the sender can personalize it to various degrees by

adding a message, photo, or video. Finally, the sender specifies the recipient's e-mail address and

the web site delivers an e-mail message to the recipient on behalf of the sender.

72 | P a g e
Types of E-card:

 Flash animation
 This type of E-card is based on two-dimensional vector animation controlled with
a scripting language. Flash animated greeting cards can include interactivity, for
example, asking the viewer to choose a picture to animate;
 Video E-cards
 "Video E-cards" use a combination of personalized text and video to convey the
message to the recipient.
 Mobile E-cards
 With the advance in mobile technologies, Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS)
which is basically picture SMS, became more and more popular.
 Web based multi-media E-cards
 The web-based card creation has been evolving becoming more creative. The
user can create greeting cards online choosing backgrounds, drag and drop
images, animations, smiles and write text that look like handwriting.
 E-cards games
 Some E-cards include interactive games.

Influence on user

ADVANTAGES OF ECOMMERCE
 Faster buying/selling procedure, as well as easy to find products.
 Buying/selling 24/7.
 More reach to customers, there is no theoretical geographic limitations.
 Low operational costs and better quality of services.
 No need of physical company set-ups.
 Easy to start and manage a business.
 Customers can easily select products from different providers without moving around physically.

73 | P a g e
DISADVANTAGES OF ECOMMERCE
 Any one, good or bad, can easily start a business. And there are many bad sites which eat up
customers’ money.
 There is no guarantee of product quality.
 Mechanical failures can cause unpredictable effects on the total processes.
 As there is minimum chance of direct customer to company interactions, customer loyalty is
always on a check.
 There are many hackers who look for opportunities, and thus an ecommerce site, service,
payment gateways, all are always prone to attack.

What factor one should keep in mind while doing e-

commerce?
1 Privacy
It is easy to collect a lot of personal information from a
consumer using an e-commerce website,

2 Security

Online transactions are inherently more insecure than those conducted in person because
there's no way to guarantee that the person making the payment is the actual owner of the
credit card used.

3 Price Wars
Merchants used to selling at their shop may often find selling online an extremely competitive
marketplace. or products are purchased from illegitimate retailers because they had the best
price.

74 | P a g e
 4 Returns And Complaints
Selling online means usually a higher return rate on products than when the purchase was
conducted in person.

SUMMARY

1. Electronic data interchange (EDI) is an electronic communication method that provides

standards for exchanging data via any electronic means.
2. EDI implies a sequence of messages between two parties, either of whom may serve as
originator or recipient.
3. E-CommerceItreferstoanyform
oftransaction(exchange)thatusesanelectronicmediumto facilitatethetransaction.
4. An E-card is similar to a postcard or greeting card, with the primary difference being that it is
created using digital media instead of paper or other traditional materials.
5. E-card businesses are considered environmentally friendly because their carbon footprint is
generally much lower compared to paper card companies and because paper is not used in
the end product.
6. Flash animation :This type of E-card is based on two-dimensional vector animation controlled
with a scripting language.
7. Video E-cards :use a combination of personalized text and video to convey the message to the
recipient.
8. Mobile E-cards :With the advance in mobile technologies, Multimedia Messaging Service
(MMS) which is basically picture SMS, became more and more popular.
9. Web based multi-media E-cards :The web-based card creation has been evolving becoming
more creative. The user can create greeting cards online choosing backgrounds, drag and
drop images, animations, smiles and write text that look like handwriting.
10. E-cards games :Some E-cards include interactive games.

EXERCISES
75 | P a g e
A. Fill in the blanks

i. EDI implies a sequence of _______________between two parties.

ii. _____________refers to any form of transaction that uses an electronic medium.
iii. _____________ based on two dimensional vector animation.
iv. Video-E-Cards use a combination personalized __________and ___________ to
convey the message.
v. ___________is easy to collect personal information from a consumer using E-
Commerce website.
B. Find true or false
i. EDI is an electronic communication method.
ii. An E-Card is similar to birthday card.
iii. MMS is Multimedia Message Server.
iv. Some E-Card includes interactive entertainment movie.
v. E-Card businesses are considered environmentally friendly.
C. Short Answer Questions
i. What is EDI?
ii. What do you mean by E-Commerce?
iii. Name some E-Commerce website.?
iv. What is E-Card? Name some E-Cards.
v. Write two advantage of E-Card.
vi. Write two disadvantage of E-Card.
vii. Write short notes on:
a) Price Wars.
b) Return and Complaints.
c) Security.

76 | P a g e
In the lab

1. Teachers are requested to show all the E-Commerce websites which discussed in the lesson.
2. Teachers are requested to show the disadvantage of E-Commerce with advantage by choosing
any E-Commerce website.

77 | P a g e
Lesson-9
Chatting
You will learn

 Definition
Chatting  Example

Definition
May refer to any kind of communication over the Internet that offers

a real-time transmission of text messages from sender to receiver.

Chat messages are generally short in order to enable other

participants to respond quickly. Online chat may address point-

to-point communications as well as multicast communications

from one sender to many receivers and voice and video chat,

or may be a feature of a web conferencing service.Online chat can

be direct text-based or video-based (webcams), one-on-one chat or

one-to-many group chattools such as instant messengers, Internet

Relay Chat (IRC), talkers

and possibly MUDs.

Example
The following are common chat programs and protocols:

 AOL Instant Messenger (AIM)

 Google Talk
 Internet Relay Chat (IRC)

78 | P a g e
  Skype
 WhatsApp
 Windows Live Messenger
 Yahoo! Messenger

SUMMARY

1. Chatting may refer to any kind of communication over the Internet that offers a real-
time transmission of text messages from sender to receiver.

2. Online chat may address point-to-point communications as well as multicast communications

from one sender to many receivers and voice and video chat, or may be a feature of a web
conferencing service

3. Online chat can be direct text-based or video-based (webcams), one-on-one chat or one-to-

many group chattools such as instant messengers, Internet Relay Chat (IRC), talkers

4. Google Talk, Internet Relay Chat (IRC)are the example of Online chat.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. Skype is an example of______________.

ii. Online chat can be direct ____________or ______________.
iii. IRC means______________________.

B. Short Answer Questions

i. What do you mean by Chatting?

ii. Write one difference between text based chat and video based chat.
iii. Write for Chat application.

79 | P a g e
In the lab

1. Teachers are requated to show few Online chat Example.

80 | P a g e
Lesson-10
Downloading/Uploading
You will learn

Downloading/Uploading Speed  Downloading/Uploadi

ng Speed
 Difference
 Example
 Concept of Bandwidth
and protocol

DownloadWhen you connect to the internet, the download speed is the pace at which data
(websites, programmers, music etc.) is transferred from another computer to your own. Currently,
when it comes to home broadband, download speeds range from 8 Mbps to 100 Mbps

Upload speed on the other hand is the speed at which data (such as your pictures and videos) is
uploaded to the internet – perhaps to put onto a social networking site such as Facebook, or file-
sharing site such as Flickr; Essentially, the upload is going in the opposite direction to the download –
from your computer to someone else’s.

Broadband upload speeds are generally much slower than download speeds. The reason for this is
that people generally do far more downloading than uploading, and as such downloading is given
priority by internet service providers (ISPs).

81 | P a g e
Difference
Speed

The time that it takes to upload or download a file depends on several factors. The main factor is the
digital size of the file, which is measured in bytes. The larger the file, the longer it takes to transfer the
information in it.

The quality of the connection from the Internet or central server to the smaller computer or device
also makes a difference in the transfer speed. A computer that has high-speed Internet connection
will be able to download or upload a file much more quickly than a computer that has a low-speed
connection would. In addition, the speed of the server on which the file is stored can affect upload
times or download times.

Background Operations

Uploading and downloading occur frequently, often without the user being aware that he or she is
doing it. For example, incoming email is downloaded from a server, and outgoing emails are
uploaded to be sent out.

Example
Downloading

1. Songs, Videos, files from the net

2. Text or Images that are displayed on your browser

Uploading

1. Sending emails
2. Posting Comments, status or pics on various social networking sites

* To be shown in practical by teacher

82 | P a g e
Concept of Bandwidth and protocol
Bandwidth is the bit-rate of available or consumed information capacity expressed typically in metric
multiples of bits per second. Variously, bandwidth may be characterized as network bandwidth, data
bandwidth, or digital bandwidth.

Bandwidth is a term used in the field of signal processing, wireless communications, modem data
transmission, digital communications, and electronics, in which bandwidth is used to refer to
analog signal bandwidth measured in hertz, meaning the frequency range between lowest and
highest attainable frequency while meeting a well-defined impairment level in signal power.

Protocols are rules exist at several levels in a telecommunication connection. Example, there are
protocols for the data interchange at the hardware device level and protocols for data interchange at
the application program level. In Open Systems Interconnection (OSI), there are one or more
protocols at each layer in the telecommunication exchange that both ends of the exchange must
recognize and observe.

The TCP/IP Internet protocols, a common example, consist of:

 Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), which uses a set of rules to exchange messages with
other Internet points at the information packet level
 Internet Protocol (IP), which uses a set of rules to send and receive messages at the Internet
address level
 Other Protocol are Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and File Transfer Protocol (FTP),

83 | P a g e
SUMMARY

1. Downloading refers to copying a file from network file server to the computer on the network.

2. Uploading refers to copying a file from computer to the network file server.

3. The time that it takes to upload or download a file depends on several factors. The main factor

is the digital size of the file, which is measured in bytes.

4. Uploading and downloading occur frequently, often without the user being aware that he or she

is doing it. For example, incoming email is downloaded from a server.

5. Bandwidth is the bit-rate of available or consumed information capacity expressed typically in

metric multiples of bits per second.

6. Protocols are the common set of rules which is used by the computer on the network to

communicate different types of devices.

7. In Open Systems Interconnection (OSI), there are one or more protocols at each layer in the

telecommunication exchange that both ends of the exchange must recognize and observe.

8. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), which uses a set of rules to exchange messages with

other Internet points at the information packet level

9. Internet Protocol (IP), which uses a set of rules to send and receive messages at the Internet

address level

10. Other Protocol are Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and File Transfer Protocol (FTP).

84 | P a g e
EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. ______________reafers to copying a file from network file server to the computer on

the network.
ii. ______________refers to copying a file from computer system to the network file
server.
iii. ______________ is bit rate of available or consumed information capacity.
iv. ______________ is common set of rules.

B. Short Answer Questions

i. What is Downloading?
ii. What is Uploading?
iii. Write one difference between Downloading and Uploading.
iv. Give few example of Downloading and Uploading
v. What is TCP/IP Protocol?
vi. Write full forms of:
a) FTP
b) TCP
c) IP
d) HTTP
e) OSI

85 | P a g e
In the lab

1. Download some images and upload it using E-mail.

Teachers are requested to show them in Practical Class.

86 | P a g e
Lesson-11
Audio and Video Conferencing
You will learn
Audio and Video Conferencing
What is it  What is it
 Use of It
An audio conference, or teleconference, is simply when a meeting
 Factors affecting Video

between several parties is held over the telephone instead of in person. Quality
 Usefulness of Video
The party instigating the audio-conference is known as the calling Conferencing

party and those joining the call are known as the participants.

Videoconferencing is the conduct of a videoconference (also known as a video conference or

video teleconference) by a set of telecommunication technologies which allow two or more locations
to communicate by simultaneous two-way video and audio
transmissions.

Use of It
1. Video and audio, or just audio connection between two
computers communicating via the Internet.
Examples of free audio conferencing software: Gizmo, Skype both enable users to speak to
other Gizmo/Skype users free of charge Examples of free video conferencing,
software: iVisit (cross platform), iChat (Mac only), NetMeeting (Windows only).

2. Breeze can also be used for video conferencing

3. Transmitted to & received from any computer in any location that has Internet. User must
have microphone, can have camera. Ideally every user has microphone (camera not
essential) for synchronous communication.
87 | P a g e
 4. Technology requirements for video/audio conferencing:
 Computer with access (ideally broadband) to the Internet.
 Browser.
 Speakers to hear audio.
 Microphone (to contribute audio).
 Web camera to contribute video.

Factors affecting Video Quality

The speed of the network connection is one of the biggest contributors to quality. If the network
connection is slow or unstable (such as over the open internet) the video session can be unusable.
Newer equipment (manufactured after 1999) can produce excellent motion pictures from even slow
speed connections and therefore can significantly contribute to better quality images.

Some seemingly minor factors can seriously affect quality. Microphone placement and function
significantly affect video conference quality because the audio clarity of a meeting is critical to the
perception of quality. Further, the amount of movement the meeting participants create, if great, can
cause codecs (the video conferencing engine) to create blurred images as they process
communications signals. Finally, the type-size of fonts used in computer presentations if too small
can be illegible to both near and far-end meeting participants. Tec phonic can offer assistance with all
of these quality factors and more. Contact us for more information.

Usefulness of Video Conferencing

Video conferencing can be used in a host of different environments, which is one of the reasons the
technology is so popular. General uses for video conferencing include business meetings,
educational training or instruction and collaboration among health officials or other representatives.
Thus far video conferencing has been used in the following fields:

88 | P a g e
  Business: Videoconferencing provides businesses with the ability to meet and to work with
others over a distance.
 Distance Learning: Videoconferencing is an exciting technology for education. Teachers
and students are able to see each other, share documents and discuss topics together in a
situation similar to a traditional classroom setting
 Telecommuting / Home Offices: Working out of home has never been easier or more
practical. Videoconferencing makes it possible to stay connected with people in a very real
way.
 Legal Environment: The use of videoconferencing technology is becoming more prevalent
in today’s courtrooms. Videoconferencing systems are used to enable testifying witnesses
to ―appear‖ in court without having to travel to the courtroom.
 Telemedicine: There are times when a person needs medical advice but is unable to visit
their personal physician or even more likely, a specialist. In such situations using
videoconferencing can make all the difference.

SUMMARY

1. An audio conference, or teleconference, is simply when a meeting between several parties is

held over the telephone instead of in person.
2. The party instigating the audio-conference is known as the calling party and those joining the
call are known as the participants.
3. Videoconferencing is the conduct of a videoconference (also known as a video conference or
video teleconference) by a set of telecommunication technologies, which allow two or more
locations to communicate by simultaneous two-way video and audio transmissions.
4. If the network connection is slow or unstable (such as over the open internet) the video session
can be unusable
5. Video conferencing can be used in a host of different environments, which is one of the reasons
the technology is so popular

89 | P a g e
EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. ______________ conference is simply when a meeting between several parties is held

over the telephone.
ii. The party instigating the audio conference is knownas_______________party.
iii. Video conference is the conduct of a video conference by a set of_________________.
iv. Breeze can also be used for ____________.
v. The ____________of the network connection is one of the biggest contributors to
quality.

B. Find true or false

i. Audio conference is takes place with Miscrophone.

ii. The party instigating the audio-conference is known as the participants.
iii. Video conferencing can be used in a host of different environments, which is one of the
reasons the technology is so popular
iv. Audio/Video Conferencing does not require any internet connection.

C. Short Answer Questions

i. What is audio conferencing?
ii. What is video conferencing?
iii. Write the technology requirements for video/audio conferencing.
iv. Give some example where Audio/Video conference takes place.
v. Who is calling party and participants in context with audio conferencing?

90 | P a g e
 Chief Patron
ShriSantosh Kumar Mall, IAS
Commissioner, KVS

Patron
Shri. G.K. Shrivastava, IAS
Additional Commissioner (Admin)

Shri. U.N. Khaware

Additional Commissioner (Acad)

Regional Patron
Shri C.Neelap
Deputy Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

Co-ordination, Compilation & Guidance

Shri D. Patle
Asstt. Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

School Co-ordination
Shri. K. AlungKhumba
Principal,KV NFR,Maligaon,Guwahati

Subject Expert
Dr. K. K. Motla, PGT(CS),
KV NFR,Maligaon,Guwahati
Sh. RajendraGavahle, PGT(CS),
KV NFR,Maligaon,Guwahati
Syllabus Content IX
Quarter – April to June

S.no. Units Contents No. of

Periods
1. Revision of 1.1 REVIEW OF PHOTOSHOP 6
Fundamental 1.1.1 Opening & Saving
Concepts 1.1.2 Scanning a Photograph
1.1.3 Adjusting Image Size
1.1.4 Selection Tools
2. Multimedia Authoring 2.1 REVIEW OF FLASH 10
& Animation 2.1.1 Using the Toolbar
( Review of Flash & 2.1.2 ANIMATION CONCEPTS
Introduction to 2.1.3 FRAMES & LAYERS
Autodesk 3DMax ) 2.1.4 About Layers
2.1.5 Types of Animation
2.1.6 Publishing the Movie
2.2 Introduction to Autodesk 3DMax
2.2.1 What is 3D?
 3D Basics:
 Modeling
 Animation
 Rendering
 Object-orientation
2.2.2 Navigation and Display
 Coordinate Systems & The Home
Grid
 Orthogonal vs. Perspective Views
 Changing Views and Viewport
Layout
 Display Modes &Viewport Window
Controls
 Custom Grids and Snaps
2.2.3 Creating Objects & Selecting Objects.
2.2.4 Parenting & Grouping objects.
2.2.5 Transforming Objects.
Quarter 2- July to Sept
3. Adding styles to 3.1 Review of HTML 16
Webpages using CSS 3.1.1 World Wide Web(WWW)
3.1.2 Headers
3.1.3 Body and Titles
3.1.4 Headings
3.1.5 Paragraphs
3.1.6 Tables
3.1.7 Lists
3.2 Adding Style Sheets
3.2.1 Setting the default style sheet language
3.2.2 Inline style information
3.2.3 Header style information: the “STYLE”
element.
3.2.4 Media types
3.3 External Style Sheets
3.3.1. Preferred and alternate style sheets
3.3.2. Specifying external style sheets
3.4 CSS Properties-Border, box, font, margin
3.5 CSS Classes
3.5.1. ID
3.5.2. Class Selectors

Quarter 3- Oct to Dec

4. Web Scripting 4.1 CREATING INTERACTIVE WEBPAGES USING 20
JAVASCRIPT
JavaScript 4.1.1 Introduction and History of Java Script
4.1.2 Objectives and Properties
4.1.3 Variables & Operators
 Variable constraints,
 Types of Operators: logical, arithmetic, relational
 Decision Making using if & Switch
 Iteration – Loops
 Window Object
 Popup Boxes – alert, confirm etc.
Quarter 4- Jan to Mar
5. Database concepts- 5.1 Basics of RDBMS 10
RDBMS 5.1.1 Purpose
5.1.2 Data Models
5.1.3 Relational Model
5.2 Data Definition Language
5.2.1 Creating Database and Tables
5.2.2 Creating Views
5.3 Data Manipulation Language
5.3.1 Data input, modify, display & deleting in tables
5.3.2 Ordering & grouping
5.4 Operating with multiple tables.
5.4.1 Union
5.4.2 Join
6. Network Safety of 6.1 Network Safety
Computer System. 6.1.1. Social Networking Ethics
6.2 Network Security Tools And Services
6.2.1. Tools
6.2.2. LAN Management
6.2.3. MAN Management
6.2.3. WAN Management
6.2.4 PAN Management
6.2.5. VOIP
6.3 Cyber Security
6.3.1. need
6.3.2. Objectives
6.4 Social Networking Various Practices
6.5 New emerging trends
6.5.1 mobile computing
6.5.2 cloud computing

ICT Projects to be completed in the one academic session

Work Experience:- (Using AutoCad)

1. Edible Landscape
2. Disaster Relief Housing

Art Education:- (Using AutoDesk Maya)

1. Save our Fish

Contents
Revision of Fundamental
Adding styles to Webpages 26
Concepts 1 using CSS
REVIEW OF PHOTOSHOP
Review of HTML
 Opening & Saving
 World Wide Web(WWW)
 Scanning a Photograph
 Headers
 Adjusting Image Size
 Body and Titles
 Selection Tools
 Headings
Multimedia Authoring & Animation  Paragraphs
( Review of Flash & Introduction to  Tables
Autodesk 3DMax ) 9  Lists
REVIEW OF FLASH
Adding Style Sheets
 Using the Toolbar
 Setting the default style sheet language
 ANIMATION CONCEPTS
 Inline style information
 FRAMES & LAYERS
 Header style information: the “STYLE”
 About Layers
element.
 Types of Animation
 Media types
 Publishing the Movie
Introduction to Autodesk 3DMax External Style Sheets
 What is 3D?  Preferred and alternate style sheets
 3D Basics:  Specifying external style sheets
 Modeling CSS Properties-Border, box, font, margin
 Animation CSS Classes
 Rendering ID
 Object-orientation Class Selectors
Navigation and Display
 Coordinate Systems & The Home Grid
 Orthogonal vs. Perspective Views Web Scripting JavaScript 40
 Changing Views and Viewport Layout CREATING INTERACTIVE WEBPAGES USING
 Display Modes &Viewport Window Controls JAVASCRIPT
 Custom Grids and Snaps Introduction and History of Java Script
Creating Objects & Selecting Objects.
Parenting & Grouping objects. Objectives and Propertie
Transforming Objects. Variables & Operators

 Variable constraints,
 Types of Operators: logical, arithmetic,
relational
 Decision Making using if & Switch
 Iteration – Loops
 Window Object
Popup Boxes – alert, confirm etc.
Database concepts- RDBMS 62 Check your progress on 79
Basics of RDBMS Web Scripting JavaScript
Purpose
Data Models
Relational Model
Data Definition Language Check your progress on 85
Creating Database and Tables Database concepts- RDBMS
Creating Views
Data Manipulation Language
Data input, modify, display & deleting in tables
Ordering & grouping
Operating with multiple tables Check your progress on88
Union Network Safety of Computer
Join
System.
Network Safety of Computer 73
System.
Network Safety
Social Networking Ethics
Network Security Tools And Services
 Tools
 LAN Management
 MAN Management
 WAN Management
 PAN Management
 VOIP
Cyber Security
 need
 Objectives
Social Networking Various Practices
New emerging trends
 mobile computing
 cloud computing
Lesson-1
REVIEW OF PHOTOSHOP

You will learn

REVIEW OF PHOTOSHOP
 Opening & Saving
An image editing software developed and manufactured by  Scanning a
Adobe Systems Inc. Photoshop is considered one of the leaders Photograph
in photo editing software. The software allows users to manipulate,  Adjusting Image Size
crop, resize, and correct color on digital photos. The software is
 Selection Tools
particularly popular amongst professional photographers and
graphic designers.

1|Page
Opening & Saving
OPENING A FILE: Opening a file is easy, just do Menu > File > Open…Navigate to the file and
highlight it, then click OK.
Steps:
1. Open Photoshop
2. click File > Open >navigate to document, click once on it

SAVE DOCUMENT AND THE FORMAT

Formats:

1. .PSD Thisis the Photoshop format and it preserves layers.

2. .JPG Thisis for the web and is used for graphics on the web.
3. .GIF Thisis also for the web but is best for text.
4. . TFF A great cross platform format that preserves all quality for printing.
5. .PCT Anothergood format for print and cross platform.

Steps:
1. Open Photoshop
2. Click File >Open navigate to document, click once on it, click OK.
3. Next let us perform some editing on the image or document
4. Next save it as Work.jpg on the desktop or any other folder
5. Click> File > Save As Change name, navigate to desired save location, Click OK

2|Page
Scanning a Photograph
1. Open Photoshop.

2. Place the image on the flatbed scanner.

3. Click on File Import, and choose your scanner name eg.hpscanjet 8200

4. The scanner will do a preliminary scan of the image and let you preview it. Do not remove the
image from the scanner.

5. Click on Accept to scan. The scanner will scan the image again, flipping and cropping it to
your specifications.

3|Page
 6. If the image is still not correct, you can do some editing with Photoshop (see below).

7. When you have a finished image, go to FileSave As... to save your image. Make sure you
change the image type from .psd (Photoshop document) to .jpg (JPEG) in the pull-down
menu. .psd files can only be viewed in Photoshop, but .jpg can be viewed anywhere.

Adjusting Image Size

1. Open the original photo in Photoshop

2. Click Image > Image Size.

3. The Image Size dialog box will open

4|Page
4. The current file size is displayed to the right of the words "Pixel Dimensions" and the image size.

5. Change the values as you want, you can enter whatever size you need (Entering new Width and
Height values for the image)

6. You can also change the measurement type to percent:

7. Simply change both the Width and Height values to 50 percent to the size of an image

8. Click OK in the top right corner of the Image Size dialog box,

5|Page
Selection Tools

1. Marquee Tools: The Marquee tool selects a section of the document based on the shape of the
chosen tool.

2. Lasso Tools: The Lasso tools allow you to select a section of the document either by freehand,
polygonal, or magnetic selections.

• The Lasso tool will close the selection will close automatically when the mouse is
unclicked.
• The Polygonal Lasso tool and Magnetic Lasso tool need the ends of the selection to be
joined for the section to become selected.

3. Magic Wand Tool: The Magic Wand tool selects areas of similar colors.

5. Crop Tool: The Crop tool trims images.

SUMMARY

1. An image editing software developed and manufactured by Adobe Systems Inc.

2. Photoshop is considered one of the leadersinphoto editing software.
3. Photoshop is particularly popular amongst professional photographers and graphic
designers.
4. Opening a file is easy, just do Menu > File > Open…Navigate to the file and highlight it,
then click OK.
5. .PCT Anothergood format for print and cross platform.
6. The Marquee tool selects a section of the document based on the shape of the chosen tool.

6|Page
 7. The Lasso tools allow you to select a section of the document either by freehand,
polygonal, or magnetic selections.
8. The Magic Wand tool selects areas of similar colors.
9. The Crop tool trims images.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. _____________ is an image editing software.
ii. _____________ is also for the web but is best for text.
iii. .PSD is the ____________ format.
iv. The __________ selects areas of similar colors.
v. Lasso tool allows you to select ____________ of the document.
B. Find true or false
i. .TFF is a great cross platform format that preserves all quality for printing.
ii. .PCT is the Photoshop format.
iii. Marquee tool selects a section of the document either by freehand, polygonal or
magnetic selection.
iv. Photoshop is developed and manufactured by Adobe System Inc.
C. Short Answer Questions
i. Which company developed Photoshop?
ii. In which filed Photoshop is helpful.?
iii. Write the steps to save Photoshop document.
iv. Write one difference between Marquee tool and Lasso tool.
v. What is crop tool?

7|Page
In the lab

1. Choose an image from your computer and resize it in three different styles and save it.
2. Sunil wants to crop an image in such a way that he should get only desired part but he could
not achieve it. Can you help him to solve his problem?

8|Page
Lesson-2
REVIEW OF FLASH&
INTRODUCTION TO AUTODESK 3D MAX
You will learn

REVIEW OF FLASH
REVIEW OF FLASH
Flash 8 is a powerful tool created by Macromedia that has  Using the Toolbar
 ANIMATION CONCEPTS
overcome the best expectations of its creators.  FRAMES & LAYERS
 About Layers
Macromedia Flash was originally created in an effort to realize
 Types of Animation
colorful animations for the web as well as to create animated  Publishing the Movie
Introduction to Autodesk 3DMax
GIFs.Designers, web professionals and amateurs have
 What is 3D?
selected Flash 8 by many reasons  3D Basics:
 Modeling
 Animation
 Rendering
 Object-orientation
Navigation and Display
 Coordinate Systems & The
Home Grid
Using the Toolbar  Orthogonal vs. Perspective
Views
 Changing Views and Viewport
Layout
 Display Modes &Viewport
Window Controls
 Custom Grids and Snaps
Creating Objects & Selecting
Objects.
Parenting & Grouping objects.
Transforming Objects.

9|Page
The Tools Bar contains all necessary Tools for the drawing.
Selection (arrow) Tool : It allows selecting the borders of the objects, the fillings
(with only one click), the borders (with double click), zones on our choice.
Line Tool: It allows creating straight lines in a quick way. The lines are created
as in any program of drawing. Click and drag to show up a straight line until the desired end
point.
Text Tool: It creates a text in the place where we click. Its properties will be
shown in thenext theme.
Oval Tool: The Oval Tool enables drawing circles or ellipses in a fast and
simple way.

Rectangle Tool: Its handling is identical to the Oval Tool; they only differ in the objects
they create.

Pencil Tool: It allows drawing lines, after being drawn you will be able to edit its shape
as you like.

Brush Tool: Its functionality is equivalent to the pencil, but its stroke is much thicker. It
is usually used for fills. We can modify its thickness and stroke shape.

Paint Bucket Tool: It lets you apply fillings to the created objects.

Lasso Tool: Its function is complementary to the Arrow Tool, since it can select any
object in afreeway (the Arrow Tool can only select objects or rectangular or square zones

Pen Tool: creates polygons (and moreover straight lines, rectangles...) in a simple
way

10 | P a g e
Sub selection Tool: This Tool complements the Pen Tool, as far as it lets us move
or adjust the vertices that make up the objects created by the above-mentioned tool.

Ink Bottle Tool: It is used to change quickly the color of a stroke. It is applied to
objects with borders, changes the color of the boundary with one click in the Colors Mixer
Panel.

Eyedroppers Tool: Its mission is to "Capture" colors to use them afterwards. To see
how itworks, we advice you to see the following animation:

Eraser Tool: It works like the Brush Tool. Nevertheless, its function is to erase
everything what "it draws".

ANIMATION CONCEPTS
One of the main characteristics of Flash 8 is its simplicity, the
straightforwardness in its use allows to create animations in an
effective and quick way.

Let's suppose you want to create an animation in which a globe

goes up and down. It may seem a job for long hours, but it is not
as bad. Let's see how easy is to handle it with Flash.

At first glance, it seems logical to draw the globe at each moment, so that growing number of
moments makes the movement more real: the more drawn instants, the more realistic movement.
Nevertheless, with Flash it is sufficient to create only 3 frames: firstly, we will draw the globe at the
initial instance (above all), secondly, we will draw the globe at the moment when it touches the
ground and then the globe will come back to its initial position (actually you can create this frame by
making a copy of the first one).So far as we see now, most part of the work (drawing objects) is
already done.

Now, the duration of each movement is determined

by setting the time between the moments when the globe
is at the top and at the bottom, and finally Flash is pointed
out to create an animation of movement between those
two frames. It is easy, isn't it?

11 | P a g e
FRAMES & LAYERS

A frame represents the content of the movie at one moment of time. So far, an animation is nothing
more as a succession of frames. You can control all these from the Timeline, but not all the frames
have the same behavior and can be treated equally.

Key Frame They are frames with specific contents that are created to insert into the movie inexistent
content. You can identify them by the black point that is in the centre or by the black vertical line.

A Layer could be defined as one independent movie of only one level. That is to say,
one layer contains its own Timeline (with endless frames)

The objects that are at one Layer share a frame and due to this fact they can "get mixed up" among
themselves. Frequently it could be interesting, but other times it is convenient to separate the objects
in order that they do not interfere among them. For this, we will create as many layers as necessary.

About Layers
Layer Properties

Insert Layers : As its name indicates, it is used for Inserting layers in the present scene. It inserts
normal layers (in the following point the different types from layers will be
seen).

12 | P a g e
Erase Layer : Erase the selected layer.

Change Name: To change Name: of a layer, it is enough to double click the current name.

Layer Properties: If we double click the icon , we'll be able to access a panel with
the properties of the layer we've clicked. We'll be able to modify all the options that we've previously
commented and some more of lesser importance.

Show /Hide Layers : This button allows us to show and hide all layers of the movie. It is very
helpful when we have many layers and we want only to see one of them. In order to activate the view
of a concrete layer (or to hide it) it is enough to click the corresponding layer in the point (or in the
cross) that is under the icon "Show/Hide layers"

Block Layers : It blocks the edition of all the layers, so we'll not be able to edit them until
unblocking them. In order to block or to unblock a concrete layer, we'll proceed like in the previous
point, clicking on the point or icon "Lock" located in the current layer under the icon "Block Layers".

Types of Animation

Frame-By-Frame Animation
Frame-by-frame animation is the way cartoons have been animated since the early days of
animation. Using this method, the animator draws a figure or
scene one frame at a time, drawing slight differences between
each frame. When the frames are then viewed in rapid
sequence, the differences between them create the illusion of
change or motion. In Flash, animators impose frame by frame
animations over still images or other types of animation to avoid
redrawing an entire scene for every animation frame.
13 | P a g e
Motion Tween

Motion tweens transport a still object across a scene. In Flash, an object is

animated this way by selecting its start position and first animation frame
as well as its end position and last animation frame within the program.
When run, the animation displays the object in a different section of the
scene for each frame, creating the illusion of motion. Motion tweens are
also used to move background images, which creates the illusion that still
images in the foreground are in motion. Motion tweens also move two or
more objects in a scene relative to each other.

Shape Tween
A shape tween changes the shape of an object over a series of frames. In Flash, this is used to
accomplish a number of effects. Notably, shape tweens are used to animate opening and closing
mouths or blinking eyes. Melting ice cream is created using a shape tween, as are expanding liquid
puddles and other similar effects. As with motion tweens, shape tweens are accomplished by placing
one shape in one animation frame and another shape in a subsequent end frame. When the
animation is played, Flash generates a shape somewhere between the other two in each intermittent
frame, creating the image of a smooth transformation between shapes.

Motion tweening

1. 1.Draw a Shape
2. Select the shape using Selection tool
3. Right click on the Shape, click convert into symbol, give a name, select button and click ok
4. click on the 25th or 30th frame, then click insert, click timeline, insert key frame
5. Rotate the shape or change its direction as you want.
6. Click on any frame between 1 and 25, right click and select convert to Motion Tween.
7. play the animation

Shape tweening
1. Draw a Shape
2. click on the 25th or 30th frame, then click insert, click timeline, insert key frame
3. Draw another shape over the 1st Shape or after erasing the 1st shape.

14 | P a g e
 4. Click on any frame between 1 and 25
5. Click window, click properties, and again click properties.

6. Set the tween option below as - Shape

7. play the animation

Publishing the Movie

To share a Flash movie you need:

1. SWF file generated by Flash Designer

2. a web page that will display the movie (Flash Designer can generate a web page for you)
3. a web hosting account (free accounts are OK)
4. FTP connection details

Few important things to know:

1. Flash movies exist as separate files (like images). They have extension SWF. This extension is
invisible unless you make Windows show file extensions.
2. To show a Flash file in your web page you have to use special code to display the content of the
Flash file. (you can't use them like images and use IMG SRC tags)
3. The code consists of OBJECT and EMBED tags and it tells the browser where is the Flash movie
(SWF file)
4. You have to upload Flash file on your web server

How to build SWF file from Flash Designer:

1. Open your Flash project

2. Choose "File" > "Export SWF File"
3. Name the file and click OK

How to generate a Web Page from Flash Designer:

1. Open your Flash project

2. Choose "File" > "Export HTML Page"
3. Name the SWF file "test.swf" and click OK
4. Flash Designer will generate 2 files "test.swf" and "test_html_code.htm" files.
5. The page should popup in an new window.
6. If you want a blank web page with the Flash movie only (without the code) choose "Blank HTML
Page with Flash" after step 2.

Uploading Flash file and HTML page with FTP.

1. Open Internet Explorer

15 | P a g e
2. Type ftp://www.yourwebsite.com (here's the address of your web server). Your web hosting
company will provide you with the server address. Press Enter
3. Provide the username and password.

4. Browse correct folder where your web pages exist.

5. Drag your HTML page and your SWF file into the folder (files "test.swf" and "test_html_code.htm").
6. Open a new Internet Explorer window and type the name of your web site. Try to browse your html
page for example http://www.yourwebsite.com/test_html_code.htm
7. Verify if the Flash movie appears.
8. You can also try to browse Flash movie directly for example http://www.yourwebsite.com/test.swf

Introduction to Autodesk 3DMax

What is 3D?

3D means three-dimensional, i.e. something that has width, height and depth (length). Our physical
environment is three-dimensional and we move around in 3D every day.

Humans are able to perceive the spatial relationship between objects just by looking at them because
we have 3D perception, also known as depth perception. As we look around, the retina in each eye
forms a two-dimensional image of our surroundings and our brain processes these two images into a
3D visual experience.

3D Basics:

Modeling

A 3D Model is a mathematical representation of any three-dimensional object (real or imagined) in a

3D software environment. Unlike a 2D image, 3D models can be viewed in specialized software
suites from any angle, and can be scaled, rotated, or freely modified. The process of creating and
shaping a 3D model is known as 3d modeling.

Polygonal Model:Polygonal models or "meshes" as they're often called, are the most common form
of 3D model found in the animation, film, and games industry, and they'll be the kind that we'll focus
on for the rest of the article.

Polygonal models are very similar to the geometric shapes you probably learned about in middle
school. Just like a basic geometric cube, 3D polygonal models are comprised of faces, edges, and
vertices.

Most complex 3D models start as a simple geometric shape, like a cube, sphere, or cylinder. These
basic 3D shapes are calledobject primitives. The primitives can then be modeled, shaped, and
manipulated into whatever object the artist is trying to create

Animation
16 | P a g e
Computer animation or CGI animation is the process used for generating animated images by using
computer graphics. The more general term computer-generated imagery encompasses both static
scenes and dynamic images, while computer animation only refers to moving images.

Modern computer animation usually uses 3D computer graphics, although 2D computer graphicsare
still used for stylistic, low bandwidth, and faster real-time renderings. Sometimes the target of the
animation is the computer itself, but sometimes the target is another medium, such as film.

Rendering

Rendering is the final process of creating the actual 2D image or animation from the prepared scene.
This can be compared to taking a photo or filming the scene after the setup is finished in real life.
Several different, and often specialized, rendering methods have been developed. These range from
the distinctly non-realistic wireframe rendering through polygon-based rendering, to more advanced
techniques such as: scanline rendering, ray tracing, or radiosity. Rendering may take from fractions of
a second to days for a single image/frame. In general, different methods are better suited for either
photo-realistic rendering, or real-time rendering.

Object-orientation

An Orientation constraint causes an object‟s orientation to follow the orientation of a target object or
averaged orientation of several target objects. Orientation constraints align each awning vane to its
supporting rod.

An Orientation-constrained object can be any rotatable object. When constrained, it inherits its
rotation from a target object. Once constrained you cannot rotate the object manually. You can move
or scale the object as long as it is not constrained in a manner that affects the object‟s Position or
Scale controller.

The target object can be any type of object. The rotation of a target object drives the constrained
object. Targets can be animated using any of the standard translation, rotation, and scale tools.

Navigation and Display

Coordinate Systems &The Home Grid

Grids are two-dimensional arrays of lines similar to graph paper,

except that you can adjust the spacing and other features of the
grid to the needs of your work. Using the home grid to position
houses

17 | P a g e
 Grids have these primary uses:

 As an aid in visualizing space, scale, and distance

 As a construction plane where you create and align objects in your scene.

 As a reference system for using snap

The home grid is the basic reference system, defined by three fixed planes on the world coordinate
axes . The home grid is visible by default when you start 3ds Max, but can be turned off with an
option in the right-click viewport menu. You can use any view of the home grid as a construction
plane or you can create a grid object and use that as a construction plane instead.

Orthogonal vs. Perspective Views

“Orthogonal” is a term used to describe two vectors that are perpendicular (at 90 degrees) to each
other. In 3D space, when the X, Y, or Z-Axes are not perpendicular, they are considered “non-
orthogonal” and the FBX plug-in does not support their representation as a matrix.

Because the FBX plug-in assumes that there is always a 90-degree angle between the X, Y, and Z
axes, it can support only orthogonal matrices. Any transformed axes that have non-orthogonal TRS
matrices are ignored by the FBX plug-in, so it does not import or export effects created when axes
are not orthographic.

Perspective Views: most closely resemble human vision. Objects appear to recede into the distance,
creating a sense of depth and space. For most 3D computer graphics, this is the view used in the
final output that the client sees onscreen or on the page. Perspective view of the ice-cream shop

There are three ways to create a perspective view in a viewport: perspective view, camera view, and
light view.

A perspective viewport, labeled Perspective, is one of the default

viewports. You can change any active viewport to this eye-like point of
view by pressing the keyboard shortcut P.

A camera view requires that you first create a camera object in your
scene. The camera viewport tracks the view through the perspective of
that camera. As you move the camera (or target) in another viewport, you
see the scene swing accordingly. If you alter the camera's field of view on the Modify command
panel, you see the changes as they are applied.

Changing Views and Viewport Layout

18 | P a g e
When you create an object, normalsare generated automatically. Usually objects render correctly
using these default normals. Sometimes, however, you need to adjust the normals.

Left: The normals shown as spikes indicate the orientation of faces on

the pyramid.

Right: Flipping normals can make faces invisible (or visible) in shaded
viewports and renderings.

Undesired normals can appear in these objects:

 Meshes imported from other applications.

 Geometry generated by complex operations such as
Boolean objects, lathe objects, or lofts.

Normalsare used to define which side of a face or vertex is considered the "out" side. The outside of
a face or vertex is the side that gets rendered unless you are using two-sided materials, or turn on the
Force 2-Sided option on the Render Setup dialog Common panel Common Parameters rollout.

 Viewing NormalsThe easiest way to view normals is to look at an object in a shaded viewport. In
this case, you are not viewing the normal arrows themselves, but rather their effects on the
shaded surface. If the object looks as if it is inside-out, or has holes, then some of the normals
might be pointing in the wrong direction
 Unifying NormalsUse Unify Normals to make normals point in a consistent direction. If an object
has normals that are inconsistent (some point outward and others inward) the object will appear
to have holes in its surface.UnifyNormals is found on the Surface Properties rollout and on the
Normal modifier.
 Flipping NormalsUse Flip Normals to reverse the direction of all selected faces. Flipping the
normals of an object turns it inside-out. Flip Normals is found on the Surface Properties rollout
and on the Normal modifier. The Lathe modifier sometimes creates an object with normals
pointing inward. Use the Flip Normals checkbox on the Lathe modifier's Parameters rollout to
adjust the normals..

Display Modes &Viewport Window Controls

You can choose different views to display in these four viewports as well as different layouts from the
Viewport Label Menus.

 Viewport Layouts: You can choose from other layouts different from the default
configuration. To choose a different layout, click or right-click the General viewport label

19 | P a g e
 ([+]), and from the General viewport label menu, choose Configure. Click the Layout tab of
the Viewport Configuration dialog to see and choose the alternative layouts.

 Typical viewport layout : You can change the default viewport layout by saving a
maxstart.max file with the desired viewport configuration and placing it in the \defaults
folder

.
 Viewport Layouts: The Viewport Layouts feature lets you set up any number of different
viewport layouts in a session and switch quickly among them. See Viewport Layouts.

Custom Grids and Snaps

1. Tools menu Grids and Snaps Grid and Snap Settings Right-click any snap button
2. Shift+right-click a viewport. Snaps shortcut (quad) menu Snap Options quadrant Grid
and Snap Settings

This command displays the Grid and Snap Settings dialog. This modeless dialog establishes
settings and options for snaps, the home grid, and user-defined grids.

Controls on the Grid and Snap Settings dialog determine which snap settings are used when you
activate snaps by clicking 3D Snap Toggle. Adjusting any of these snap settings does not
automatically turn on snaps.

Creating Objects & Selecting Objects.

With some variations, the steps shown in the following

images apply to creating any type of object on the Create panel. For
specific examples, see the Procedures section in any object's topic.

1. Radius defined2. Height defined

3. Sides increased4. Height Segments increased

To choose an object category:

1. Click (Create tab) to view the Create panel.

2. Click one of the buttons at the top of the Create panel. For example, (Geometry).
3. Choose the subcategory Standard Primitives from the list.
A number of buttons appear on the Object Type rollout.
To choose an object type:

20 | P a g e
  Click the button for the type of object you want to create.
The button highlights, showing that it is active. Four rollouts appear: Name and Color, Creation
Method, Keyboard Entry, and Parameters.

To choose a creation method (optional):

You can accept the default method and skip this step.

 Choose a method in the Creation Method rollout.

To preset the creation parameters (optional):

You can adjust all creation parameters after you create an object. Skip this step if you prefer.

 In the Parameters rollout, you can set parameters before you create an object. However, the
values of parameters you set by dragging the mouse (for example, the Radius and Height of a
cylinder) have no effect until after you create the object.

To create the object:

1. Put the cursor at a point in any viewport where you want to place the object, and hold the
mouse button down (do not release the button).
2. Drag the mouse to define the first parameter of the object; for example, the circular base of a
cylinder.
3. Release the mouse button. The first parameter is set with this release. In some cases, such
as Sphere, Teapot, and Plane, this completes the object. You can skip the remaining steps.
4. Move up or down without touching the mouse button. This sets the next parameter; for
example, the height of a cylinder.
If you want to cancel: Until you complete the next step, you can cancel the creation
process with a right-click.
5. Click when the second parameter has the value you want, and so on.

The number of times you press or release the mouse button depends on how many
spatial dimensions are required to define the object. (For some kinds of objects, such as Line
and Bones, the number is open-ended.)

Parenting & Grouping objects.

3. Main toolbar (Select And Link)

4. Use the Select and Link button to define the hierarchical relationship between two objects by
linking them as child and parent.
21 | P a g e
 5. You link from the currently selected object (child) to any other object (parent).
6. You can link an object to a closed group. When you do, the object becomes a child of the
group parent rather than any member of the group. The entire group flashes to show that
you've linked to the group.
7. A child inherits the transformations (move, rotate, scale) applied to the parent, but the child's
transformations have no effect on the parent. If you want the child not to inherit the transforms,
use the Link Inheritance (Selected) Utility or use the controls found in Link Info in the Hierarchy
panel.

8. You can also create hierarchical linkages using Schematic View. Use the Connect button on
the Schematic View toolbar to create hierarchical linkages between nodes.

Transforming Objects.
When you create any object, 3ds Max records its position,
rotation, and scale information in an internal table called a
transformation matrix. Subsequent position, rotation, and
scale adjustments are calledtransforms.

Moving, rotating, and scaling a figure. An object's actual

position within the world coordinate system is always
calculated in relation to its internal, or local coordinate
system, which is based on the object's transformation
matrix. The origin of the local coordinate system is the
center of the object's bounding box.

An object can carry any number of modifiers, but only one set of transforms. Although you can
change transform values from frame to frame, each object always has only one position, one rotation,
and one scale transform.

You can animate your transforms by turning on the Auto Key button and then performing the
transform at any frame other than frame 0. This creates a key for that transform at the current frame.

SUMMARY

1. Flash 8 is a powerful tool created by Macromedia that has overcome the best expectations of
its creators.

22 | P a g e
2. Selection (arrow) Tool allows selecting the borders of the objects, the fillings (with only one
click), the borders (with double click), zones on our choice.
3. Line Tool: It allows creating straight lines in a quick way. The lines are created as in any
program of drawing. Click and drag to show up a straight line until the desired end point.
4. One of the main characteristics of Flash 8 is its simplicity, the straightforwardness in its use
allows to create animations in an effective and quick way.

5. A frame represents the content of the movie at one moment of time. So far, an animation is
nothing more as a succession of frames.
6. Key Frame are frames with specific contents that are created to insert into the movie
inexistent content.
7. Insert Layers used for Inserting layers in the present scene. It inserts normal layers.
8. Erase Layer Erase the selected layer.
9. Show /Hide Layers button allows us to show and hide all layers of the movie.
10. Block Layers blocks the edition of all the layers, so we'll not be able to edit them until
unblocking them.
11. Motion tweens transport a still object across a scene. In Flash, an object is animated this way
by selecting its start position and first animation frame as well as its end position and last
animation frame within the program.
12. A shape tween changes the shape of an object over a series of frames. In Flash, this is used
to accomplish a number of effects.
13. SWF file generated by Flash Designer.
14. 3D means three-dimensional, i.e. something that has width, height and depth (length). Our
physical environment is three-dimensional and we move around in 3D every day.
15. A 3D Model is a mathematical representation of any three-dimensional object (real or
imagined) in a 3D software environment.
16. Computer animation or CGI animation is the process used for generating animated images
by using computer graphics.
17. Rendering is the final process of creating the actual 2D image or animation from the prepared
scene. This can be compared to taking a photo or filming the scene after the setup is finished
in real life.

23 | P a g e
 18. An Orientation constraint causes an object‟s orientation to follow the orientation of a target
object or averaged orientation of several target objects. Orientation constraints align each
awning vane to its supporting rod.
19. “Orthogonal” is a term used to describe two vectors that are perpendicular (at 90 degrees)
to each other.
20. Perspective Views ismost closely resemble human vision. Objects appear to recede into the
distance, creating a sense of depth and space

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. Flash 8 is a powerful tool created by_______________.
ii. ____________ enables drawing circles or ellipse in a fast and simple way.
iii. ____________tool creates polygons in a simple way.
iv. Eyedropper tool mission is to ___________ colors to use them afterwards.
v. __________represents the content of the movie at one moment of time.
vi. __________ are frames with specific contents that are created to insert into the movie
inexistent content.
vii. Frame-by-Frame animation is the way ____________have been animated.
viii. ___________tween changes the shape of an object overa series of frames.
ix. Flash movie exist as separate files. They have extension___________.
x. ID means______________.
B. Find true or false
i. Polygonal models are very similar to the geometric shape.
ii. Rendering is the final process of creating the actual 3D images or animation.
iii. Orthogonal is a term used to describe two vectors that are perpendicular to each other.
iv. Normalsare used to define which side of a face or vertex is considered the “IN” side.
v. Use Flip normals to make normal point in a consistent direction.

24 | P a g e
 vi. Viewport layouts lets you set up any number of different viewport layout in a session
and switch quickly among them.
vii. When you create any object 3Ds Max records its position, scale information in an
internal table called a transformation matrix.
C. Short Answer Question
i. What is 3D?
ii. What is Polygonal model?
iii. What is Animation?
iv. Write one difference between Orthogonal and Perspective views.
v. What is Rendering?

vi. Write one difference between Motion tween and Shape tween.?
vii. What do you mean by Frame-by-Frame animation?
viii. Write about layer properties of Flash.
ix. What is object orientation in Flash?
x. Write one difference between Frame and Key Frame.

In the lab

1. Create an Animation Using Flash Professional 8.

2. Create a 3D object Autodesk 3DMax.

25 | P a g e
Lesson-3
ADDING STYLES TO WEB PAGES
USNIG CSS
You will learn

Review of HTML Review of HTML

World Wide Web(WWW)  World Wide Web(WWW)
 Headers
WORLD WIDE WEB –The World Wide Web is a worldwide  Body and Titles
 Headings
information service on the Internet. The World Wide Web
 Paragraphs
or the Web, as it is popularly known uses special software  Tables
 Lists
called a Browser (client) and TCP/IP, HTTP and a Web server
Adding Style Sheets
to function.  Setting the default style sheet
language
Headers  Inline style information
Information placed in this section is essential to the inner  Header style information: the
“STYLE” element.
working of the document and has nothing to do with the
 Media types
content of the document. All the information placed with External Style Sheets
in the <HEAD></HEAD> tags is not displayed in the browser.  Preferred and alternate style
sheets
 Specifying
26 | external
P a g e style sheets
CSS Properties-Border, box, font,
margin
CSS Classes
The HTML tags used to indicate the start and end of the head
section are:
<HEAD>
<TITLE>…. </TITLE>.
</HEAD>

Body and Titles

The tags used to indicate the start and end of the main body of textual information are :

<BODY>
……..
……..
</BODY>

A web page would have a title that describe what the page is about without being too wordy. This can
be achieved by using the TITLE tag.

<TITLE>…………………………………..</TITLE>

Headings
Paragraphs

HTML documents are divided into paragraphs. Paragraphs are defined with the <p> tag.

<p>This is a paragraph</p>
<p>This is another paragraph</p>

Tables

Tables are defined with the <table> tag.

 A table is divided into rows with the <tr> tag. (tr stands for table row)
 A row is divided into data cells with the <td> tag. (td stands for table data)
 A row can also be divided into headings with the <th> tag. (th stands for table
heading)
 The <td> elements are the data containers in the table.
 The <td> elements can contain all sorts of HTML elements like text, images, lists,
other tables, etc.

The width of a table can be defined using CSS.

27 | P a g e
 <table style="width:300px">
<tr>
<th>First</th>
<th>Last</th>
<th>Points</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Vikram</td>
<td>Vats</td>
<td>98</td>
</tr>

<tr>
<td>Rajesh</td>

<td>Singh</td>
<td>60</td>

</tr>

</table>

First Name Last Name Points

Vikram Vats 98

Rajesh Singh 60

Lists
The most common HTML lists are ordered and unordered lists:

An ordered list: An unordered list:

1. The first list item  List item

2. The second list item  List item
3. The third list item  List item

HTML Ordered Lists

28 | P a g e
An ordered list starts with the <OL> tag. Each list item starts with the <LI> tag. The list items are
marked with numbers.

<OL>
<LI>Coffee</LI>
<LI>Milk</LI>
</OL>

How the HTML code above looks in a browser:

1. Coffee
2. Milk

HTML Unordered Lists

An unordered list starts with the <ul> tag. Each list item starts with the <li> tag. The list items are
marked with bullets (typically small black circles).

<UL>
<LI>Coffee</LI>
<LI>Milk</LI>
</UL>

How the HTML code above looks in a browser:

 Coffee
 Milk

HTML Description Lists

A description list is a list of terms/names, with a description of each term/name.
The <dl> tag defines a description list.
The <dl> tag is used in conjunction with <dt> (defines terms/names) and <dd> (describes each
term/name):
<DL>
< DT>COFFEE</DT>
<DD>- BLACK HOT DRINK</DD>
<DT>MILK</DT>
<DD>- WHITE COLD DRINK</DD>
</DL>

How the HTML code above looks in a browser:

Coffee

- black hot drink

29 | P a g e
 Milk

- white cold drink

Adding Style Sheets

CSS is a style sheet language used to determine the formatting of an HTML document.
Using separate style sheets for an entire site, leveraging semantic markup and identifiers like ids (for
unique page elements) and classes (for multiple, like elements) a developer can apply styles across a
whole site while updating a single (cacheable) file.

Setting the default style sheet language

We must specify the style sheet language of style information associated with an HTML document.

We should use the META element to set the default style sheet language for a document. For
example, to set the default to CSS, We should put the following declaration in the HEAD of their
documents:

<META http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css">

The default style sheet language may also be set with HTTP headers. The above META declaration
is equivalent to the HTTP header:

Content-Style-Type: text/css

User agents should determine the default style sheet language for a document according to the following steps
(highest to lowest priority):

1. If any META declarations specify the "Content-Style-Type", the last one in the character stream
determines the default style sheet language.
2. Otherwise, if any HTTP headers specify the "Content-Style-Type", the last one in the character stream
determines the default style sheet language.
3. Otherwise, the default style sheet language is "text/css".

Documents that include elements that set the style attribute but which don't define a default style sheet
language are incorrect. Weing tools should generate default style sheet language information (typically
a META declaration) so that user agents do not have to rely on a default of "text/css".

Inline style information

Attribute definitions
style = style [CN]
This attribute specifies style information for the current element.
30 | P a g e
The syntax of the value of the style attribute is determined by the default style sheet language

This CSS example sets color and font size information for the text in a specific paragraph.

<P style="font-size: 12pt; color: fuchsia">Aren't style sheets wonderful?

In CSS, property declarations have the form "name: value" and are separated by a semi-colon.
To specify style information for more than one element, we should use the STYLE element

<body>
<h1 >My First CSS Example</h1>
<p>This is a paragraph.</p>
</body>
</html>

Header style information: the “STYLE” element.

Using a <style> element in the HTML <head> section

31 | P a g e
<HEAD>

<STYLE type="text/css" media="projection">

H1 { color: blue}
</STYLE>

<STYLE type="text/css" media="print">

H1 { text-align: center }
</STYLE>

32 | P a g e
 Example of Inline CSS
<html>
<head>
<style>
body { background-color: #d0e4fe;}
h1 {
color: orange;
text-align: center;
font-size: 80px;
}
p{
font-family: "Times New Roman";
font-size: 20px;
border: thick dashed blue;
}
</style>
</head>
Css
</title>
Example of Inline CSS
</head>
<body>
<html>
<h1 >My First CSS Example</h1>
<body>
<p>This is a paragraph.</p>
<h1 style="color:Blue” >This is a Blue Heading</h1>
</body>
<p style="background:#ccc; color:#fff; border: solid black 1px;">This is a Paragraph</p>
</html>
<p style="font-size:large;line-height:1.2em;color:#ff9900">This text has been styled using inline style
sheets.</p>
<h1 ALIGN="center" STYLE="background: #000080; font: 36pt/40pt courier; font-variant: small-caps;
border: thick dashed blue">Welcome to my home page!</h1>
</body>
</html>

33 | P a g e
Media types
HTML allows We to design documents that take advantage of the characteristics of the media where
the document is to be rendered (e.g., graphical displays, television screens, handheld devices,
speech-based browsers, braille-based tactile devices, etc.). By specifying the media attribute, We
allow user agents to load and apply style sheets selectively. Please consult the list of recognized
media.

The following sample declarations apply to H1 elements. When projected in a business meeting, all
instances will be blue. When printed, all instances will be centered.

External Style Sheets

We may separate style sheets from HTML documents. This offers several benefits:

 We and Web site managers may share style sheets across a number of documents (and sites).
 We may change the style sheet without requiring modifications to the document.
 User agents may load style sheets selectively (based on media descriptions).

Preferred and alternate style sheets

HTML allows We to associate any number of external style sheets with a document. The style sheet
language defines how multiple external style sheets interact (for example, the CSS "cascade" rules).

 We may specify a number of mutually exclusive style sheets called alternate style
sheets. Users may select their favorite among these depending on their preferences. For
instance, user may specify one style sheet designed for small screens and another for users
with weak vision (e.g., large fonts). User agents should allow users to select from alternate
style sheets.
 We may group several alternate style sheets (including the user's preferred style sheets) under
a single style name. When a user selects a named style, the user agent must apply all style
sheets with that name.
 We may also specify persistent style sheets that user agents must apply in addition to any
alternate style sheet.
 User agents must respect media descriptors when applying any style sheet.
 User agents should also allow users to disable the user‟s style sheets entirely, in which case
the user agent must not apply any persistent or alternate style sheets.

34 | P a g e
Specifying external style sheets

We specify external style sheets with the following attributes of the LINK element:
 Set the value of href to the location of the style sheet file. The value of href is a URI.
 Set the value of the type attribute to indicate the language of the linked (style sheet) resource.
 Specify that the style sheet is persistent, preferred, or alternate:
o To make a style sheet persistent, set the rel attribute to "stylesheet" and don't set the title attribute.
o To make a style sheet preferred, set the rel attribute to "stylesheet" and name the style sheet with
the title attribute.
o To specify an alternate style sheet, set the rel attribute to "alternate stylesheet" and name the style

Example of External CSS

1:Create a folder
2:Create a text document and type the CSS code and save it as mystyle.css
body { background-color: #d0e4fe;}
h1 {
color: orange;
text-align: center;
font-size: 80px;
}
p{
font-family: "Times New Roman";
font-size: 20px;
border: thick dashed blue;
}

sheet with the title attribute.

35 | P a g e
 Example of External CSS

3:Create another text document and type the html code below and save it as webpage.html
<html>
<head>
<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="mystyle.css">
</head>
<body>
<h1>This is a heading</h1>
<p>The style of this document is a combination of an external stylesheet, and internal style</p>
</body>
</html>

In this example, we first specify a persistent style sheet located in the file mystyle.css:

<LINK href="mystyle.css" rel="stylesheet" type="text/css">

Setting the title attribute makes this the user's preferred style sheet:

<LINK href="mystyle.css" title="compact" rel="stylesheet" type="text/css">

Adding the keyword "alternate" to the rel attribute makes it an alternate style sheet:

<LINK href="mystyle.css" title="Medium" rel="alternate stylesheet" type="text/css">

If the CSS file is not in the same directory, you can also specify its absolute path:

<LINK href=”D:\New folder\mystyle.css" rel="stylesheet" type="text/css">

Properties-Border, box, font, margin

Cascading style sheet languages such as CSS allow style information from several sources to be
blended together. However, not all style sheet languages support cascading. To define a cascade,
authors specify a sequence of LINK and/or STYLE elements. The style information is cascaded in the
order the elements appear in the HEAD.

36 | P a g e
CSS Font - CSS font properties define the font family, boldness, size, and the style of a text.
font-family:"Times New Roman", Times, serif;

CSS Borders - you can create rounded borders, add shadow to boxes, and use an image as a
border - without using a design program, like Photoshop.

div
{
border:2px solid;
border-radius:25px;
}

CSS Classes

The id and class Selectors

In addition to setting a style for a HTML element, CSS allows you to specify your own selectors
called "id" and "class".

ID

The id selector is used to specify a style for a single, unique element.The id selector uses the id
attribute of the HTML element, and is defined with a "#".The style rule below will be applied to the
element with id="para1":

#para1
{
text-align:center;
color:red;
}

Class Selectors

The class selector is used to specify a style for a group of elements. Unlike the id selector, the class
selector is most often used on several elements..center {text-align:center;}

37 | P a g e
SUMMARY

1. The World Wide Web is a worldwide information service on the Internet.

2. The World Wide Web or the Web, as it is popularly known uses special software called a
Browser (client) and TCP/IP, HTTP and a Web server to function.
3. All the information placed with in the <HEAD></HEAD> tags is not displayed in the browser.
4. Body tag used to indicate the start and end of the main body of textual information.
5. A web page would have a title that describe what the page is about without being too wordy.
This can be achieved by using the TITLE tag.
6. HTML documents are divided into paragraphs. Paragraphs are defined with the <p> tag.
7. Tables are defined with the <table> tag.
8. A table is divided into rows with the <tr> tag. (tr stands for table row)
9. A row is divided into data cells with the <td> tag. (td stands for table data)
10. A row can also be divided into headings with the <th> tag. (th stands for table heading)
11. An ordered list starts with the <OL> tag. Each list item starts with the <LI> tag. The list items
are marked with numbers.
12. An unordered list starts with the <ul> tag. Each list item starts with the <li> tag. The list items
are marked with bullets (typically small black circles).

13. A description list is a list of terms/names, with a description of each term/name.

14. The <dl> tag defines a description list.The<dl> tag is used in conjunction with <dt> (defines
terms/names) and <dd> (describes each term/name)
15. CSS is a style sheet language used to determine the formatting of an HTML document.
16. To specify style information for more than one element, we should use the STYLE element.
17. The id selector is used to specify a style for a single, unique element.The id selector uses the
id attribute of the HTML element, and is defined with a "#".

38 | P a g e
EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. ____________ is a World Wide information service on the internet.
ii. ____________tag used to indicate the start and end of the main body.
iii. Paragraphs re defined with ___________ tag.
iv. A row can also be divided into headings with the ____________ tag.
v. Tables are defined with ____________ tag.
vi. HTML supports Ordered list, Unordered list and _____________list.
vii. Ordered list starts with ___________ tag where as Unordered list starts witth
___________tag.
viii. Description list is a list of ____________
ix. The ID selector is defined with ___________ symbol.
x. The class selector is used to specify _____________ for a group of elements.

B. Find true or false

i. An Unordered list starts with <OL> tag.
ii. A table is divided into rows with <TR> tag.
iii. All the information which is need to display placed in <HEAD><HEAD /> section.
iv. A web page would have a title that describe what the page is about.
v. CSS is style sheet for web page.
vi. The most common HTML lists are: Ordered list, Unordered list, Description list.

C. Short Answer Question

i. What tag is used for insert table in HTML?
ii. What is list in HTML?
iii. Write one difference between Ordered list and Unordered list.?
iv. What is CSS?
v. Write one difference between <TH> and <TD> tag.

39 | P a g e
 vi. What is Description list?
vii. What is ID and Class in CSS?
viii. What is <LINK> in CSS?
ix. What do you mean by Media in CSS?
x. What is paragraph in HTML?

In the lab

1. Create a web page in HTML with CSS which will display five freedom fighters in a list.
2. Meenu wants to create a web page, which has information on “Digital India”, but she
could not able to add style effect on it. Can you help Meenu to achieve it?
3. Create a web page in HTML which has your class time table (Using Table).

40 | P a g e
Lesson-4
WEB SCRIPTING JAVA SCRIPT
Introduction and History of Java Script You will learn

JavaScript started life as Live Script, but Netscape changed the

CREATING INTERACTIVE WEBPAGES
name, possibly because of the excitement being generated by USING JAVASCRIPT
Introduction and History of Java
Java.to JavaScript. JavaScript is a lightweight, interpreted Script

programming language with object-oriented capabilities that Objectives and Propertie

allows you to build interactivity into otherwise static HTML pages. Variables & Operators

 Variable constraints,
The general-purpose core of the language has been embedded in  Types of Operators:
logical, arithmetic,
Netscape, Internet Explorer, and other web browsers. relational
 Decision Making using if &
Client-side JavaScript is the most common form of the language. Switch
 Iteration – Loops
The script should be included in or referenced by an HTML  Window Object
Popup Boxes – alert, confirm
document for the code to be interpreted by the browser. etc.

It means that a web page need no longer be static HTML,

but can include programs that interact with the user, control the browser, and dynamically create
HTML content.

Objectives and Properties

JavaScript is:

 JavaScript is a lightweight, interpreted programming language

 Designed for creating network-centric applications
 Complementary to and integrated with Java
 Complementary to and integrated with HTML
 Open and cross-platform

41 | P a g e
The general-purpose core of the language has been embedded in Netscape, Internet Explorer, and
other web browsers

Advantages of JavaScript: The merits of using JavaScript are:

 Less server interaction: You can validate user input before sending the page off to the
server. This saves server traffic, which means less load on your server.
 Immediate feedback to the visitors: They do not have to wait for a page reload to see if they
have forgotten to enter something.
 Increased interactivity: You can create interfaces that react when the user hovers over them
with a mouse or activates them via the keyboard.
 Richer interfaces: You can use JavaScript to include such items as drag-and-drop
components and sliders to give a Rich Interface to your site visitors.

Limitations with JavaScript:

 We cannot treat JavaScript as a full-fledged programming language.
 Client-side JavaScript does not allow the reading or writing of files. This has been kept for
security reason.
 JavaScript cannot be used for networking applications because there is no such support
available.
 JavaScript does not have any multithreading or multiprocess capabilities.

JavaScript Syntax:
A JavaScript consists of JavaScript statements that are placed within the <script>... </script> HTML
tags in a web page.

<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

JavaScript code

</script>

The script tag takes two important attributes:

 Language: This attribute specifies what scripting language you are using. Typically, its value
will be JavaScript.
 Type: This attribute is what is now recommended to indicate the scripting language in use and
its value should be set to "text/javascript".

42 | P a g e
Your First JavaScript Script:
Let us write an example to print out "Hello World".

<html>

<body>

<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

<!--

document.write("Hello World!")

//-->

</script>
Used to write text, HTML, or both

</body>

</html>

So above code will display following result:

Hello World!

Variables & Operators

 Variable constraints,

JavaScript Data Types: One of the most fundamental characteristics of a programming language is
the set of data types it supports. These are the type of values that can be represented and
manipulated in a programming language.

JavaScript allows you to work with three primitive data types:

 Numbers eg. 123, 120.50 etc.
 Strings of text e.g. "This text string" etc.
 Boolean e.g. true or false.
Java does not make a distinction between integer values and floating-point values.

JavaScript Variables
Variable is the stored memory location that can hold a value in it. Variables are declared
with the var keyword. Storing a value in a variable is called variable initialization.

43 | P a g e
 Example:

<script type="text/javascript">

<!--

var name = "Ali";

var money;

money = 2000.50;

//-->

</script>

JavaScript Variable Scope:

The scope of a variable is the region of your program in which it is defined. JavaScript variable will
have only two scopes.

 Global Variables: A global variable has global scope which means it is defined everywhere in
your JavaScript code.
 Local Variables: A local variable will be visible only within a function where it is defined.
Function parameters are always local to that function.

<script type="text/javascript">

<!--

varmyVar = "global"; // Declare a global variable

function checkscope( ) {

varmyVar = "local"; // Declare a local variable

document.write(myVar);

//-->
</script>

44 | P a g e
This produces the following result:

Local

JavaScript Variable Names:

While naming your variables in JavaScript keep following rules in mind.

 You should not use any of the JavaScript reserved keyword as variable name.
 JavaScript variable names should not start with a numeral (0-9). They must begin with a letter
or the underscore character.
 JavaScript variable names are case sensitive.

JavaScript Reserved Words:

The following are reserved words in JavaScript. They cannot be used as JavaScript variables,
functions, methods, loop labels, or any object names.

abstract else instanceof switch

boolean enum int synchronized
break export interface this
byte extends long throw
case false native throws
catch final new transient
char finally null true
class float package try
const for private typeof
continue function protected var
debugger goto public void
default if return volatile
delete implements short while
do import static with
double in super

45 | P a g e
  Types of Operators: logical, arithmetic, relational

Operators: An Operator is a symbol that performs an operation.

JavaScript language supports following type of operators.

 Arithmetic Operators
 Comparision Operators
 Logical (or Relational) Operators
 Assignment Operators
 Conditional (or ternary) Operators

The Arithmetic Operators:

Assume variable A holds 10 and variable B holds 20 then:

Operator Description Example

+ Adds two operands A + B will give 30

- Subtracts second operand from the first A - B will give -10

* Multiply both operands A * B will give 200

/ Divide numerator by denumerator B / A will give 2

% Modulus Operator and remainder of after an integer division B % A will give 0

++ Increment operator, increases integer value by one A++ will give 11

-- Decrement operator, decreases integer value by one A-- will give 9

46 | P a g e
The Comparison Operators:

Assume variable A holds 10 and variable B holds 20 then:

Operator Description Example

== Checks if the value of two operands are equal or not, if (A == B) is not true.
yes then condition becomes true.

!= Checks if the value of two operands are equal or not, if (A != B) is true.

values are not equal then condition becomes true.

> Checks if the value of left operand is greater than the (A > B) is not true.
value of right operand, if yes then condition becomes
true.

< Checks if the value of left operand is less than the value (A < B) is true.
of right operand, if yes then condition becomes true.

>= Checks if the value of left operand is greater than or (A >= B) is not true.
equal to the value of right operand, if yes then condition
becomes true.

<= Checks if the value of left operand is less than or equal to (A <= B) is true.
the value of right operand, if yes then condition becomes
true.

47 | P a g e
The Logical Operators:
Assume variable A holds 10 and variable B holds 20 then:

Operator Description Example

&& Called Logical AND operator. If both the operands are (A && B) is true.
non zero then then condition becomes true.

|| Called Logical OR Operator. If any of the two (A || B) is true.

operands are non zero then then condition becomes
true.

! Called Logical NOT Operator. Use to reverses the !(A && B) is false.
logical state of its operand. If a condition is true then
Logical NOT operator will make false.

The Assignment Operators:

Operator Description Example

= Simple assignment operator, Assigns values from C = A + B will assign value of A +

right side operands to left side operand B into C

+= Add AND assignment operator, It adds right operand C += A is equivalent to C = C + A

to the left operand and assign the result to left
operand

-= Subtract AND assignment operator, It subtracts right C -= A is equivalent to C = C - A

operand from the left operand and assign the result to
left operand

*= Multiply AND assignment operator, It multiplies right C *= A is equivalent to C = C * A

operand with the left operand and assign the result to
left operand

48 | P a g e
/= Divide AND assignment operator, It divides left C /= A is equivalent to C = C / A
operand with the right operand and assign the result
to left operand

%= Modulus AND assignment operator, It takes modulus C %= A is equivalent to C = C %

using two operands and assign the result to left A
operand

 Decision Making using if & Switch

if...else Statements:While writing a program, you need to make use of conditional statements that
allow your program to make correct decisions and perform right actions.

JavaScript supports following forms of if..else statement:

 if statement
 if...else statement
 if...else if... statement.

if statement:

The if statement allows JavaScript to make decisions and execute statements conditionally.

Syntax:

if (expression){
Statement(s) to be executed if expression is true
}

Example:

<script type="text/javascript">
var age = 20;
if( age > 18 ){
document.write("<b>Qualifies for driving</b>");
}
</script>

49 | P a g e
This will produce following result:

Qualifies for driving

if...else statement:

The if...else statement is the next form of control statement that allows JavaScript to execute
statements in more controlled way i.e to choose from given options.

Syntax:

if (expression){
Statement(s) to be executed if expression is true
}else{
Statement(s) to be executed if expression is false
}

Example:

<script type="text/javascript">
var age = 15;
if( age > 18 ){
document.write("<b>Qualifies for driving</b>");
}else{
document.write("<b>Does not qualify for driving</b>");
}
</script>

This will produce following result:

Does not qualify for driving

if...else if... statement:

The if...else if... statement allows JavaScript to make correct decision out of several conditions.

50 | P a g e
Syntax:
if (expression 1){
Statement(s) to be executed if expression 1 is true
}else if (expression 2){
Statement(s) to be executed if expression 2 is true
}else if (expression 3){
Statement(s) to be executed if expression 3 is true
}else{
Statement(s) to be executed if no expression is true
}
Example:

<script type="text/javascript">
var book = "maths";
if( book == "history" ){
document.write("<b>History Book</b>");
}else if( book == "maths" ){
document.write("<b>Maths Book</b>");
}else if( book == "economics" ){
document.write("<b>Economics Book</b>");
}else{
document.write("<b>Unknown Book</b>");
}
</script>

This will produce following result:

Maths Book

Switch Case:You can use multiple if...else if statements, to perform a multiway branch. However, this
is not always the best solution, especially when all of the branches depend on the value of a single
variable.

51 | P a g e
Syntax: The basic syntax of the switch statement is to give an expression to evaluate and
several different statements to execute based on the value of the expression. The interpreter checks
each case against the value of the expression until a match is found. If nothing matches, a
default condition will be used.

switch (expression)
{
case condition 1: statement(s)
break;
case condition 2: statement(s)
break;
...
case condition n: statement(s)
The break statements indicate to the
break;
interpreter the end of that particular
default: statement(s)
case. If they were omitted, the
}
interpreter would continue executing
each statement in each of the following cases.

Example: Following example illustrates a basic Switch case:

<script type="text/javascript">
var grade='A';
document.write("Entering switch block<br />");
switch (grade)
{
case 'A': document.write("Good job<br />");
break;
case 'B': document.write("Pretty good<br />");
break;
case 'C': document.write("Passed<br />");
break;
case 'D': document.write("Not so good<br />");
break;
case 'F': document.write("Failed<br />");
break;
default: document.write("Unknown grade<br />")

52 | P a g e
 }
document.write("Exiting switch block");
</script>

This will produce following result:

Entering switch block

Good job
Exiting switch block

Example:Consider a case if you do not use break statement:

<script type="text/javascript">
var grade='A';
document.write("Entering switch block<br />");
switch (grade)
{
case 'A': document.write("Good job<br />");
case 'B': document.write("Pretty good<br />");
case 'C': document.write("Passed<br />");
case 'D': document.write("Not so good<br />");
case 'F': document.write("Failed<br />");
default: document.write("Unknown grade<br />")
}
document.write("Exiting switch block");
</script>

This will produce following result:

Entering switch block

Good job
Pretty good
Passed
Not so good
Failed
Unknown grade
Exiting switch block

53 | P a g e
Iteration – Loops
A loop is a block of code that allows you to repeat a section of code a certain number of times;
perhaps changing certain variable values each time the code is executed.

This not only saves you the time and trouble of repeatedly typing the same lines of code, but
also avoids typing errors in the repeated lines.

JavaScript allows you to use the for, while, and do while loops.

 For loop: Structure of a for Loop

This line determines how many times the loop will
for (initialization; test condition; iteration statement) run

JavaScript Code Here The JavaScript code for the loop will be inside the brackets here

Parts of for loop are:

1. Initialization:Here we initialize our counter to a starting value. The initialization statement is

executed before the loop begins.
2. Test condition: If condition is true then code given inside the loop will be executed otherwise
loop will come out.
3. Iteration statement: The iteration statement where you can increase or decrease your
counter.

Example: JavaScript to write a sentence to the page 5 times

<script type="text/javascript">
<!--
for (var count=1;count<6;count+=1) {

document.write("I am part of a loop!<br />");

//-->

</script>

54 | P a g e
This will produce following result:

I am part of a loop!
I am part of a loop!
I am part of a loop!
I am part of a loop!
I am part of a loop!

 While loop:

syntax : initialization;

while( condition )

{ JavaScript Code Here;

Update expression;

Example:

A variable is assigned a value to count the loop

var count=1;

while (count<6) The while statement begins with a comparison

JavaScript Code Here

The count variable is adjusted so that you do not have an endless
count++; loop

Program to print 5 numbers using a basic while loop:

<script type="text/javascript">
var count = 1;
document.write("Starting Loop" + "<br />");
while (count <= 5)
{

55 | P a g e
document.write("Number : " + count + "<br />");

count++;
}
document.write("Loop stopped!");
</script>

This will produce following result:

Starting Loop
Number : 1
Number : 2
Number : 3
Number : 4
Number : 5
Loop stopped!

Window Object

Popup Boxes – alert, confirm etc.

JavaScript supports three important types of dialog boxes. These dialog boxes can be used to raise
and alert, or to get confirmation on any input or to have a kind of input from the users.

 Alert Dialog Box:

An alert dialog box is mostly used to give a warning message to the users.

<html>

<head>

<script type="text/javascript">

<!--

function Warn()

alert("This is a warning message!");

56 | P a g e
 }

//-->

</script>

</head>

<body>

<p>Click the following button to see the result: </p>

<form>

<input type="button" value="Click Me" onclick="Warn();" />

</form>

</body>

</html>

Nonetheless, an alert box can still be used for friendlier messages. Alert box gives only one button
"OK" to select and proceed.

On clicking button, „Click Me‟ an alert

window appears.

 Confirmation Dialog Box:

A confirmation dialog box is mostly used to take user's consent on any option. It displays a dialog box
with two buttons: OK and Cancel.

57 | P a g e
If the user clicks on OK button the window method confirm() will return true. If the user clicks on the
Cancel button confirm() returns false. You can use confirmation dialog box as follows:

<html>
<head>
<script type="text/javascript">
<!--
function getConfirmation(){
varretVal = confirm("Do you want to continue ?");
if( retVal == true ){
alert("User wants to continue!");
return true;
}else{
alert("User does not want to continue!");
return false;
}
}
//-->
</script>
</head>
<body>
<p>Click the following button to see the result: </p>
<form>
<input type="button" value="Click Me" onclick="getConfirmation();" />
</form>
</body>
</html>

Output will appear on the screen.

On clicking button „Click Me‟ aconfirmation, dialog box appears.

58 | P a g e
  Prompt Dialog Box

The prompt dialog box is very useful when you want to pop-up a text box to get user input. Thus it
enable you to interact with the user. The user needs to fill in the field and then click OK.

This dialog box is displayed using a method called prompt() which takes two parameters (i) A label
which you want to display in the text box (ii) A default string to display in the text box.

This dialog box with two buttons: OK and Cancel. If the user clicks on OK button the window
method prompt() will return entered value from the text box. If the user clicks on the Cancel button the
window method prompt() returns null.

You can use prompt dialog box as follows:

<html>
<head>
<script type="text/javascript">

function getValue(){
varretVal = prompt("Enter your name : ", "your name here");
alert("You have entered : " + retVal );
}
</script>
</head>

<body>
<p>Click the following button to see the result: </p>
<form>
<input type="button" value="Click Me" onclick="getValue();" />
</form>
</body>
</html>

59 | P a g e
 Output will appear on the screen.

On clicking button „Click Me‟ prompt dialog box will appear on the screen.

SUMMARY

1. The general-purpose core of the language has been embedded in Netscape, Internet Explorer,
and other web browsers.
2. A JavaScript consists of JavaScript statements that are placed within the <script>... </script>
3. One of the most fundamental characteristics of a programming language is the set of data
types it supports.
4. Variable is the stored memory location that can hold a value in it. Variables are declared with
the var keyword.
5. Storing a value in a variable is called variable initialization.

6. A global variable has global scope which means it is defined everywhere in your JavaScript
code.
7. A local variable will be visible only within a function where it is defined. Function parameters are always
local to that function.
8. You should not use any of the JavaScript reserved keyword as variable name.

60 | P a g e
 9. if...else Statements make use of conditional statements that allow your program to make
correct decisions and perform right actions.
10. Switch Case is one of the alternate of multiple if...else if statements.
11. A loop is a block of code that allows you to repeat a section of code a certain number of times;
perhaps changing certain variable values each time the code is executed.
12. JavaScript supports three important types of dialog boxes. These dialog boxes can be used to
raise and alert, or to get confirmation on any input or to have a kind of input from the users.

13. An alert dialog box is mostly used to give a warning message to the users.

14. A confirmation dialog box is mostly used to take user's consent on any option. It displays a
dialog box with two buttons: OK and Cancel.
15. The prompt dialog box is very useful when you want to pop-up a text box to get user input.
Thus it enable you to interact with the user. The user needs to fill in the field and then click OK.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks

i. JavaScript is a lightweight, ______________programing language.
ii. JavaScript is Open and _________________.
iii. JavaScript does not have any ___________ or _____________.
iv. Java Script Consists of JavaScript statements that are placed within __________ HTML
tags in a web page.
v. Scripts tag has two attributes___________ and ______________.
vi. Variables are declared with the __________ keyboard.
vii. ____________ can not be used as JavaScript variables, functions, methods.
viii. Switch case is one of the alternate form of________________.
ix. The ______________ statement indicates to the interpreter the end of the particular
case.
x. A loop is a block of code that allows you to __________ a section of code.
61 | P a g e
 xi. ____________ is mostly used to give a warning message to the users.
xii. ____________ is mostly used to take users consent on any option.

B. Find true or false

i. Storing a value in a variable called variable declaration.
ii. A loop is a block of code that allows you to repeat a section of code.
iii. A confirmation dialog box is mostly used when you want to pop up a text box.
iv. A global variable has global scope.
v. Switch case is one of the alternate of loop.

C. Short Answer Question

i. How to use JavaScript in HTML?
ii. What is JavaScript?
iii. What is variable? What are the types of Variable?
iv. Give one difference between Local and Global Variable.
v. What is reserved word?
vi. What is the use of break in switch statement?
vii. What is loop?
viii. Give syntax of For loop.
ix. What are the parts of loop?
x. What is dialog box in JavaScript?
xi. Give one difference between Alert dialog box and Confirmation dialog box.?

In the lab

1. Create a web page using JavaScript which will Check whether a person give vote or not.
2. Create a page using JavaScript, which will display a multiplication table for given number.
3. Create one admission form for a school using JavaScript which will pop up a message “ Sorry
age is not valid for the admission ” if the age entered below 5 years.

62 | P a g e
Lesson-5
DATABASE CONCEPTS- RDBMS

You will learn

Basics of RDBMS
Basics of RDBMS
 Purpose
Database Management System or DBMS in short, refers to the
 Data Models
technology of storing and retrieving user‟s data with utmost  Relational Model
efficiency along with safety and security features. DBMS allows Data Definition Language
 Creating Database and Tables
its users to create their own databases, which are relevant with
 Creating Views
the nature of work they want. These databases are highly Data Manipulation Language
configurable and offers bunch of options.  Data input, modify, display &
deleting in tables
 Ordering & grouping
Database is collection of data, which is related by some Operating with multiple tables
Union
aspect. Data is collection of facts and figures which can be
Join
processed to produce information. Name of a student, age, class
and her subjects can be counted as data for recording purposes.

Mostly data represents recordable facts. Data aids in

producing information, which is based on facts. For example,
if we have data about marks obtained by all students, we can
then conclude about toppers and average marks etc.

63 | P a g e
A database management system stores data, in such a way,
which is easier to retrieve, manipulate and helps to produce
information.

Users
DBMS is used by various users for various purposes. Some may involve in retrieving data and some
may involve in backing it up. Some of them are described as follows:

Administrators: A bunch of users maintain the DBMS and are responsible for administrating the
database. They are responsible to look after its usage and by whom it should be used.

Designer: This is the group of people who actually works on designing part of database. The actual
database is started with requirement analysis followed by a good designing process.

End Users: This group contains the persons who actually take advantage of database system. End
users can be just viewers who pay attention to the logs or market rates or end users can be as
sophisticated as business analysts who take the most of it.

Purpose of RDBMS:
A relational database will allow you to store data organized such that you can store your information
in tables, organized by rows (records) and columns (fields) which you can then store and access as
required.

64 | P a g e
The features of a relational database is storage minimization - you, as a DB designer try and use the
least storage that you can and still be able to access the data efficiently.

If you then need to retrieve any data, you would 'query' the database (ask it) if record exists in the
database or not. This interaction is done via SQL - Structured Query Language - to get the records
(rows) that you need.

By utilizing a well-structured database, you can store a lot of information and retrieve it quickly.

Data Models

Data model tells how the logical structure of a database is modeled. Data Models are fundamental
entities to introduce abstraction in DBMS. Data models define how data is connected to each other
and how it will be processed and stored inside the system.

The very first data model could be flat data-models where all the data used to be kept in same plane.
Because earlier data models were not so scientific, they were prone to introduce lots of duplication
and update anomalies.

1. Hierarchical Model: The hierarchical data model organizes data in a tree structure.

2. Network Model:Some data were more naturally modeled with more than one parent per child.
Therefore, the network model permitted the modeling of many-to-many relationships in data.

3. Object-Oriented Model:Object DBMSs add database functionality to object programming

languages.

Relational Model
The most popular data model in DBMS is Relational Model. It is more
scientific model then others. This model is based on first-order
predicate logic and defines table as an n-any relation.

Concepts

65 | P a g e
Tables: In relation data model, relations are saved in the format of Tables. This format stores the
relation among entities. A table has rows and columns, where rows represent records and columns
represents the attributes

Tuple: A single row of a table, which contains a single record for that relation,is called a tuple.

Relation instance: A finite set of tuples in the relational database system represents relation
instance. Relation instances do not have duplicate tuples.

Relation schema: This describes the relation name (table name), attributes and their names.

Relation key: Each row has one or more attributes, which can identify the row in the relation (table)
uniquely, is called the relation key.

Attribute domain: Every attribute has some pre-defined value scope, known as attribute domain.

The main highlights of this model are:

 Data is stored in tables called relations.

 Relations can be normalized.
 In normalized relations, values saved are atomic values.
 Each row in relation contains unique value
 Each column in relation contains values from a same domain.

Data Definition Language

Data Definition Language (DDL) statements are used to define the database structure. Some
examples:

 CREATE - to create objects in the database

 ALTER - alters the structure of the database
 DROP - delete objects from the database
 TRUNCATE - remove all records from a table, including all spaces allocated for the records
are removed
 COMMENT - add comments to the data dictionary
 RENAME - rename an object

Create database: The CREATE DATABASE statement is used to create a database.

Syntax:CREATE DATABASE your_name;

Create Table: The CREATE TABLE statement is used to create a table in a database.

Tables are organized into rows and columns and each table must have a name.

66 | P a g e
 CREATE TABLE Student
(
RollNoint,
LastNamevarchar(255),
FirstNamevarchar(255),
Address varchar(255),
City varchar(255)
);

Creating Views: A view is a virtual table. A view can contain all rows of a table or select rows from a
table. A view comes from one or more tables or just a part of table.

Database views are created using the CREATE VIEW statement. Views can be created from a single
table, multiple tables, or another view.

To create a view, a user must have the appropriate system privilege according to the specific
implementation.

Consider the CUSTOMERS table having the following records:

+----+------------+--------+----------------+--------------+
| ID | NAME | AGE | ADDRESS | SALARY |
+----+------------+------ +-----------------+--------------+
|1 |Ramesh |32 |Ahmedabad |2000.00 |
|2 |Khilan |25 |Delhi |1500.00 |
|3 | kaushik |23 |Kota |2000.00 |
|4 |Chaitali |25 |Mumbai |6500.00 |
|5 |Hardik |27 |Bhopal |8500.00 |
|6 |Komal |22 | MP |4500.00 |
|7 |Muffy |24 |Indore |10000.00 |
+----+-----------+---------+----------------+--------------+

Now, following is the example to create a view from CUSTOMERS table. This view would be used to
have customer name and age from CUSTOMERS table:

SQL > CREATE VIEW CUSTOMERS_VIEW AS

SELECT name, age FROM CUSTOMERS;

Now, you can query CUSTOMERS_VIEW in similar way as you query an actual table.

Following is the example:

67 | P a g e
SQL > SELECT * FROM CUSTOMERS_VIEW;

This would produce the following result:

Data Manipulation Language

Data Manipulation Language (DML) statements are used for managing data within schema objects.
Some examples:

 SELECT - retrieve data from the a database

 INSERT - insert data into a table
 UPDATE - updates existing data within a table
 DELETE - deletes all records from a table, the space for the records remain
 MERGE - UPSERT operation (insert or update)

SQL SELECT Syntax

SELECT column_name,column_nameOR SELECT * FROM table_name;

FROM table_name;

SQL INSERT INTO Syntax

INSERT INTO table_name (column1,column2,column3,...)
VALUES (value1,value2,value3,...);

SQL UPDATE Syntax

UPDATE table_name
SET column1=value1,column2=value2,...
WHERE some_column=some_value;

68 | P a g e
SQL DELETE Syntax
DELETE FROM table_name
WHERE some_column=some_value;

Ordering & grouping

The GROUP BY statement is used in conjunction with the aggregate functions to group the result-set
by one or more columns.

Syntax
SELECT column_name, aggregate_function(column_name)
FROM table_name
WHERE column_name operator value
GROUP BY column_name;

Example:
SELECT ZIP
FROM Customers
GROUP BY ZIP

ORDER BY Keyword
The ORDER BY keyword is used to sort the result-set by one or more columns. The ORDER BY
keyword sorts the records in ascending order by default. To sort the records in a descending order,
you can use the DESC keyword.

SQL ORDER BY Syntax

SELECT column_name,column_name
FROM table_name
ORDER BY column_name,column_name ;

Operating with multiple tables.

Union

The SQL UNION query is a SQL query to combine the result sets of 2 or more SQL SELECT
statements. It removes duplicate rows between the various SELECT statements.

The following is an example of the SQL UNION query that returns one field from multiple SELECT
statements (and both fields have the same data type):

69 | P a g e
 SELECT supplier_id
FROM suppliers
UNION
SELECT supplier_id
FROM orders;

Join

SQL JOINS are used in a SQL query to retrieve data from multiple tables. A SQL JOIN is performed
whenever two or more tables are joined in a SQL statement. There are 4 different types of SQL joins:

 SQL INNER JOIN (or sometimes called simple join)

 SQL LEFT OUTER JOIN (or sometimes called LEFT JOIN)
 SQL RIGHT OUTER JOIN (or sometimes called RIGHT JOIN)
 SQL FULL OUTER JOIN (or sometimes called FULL JOIN)

SUMMARY
1. Database Management System or DBMS in short, refers to the technology of storing and
retrieving user‟s data with utmost efficiency along with safety and security features.
2. Database is collection of data, which is related by some aspect. Data is collection of facts and
figures which can be processed to produce information.
3. DBMS is used by various users for various purposes. Some may involve in retrieving data and
some may involve in backing it up.
4. Administrators: A bunch of users maintain the DBMS and are responsible for administrating
the database. They are responsible to look after its usage and by whom it should be used.
5. Designer: This is the group of people who actually works on designing part of database. The
actual database is started with requirement analysis followed by a good designing process.
6. End Users: This group contains the persons who actually take advantage of database system.
End users can be just viewers who pay attention to the logs or market rates or end users can
be as sophisticated as business analysts who take the most of it.
7. A relational database will allow you to store data organized such that you can store your
information in tables, organized by rows (records) and columns (fields) which you can then
store and access as required.

70 | P a g e
 8. Data model tells how the logical structure of a database is modeled. Data Models are
fundamental entities to introduce abstraction in DBMS.
9. The hierarchical data model organizes data in a tree structure.
10. Some data were more naturally modeled with more than one parent per child. Therefore, the
network model permitted the modeling of many-to-many relationships in data.
11. The most popular data model in DBMS is Relational Model. It is more scientific model then
others. This model is based on first-order predicate logic and defines table as an n-any
relation.
12. A table has rows and columns, where rows represent records and columns represents the
attributes
13. Tuple: A single row of a table, which contains a single record for that relation, is called a tuple.
14. Relation instance is a finite set of tuples in the relational database system represents relation
instance.
15. Relation schemadescribes the relation name (table name), attributes and their names.

16. Data Definition Language (DDL) statements are used to define the database structure.
17. The CREATE DATABASE statement is used to create a database.

18. The CREATE TABLE statement is used to create a table in a database.

19. A view is a virtual table. A view can contain all rows of a table or select rows from a table.
20. DML statements are used for managing data within schema objects.

21. The GROUP BY statement is used in conjunction with the aggregate functions to group the
result-set by one or more columns.
22. The ORDER BY keyword is used to sort the result-set by one or more columns.
23. The SQL UNION query is a SQL query to combine the result sets of 2 or more SQL SELECT
statements. It removes duplicate rows between the various SELECT statements.
24. SQL JOINS are used in a SQL query to retrieve data from multiple tables. A SQL JOIN is
performed whenever two or more tables are joined in a SQL statement.

EXERCISES

71 | P a g e
A. Fill in the blanks

i. ___________refers the technology of storing and retrieving users data.

ii. A bunch of users maintain the DBMS and are responsible for ___________ the
database
iii. ___________group contains the person who actually take advantage of database
system.
iv. __________tells how the logical structure of a database is modeled.
v. A table has ______________ and _____________.
vi. A single row of a table called_________________.
vii. SQL Joins are used in ____________ to retrieve data from multiple tables.
viii. ___________ used to create database.
ix. DML statements are used for managing data within____________.
x. The _____________ keyword is used to sort the result set by one or more columns.

B. Find true or false

i. The CREATE TABLE statement is used to create database.
ii. Relation schema describes the relation name, attributes and their names.
iii. The most popular data models in DBMS is Relational schema model.
iv. DDL statement is used to define the database structure.
v. Designers are the group of people who actually works on End user part of database.
vi. The hierarchical data models organizes data in tree structure.

C. Short Answer Questions

i. What is DBMS?
ii. What do you mean by RDBMS?
iii. What is the work of Administrator in DBMS?
iv. Who is End User?
v. Give one difference between DBMS and RDBMS.?
vi. What is DDL and DML?
vii. Give syntax for Create Database.?
72 | P a g e
 viii. What is the use of Group By statement in SQL statement?
ix. What is View?
x. What is data model?

In the lab

1. Create a database name School and create table called “Student” , insert few records in
it and display using SQL Command.
i. Display only those records from the above database whose subject is
“Computer”.
ii. Display only those records whose tuition fee is above 2000.
2. Create a view of “Student” and Display the records form the created view.

73 | P a g e
Lesson-6
NETWORK SAFETY OF
COMPUTER SYSTEM
You will learn
Network Safety and Security
Network Safety
Network Safety
Social Networking Ethics
Network safety consists of the provisions and policies adopted by Network Security Tools And
Services
a network administrator to prevent and monitor unauthorized  Tools
access, misuse, modification, or denial of a computer network  LAN Management
and network-accessible resources. Network security involves the  MAN Management
 WAN Management
authorization of access to data in a network, which is controlled  PAN Management
by the network administrator. Users choose or are assigned an ID  VOIP
and password or other authenticating information that allows them Cyber Security
 need
74 | P a g e
 Objectives
Social Networking Various
Practices
access to information and programs within their authority.

Social Networking Ethics

1. Under no circumstances should a post be threatening,
harassing, bullying, pornographic, racist, homophobic,
orlibellous.
2. Practice respectful conversation: No obscenities, personal attacks, name-calling, accusations,
defamation, or hate speech.
3. Refrain from posting comments, images, or links not directly related to the content of the forum.
4. Do not post:
 Intentionally misleading or inaccurate information.
 Contact information or identifying details, such as phone numbers or e-mail
addresses.
 Information related to advertising, promotion, job recruiting, and campaigning,
lobbying, spam, soliciting, or proselytizing.
5. Do not post anything while posing as someone else.
6. Do not infringe on the copyright of others.

Network Security Tools and Services

Tools

This concise, high-end guide shows experienced administrators how to customize and extend popular
open source security tools such as port scanners, packet injectors, network sniffers, and web
assessment tools. Network security tools are used to lock down the network for safety.

LAN Management

A local area network (LAN) is a computer network that interconnects computers in a limited area such
defining characteristics of LANs, in contrast to wide area network (WANs), include their smaller
geographic area.Token ring and other technology standards have been used in the past, but
Ethernet over twisted pair cabling and Wi- Fi are the two most common technologies currently used to
build LANs.as a home, school, computer laboratory, or office building using network media.

MAN Management

A Metropolitan Area Network(MAN) is a computer network in which two or more computers or

communicating devices or networks which are geographically separated but in same metropolitan city
and are connected to each other are said to be connected on MAN. Metropolitan limits are

75 | P a g e
determined by local municipal corporations; the larger the city, the bigger the MAN, the smaller a
metro city, smaller the MAN

WAN Management

A wide area network (WAN) is a network that covers a broad area (i.e., any telecommunication
network that links across metropolitan, regional, or national boundaries) using private
or public network transports. Business and government entities utilize WANs to relay data among
employees, clients, buyers, and suppliers from various geographical locations. In essence, this mode
of telecommunication allows a business to effectively carry out its daily function regardless of
location. The Internet can be considered a WAN as well, and is used by businesses, governments,
organizations, and individuals.

PAN management

A PAN(Personal Area Network) is a network of Communicating devices (Computer, Phone, MP3/MP4

Player, Camera etc.) in the proximity of an individual. It can cover an area of a few meters
radius.When you have to transfer songs from one cell phone to another, you set up a PAN of two

phones. When files are transferred from a PC to an MP3 player, a PAN is set up between the two.
There can also be multiple devices in PAN. A PAN can be set up using guided media (USB cable) or
unguided media (Bluetooth, Infrared).

VOIP

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) is a methodology and group of technologies for the delivery
of voice communications and multimedia sessions over Internet Protocol (IP) networks, such as the
Internet. Early providers of voice over IP services offered business models and technical solutions
that mirrored the architecture of the legacy telephone network. Second-generation providers, such as
Skype have built closed networks for private user bases, offering the benefit of free calls and
convenience while potentially charging for access to other communication networks.

Cyber Security

Cyber security is information security applied to computers and computer network. The field covers all
the processes and mechanisms by which computer-based equipment, information and services are
protected from unintended or unauthorized access, change or destruction. Cyber security also
includes protection from unplanned events and natural disasters.

Need:Governments, military, corporations, financial institutions, hospitals and other businesses

collect, process and store confidential information on computers and transmit that data across
networks to other computers. With the growing volume and sophistication of cyber-attacks, ongoing

76 | P a g e
attention is required to protect sensitive business and personal information, as well as safeguard
national security. So to secure all crucial and confidential data cyber security is required.

Objectives Cyber Security‟s main purpose is to secure the data and maintain confidentiality of any
information stored in computer. It is use to secures the network, as well as protect and oversee
operations being done.

Social Networking Practices

To practice safely on Social networking sites few things are important to keep in mind, such
as:-
1. Never open random link or any link sends by unknown person.
2. Never trust any messages on your social network website or e-mail.
3. Always keep your personal information secure by private settings.
4. Try to avoid uploading any private information, picture or video.
5. Change use password after an interval.
6. Avoid opening your social network website or email id on unknown system.

New emerging trends

Mobile Computing

Mobile computing is human–computer interaction by which a computeris expected to be transported

during normal usage. Mobile computing involves mobile communication, mobile hardware, and
mobile software. Communication issues include ad hoc and infrastructure networks as well as
communication properties, protocols, data formats and concrete technologies. Hardware includes
mobile devices or device components. Mobile software deals with the characteristics and
requirements of mobile applications.

Cloud Computing

Cloud computing enables companies to consume compute resources as a utility just like electricity --
rather than having to build and maintain computing infrastructures in-house.

Cloud computing promises several attractive benefits for businesses and end users including:

77 | P a g e
  Self-service provisioning: End users can spin up computing resources for almost any type of
workload on-demand.
 Elasticity: Companies can scale up as computing needs increase and then scale down again
as demands decrease.
 Pay per use: Computing resources are measured at a granular level, allowing users to pay
only for the resources and workloads they use.

Cloud computing services can be private, public or hybrid.

SUMMARY

1. Network safety consists of the provisions and policies adopted by a network administrator to
prevent and monitor unauthorized access, misuse, modification, or denial of a computer
network and network-accessible resources.
2. A local area network (LAN) is a computer network that interconnects computers in a limited
area such defining characteristics of LANs.

3. A Metropolitan Area Network(MAN) is a computer network in which two or more computers or

communicating devices or networks which are geographically separated but in same
metropolitan city.
4. A wide area network (WAN) is a network that covers a broad area (i.e., any telecommunication
network that links across metropolitan, regional, or national boundaries) using private
or public network transports.
5. A PAN(Personal Area Network) is a network of Communicating devices (Computer, Phone,
MP3/MP4 Player, Camera etc.) in the proximity of an individual. It can cover an area of a few
meters radius.
6. Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) is a methodology and group of technologies for the delivery
of voice communications and multimedia sessions over Internet Protocol (IP) networks, such
as the Internet.

78 | P a g e
 7. Cyber security is information security applied to computers and computer network.
8. Mobile computing is human–computer interaction by which a computeris expected to be transported
during normal usage.
9. Cloud computing enables companies to consume compute resources as a utility just like
electricity -- rather than having to build and maintain computing infrastructures in-house.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blank

i. ___________ interconnects in a limited area.

ii. ___________ networks are geographically separated but in same city.
iii. Cyber security is_____________ security applied to computers and computer networks.
iv. _____________ enables companies to consume compute resources as a utility just like
electricity.
v. _____________ computing is human- interaction by which a computer is expected to be
transported during normal usage.

B. Find true or false

i. MAN is a computer network covers a broad area.
ii. VOIP is a methodology and group of technologies for delivery of voice communication.
iii. Do not post anything while posing as someone else is one of the ethics of social
networking.
iv. Cyber security main purpose is to remove users who don not follows the ethics of social
networks.
v. Cloud computing services can be private, public or hybrid.

C. Short Answer Questions.

i. What is network safety?
ii. Write two ethics of Social network.
iii. Write about:
79 | P a g e
 a) LAN Management
b) MAN Management
c) WAN Management
iv. What is VOIP?
v. Write the objectives of Cyber security.
vi. What is cloud computing?
vii. Write two advantage of cloud computing.?

Check Your Progress with Practical Solutions:

Web Scripting JavaScript

Short Answer Questions

Q.1 Difference between HTML and Javascript.

Q.2 Define : a) Datatypes b) Variable c) Reserved words d) Operators
Q.3 Explain the different types of Operators in Javascript.
Q.4 State the difference between if else and switch case statement.
Q.5 What are dialog boxes? What is their use?

80 | P a g e
 Multiple Choice Questions
Q.1 How does the variable name in Javascript must begin with ?
A)a letter B) underscore character C) Digit D) Reserve word
Q.2 In which datatypes, Java does not make a distinction ?
A)integer B) floating-point C) Boolean D) String
Q.3 Which dialog box enables you to getuser inputfrom a text Box ?
A)Alert dialog box B) Prompt dialog boxC) Confirm dialog box D) Raise dialog box
Q.4 Which datatypes are not supported in Switch case?
A) integer B) floating-point C) Boolean D) Character
Q.5 Which statement is important in switch case?
A) break B) Selection C) Conditional D) Iteration

True or False
Q.1 a) Javascript is static programming language.
Q.2 In Iteration statement, initialization is done after execution of code in loop.
Q.3 A confirmation dialog box is mostly used to take user's consent on any option.
Q.4 The ‘else’ part is same as ‘default’ in decision making statements.
Q.5 Comparison Operator is used to join two expressions.

Find the Output

Q.1 Find the Output of the Expression if A=10 , B=4 , C=5
a) X= C+ A/B
b) Y= B * (A>C)

c) Z= !(B && C)

Q.2 Consider the code given below and find the Output
varnum = 21;
if( num%2 = = 0 )
{
document.write("<b>Square of Even number </b>" + num*num);
}
else
{
document.write("<b>cube of number</b>"+ num*num*num);
}
Q.3 Rewrite the code given below after removing errors , if any and find the Output
var n = 23, a=11;

if (n = a)

81 | P a g e
 {
document.write(n + " is equal a <BR>");
}
Q.4 Consider the code given below and find the Output if
1) ch = „A‟ 2) ch = „C‟ 3) ch = „E‟

varch = prompt("Enter a character") ;

switch (ch)
{
case „A‟ : document.write("<b>It is A </b>");
break;
case „C‟ : document.write("<b>It is C </b>");
default : document.write("<b>It is D </b>");
break;
}
Q.5 Consider the code given below and find the Output

var n1 = 10;
while ( n1<=10 )
{
document.write(“<BR>" + “loop”);
}

Practical Exercises
Q.1 Write the code using Javascript to find the positive, negative or zero entered by the user.
Solution:

<html>
<body>
<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

var number = parseFloat( prompt("Enter a number") );

if (number > 0)
{
document.write(number + " is a positive value.<BR>");
}
else if (number <o)
82 | P a g e
 {
document.write(number + " is a NOT positive value.<BR>");
}
else
document.write(number + " is has a ZERO value.<BR>");

</script>
</body>
</html

83 | P a g e
Q.2 Write the code using Javascript to find the even and odd number entered by the user. If the number is even
print its square and if it is odd then prints its cube.
Solution:

<html>
<body>
<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

var number = parseFloat( prompt("Enter a number") );

if (number % 2 == 0)
{
document.write(number + " is EVEN <BR>" ) ;
document.write("SQUARE is" + (number*number)+"<BR>" ) ;

}
else
{
document.write(number + " is ODD <BR>" );
document.write("CUBE is" + (number*number*number)+"<BR>" );
}
</script>
</body>
</html>

Q.3 Write the code using Javascript to check whether the character entered by the user is vowel or not.
Solution:

<html>
<body>
<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">
varch = prompt("Enter a character") ;
switch(ch)
{
case 'a' : document.write(ch + " is LOWERCASE VOWEL <BR>" ) ;
break;
case 'e' : document.write(ch + " is LOWERCASE VOWEL <BR>" ) ;
break;
case 'i' : document.write(ch + " is LOWERCASE VOWEL <BR>" ) ;
break;
case 'o' : document.write(ch + " is LOWERCASE VOWEL <BR>" ) ;
break;
case 'u' : document.write(ch + " is LOWERCASE VOWEL <BR>" ) ;
break;
case 'A' : document.write(ch + " is UPPERCASE VOWEL <BR>" ) ;
break;
case 'E' : document.write(ch + " is UPPERCASE VOWEL <BR>" ) ;

84 | P a g e
 break;
case 'O' : document.write(ch + " is UPPERCASE VOWEL <BR>" ) ;
break;
case 'U' : document.write(ch + " is UPPERCASE VOWEL <BR>" ) ;
break;
case 'I' : document.write(ch + " is UPPERCASE VOWEL <BR>" ) ;
break;
default: document.write(ch + " is NOT VOWEL <BR>" ) ;
}
</script>
</body>
</html>

Q.4 Write the code using Javascript to print the sum of the series: 12 + 32 + 52 + N2
Solution:

<html>
<body>
<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

var N = parseFloat( prompt("Enter a number") );

var sum = 0;

for( var i=1 ; i<=N ; i=i+2 )

{
sum = sum + (i*i);

}
document.write("sum of series" + sum +"<BR>" );
</script>
</body>
</html>
Q.5 Write the code using Javascript to enter the string from the user through dialog box and check if it matches the
word “HELLO” .If the value matches then show status using alert box.
Solution:

<html>
<body>
<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

varword = prompt("Enter a word");

85 | P a g e
 if (word == "HELLO")

alert("Words matches each other!");

else

alert("Words do not matches each other!");

</script>
</body>
</html>

86 | P a g e
 Database concepts- RDBMS
Q.1 What is DBMS and what is its need?

Q.2 Mention the different data models used to organize data.

Q.3 Define: a) RDBMS b) Tuples c) Attributes d) views

Q.4 Explain the types of SQL commands with their examples.

Multiple Choice Questions

Which statement is used to display data from a table?

Q.1
A. selectB. displayC. readD. extract

Q.2
How would you display all those rows from a table named "Empl" where thevalue of the column "desig" is
"SALESMAN" ?
A. Select all from empl where desig is ' salesman ';B. Select * from empl where desig =' salesman ';
C. Select * from empl where desig = ' salesman " ;D. Select all from empl where desig ' salesman ' ;
Q.3
Which SQL keyword(s) is/are used to sort the rows in the output?
A. Sorted orderB. SortC. Sort byD. Order by

Q.4
Which keyword is used to return only different values in a column?
A. DifferentB. ExclusiveC. DistinctD. Unique

Which command is used create table in a database?

Q.5
A. Create database B. Create tableC. Createview D. create order

87 | P a g e
 True or False

Q.1
DBMS is not used for sharing of data.
Q.2 RDBMS organizes data in the form of a tree.
Q.3 Update is an example of DML command.
Q.4 Sorting in a database can be done by using Group by clause.
Answer the queries given below
Q.1 While creating the table, Mr Ram forgot to add a column ‘marks’ in the table ‘student’. Give the name of a
command to a column in a table ‘student’.
Q.2 Write the command to create the table ‘book’ with the following specification.
Bookno integer,
Booknamevarchar(10),
Price decimal(5,2)
Q.3 While entering the salary of the employees in the table ‘EMP’ , Mr. Laxman made a mistake in the salary of
employee no 1122.It should be 1300 instead of 1500.What command should he write to rectify the mistake.
Q.4 Study the given tables and answer the queries given below
Table: HOSPITAL
PNo Name Age Department DateofAdm Charges Sex

1 Sandeep 65 Surgery 23/02/98 300 M

2 Ravina 24 Orthopedic 01/01/98 200 F
3 Karan 45 Orthopedic 19/02/98 200 M
4 Tarun 12 Surgery 01/01/98 300 M
5 Zubin 36 ENT 12/01/98 250 M
6 Ketaki 16 ENT 24/02/98 300 F
7 Ankita 29 Cardiology 20/02/98 800 F
8 Zareena 45 Gynecology 22/02/98 300 F
9 Kush 19 Cardiology 13/01/98 800 M
10 Shailya 31 Medicine 19/02/98 400 M

a) To list the names of female patients who are either in the orthopedic or surgery department.
b) To list the name of all the patients with their date of admission in ascending order.
c) To count the number of patients with age > 20.
d) To display various departments in the hospital .
e) To display the number of patients in each department.

88 | P a g e
 Q.5 Study the given tables and answer the queries given below.

Table: ACTIVITY
Acode ActivityName Stadium ParticipantsNum PrizeMoney ScheduleDate

1001 Relay 100x4 Star Annex 16 10000 23-Jan-2004

1002 High Jump Star Annex 10 12000 12-dec-2003
1003 Shot Put Super Power 12 8000 14-Feb-2004
1005 Long Jump Star Annex 12 9000 01-Jan-2004
1008 Discuss Throw Super Power 10 15000 19-Mar-2004

Table: COACH

Pcode Name Acode

1 Ahmed Hussain 1001

2 Ravinder 1008
3 Janila 1001
4 Naaz 1003

a) Display the coach’s name and Acodes in ascending order of Acode from the table COACH.
b) Display the content of Activity table whose ScheduleDate is earlier than 01/01/2004 in ascending order
of ParticipantsNum.
c) Display the names of coaches who are not associated with any activity at all.

Find the output for the queries given below:

d) Select activityname from activity where stadium =’ Star Annex’;

e) Select acode, participantsnum from activity group by stadium;
f)

89 | P a g e
 Network Safety of Computer
System.

Short Answer Questions

Q.1 What do you understand by Network Safety?

Q.2 Explain the types of Networks?

Q.3 What are the objectives of cyber security?
Q.4 State the difference between the cloud computing and mobile computing.
Two engineers in the same room have connected their Palm-tops using bluetooth for working
Q.5 on a Group presentation. Out of the following, what kind of Network have they formed?
LAN, MAN, PAN, WAN

Multiple Choice Questions

Bluetooth can be used for
Q.1 a. Long distance communication b. Short distance communication
c. In mobile phones only d. None of the above
Q.2 Satellite links are generally used for
a. PANs b. LANsc. MANs d. All of the above
Q.3 Skype is an example of
a. PAN b. LANsc. MANs d. VoIP

True or False
Q.1 There is always a threat of some kind of attacks on computer networks'security.
Q.2 Cyber Security do not maintain the confidentiality of data stored in computer.
Q.3 We should always trust all the messages on your e-mail.

90 | P a g e
1|Page
 Chief Patron
ShriSantosh Kumar Mall, IAS
Commissioner, KVS

Patron
Shri. G.K. Shrivastava, IAS
Additional Commissioner (Admin)

Shri. U.N. Khaware

Additional Commissioner (Acad)

Regional Patron
Shri C.Neelap
Deputy Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

Co-ordination, Compilation & Guidance

Shri D. Patle
Asstt. Commissioner, KVS RO Guwahati

School Co-ordination
Shri. K. AlungKhumba
Principal,KV NFR,Maligaon,Guwahati

Subject Expert
Dr. K. K. Motla, PGT(CS),
KV NFR,Maligaon,Guwahati
Sh. RajendraGavahle, PGT(CS),
KV NFR,Maligaon,Guwahati
 Syllabus Content X
Quarter – April to June

S.no. Units Contents No. of

Periods
1. Review of Autodesk 3D Max 1.1 What is 3D? 4
1.2 Navigation and Display
1.3 Creating Objects & Selecting Objects.
1.4 Parenting & Grouping objects.
1.5 Transforming Objects.
2. Animation in 3D Max 2.1. Animation 12
2.1.1 Keys and Key framing.
2.1.2 Animation Controllers
2.1.3 Parametricvs. Transform Animation
2.1.4 Animation Playback
2.1.5 Acceleration
2.1.6 Time Configuration
2.1.7 Cycling &Linking
2.2 Editing tools:
2.2.1 Select Modifiers
2.2.2 Edit Modifiers
2.2.3 Editable Object Commands
2.2.4 Sub-Object Selection
2.2.5 Modifying & Transforming Sub-
Objects
2.2.6 Mesh Editing Levels
2.2.7 Spline Editing Levels

Quarter 2- July to Sept

3. Customizing & Embedding 3.1 Inserting Multimedia files in Webpages 16
Multimedia components in 3.1.1 Compatible Multimedia Files formats for Webpages.
Webpages 3.1.2 Embedding Audio File.
3.1.3 Embedding Video File.
3.1.4 Embedding Flash File.
Quarter 3- Oct to Dec
4. Web Scripting Using 4.1 REVIEW OF JAVA SCRIPT OF CLASS IX 20
4.1.1 Variables & Operators
Java Script 4.1.2 If & Switch
4.1.3 Iteration (Loops)
4.1.4 Window Object
4.1.5 Pop – Up Boxes –Alert, Confirm Etc.
4.2 FUNCTIONS –USER DEFINED
4.2.1 Function Definition
4.2.2 Calling a Function
4.2.3 Function Parameters
4.2.4 Return Statement
4.3 String Object
4.3.1 Syntax
4.3.2 String Properties
4.3.3 String Methods
4.3.4 String HTML Wrappers
4.4 Math Object
4.4.1Syntax
4.4.2 Array Properties
4.4.3 Array Methods
4.5 Event
4.5.1 What is an Event?
4.5.2 An click Event Type
4.5.3 On Submit Event Type
4.5.4 On Mouseover& On Mouseout
4.5.5 HTML 4 Standard Events

Quarter 4- Jan to Mar

5. Operating Web Based 5.1 E-GOVERANCE 6
Application 5.1.1 What is E-Governance
5.1.2 Major E- Governance Projects in India
5.1.3 Societal Imports of E- Governance
5.2. E-BUSSINESS
5.2.1 What is E- Business
5.2.2 Major E- Business Portals
5.2.3 Societal Impacts of E- Business
5.3 E- LEARNING
5.3.1 What is E- Learning?
5.3.2 Major E- Learning Sites
5.3.3 Societal Impacts of E- Learning.

Project Developing a Project on coding a

Contents website using HTML, JavaScript & CSS.
Review of Autodesk 3D Max 1
 What is 3D?
Web Scripting using Java
 Navigation and Display Script 34
 Creating Objects & Selecting Objects. REVIEW OF JAVA SCRIPT OF CLASS IX
 Parenting & Grouping objects.  Variables & Operators
 Transforming Objects.  If & Switch
Animation in 3D Max 8  Iteration (Loops)
Animation  Window Object
 Keys and Key framing.  Pop – Up Boxes –Alert, Confirm Etc.
 Animation Controllers FUNCTIONS –USER DEFINED
 Parametric vs. Transform Animation  Function Definition
 Animation Playback  Calling a Function
 Acceleration  Function Parameters
 Time Configuration  Return Statement
String Object
 Cycling &Linking
 Syntax
Editing tools:
 String Properties
 Select Modifiers
 String Methods
 Edit Modifiers
 String HTML Wrappers
 Editable Object Commands
Math Object
 Sub-Object Selection  Syntax
 Modifying & Transforming Sub-Objects Array Properties
 Mesh Editing Levels Array Methods
 Spline Editing Levels Event
What is an Event?
Customizing & Embedding 25 An click Event Type
On Submit Event Type
Multimedia components in On Mouseover& On Mouseout
Webpages  HTML 4 Standard Events
Inserting Multimedia files in Webpages
 Compatible Multimedia Files formats
for Webpages.
 Embedding Audio File.
 Embedding Video File.
 Embedding Flash File.
Operating Web based
Application 65
Check your progress on 69
E-GOVERANCE
Web Scripting JavaScript
 What is E-Governance With Practical Solution
 Major E- Governance Projects in India
 Societal Imports of E- Governance
E-BUSSINESS
 What is E- Business
 Major E- Business Portals
 Societal Impacts of E- Business
E- LEARNING
 What is E- Learning?
 Major E- Learning Sites
 Societal Impacts of E- Learning.
Lesson-1
Review of Autodesk 3D Max
You will learn
What is 3D?
 What is 3D?
3D means three-dimensional, i.e. something, that has width,  Navigation and
height and depth (length). Our physical environment is Display
 Creating Objects &
three-dimensional and we move around in 3D every day.
Selecting Objects.
Humans are able to perceive the spatial relationship between  Parenting &
objects just by looking at them because we have 3D perception, Grouping objects.
also known as depth perception. As we look around, the retina in  Transforming
Objects.
each eye forms a two-dimensional image of our surroundings and
our brain processes these two images into a 3D visual experience.

Navigation and Display

• Coordinate Systems & The Home Grid

Grids are two-dimensional arrays of lines similar to graph paper, except that you can adjust the
spacing and other features of the grid to the needs of your work.

Using the home grid to position houses

Grids have these primary uses:

 As an aid in visualizing space, scale, and distance

 As a construction plane where you create and align
objects in your scene
 As a reference system for using snap

The home grid is the basic reference system, defined by three fixed
planes on the world coordinate axes . The home grid is visible by default when you start 3ds Max, but
can be turned off with an option in the right-click viewport menu. You can use any view of the home

1|Page
grid as a construction plane or you can create a grid object and use that as a construction plane
instead.

• Orthogonal vs. Perspective Views

“Orthogonal” is a term used to describe two vectors that are perpendicular (at 90 degrees) to each
other. In 3D space, when the X, Y, or Z-Axes are not perpendicular, they are considered “non-
orthogonal” and the FBX plug-in does not support their representation as a matrix.

Because the FBX plug-in assumes that there is always a 90-degree angle between the X, Y, and Z
axes, it can support only orthogonal matrices. Any transformed axes that have non-orthogonal TRS
matrices are ignored by the FBX plug-in, so it does not import or export effects created when axes
are not orthographic.

Perspective Views: most closely resemble human vision. Objects appear to recede into the distance,
creating a sense of depth and space. For most 3D computer graphics, this is the view used in the
final output that the client sees onscreen or on the page. Perspective view of the ice-cream shop

There are three ways to create a perspective view in a viewport perspective view, camera view, and
light view.

A perspective viewport, labeled Perspective, is one of the default

viewports. You can change any active viewport to this eye-like point of
view by pressing the keyboard shortcut P.

A camera view requires that you first create a camera object in your
scene. The camera viewport tracks the view through the perspective of
that camera. As you move the camera (or target) in another viewport, you see the scene swing
accordingly. If you alter the camera's field of view on the Modify command panel, you see the
changes as they are applied.

2|Page
Creating Objects & Selecting Objects.

With some variations, the steps shown in the following images apply to
creating any type of object on the Create panel. For specific examples,
see the Procedures section in any object's topic.

1. Radius defined2. Height defined

3. Sides increased4. Height Segments increased

To choose an object category:

1. Click (Create tab) to view the Create panel.

2. Click one of the buttons at the top of the Create panel. For example, (Geometry).
3. Choose the subcategory Standard Primitives from the list.

A number of buttons appear on the Object Type rollout.

To choose an object type:

• Click the button for the type of object you want to create.
 The button highlights, showing that it is active. Four rollouts
appear Name and Color, Creation Method, Keyboard Entry,
and Parameters.
 To choose a creation method (optional):
 You can accept the default method and skip this step.
• Choose a method in the Creation Method rollout.

 To preset the creation parameters (optional):

 You can adjust all creation parameters after you create an object.
3|Page
 • In the Parameters rollout, you can set parameters before you create an object. However, the
values of parameters you set by dragging the mouse (for example, the Radius and Height of a
cylinder) have no effect until after you create the object.
•

To create the object:

1. Put the cursor at a point in any viewport where you want to place the object, and hold the
mouse button down (do not release the button).
2. Drag the mouse to define the first parameter of the object; for example, the circular base of a
cylinder.
3. Release the mouse button. The first parameter is set with this release. In some cases, such
as Sphere, Teapot, and Plane, this completes the object. You can skip the remaining steps.
4. Move up or down without touching the mouse button. This sets the next parameter; for
example, the height of a cylinder.
If you want to cancel: Until you complete the next step, you can cancel the creation
process with a right-click.
5. Click when the second parameter has the value you want, and so on.

The number of times you press or release the mouse button depends on how many spatial
dimensions are required to define the object. (For some kinds of objects, such as Line and Bones, the
number is open-ended.)

Parenting & Grouping objects.

1. Main toolbar (Select And Link)

2. Use the Select and Link button to define the hierarchical relationship between two objects by
linking them as child and parent.
3. You link from the currently selected object (child) to any other object (parent).

4|Page
 4. You can link an object to a closed group. When you do, the object becomes a child of the
group parent rather than any member of the group. The entire group flashes to show that
you've linked to the group.
5. A child inherits the transformations (move, rotate, scale) applied to the parent, but the child's
transformations have no effect on the parent. If you want the child not to inherit the transforms,

use the Link Inheritance (Selected) Utility or use the controls found in Link Info in the Hierarchy
panel.
6. You can also create hierarchical linkages using Schematic View. Use the Connect button on
the Schematic View toolbar to create hierarchical linkages between nodes.

Transforming Objects:

When you create any object, 3ds Max records its position,
rotation, and scale information in an internal table called a
transformation matrix. Subsequent position, rotation, and scale
adjustments are calledtransforms.

Moving, rotating, and scaling a figure. An object's actual

position within the world coordinate system is always calculated in relation to its internal, or local
coordinate system, which is based on the object's transformation matrix. The origin of the local
coordinate system is the center of the object's bounding box.

An object can carry any number of modifiers, but only one set of transforms. Although you can
change transform values from frame to frame, each object always has only one position, one
rotation, and one scale transform.

You can animate your transforms by turning on the Auto Key button and then performing the
transform at any frame other than frame 0. This creates a key for that transform at the current
frame.

5|Page
SUMMARY

1. 3D means three-dimensional, i.e. something, that has width, height and depth (length).
2. “Orthogonal” is a term used to describe two vectors that are perpendicular (at 90 degrees) to
each other. In 3D space, when the X, Y, or Z-Axes are not perpendicular, they are considered
“non-orthogonal”.
3. There are three ways to create a perspective view in a viewport perspective view, camera
view, and light view.
4. When you create any object, 3ds Max records its position, rotation, and scale information in an
internal table called a transformation matrix.
5. Subsequent position, rotation, and scale adjustments are calledtransforms.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks:

i. 3D means________________dimension.
ii. 3D perception is also called _________________perception.
iii. Subsequent position, _____________and______________ are referred as transforms.
iv. In 3D space when X,Y or Z Axes are not ___________they considered “non -
orthogonal”.

6|Page
 B. State true or false
i. Grid are three dimensional arrays of links similar to graph paper.
ii. The home grid is visible by default when you start 3Ds max.
iii. An object can carry any number of modifiers but only one set of transforms.
iv. A camera view requires that you first create light view in your scene.

C. Short Answer Questions:

i. What is Grid in Autodesk?
ii. What is the difference between orthogonal and non-orthogonal views?
iii. What are the ways to create perspective view in a viewport?
iv. Write the steps to create object.?
v. What is transform?

In the lab

1. Teachers are requested to give revision of class IX practical on 3D Max.

7|Page
Lesson-2
Animation in 3D Max

Animation

Keys and Key framing. You will learn

Animation is based on a principle of human vision. If you

view a series of related still images in quick succession, Animation
your brain perceives them as continuous motion. Each  Keys and Key framing.
 Animation Controllers
image is called a frame.  Parametric vs. Transform
Historically, the major difficulty in creating animations has Animation
 Animation Playback
been that the animator must produce a large number of
 Acceleration
frames. Depending on the quality you want, one minute of  Time Configuration
animation might require between 720 and 1800 separate still  Cycling &Linking
Editing tools:
images. Creating images by hand is a big job. That is where  Select Modifiers
key framing comes in.  Edit Modifiers
 Editable Object Commands
 Sub-Object Selection
Animation Controllers:  Modifying & Transforming
Sub-Objects
Most of the frames in an animation are routine, incremental  Mesh Editing Levels
changes from the previous frame directed toward some  Spline Editing Levels
predefined goal. Early animation studios quickly realized
they could increase the productivity of their master

8|Page
artists by having them draw only the important frames,
calledkeyframes.
Assistants could then figure out the frames that were required in between the key frames. These
frames were (and still are) called tweens. Use 3ds Max as your animation assistant. As the master
animator, you create the key frames that record the beginning and end of each transformation. The
values at

thesekey frames are called keys. 3ds Max calculates the interpolated values between each key value,
resulting in tweened animation.

Parametric vs. Transform Animation

Parametric animation is an animation technique used in computer software, such as in computer

games that blends two or more separate animations together to form a new animation. This new
animation is constructed in real-time by the game engine, and is not stored in a separate file like a
regular animation. The technique was first used in an early build of the Half-Life mod, Team Fortress
2, and it not only heavily reduces artist workload during game development, it provides for much
smoother animation as well.

How parametric animation works?

It combines different layers of animation automatically. The whole process controls by program,
determines which animation layer should be used and controls the method of combination like
override, additive, overly or and the amount of density.

A transform is an adjustment of an object‟s position, orientation, or

scale, relative to the 3D world (or world space) in which you are
working.Changing a model by changing its position, rotation, or scale

You can apply three basic types of transform to an object:

9|Page
  Position

 Rotation

 Scale

And a fourth transform command lets you position an object automatically on an

underlying surface:

 Placement

This section presents brief topics to help you quickly start learning how to transform objects and how
to animate your transforms.

Failure to Move or Rotate

In some cases, an object might fail to move or rotate, even when the proper command is active and
the object is selected. This could be due to one of the following reasons:

 The object is frozen.

 A transform controller has been assigned to the object.
 Inverse Kinematics mode is on and the preference called Always Transform
Children of the World is off.

Procedures :To transform an object using the main toolbar:

1. On the main toolbar, click one of the three transform buttons: (Select And Move),

(Select And Rotate), or (Select And Uniform Scale). These buttons are usually referred
to as Move, Rotate, and Scale.

Alternatively, to position an object on another object's surface, click (Select And Place).

2. Position the mouse over the object you want to transform.

a. If the object is already selected, the cursor changes to indicate the transform.
b. If the object is not selected, the cursor changes to a crosshairs to show that the object
can be selected.
3. Drag the mouse to apply the transform.
10 | P a g e
 If you start the drag over an unselected object, it becomes selected and is also
transformed.You can restrict transforms to one or two axes easily with the Using
Transform Gizmos.

Animation Playback

Play/Stop

The Play button plays the animation in the active viewport. If you click another viewport to
make it active, the animation continues playing in that viewport. When the animation is playing, the
Play button becomes a Stop button. The Play button is a flyout for playing only the animation of
selected objects.

 Status bar > Time controls > (Play Animation)

 Status bar > Time controls > (Stop Animation)

 Keyboard > / (to play) (3ds Max mode)

 Keyboard > .) +V (Maya mode: See Interaction Mode Preferences

 Keyboard > (to stop)

Procedures: To play the animation in the viewport:

1. Activate the viewport where you want to play the animation.

2. Click (Play Animation).

The animation plays in the viewport. The Play button becomes a Stop button.

3. Click (Stop Animation) to end the playback.

11 | P a g e
 The speed of the animation playback is determined by the settings in the Time
Configuration dialog, the complexity of the scene and the speed of the graphics card and
processor.

To play the animation looped backward:

1. In the animation controls, click (Time Configuration).

2. In the Time Configuration dialog Playback group, turn off Real Time.
i. The Direction buttons are now available.
3. Turn on Reverse and click OK.
4. Click (Play Animation).
i. The animation plays backward.
5. To play the animation front-to-back and then back-to-front in a continuous loop, turn on Ping-
Pong as the Direction.

To play the animation of a selected object only:

1. In a viewport, select a single animated object or a set of animated objects.

2. Choose (Play Selected) from the Play/Stop flyout.
i. Only the selection is animated in the viewport.
3. To end playback, click (Stop Animation) or press .

Acceleration

Acceleration is measured in units per frame per frame, where the

unit is the current 3ds Max system unit. That is, the acceleration is
determined by the rate at which the speed changes per
frame.UseAccelerationTurn on to have the motion synthesis engine

12 | P a g e
consider delegate acceleration in determining whether to activate the state.

Range group

When you choose Range, the motion synthesis engine activates the clip when the delegate's
acceleration falls inside the specified range.

Min/Avg/Max display
After you synthesize the Master Motion Clips, displays delegates' minimum, average, and maximum
acceleration.

Min
Set a minimum acceleration value for the range.

Max
Set a maximum acceleration value for the range.

When you choose Unique, the motion synthesis engine activates the clip when the delegate's
acceleration matches a specific value, optionally with a rising, falling, or constant value before or after
the specified value.

Value
Set a unique acceleration value.

In and Out groups

These radio buttons let you specify the behaviour of the parameter before and after the unique value
is met.

 AnythingAcceleration before or after the target value is not relevant.

 DecreasingAcceleration decreases before or after it reaches the target value.
 ConstantAcceleration before or after the target value is constant.
 IncreasingAcceleration increases before or after it reaches the target value.cale Playback
Speed group

These settings let you scale the rate at which the animation is played, depending upon the
acceleration of the delegate.

Scale Animation

Scale the clip's animation based on acceleration.

13 | P a g e
For example, as a bird accelerates, its wings beat more rapidly. Scaling an animation scales the keys
of the animation.

Percentage

Specify how much to alter the playback speed based upon the difference between the delegate's
acceleration and the Base Acceleration setting.

The formula used is this:

Animation Speed change % = (current speed/Base Acceleration – 1) x Percentage %

For example, if a delegate is accelerating 50 percent faster than the base acceleration, and the Scale
Percentage value is 50, then the playback speed is scaled up by 25 percent.

Base Acceleration
Specifies the delegate acceleration at which the animation should be played back at its normal rate.

Time Configuration
The Time Configuration dialog provides settings for frame rate, time display, playback, andanimation.
You use this dialog to change the length of your animation, or stretch or rescale it

 Status bar > Time controls > (Time Configuration) > Time Configuration dialog

Procedures: To define the active time segment:

1. Click (Time Configuration).

2. In the Time Configuration dialog Animation group, set Start Time to specify the
beginning of your active time segment.
3. Do one of the following:
 Set End Time to specify the end of your active time segment.
 Set Length to specify the amount of time in the active time segment and
automatically set the correct End Time.
You can enter positive or negative values in any spinner, but you must use the same format used by
the time display.
14 | P a g e
To stretch out your existing animation over a longer time:
1. In the Time Configuration dialog Animation group, click Re-scale Time.
2. Change the value in Length to be the number of frames you want the action to fill.
3. Click OK.
The animation is rescaled to the new number of frames.

To add frames onto your existing animation:

This procedure adds new frames to the end of your animation, without affecting your existing work.

1. In the Time Configuration dialog Animation group End Time field, enter the number
of the last frame of the animation.
For example, if your existing animation is 100 frames long and you want to add 50 frames,
enter 150.

2. Click OK.
The number you entered is now the new length of the animation, shown on the time slider.

To move to an exact time in your animation:

 In the Time Configuration dialog Animation group, enter the frame number in the
Current Time field, and press .

To set the frame rate of your animation:

In the Time Configuration dialog Frame Rate group, do one of the following:

1. Choose one of the standard frame rates such as PAL or NTSC.

2. Choose Custom, and specify a frame rate in the FPS (frames-per-second) field.

To play your animation in reverse or back and forth:

1. In the Time Configuration Playback group, turn off the Real Time.
15 | P a g e
 2. Choose the direction of the animation playback by selecting Forward, Reverse, or
Ping-Pong.
3. Play the animation in the viewport using (Play Animation) or the / key.

To play your animation only once:

1. In the Time Configuration Playback group, turn off Loop.

2. Choose the direction of the animation playback by selecting Forward, Reverse or Ping-
Pong.

3. Play the animation in the viewport using (Play Animation) or the / key.

The animation will play once and stop.

To play your animation in multiple viewports:

1. In the Time Configuration Playback group, turn off Active Viewport Only. Click OK.
2. Play your animation.

To play an animation with sound:

 In the Time Configuration Playback group, be sure you have Real Time turned on. If
Real Time is not on, the sound will not play back during the animation.

Interface

These are the controls for the Time Configuration dialog. You can
display this dialog by right-clicking any of the time control buttons to
the right of the Auto Key button.

Frame Rate group

These four option buttons, labeled NTSC, Film, PAL, and Custom let
you set the frame rate in frames-per-second (FPS).

FPS (Frames Per Second)

Sets the frame rate of your animation in Frames per Second. Use
frame rates of 30 fps for video, 24 for film, and lower rates for web
and media animations.

Cycling &Linking
16 | P a g e
Linking Objects

The general process of creating links is to build the hierarchy from child to parent. You click Select
and Link on the toolbar, select one or more objects as children, and then drag the link cursor from the
selection to a single parent object. The selected objects become children of the parent object.

Once objects are linked, any transformations applied to the parent are also applied to its children. For
example, if you scale the parent to 150%, the size of its children and the distance between the
children and the parent are also scaled by 150%.

Unlinking Objects

Click Unlink Selection to remove the link from selected objects to their parents. Any children of the
selected object are unaffected.
You can quickly unlink an entire hierarchy by double-clicking the root object to select the object and
all of its children. Then click Unlink Selection..

Linking Animated Objects

You should establish links before you begin animating objects. The linkage of objects with Select and
Link cannot be animated; the link remains in force throughout the entire animation.
If you want your objects to be linked during one part of the animation but not another, you can a Link
constraint to change the linkage at specific frames.

Editing tools:
Select Modifiers

Controls on the Bone Editing Tools rollout let you create and modify
bone geometry and structure, and set bone color for one or more bones

Interface
Bone Pivot Position group

Bone Edit Mode

17 | P a g e
Lets you change the lengths of bones and their positions relative to one another.

When this button is on, you can change the length of a bone by moving its child bone. In effect, you
can scale or stretch a bone by moving its child bone while in this mode. You can use this tool both
before and after assigning an IK chain to the bone structure.

When Bone Edit Mode is on, you cannot animate, and when Auto Key or Set Key is on, Bone Edit
Mode is unavailable. Turn off Auto/Set Key to edit bones.

Bone Tools group

Create Bones Begins the bone-creation process. Clicking this button is the same as clicking Create
panel Systems Bones System.

Create EndCreates a nub bone at the end of the currently selected bone. If the selected bone is not
at the end of a chain, the nub is linked in sequence between the currently selected bone and the next
bone in the chain.

Remove Bone Removes the currently selected bone. The bone‟s parent bone is stretched to reach
the removed bone‟s pivot point, and any children of the removed bone are linked to its parent. Any IK
chains that included the removed bone will remain intact.

Connect Bones Creates a connecting bone between the currently selected bone and another bone.
When you click this button, a dotted line appears in the active viewport from the first selected bone.
Move the cursor to another bone to create a new connecting bone. The first selected bone will
become a parent to the connecting bone, which is in turn a parent to the second selected bone.

Delete Bone Deletes the currently selected bone, removing all its parent/child associations. A nub is
placed at the end of the deleted bone‟s parent. Any IK chains that included this bone become invalid.

Reassign Root Makes the currently selected bone the root (parent) of the bone structure.

RefineSplits a bone in two. Click Refine, and then click a bone where you want it to split.

MirrorOpens the Bone Mirror dialog (see following), which lets you create mirror copies of selected
bones without changing the sign of the bones' scale. Instead, Mirror flips one of the bone axes: Y or
Z. You can specify the mirroring axis and the flip axis with the dialog controls.
18 | P a g e
Bone Mirror dialog
Opens when you click the Mirror button. Use it to specify the mirroring axis,
the flip axis, and an offset value.
While the dialog is open, you can see a preview of the mirrored bone(s) in
the viewports. Click OK to create the bones, or Cancel to prevent creation.

Mirror AxisChoose an axis or plane about which the bones will be mirrored: X/Y/Z or XY/YZ/ZX.

Bone Axis to FlipTo avoid creating a negative scale, choose the bone axis to flip: Y or Z.

OffsetThe distance between the original bones and the mirrored bones. Use this to move the
mirrored bones to the other side of the character.

Edit Modifiers
To be demonstrated by teacher in practical class

Editable Object Commands

To be demonstrated by teacher in practical class

Sub-Object Selection

If the modifier supports sub-object selection, the plug-in must provide methods to allow the system to
manipulate the sub-object components of the modifier. When a modifier's parameters are being
edited, it has the option of providing the system with different levels of sub-object selection. There are
two types of sub-object selection:

1. Selection of a modifier's Gizmo or Center - A modifier can have a visual

representation in the scene which users can manipulate called a gizmo. The Bend
modifier uses a 3D box. When Gizmo is selected in the sub-object selection list of
Max's UI, the user can transform the modifier's gizmo itself -- that is, they can
adjust its location, orientation, and scale in relation to the object it is affecting.
When Center is selected in the list, they can transform the pivot point of the

19 | P a g e
 modifier's gizmo. For example, if you want a bend to occur about the base of the
Bend gizmo, you could move the center to the base of the gizmo.

2. Selection of components in the pipeline - The second type of sub-object selection is

selection of components of the object flowing through the pipeline. If the object in
the pipeline is a triangle object, then sub-object selection level might be things like
vertex, face, edge, etc. These are options for the Edit Mesh modifier, for instance.

Modifying & Transforming Sub-Objects

Selecting Sub-Objects

 To select a vertex, edge, or face/polygon/element, click it.

 To add to the sub-object selection, hold down and click, or drag to specify a
region.
 To subtract from the sub-object selection, hold down and click, or drag to
specify a region.
Note: When you drag to specify a region with an existing sub-object selection, if any transform tool is
active, you will transform the selection instead of changing the selection. To avoid this, start the

region away from the object, or first activate (Select Object) on the main toolbar.

Following is a general procedure in setting up an object for sub-object selection.

1. Convert the object into an editable object such as an editable mesh, editable spline,
editable poly, and so on.

2. On the modifier stack display, click (the plus-sign icon to the left of the name of the
modifier or editable object).

3. On the stack display, choose the kind of sub-object geometry you want to work with:
for example, Vertex, Face, or Edge. Each sub-object selection level has rollouts with
their own sets of options.

The sub-object level is highlighted in the list.

20 | P a g e
 4. Use standard selection techniques (see preceding) to select sub-object geometry,
from a single sub-object to the entire object. By default, the sub-object selection
highlights in red.

Storing Sub-Object Selection Sets

The surface formats (mesh, poly, and so on), automatically remember the most recent selection for
each sub-object level: vertex, edge, and so on (there is overlap in some cases, such as poly edge
and border). These selection sets are saved with the file. With sub-object selections, you have these
options:

 Choose one of the selection sets to pass geometry up the stack to other modifiers.
Only one selection set is active at a time.
 Change to one of the other selection sets at any time by activating its sub-object
level.
 Use named selection sets for sub-object selections you want to reuse.


Using Sub-Object Selections

 Apply any options supplied for the kind of object and the selection level.
 Apply standard transforms: Move, Rotate, Scale. For more information, see
Transforming a Sub-Object Selection, following.
 Apply object-space modifiers (Bend, Taper, and Twist, for example) to perform useful
modelling operations.
 Apply object-space modifiers (UVW Map or Smooth, for example) to perform useful
surfacing operations.
 Bind a space warp to the selection. The rest of the object is unaffected by the warping.
 Use the toolbar commands Align, Normal Align, and Align To View with face
selections.

Transforming a Sub-Object Selection

Using an editable mesh, poly, patch, or spline, you can directly transform any sub-
object selection. However, “Select” modifiers like Mesh Select and Spline
Select enable only selection.

To transform a sub-object selection made with a Select modifier:

21 | P a g e
 1. Add an XForm modifier to the stack, following (or somewhere above) the Select
modifier.
2. In the stack, open the Select modifier and make a sub-object selection.
3. Choose XForm in the stack. You then transform the XForm gizmo, which applies the
transform to the selection.

Mesh Editing Levels

1. Select an editable mesh object. Modify panel Selection rollout Choose any
sub-object level.

2. Select an editable mesh object. Modify panel Modifier stack display

Expand the Editable Mesh entry. Choose any sub-object level.
3. Select an editable mesh object. Quad menu Tools 1 quadrant Choose any sub-
object level.
The Edit Geometry rollout for Meshes contains most of the controls that let you alter
the geometry of the mesh, at either the Object (top) level, or one of the sub-object
levels. The controls that the rollout displays can vary, depending on which level is
active; if a

control is not available for the active level, it might be grayed out, or simply might not
appear at all.

Spline Editing Levels

1. Create or select a spline Modify panel Right-click spline entry in the stack
display Convert To: Editable Spline
2. Create a line Modify panel
3. Create or select a spline Right-click the spline Transform (lower-right) quadrant of
the quad menu Convert To: Convert to Editable Spline
Editable Spline provides controls for manipulating an object as a spline object and at
three sub-object levels: vertex, segment, and spline.
22 | P a g e
 The functions in Editable Spline are the same as those in theEdit Spline modifier.
The exception is that when you convert an existing spline shape to an editable spline,
the creation parameters are no longer accessible or animatable. However, the spline's
interpolation settings (step settings) remain available in the editable spline.

SUMMARY

1. Animation is based on a principle of human vision. Each image is called a frame.

2. Parametric animation is an animation technique used in computer software, such as in
computer games that blends two or more separate animations together to form a new
animation.
3. A transform is an adjustment of an object‟s position, orientation, or scale, relative to the 3D
world (or world space) in which you are working.
4. Acceleration is measured in units per frame per frame, where the unit is the current 3ds
Max system unit. That is, the acceleration is determined by the rate at which the speed
changes per frame.
5. The general process of creating links is to build the hierarchy from child to parent.
6. Offset is the distance between the original bones and the mirrored bones. Use this to move
the mirrored bones to the other side of the character.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks:

23 | P a g e
 i. Each image is called________________.
ii. Parametric animation is an animation technique used in_____________.
iii. A ______________is an adjustment of an object position.
iv. The ____________button plays the animation in the active viewport.
v. Acceleration is measured in_____________ per frame.
vi. Click _____________selection to remove the link from selected objects to their parents.
vii. _____________sets the frame rate of your animation in frame per second.

B. State true or false:

i. When you drag to specify a region with an existing sub-object selection , if any
transform tool is active, you will transform the selection instead of changing the
selection.

ii. If the object in the pipeline is a triangle object, then sub object selection level might be
things like vertex, face, edge etc.

iii. To avoid creating a negative scale, choose the bone axis to flip X or Y.

iv. Refine splits a bone in two.

v. Remove Bone remove current selected layer.

vi. The general process of creating links is to build the hierarchy from child to parent.

vii. Use frame rates of 30 fps for video, 26 for film and highest rate for web and media
animation.

C. Short Answer Questions:

i. What is animation?
ii. What is keyframes?
iii. Write one difference between parametric and transform animation.?
iv. How parametric animation work?
v. Write name of three basic transform which we can apply on object.?
vi. Write the steps to play animation in viewport.?
vii. What is Acceleration?
viii. Write the steps to add frames in existing animation.?
24 | P a g e
 ix. What do you mean by linking object?
x. Write one difference between linking object and un-linking object.

In the lab

1. Create an animation on moving object and play it.

2. Create an animation on “Save Tree” and display it.(Teachers are requested to guide
the student in proper sequence).

Lesson-3
Customizing & Embedding
Multimedia components in
Webpages
You will learn

Inserting Multimedia files

Inserting Multimedia files in in Webpages
 Compatible Multimedia
Webpages Files formats
 for Webpages.
What is Multimedia?  Embedding Audio File.
 Embedding Video File.
Multimedia comes in many different formats. It can be almost
 Embedding Flash File.
anything you can hear or see. Examples: Pictures, music,
sound, videos, records, films, animations, and more.
Web pages often contain multimedia elements of different
types and formats.

Browser Support

25 | P a g e
The first web browsers had support for text only, limited to a
single font in a single color. Later came browsers with support
for colors and fonts, and even support for pictures!
The support for sounds, animations, and videos is handled
differently by various browsers. Different types and formats
aresupported, and some formats require extra helper
programs (plug-ins) to work.

Compatible Multimedia Files formats for Webpages.

Common Video Formats

So
un
d
For
26 | P a g e
mats

Embedding Audio File.

Method 1

1. Open your Web page in an HTML editor or Notepad

2. Start with an object element:
<object>

3. You'll add 4 parameters to the object. The first is "src" that tells the browser where to find
the sound file. In this example, the sound file is eureka.wav and is found in the same
directory as the Web page:
<param name="src" value="eureka.wav" />

4. If you want the sound file to play immediately after it's loaded, make the autostart parameter
"true" otherwise make it "false":
<param name="autostart" value="true" />

5. The parameter autoplay is similar to autostart, just used by other browsers, set it the same as
the autostart parameter:
<param name="autoplay" value="true"/>
27 | P a g e
 6. Use the controller parameter to tell the browser if a controller should be displayed to give
your readers more control over the sound:
<param name="controller" value="true" />

7. Inside the <object></object> element, add an embed element:

<embed />

8. Add the following four attributes that are the same as the parameters to the object:
<embed src="eureka.wav" controller="true" autoplay="true" autostart="True" />

9. Add the correct MIME type for your sound file into the type attribute:
<embed src="eureka.wav" controller="true" autoplay="true" autostart="True"
type="audio/wav" />

10. Add the plugins page attribute so that people who don't have the correct plugin for your sound
file can go download it. For WAV files, recommended QuickTime:

<embed src="eureka.wav" controller="true" autoplay="true" autostart="True"

type="audio/wav" pluginspage="http://www.apple.com/quicktime/download/" />

11. When you're done, your HTML should look like this:
<object>
<param name="autostart" value="true">
<param name="src" value="eureka.wav">
<param name="autoplay" value="true">
<param name="controller" value="true">
<embed src="eureka.wav" controller="true" autoplay="true" autostart="True"
type="audio/wav" />
</object>
Method 2

Make a hyperlink directly to the audio file using the following code (change
"audiofilename.wmv" to your own file name):

<a href="audiofilename.wmv">Click here to listen audio </a>

A link is created like this: Click here to listen audio. When the end user clicks this hyperlink,
their Windows Media Player will open and load the audio file for playing.
28 | P a g e
Embedding Video File.
1. First Upload Your Video to Your Web Server

2. Create your video as a .mov or .mp4 file - and then upload it to your Web server

3. Write down the full URL to your video file - you'll need it when you write your HTML.

4. Use the Object Tag to Embed Your Video Validly

The object tag is not widely supported, but it is the only way to add a QuickTime video into
your pages using valid HTML.

There are two attributes that you need to include to get the video to play correctly:

Classid="clsid:02BF25D5-8C17-4B23-BC80-D3488ABDDC6B"
codebase=http://www.apple.com/qtactivex/qtplugin.cab

5. You'll also want to set the width and height of the object - set the width to the width of
the movie and the height to the height plus 15-20 pixels extra to include the controls.

6. Your object tag will look like:

<object width="960" height="555" classid="clsid:02BF25D5-8C17-4B23-BC80-

D3488ABDDC6B" codebase="http://www.apple.com/qtactivex/qtplugin.cab">

7. Parameters Make the Object Work

8. The only parameter that you need is the src parameter - this tells the browser where to
find the movie to play. Set the src attribute to the URL of your movie:

<param name="src" value="http://URL to movie.mov" />

9. Some other parameters that can be useful to control your video and make it more user-
friendly are:

 controller - this can be true or false. Remember that most people get very
frustrated if they cannot control multimedia elements on Web pages that they visit.
So I strongly recommend setting this to true.

29 | P a g e
  autoplay - this can be true or false. Autoplay also annoys customers. They want to
decide when and whether to watch the video. So I strongl recommend setting this
to false.
10. Inside the <object> tag, place the following parameters:

<param name="controller" value="true" /><param name="autoplay" value="false" />

11. Finally, Include an Embed Tag with the Same Information

If it is very important to you that all your pages validate, then you should not include this
section.But remember that only people with some browsers like Safari and Opera will be
able to view your video.

The embed tag should look like this. Note that all the fields are the same as the :

<embed src="http://URL to movie.mov" width="960" height="555" autoplay="true"

controller="true" pluginspage="http://www.apple.com/quicktime/download/"></embed>

12. And then close the object tag:

</object>

Embedding Flash File.

Method 1: Using Dreamweaver to insert SWF file to webpage

Dreamweaver is a visual HTML editor with built-in objects that allow you to easily insert Flash
content. The required HTML tags are automatically inserted by Dreamweaver.

1. Copy the SWF file to the same folder as the HTML document.
2. In Dreamweaver, select the location of the page where you wish to add the Flash content
(including inside a div, table cell or frame).
3. Click the Insert Flash button in Dreamweaver's Object palette, or chooseInsert> Media > Flash.
Browse to and choose the SWF file.
4. Upload both the SWF and HTML files to your Web server, placing them in the same directory.

Method 2: Manually adding the proper tags to an existing web page

If you need to incorporate the flash slideshows created by Photo Slideshow Maker into an
existing HTML or other type of webpage document, a better way is manually adding the proper
tags to the existing page.

Web page must contain tags that reference the actual Flash movie file to be opened and
played. These tags are the <OBJECT> and <EMBED> tags.
30 | P a g e
 The OBJECT tag is used by Internet Explorer on Windows and the EMBED is used by
Netscape Navigator (Macintosh and Windows) and Internet Explorer (Macintosh) to direct the
browser to load the Macromedia Flash Player.

1. Open the PFM-created HTML document in a text or HTML editor

2. Copy the HTML code included in the <object> and <embed> tags (see example below) and
paste it into the existing HTML document. This should contain the <OBJECT> and <EMBED>
tags

<object classid="clsid:d27cdb6e-ae6d-11cf-96b8-444553540000"
codebase="http://fpdownload.macromedia.com/pub/shockwave/cabs/flash/
swflash.cab#version=6,0,0,0" width="777" height="528" id="tech" align="middle">
<param name="allowScriptAccess" value="sameDomain" />
<param name="movie" value="showcase/flash/fashionshow.swf" />
<param name="quality" value="high" />
<embed src="showcase/flash/fashionshow.swf" quality="high" width="777"
height="528" name="tech" align="middle" allowScriptAccess="sameDomain"

type="application/x-shockwave-flash"
pluginspage="http://www.macromedia.com/go/getflashplayer" />
</object>

In this case, showcase/flash/ is the folder directory, while the fashionshow.swf is the SWF file
name.

3. Open the existing webpage page, and paste the <object> and <embed> tags into the
desired location in the body of the document. This can also be pasted into a table cell or
frame.

4. Edit the attributes of the tags for the movie.

Change the height and width parameters to match the height and width of the movie
dimensions or use percentage values, if desired.

5. Upload the HTML and SWF files to the same folder on the Web server.

31 | P a g e
SUMMARY

1. Multimedia comprises text, sound, graphics, image and video.Multimedia comes in many
different formats.
2. Pictures, music, sound, videos, records, films, animations are example of multimedia.
3. The first web browsers had support for text only, limited to a single font in a single color.
4. Plug-ins are the extra helper program of web browser.
5. MPEG,AVI, and WMV are example of common video format.
6. MIDI,RealAudio, and WMA are example of audio format.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks:

i. Multimedia comprises text, sound, ___________, image and video.

ii. MPEG developed by_____________.
iii. ____________tells the browser where to find the sound file.
iv. The parameter auto play is similar to _____________ just used by other web browser.
v. _____________ is visual HTML editor with built in objects that allow you to easily
insert Flash content.
B. State true or false:

i. The first web browser had support for flash only.

32 | P a g e
 ii. AVI developed by Microsoft.
iii. To play audio file we place the source in href attribute.
iv. Plug – ins are extra format to play audio in web page.
v. WMA is example of audio format.

C. Short Answer Questions:

i. What is multimedia program?

ii. Name four common video format which is compatible with web pages.?
iii. Write the steps to play an audio file from web page.?
iv. Write the steps to embed video file in web page.?
v. How to import Plug – ins in web page write their steps?

In the lab

1. Create a web page which has information on Mr. Amitabh Bacchan with one link to the audio
of him. When user click on the given link, it should play Mr.Bacchan voice.
2. Create a web page on “Save Tiger” which has some information on tiger with one link to the
video. When user click on the given link, it should play video on Save Tiger.
3. Create a web page which has link to the download the missing Plug –ins for the web page.

33 | P a g e
Lesson-4
Web Scripting using JavaScript
You will learn

REVIEW OF JAVA SCRIPT OF CLASS IX

REVIEW OF JAVA SCRIPT OF CLASS IX  Variables & Operators
 If & Switch
 Iteration (Loops)
Variables & Operators  Window Object
 Pop – Up Boxes –Alert,
JavaScript Data Types: One of the most fundamental
Confirm Etc.
characteristics of a programming language is the set of
data types it supports. These are the type of values that FUNCTIONS –USER DEFINED

can be represented and manipulated in a programming  Function Definition

language.  Calling a Function
 Function Parameters
 Return Statement
34 | P a g e String Object
 Syntax
 String Properties
 String Methods
 String HTML Wrappers
Math Object
JavaScript allows you to work with three primitive
data types:
 Numbers eg. 123, 120.50 etc.
 Strings of text e.g. "This text string" etc.
 Boolean e.g. true or false.
Java does not make a distinction between integer
values and floating-point values.
JavaScript Variables:
Variable is the stored memory location that can
hold a value in it. Variables are declared with the var
keyword. Storing a value in a variable is called variable
initialization.

Example:
<script type="text/javascript">
<!--
var name = "Ali";
var money;
money = 2000.50;
//-->
</script>

JavaScript Variable Scope:

The scope of a variable is the region of your program in which it is defined. JavaScript variable will
have only two scopes.

 Global Variables: A global variable has global scope which means it is defined everywhere in
your JavaScript code.
 Local Variables: A local variable will be visible only within a function where it is defined.
Function parameters are always local to that function.

<script type="text/javascript">
<!--

35 | P a g e
 varmyVar = "global"; // Declare a global variable
function checkscope( ) {
varmyVar = "local"; // Declare a local variable
document.write(myVar);
}
//-->
</script>

This produces the following result: Local

JavaScript Variable Names:

While naming your variables in JavaScript keep following rules in mind.

 You should not use any of the JavaScript reserved keyword as variable name.
 JavaScript variable names should not start with a numeral (0-9). They must begin with a letter
or the underscore character.
 JavaScript variable names are case sensitive.

JavaScript Reserved Words:

The following are reserved words in JavaScript. They cannot be used as JavaScript variables,
functions, methods, loop labels, or any object names.

36 | P a g e
 abstract else instanceof switch
boolean enum int synchronized
break export interface this
byte extends long throw
case false native throws
catch final new transient
char finally null true
class float package try
const for private typeof
continue function protected var
debugger goto public void
default if return volatile
delete implements short while
do import static with
double in super

Types of Operators: logical, arithmetic, relational

Operators: An Operator is a symbol that performs an operation.JavaScript language supports
following type of operators.
 Arithmetic Operators
 Comparision Operators
 Logical (or Relational) Operators
 Assignment Operators
 Conditional (or ternary) Operators

The Arithmetic Operators:

Assume variable A holds 10 and variable B holds 20 then:

Operator Description Example

37 | P a g e
 + Adds two operands A + B will give 30

- Subtracts second operand from the first A - B will give -10

* Multiply both operands A * B will give 200

/ Divide numerator by denumerator B / A will give 2

% Modulus Operator and remainder of after an integer division B % A will give 0

++ Increment operator, increases integer value by one A++ will give 11

-- Decrement operator, decreases integer value by one A-- will give 9

The Logical Operators:

Assume variable A holds 10 and variable B holds 20 then:

Operator Description Example

&& Called Logical AND operator. If both the operands are (A && B) is true.
non zero then then condition becomes true.

|| Called Logical OR Operator. If any of the two (A || B) is true.

operands are non zero then then condition becomes
true.

! Called Logical NOT Operator. Use to reverses the !(A && B) is false.
logical state of its operand. If a condition is true then
Logical NOT operator will make false.

The Comparison Operators:

Assume variable A holds 10 and variable B holds 20 then:

Operator Description Example

38 | P a g e
 == Checks if the value of two operands are equal or not, if (A == B) is not true.
yes then condition becomes true.

!= Checks if the value of two operands are equal or not, if (A != B) is true.

values are not equal then condition becomes true.

> Checks if the value of left operand is greater than the (A > B) is not true.
value of right operand, if yes then condition becomes
true.

< Checks if the value of left operand is less than the value (A < B) is true.
of right operand, if yes then condition becomes true.

>= Checks if the value of left operand is greater than or (A >= B) is not true.
equal to the value of right operand, if yes then condition
becomes true.

<= Checks if the value of left operand is less than or equal to (A <= B) is true.
the value of right operand, if yes then condition becomes
true.

The Assignment Operators:

39 | P a g e
Operator Description Example

= Simple assignment operator, Assigns values from C = A + B will assign value of A +

right side operands to left side operand B into C

+= Add AND assignment operator, It adds right operand C += A is equivalent to C = C + A

to the left operand and assign the result to left
operand

-= Subtract AND assignment operator, It subtracts right C -= A is equivalent to C = C - A

operand from the left operand and assign the result to
left operand

*= Multiply AND assignment operator, It multiplies right C *= A is equivalent to C = C * A

operand with the left operand and assign the result to
left operand

/= Divide AND assignment operator, It divides left C /= A is equivalent to C = C / A

operand with the right operand and assign the result
to left operand

%= Modulus AND assignment operator, It takes modulus C %= A is equivalent to C = C %

using two operands and assign the result to left A
operand

Decision Making using if & Switch

if...else Statements:While writing a program, you need to make use of conditional statements that
allow your program to make correct decisions and perform right actions.

JavaScript supports following forms of if..else statement:

40 | P a g e
  if statement
 if...else statement
 if...else if... statement.

if statement:

The if statement allows JavaScript to make decisions and execute statements conditionally.

Syntax:

if (expression){
Statement(s) to be executed if expression is true
}

Example:

<script type="text/javascript">
var age = 20;
if( age > 18 ){
document.write("<b>Qualifies for driving</b>");
}
</script>

This will produce following result:

Qualifies for driving

if...else statement:

The if...else statement is the next form of control statement that allows JavaScript to execute
statements in more controlled way i.e to choose from given options.

Syntax:

if (expression){
Statement(s) to be executed if expression is true
}else{
Statement(s) to be executed if expression is false
}

Example:
41 | P a g e
 <script type="text/javascript">
var age = 15;
if( age > 18 ){
document.write("<b>Qualifies for driving</b>");
}else{
document.write("<b>Does not qualify for driving</b>");
}
</script>

This will produce following result:

Does not qualify for driving

if...else if... statement:The if...else if... statement allows JavaScript to make correct decision out of
several conditions.
Syntax:
if (expression 1){
Statement(s) to be executed if expression 1 is true
}else if (expression 2){
Statement(s) to be executed if expression 2 is true
}else if (expression 3){
Statement(s) to be executed if expression 3 is true
}else{
Statement(s) to be executed if no expression is true
}
Example:

<script type="text/javascript">
var book = "maths";
if( book == "history" ){
document.write("<b>History Book</b>");
}else if( book == "maths" ){
document.write("<b>Maths Book</b>");
}else if( book == "economics" ){
document.write("<b>Economics Book</b>");
}else{
document.write("<b>Unknown Book</b>");
}
</script>

42 | P a g e
This will produce following result:

Maths Book

Switch Case:You can use multiple if...else if statements, to perform a multiway branch. However,
this is not always the best solution, especially when all of the branches depend on the value of a
single variable.
Syntax:The basic syntax of the switch statement is to give an expression to evaluate and several
different statements to execute based on the value of the
expression. The interpreter checks each case against the switch (expression)
value of the expression until a match is found. If nothing {
matches, a default condition will be used. case condition 1: statement(s)
The break statements indicate to the interpreter the break;
end of that particular case. If they were omitted, the case condition 2: statement(s)
interpreter would continue executing each statement in each break;

of the following cases. ...

case condition n: statement(s)
break;
default: statement(s)
}

Example: Following example illustrates a basic Switch case:

<script type="text/javascript">
var grade='A';
document.write("Entering switch block<br />");
switch (grade)
{
case 'A': document.write("Good job<br />");
break;

case 'B': document.write("Pretty good<br />");

43 | P a g e
 break;
case 'C': document.write("Passed<br />");
break;
case 'D': document.write("Not so good<br />");
break;
case 'F': document.write("Failed<br />");
break;
default: document.write("Unknown grade<br />")
}
document.write("Exiting switch block");
</script>

This will produce following result:

Entering switch block

Good job
Exiting switch block

Example:Consider a case if you do not use break statement:

<script type="text/javascript">
var grade='A';
document.write("Entering switch block<br />");
switch (grade)
{
case 'A': document.write("Good job<br />");
case 'B': document.write("Pretty good<br />");
case 'C': document.write("Passed<br />");
case 'D': document.write("Not so good<br />");
case 'F': document.write("Failed<br />");
default: document.write("Unknown grade<br />")
}
document.write("Exiting switch block");
</script>

44 | P a g e
This will produce following result:

Entering switch block

Good job
Pretty good
Passed
Not so good
Failed
Unknown grade
Exiting switch block

Iteration – Loops
A loop is a block of code that allows you to repeat a section of code a certain number of times;
perhaps changing certain variable values each time the code is executed.

This not only saves you the time and trouble of repeatedly typing the same lines of code, but also
avoids typing errors in the repeated lines.

JavaScript allows you to use the for, while, and do while loops.

 For loop: Structure of a for Loop

for (initialization; test condition; iteration statement) This line determines how many times the loop will
run
{

JavaScript Code Here The JavaScript code for the loop will be inside the brackets here

Parts of for loop are:

1. Initialization: Here we initialize our counter to a starting value. The initialization statement is
executed before the loop begins.
2. Test condition: If condition is true then code given inside the loop will be executed otherwise
loop will come out.
3. Iteration statement: The iteration statement where you can increase or decrease your
counter.

45 | P a g e
Example: JavaScript to write a sentence to the page 5 times

<script type="text/javascript">
<!--
for (var count=1;count<6;count+=1) {
document.write("I am part of a loop!<br />");
}
//-->
</script>

This will produce following result:

I am part of a loop!
I am part of a loop!
I am part of a loop!
I am part of a loop!
I am part of a loop!

 While loop:
syntax : initialization;

while( condition )

{ JavaScript Code Here;

Update expression;

Example:

A variable is assigned a value to count the loop

var count=1;

while (count<6) The while statement begins with a comparison

JavaScript Code Here

The count variable is adjusted so that you do not have an endless
count++; loop

46 | P a g e
 Program to print
5 numbers using
a <script type="text/javascript"> basic while
var count = 1;
loop:
document.write("Starting Loop" + "<br />");
while (count <= 5)
{
document.write("Number : " + count + "<br />");
count++;
}
document.write("Loop stopped!");
</script>

This will produce following result:

Starting Loop
Number : 1
Number : 2
Number : 3
Number : 4
Number : 5
Loop stopped!

Window Object
The window object represents an open window in a browser.

If a document contain frames (<iframe> tags), the browser creates one window object for the HTML
document, and one additional window object for each frame.

Some common Window Object Methods:

alert() Displays an alert box with a message and an OK button

blur() Removes focus from the current window

close() Closes the current window

confirm() Displays a dialog box with a message and an OK and a Cancel button

47 | P a g e
 focus() Sets focus to the current window

getSelection() Returns a Selection object representing the range of text selected by the user

moveTo() Moves a window to the specified position

open() Opens a new browser window

print() Prints the content of the current window

prompt() Displays a dialog box that prompts the visitor for input

resizeBy() Resizes the window by the specified pixels

scrollBy() Scrolls the document by the specified number of pixels

stop() Stops the window from loading

Popup Boxes – alert, confirm etc.

JavaScript supports three important types of dialog boxes. These dialog boxes can be used to raise
and alert, or to get confirmation on any input or to have a kind of input from the users.

 Alert Dialog Box:

An alert dialog box is mostly used to give a warning message to the users.

<html>
<head>
<script type="text/javascript">
<!--
function Warn()
{
alert("This is a warning message!");
}
//-->
</script>
</head>
<body>
<p>Click the following button to see the result: </p>
<form>
<input type="button" value="Click Me" onclick="Warn();" />
</form>

48 | P a g e
 </body>
</html>

Nonetheless, an alert box can still be used for friendlier messages. Alert box gives only one button
"OK" to select and proceed.

On clicking button, „Click Me‟ an alert

window appears.

 Confirmation Dialog Box:

A confirmation dialog box is mostly used to take user's consent on any option. It displays a dialog box
with two buttons: OK and Cancel.

If the user clicks on OK button the window method confirm() will return true. If the user clicks on the
Cancel button confirm() returns false. You can use confirmation dialog box as follows:

<html>
<head>
<script type="text/javascript">
<!--
function getConfirmation(){
varretVal = confirm("Do you want to continue ?");
if( retVal == true ){
alert("User wants to continue!");
return true;
}else{
alert("User does not want to continue!");
49 | P a g e
 return false;
}
}
//-->
</script>

</head>
<body>
<p>Click the following button to see the result: </p>
<form>
<input type="button" value="Click Me" onclick="getConfirmation();" />
</form>
</body>
</html>

Output will appear on the screen.

On clicking button „Click Me‟ a confirmation, dialog

box appears.

 Prompt Dialog Box

50 | P a g e
The prompt dialog box is very useful when you want to pop-up a text box to get user input. Thus it
enable you to interact with the user. The user needs to fill in the field and then click OK.

This dialog box is displayed using a method called prompt() which takes two parameters (i) A label
which you want to display in the text box (ii) A default string to display in the text box.

This dialog box with two buttons: OK and Cancel. If the user clicks on OK button the window
method prompt() will return entered value from the text box. If the user clicks on the Cancel button the
window method prompt() returns null.

You can use prompt dialog box as follows:

<html>
<head>
<script type="text/javascript">

function getValue(){

varretVal = prompt("Enter your name : ", "your name here");

alert("You have entered : " + retVal );
}
</script>
</head>

<body>
<p>Click the following button to see the result: </p>
<form>
<input type="button" value="Click Me" onclick="getValue();" />
</form>
</body>
</html>

Output will appear on the screen.

On clicking button „Click Me‟ prompt dialog box will appear on the screen.

51 | P a g e
FUNCTIONS –USER DEFINED

A function is a group of reusable code which can be called anywhere in your programme. This
eliminates the need of writing same code again and again. This will help programmers to write
modular code. You can divide your big programme in a number of small and manageable functions.

Function Definition:

The most common way to define a function in JavaScript is by using the function keyword, followed
by a unique function name, a list of parameters (that might be empty), and a statement block
surrounded by curly braces.
The basic syntaxis
shown here:

Example:

A simple function that takes no parameters called sayHellois defined here:

<script type="text/javascript">
52 | P a g e
 <!--
function sayHello()
{
alert("Hello there");
}
//-->
</script>

Calling a Function:

To invoke a function , you would simple need to write the name of that function as follows:

<script type="text/javascript">

<!--

sayHello();

//-->

</script>

Function Parameters:
We can pass different parameters while calling a function. These passed parameters can be captured
inside the function and any manipulation can be done over those parameters.
A function can take multiple parameters separated by comma.

Example:Let us do a bit modification in our sayHello function. This time it will take two parameters:

<script type="text/javascript">
<!--
function sayHello(name, age)
{
alert( name + " is " + age + " years old.");
}
//-->
</script>

Note: We are using + operator to concatenate string and number all together. JavaScript does not
mind in adding numbers into strings.Now we can call this function as follows:

53 | P a g e
 <script type="text/javascript">
<!--
sayHello('Zara', 7 );
//-->
</script>

The return Statement

A JavaScript function can have an optional return statement. This is required if you want to return a
value from a function. This statement should be the last statement in a function.

For example you can pass two numbers in a function and then you can expect from the function to
return their multiplication in your calling program.

Example:

This function takes two parameters and concatenates them and return resultant in the calling
program:

<script type="text/javascript">
<!--
function concatenate(first, last)
{

var full;

full = first + last;

return full;
}
//-->
</script>

Now we can call this function as follows:

<script type="text/javascript">
<!--
var result;
result = concatenate('Zara', 'Ali');
alert(result );
//-->
</script>

54 | P a g e
String Object

JavaScript is an Object Oriented Programming (OOP) language. A programming language can be

called object-oriented if it provides four basic capabilities to developers:

 Encapsulation . the capability to store related information, whether data or methods, together in
an object
 Aggregation . the capability to store one object inside of another object
 Inheritance . the capability of a class to rely upon another class (or number of classes) for use
of its properties and methods
 Polymorphism . the capability to write one function or method that works in a variety of different
ways

The String object let's you work with a series of characters and wraps Javascript's string primitive
data type with a number of helper methods.

Syntax :varval = new String(string)

Example:
varguitar_string = new String("Gagan");

OR

varval = string;
Example:
var s1= “Gagan”;

String Properties

Here is a list of each property and their description.

Property Description

length Returns the length of the string.

EXAMPLE:

55 | P a g e
 <body>

<script type="text/javascript">

varmyname="John";

document.write("The name has "+myname.length+" characters.");

</script>

</body>

Result is :

The name has 4 characters.

String Methods

Here is a list of each method and its description.

Method Description

charAt() Returns the character at the specified index.

concat() Combines the text of two strings and returns a new

string.

substr() Returns the characters in a string beginning at the

specified location through the specified number of
characters.

substring() Returns the characters in a string between two

56 | P a g e
 indexes into the string.

toLowerCase() Returns the calling string value converted to lower

case.

toString() Returns a string representing the specified object.

toUpperCase() Returns the calling string value converted to

uppercase.

Example:

var str1= new String("Gagan");

var str2 = new String("Sagan");
document .write(concat(str1,str2));

Result is :GaganSagan

String HTML Wrappers

Here is a list of each method, which returns a copy of the string wrapped inside the appropriate HTML
tag.

Method Description

big() Creates a string to be displayed in a big font as if it were in a <big> tag.

blink() Creates a string to blink as if it were in a <blink> tag.

bold() Creates a string to be displayed as bold as if it were in a <b> tag.

fontcolor() Causes a string to be displayed in the specified color as if it were in a <font

57 | P a g e
 color="color"> tag.

fontsize() Causes a string to be displayed in the specified font size as if it were in a <font
size="size"> tag.

italics() Causes a string to be italic, as if it were in an <i> tag.

link() Creates an HTML hypertext link that requests another URL.

small() Causes a string to be displayed in a small font, as if it were in a <small> tag.

strike() Causes a string to be displayed as struck-out text, as if it were in a <strike> tag.

Example:
vartext = "I am so mad I am red!";
document.write(text.fontcolor("red"));

This script places the following code into the page source:
<font color="red">I am so mad I am red!</font>

Result is:I am so mad I am red!

Math Object

The math object provides you properties and methods for mathematical constants and functions.

Syntax

varvariablename = mathfunction;

Example:

varpi_val = Math.PI; // pi_val =3.14159

varsq = Math.SQRT2; // sq = 1.414

Math Properties

58 | P a g e
 Here is a list of each property and their description.

Property Description

PI Ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter, approximately 3.14159.

SQRT2 Square root of 2, approximately 1.414.

Math Methods

Here is a list of each method and its description.

Method Description

abs() Returns the absolute value of a number.

max() Returns the largest of zero or more numbers.

min() Returns the smallest of zero or more numbers.

pow() Returns base to the exponent power, that is, base exponent.

random() Returns a pseudo-random number between 0 and 1.

round() Returns the value of a number rounded to the nearest integer.

sqrt() Returns the square root of a number.

Example :

varnum =4;
document .write(“ SQURE ROOT OF NUM = “+ sqrt(num) );

Result is : SQURE ROOT OF NUM = 2

Event
59 | P a g e
What is an Event?

An occurance of an activity is called an event.

When the page loads, that is an event. When the user clicks a button, that click, too, is an event.
Another example of events are like pressing any key, closing window, resizing window etc.

On click Event Type

This is the most frequently used event type which occurs when a user clicks mouse left button. You
can put your validation, warning etc against this event type.

Example:

<html>
<head>
<script type="text/javascript">
<!--
function sayHello() {
alert("Hello World")
}
//-->
</script>
</head>
<body>
<input type="button" onclick="sayHello()" value="Say Hello" />
</body>
</html>

This will produce following result and when you click Hello button then onclick event will occur
which will trigger sayHello() function.

On Submit Event Type

Another most important event type is on submit. This event occurs when you try to submit a form. So
you can put your form validation against this event type.

Example:

<html>
<head>
<script type="text/javascript">
<!--
function validation() {
60 | P a g e
 all validation goes here
.........
return either true or false
}
//-->
</script>
</head>
<body>
<form method="POST" action="t.cgi" onsubmit="return validate()">
.......
<input type="submit" value="Submit" />
</form>
</body>
</html>

On Mouseover& On Mouseout

The onmouseover event occurs when you bring your mouse over any element and theonmouseout
occurs when you take your mouse out from that element.

Example:Following example shows how a division reacts when we bring our mouse in that division:

<html>
<head>
<script type="text/javascript">
<!--
function over() {
alert("Mouse Over");
}
function out() {
alert("Mouse Out");
}
//-->
</script>

61 | P a g e
 </head>
<body>
<div onmouseover="over()" onmouseout="out()">
<h2> This is inside the division </h2>
</div>
</body>
</html>

HTML 4 Standard Events

The standard HTML 4 events are listed here for your reference. Here script indicates a Javascript
function to be executed agains that event.

Event Value Description

onchange script Script runs when the element changes

onsubmit script Script runs when the form is submitted

onreset script Script runs when the form is reset

onclick script Script runs when a mouse click

onmouseout script Script runs when mouse pointer moves

out of an element

onmouseover script Script runs when mouse pointer moves

over an element

SUMMARY

62 | P a g e
 1. One of the most fundamental characteristics of a programming language is the set of data
types it supports.
2. Variable is the stored memory location that can hold a value in it. Variables are declared with
the var keyword.
3. The scope of a variable is the region of your program in which it is defined. JavaScript variable
have only two scopes: Global and Local Variables
4. Global Variables is a global variable has global scope which means it is defined everywhere
in your JavaScript code.
5. Local Variables is a local variable will be visible only within a function where it is defined.
6. An Operator is a symbol that performs an operation. JavaScript language supports Arithmetic,
Comparison, Logical, Assignment, and Conditional Operators.
7. The if statement allows JavaScript to make decisions and execute statements conditionally.
8. The if...else statement is the next form of control statement that allows JavaScript to execute
statements in more controlled way i.e to choose from given options.
9. if...else if... statement: The if...else if... statement allows JavaScript to make correct decision
out of several conditions.
10. Switch case is one of the alternate of multiple if. Else…if…
11. A loop is a block of code that allows you to repeat a section of code a certain number of times;
perhaps changing certain variable values each time the code is executed.
12. The window object represents an open window in a browser
13. A confirmation dialog box is mostly used to take user's consent on any option. It displays a
dialog box with two buttons: OK and Cancel.
14. The prompt dialog box is very useful when you want to pop-up a text box to get user input.
Thus it enable you to interact with the user. The user needs to fill in the field and then click OK.

15. A function is a group of reusable code which can be called anywhere in your programme. This
eliminates the need of writing same code again and again.
16. The math object provides you properties and methods for mathematical constants and
functions
17. An occurance of an activity is called an event.

63 | P a g e
 18. The onmouseover event occurs when you bring your mouse over any element and
theonmouseout occurs when you take your mouse out from that element.

EXERCISES

A. Fill in the blanks:

i.
_____________ is the stored memory location that can hold value in it.
ii.
_____________ cannot be used as variable.
iii.
An __________ is a symbol that performs an operation.
iv.___________control statement allows JavaScript to execute statement in more
controlled way.
v. ____________is one of the alternate of multiple if….else….if.
vi. The _____________ object represents an open window in a browser.
vii. ____________ is mostly used to give warning message to the users.
viii. ____________ is a group of reusable code which can be called anywhere in your
program.
ix. ___________keyword is used to define function in JavaScript.
x. The _____________object provides you properties and methods for mathematical
constants and functions.
B. State true or false:

i. The onmouseover event occurs when you take out your mouse out from that
element.
ii. An occurrence of an activity is called event.
iii. Pow( ) method returns base to the exponent power.
iv. Encapsulation is the capability of a class to rely upon another class for use of its
properties and methods.
v. JavaScript function can have a optional return statement.

vi. We are using * operator to concatenate string.

C. Short Answer Questions:

i. What is data type in JavaScript?

ii. What data type support JavaScript?
iii. What is variable? What are the types of variable?
64 | P a g e
 iv. Write one difference between Local variable and Global variable.?
v. What do you mean by Reserved word?
vi. What is operator? What operator support JavaScript?
vii. Give your reason why the following operators are used:
a) Arithmetic Operator
b) Logical Operator
c) Comparison Operator
viii. Write syntax for the following:
a) If else if statement.
b) Switch case
c) For loop
ix. What is window object? Write some common window object methods.
x. Write one difference between Confirmation Dialog Box and Prompt Dialog Box.
xi. What is function? Give one example of it.
xii. What is the use of return statement in function?
xiii. Write short notes on:
a) Encapsulation
b) Aggregation
c) Inheritance
d) Polymorphism
xiv. What is string object in JavaScript?
xv. What is event? Write about Onclick event type with example.

In the lab

1. Write a program in JavaScript which will display all the even numbers between 1 to 20.
65 | P a g e
 2. Write a program in JavaScript which will display your name 10 times and say good Bye at the
end.
3. Write a program in JavaScript which will call a function where it is displaying the largest
number between the two number.
4. Write a program in JavaScript which will display different warning message in the same
program.
5. Write a JavaScript which will display All the month name with reference of their month
number(Using Switch Case).

NOTE: Teachers are requested to give them a group project on JavaScript.

Lesson-5
Operating Web based application

You will learn

E-GOVERANCE

66 | P a g e E-GOVERANCE
 What is E-Governance
 Major E- Governance Projects
in India
 Societal Imports of E-
Governance
What is E-Governance?

E-GOVERNANCE refers to the application of electronic means

in governance with an aim of fulfilling the requirements of common
man at affordable costs and in fastest possible time.
Major E- Governance Projects in India

1. MCA 21 ,India‟s prestigious G2B services Portal

(URL: www.mca.gov.in)
2. Consular passport and VISA Division
(Indian Passport Office)( URL: http://passport.gov.in)
3. Income Tax Portal (URL: http://www.incometaxindia.gov.in)
4. National Portal of India (URL: http://www.india.gov.in)
5. DRDO(URL : http://www.drdo.nic.in)
6. Supreme Court of India
(URL :http://supremecourtofindia.nic.in)
7. Indian Courts (URL: http://www.indiancourts.nic.in)
8. RTI Portal (URL:http://www.rti.gov.in)

Societal Impacts of E- Governance

Positive Impacts:

1. Improve efficiency of administration and service delivery.

2. Reduce waiting time.

3. Reduce cost of availing the services.

4. Keep a tab on corruption to some extent.
5. Increased public participation.
6. Increase transparency & increased accountability of government offices

Negative Impacts:

67 | P a g e
 1. People living in rural & remote areas face lack of computerization.
2. Not all services are part of E-governance so manual methods are used.
3. Lack of awareness prevented people to benefit.
4. Incompatibility of software & hardware.
5. Websites are slow & needs improvement.

E-BUSSINESS

What is E- Business?

E-BUSINESS refers to any form of transaction that uses an electronic medium to facilitate the
transaction.

Major E- Business Portals

1. IRCTC portal (URL: http://www.irctc.co.in)

2. Online Reservation site Yatra .com(URL: http://www.yatra.com)

3. Life Insurance Cooperation of India (URL: http://www.licindia.com)

4. State Bank of India (URL: http://www.statebankofindia.com)

5. Online store Amazon.com (URL:http://www.amazon.com)

Societal Impacts of E- Business

Positive Impacts

1. Increase in internet users

2. Middle class attracted towards low cost flights
3. Change in online shopping habits
4. Increase in online payments

Negative Impacts

1. Poor telecom & infrastructure for reliable connectivity

2. Multiple issues of trust
3. Multiple gaps in the current legal & regulatory frame work

68 | P a g e
E- LEARNING

What is E- Learning?

E-LEARNING is a flexible term used to describe a means of teaching through technology such
as a network, browser, CDROM or DVD multimedia platforms.

Major E- Learning Sites

1. Moodle portal (http://www.moodle.org)

2. W3Schools (http://www.w3schools.com)
3. eXe Project (http://www.exelearning.org)
4. Xerte Project (http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/xerte)

Societal Impacts of E- Learning.

Positive Impacts

1. Availability of same course to millions.

2. Boon for Working class.
3. Apprehensive Employers.

Negative Impacts

1. People living in rural & remote areas face lack of computerization.

2. Lack of awareness prevented people to benefit.
3. Cultural differences obstruct the true aim of E-Learning.
4. High dropout rate.

SUMMARY

1. E-GOVERNANCE refers to the application of electronic means in governance with an aim of

fulfilling the requirements of common man at affordable costs and in fastest possible time.
69 | P a g e
 2. E-BUSINESS refers to any form of transaction that uses an electronic medium to facilitate the
transaction.
3. E-LEARNING is a flexible term used to describe a means of teaching through technology such
as a network, browser, CDROM or DVD multimedia platforms.

EXERCISES

A. Short Answer Questions:

i. What is E-Governance? Write few names of major E-Governance project in India.
ii. Write two positive and two negative societal impacts of E-Governance.
iii. What is E-Business? Write few names of E-Business Portals.
iv. Write two positive and two negative societal impacts of E-Business.
v. What is E-Learning? Write few names of E-Learning web sites.
vi. Write two positive and two negative societal impact of E-Learning.

Check Your Progress

Short Answer Questions

70 | P a g e
 Q.1 What are Functions?
Q.2 What is the need of function?

Q.3 Define: a) Function Call b) Function definition

Q.4 What are parameters in functions?
Q.5 What is the significance of return statement ?

Multiple Choice Questions

Which Keyword should be used to write functions?
Q.1
A) var B) String C) function D) return
Q.2 Where should you write the Return statement in a function?
A) Beginning B) Ending C) Middle D) nowhere
Q.3 What are the disadvantages of functions?
A) Reduced time B) Reduced Efforts C) repetition of code D) complexity
Q.4 How many values are returned by the function?
A) one B) two C) Zero D) NULL
How can we separate the list of function parameters in the function definition?
Q.5
A) by commas B) by colon C) by semi colon D) by opeartor

True or False
Q.1 The return statement can return two values from a function at a time.
Q.2 A function can take multiple parameters separated by comma.

Q.3 A function is a group of reusable code which can be called anywhere in your programme.

Q.4 Function call is optional to call the function definition.

Q.5 Function definition can be written in body tag or in head tag of HTML.

Find the Output

71 | P a g e
 Q.1 What value will be stored in ‘result’?

function change(n1)

var result;

result = n1 + 10;

return result;

Q.2 What value will be stored in ‘a’?

function change(b)

vara;

a=b/3;

return a;

72 | P a g e
 Q.3 Consider the following code fragment and Find the Output

function find_data()

varch = ‘b’;

switch(ch)
{
case „a‟ : document.write(“It is a” + “<BR>" ) ;
break;
case „b‟ : document.write((“It is b” + “<BR>") ;

default : document.write((“It is not valid” + “<BR>" ) ;

break;
}

Q.4 Consider the following code fragment and Find the Output

function find_data()

var sum = 1;

for( var x=8; x>=1 ; x = x-2)

sum=sum * x ;

document.write( “ result is “+ sum);

73 | P a g e
 Practical Exercises with solution:
Q.1 Write the function using Javascript to find the sum of two numbers entered by the user.
Solution:

<html>
<body>
<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

var number1 = parseFloat( prompt("Enter the first number") );

var number2 = parseFloat( prompt("Enter the second number") );

function add(n1,n2)
{
var result;
result = n1 + n2;
return result;
}

var r = add(number1,number2) ;
document.write("result is"+r);

</script>
</body>
</html
Q.2 Write the function using Javascript to find the largest of two numbers.
Solution:

<html>
<body>
<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

function large(n1,n2)
{
var result;
if (n1 > n2)
result = n1;
else
result = n2;
return result;
}

var r = large(10,20) ;
document.write("result is"+r);

</script>
</body>
</html>

74 | P a g e
 Write the function using Javascript to find the remainder and quotient of a number, if divided by
Q.3 another number.
Hint: use of math.floor( ) gives you integer quotient

Solution:

<html>
<body>
<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

var n1 = parseInt( prompt("Enter the divisor of a number") );

var n2 = parseInt( prompt("Enter the dividend of a number") );
var r, q;

r = n2 % n1;
q = Math.floor(n2 / n1);
document.write("Remainder is" + r);
document.write("Quotient is" + q);

</script>
</body>
</html>

Q.4 Write the function using Javascript to enter the day number and display the day name.
Solution:

<html>
<body>
<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

vardaynum = parseFloat(prompt("Enter a day number") ;

switch(daynum)
{
case 1 : document.write(daynum + " is MONDAY <BR>" ) ;
break;
case 2 : document.write(daynum + " is TUESDAY <BR>" ) ;
break;
case 3 : document.write(daynum + " is WEDNESDAY <BR>" ) ;
break;
case 4 : document.write(daynum + " is THURSNDAY <BR>" ) ;
break;
case 5 : document.write(daynum + " is FRIDAY <BR>" ) ;
break;

75 | P a g e
 case 6 : document.write(daynum + " is SATURDAY <BR>" ) ;
break;
case 7 : document.write(daynum + " is SUNDAY <BR>" ) ;
break;
default: document.write(daynum + " is NOT VALID DAYNUMBER <BR>") ;
}

</script>
</body>
</html>

Q.5 Write the function using Javascript to print the table of number entered by the user.
Solution:

<html>

<body>

<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

varnum = parseFloat(prompt("Enter a number") );

var x;

for(var i = 1; i<=10 ;i++)

x= i*num;

document.write("<p>" + "value 1= " + x + "</p>");

</script>

</body>

</html>

76 | P a g e
 Check Your Progress

Short Answer Questions

Q.1 Mention the capabilities of OOPs.
Q.2 Define : a) Inheritance b) Encapsulation c) Polymorphism
Q.3 Which method is used to join 2 strings?
Q.4 Write some methods which are used for formatting?
Q.5 Declare one variable name that stores the value of your firstname.

Multiple Choice Questions

Which is not the Object oriented programming feature?
Q.1
A) Inheritance B) Encapsulation C) Polymorphism D) Formatting
Q.2 What is the length of the string x = “COMPUTER”?
A) 6 B) 7 C) 8 D) 9
Q.3 Which keyword is used to declare a string object?
A) String B) str C) string D) any other

True or False
Q.1 bold() Creates a string to be displayed in a big font as if it were in a <big> tag.
Q.2 italics()Causes a string to be italic, as if it were in an <i> tag.

Q.3 blink()Creates an HTML hypertext link that requests another URL.

Find the Output

Q.1 Consider the following code fragment and find the output.

varsr ="AbCD Char";

document.write("<p>" + sr + "</p>");
document.write("<p>" + sr.toUpperCase() + "</p>");
document.write("<p>" + sr.toLowerCase() + "</p>");
document.write("<p>" + sr + "</p>");
Q.2 Consider the following code fragment and find the output.

varsr ="AbCD Char";

document.write("<p>" + sr.substr(2,4) + "</p>");

77 | P a g e
 Q.3 Consider the following code fragment and find the output.

varstr = new String( "This is program" );

document.write("str.charAt(0) is:" + str.charAt(0));

document.write("str.charAt(5) is:" + str.charAt(5));

Practical Exercises with Solution:

Q.1 Write the code using Javascript to convert uppercase characters into lowercase and
vice-versa.
Solution:

<html>
<body>
<script>
var txt="Hello World!";
document.write("<p>" + txt.toUpperCase() + "</p>");
document.write("<p>" + txt.toLowerCase() + "</p>");
document.write("<p>" + txt + "</p>");
</script>
</body>
</html>
Q.2 Write the code to obtain the following output.

Original value1 is ABc

Original value2 is DEFg

Changed value is ABcDEFg

78 | P a g e
 Q.3 Write the code using Javascript to find the substring of a given string. Then join the 2
strings and store them into another variable.
Solution:

<html>
<body>
<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">
var x = new String("program");
var sub = x.substr(4);
var res = x.concat(sub);
document.write("<p>" + "Substring is " + sub +"</p>");
document.write("<p>" + "joined string is " + res +"</p>");
</script>
</body>
</html>
Q.4 Write the code to change the font color as RED.

<html>

<head>

<title>JavaScript String fontcolor() Method</title>

</head>

<body>

<script type="text/javascript">

varstr = new String("Hello world");

alert(str.fontcolor( "red" ));

</script>

</body>

</html>

Q.5 Write the code to display the output as given below

Hello world

79 | P a g e
 Check Your Progress
Short Answer Questions
Q.1 Expain the significance of Math Object.
Q.2 Mention some of the properties of Math object.
Q.3 Mention some of the methods of Math object.

Multiple Choice Questions

Which method do not belong to math object?
Q.1
A) abs() B) pow() C) sqrt() D) minus()
Q.2 Which method is used to find the minimum value from the given list of values?
A) math.pow() B) math.max() C) math.min() D) math.less()
Q.3 Which method is used to find the random values between 0 and 1?
A) math.random() B) math.pow() C) math.square() D) math.round()

True or False
Q.1 Math object is used for mathematical functions.
Q.2 Math.abs() is used to find the absolute value of number entered by the user.
Q.3 At once , we can generate 2 Random numbers .

Find the Output

Q.1 What value will be displayed for the variable ‘value’ for the code mentioned below

var value = Math.max(10, 20, -1, 100);

document.write("First Test Value : " + value );

A) 10 B) 20 C) -1 D) 100

Q.2 What value will be displayed for the variable ‘value’ for the code mentioned below

var value = Math.pow(0, 10);

document.write("<br />Result is : " + value );

A) 10 B) 20 C) 0 D) 100

80 | P a g e
 Q.3 What value will be displayed for the variable ‘value’ for the code mentioned below

var value = Math.round( -20.3 );

document.write("<br />Fourth Test Value : " + value );

A) 10 B) -20 C) 3 D) -20.3

Practical Exercises with solution:

Write the code using Javascript to find the minimum and maximum values from
the values entered by the user.

Q.1 Solution:

<html>

<body>

<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

var n1 = parseInt(prompt("Enter the first number"));

var n2 = parseInt(prompt("Enter the second number"));

var n3 = parseInt(prompt("Enter the third number"));

varsmall,large;

small=Math.min(n1,n2,n3);

large=Math.max(n1,n2,n3);

document.write("<p>" + "smaller no. is " + small +"</p>");

document.write("<p>" + "larger no. is " + large +"</p>");

</script>

</body>

</html

81 | P a g e
 Q.2 Write the code using Javascriptto generate random numbers.
<html>

<body>

<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

varnum;

num = Math.random();

document.write("<p>" + "random no. generated is " + num +"</p>");

</script>

</body>

</html

Q.3 Write the codeusing Javascript to find the square root of a number entered by
the user.
Solution:

<html>
<body>
<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

varnum;
num = prompt(parseFloat("Enter the number"));
varsq = Math.sqrt(num);
document.write("<p>" + "Squreroot of a number is " + sq +"</p>");

</script>
</body>
</html

Q.4 Write the code usingJavascript to enter a float value from the user and find the
rounded value for that number.
Solution:
<html>
<body>
<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

varnum;
num = prompt(parseFloat("Enter the number to be rounded off"));
var r1 = Math.round(num);

82 | P a g e
 document.write("<p>" + "Rounded number is " + r1 +"</p>");

</script>
</body>
</html>

Q.5 Write the code to display the output as given below

<html>
<body>
<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

varnum;
num = prompt(parseFloat("Enter the number to be rounded off"));
var r1 = Math.round(num);
document.write("<p>" + "Rounded number is " + r1 +"</p>");

</script>
</body>
</html>

83 | P a g e
 Check Your Progress

Short Answer Questions

Q.1 What is an Event?
Q.2 Give some examples of event
What is the difference between the OnMouseover& On Mouseout Event?
Q.3

Multiple Choice Questions

Which event is fired when the element changes?
Q.1
A) Onclick() B) onsubmit() C) onchange() D) onreset()
Q.2 Which event is fired ,when the form is reset?
A) Onclick() B) onsubmit() C) onchange() D) onreset()
Q.3 Which event is fired , when mouse pointer moves out of an element?
A) Onclick() B) onsubmit() C) onchange() D) onmouseout()

True or False
Q.1 onsubmit() event is fired when we submit a form by clicking a button.
Q.2 Clicking a button is not an event.
Q.3 Resizing a window is an example of an event.

84 | P a g e
 Practical Exercises with solution:
Q.1 Write the code using Javascript to concatenate 2 words entered by the user on
clicking the button.
Solution:

<html>

<body>

<script language="javascript" type="text/javascript">

document.write("<p>"+"LETS CONCATENATE 2 WORDS "+"</p>");

function JOIN()

alert("Lets join 2 words");

var ch1=prompt("Enter first name");

var ch2=prompt("Enter second name");

document.write("joining is " + ch1 +ch2);

</script>

<input type="button" onclick="JOIN()" value="calculate" />

</body>

</html>

85 | P a g e
 Q.2 Write the code usingJavascript to show the working of onsubmit event.
Solution:

<html>

<body>

<p>Click the "Submit" button to submit the form.</p>

<form onsubmit="myFunction()" action="form_action.asp">

Firstname: <input type="text" name="fname" value="Donald"><br>

Lastname: <input type="text" name="lname" value="Duck">

<br><br>

<input type="submit" value="SUBMIT">

</form>

<script>

function myFunction()

alert("The form will be submitted");

</script>

</body>

</html>

86 | P a g e
 Q.3 Write the code usingJavascript to show the working of reset event.
Solution:

<html>

<body>

<p>Enter some text in the fields below, then press the "Reset" button to reset the
form.</p>

<form onreset="myFunction()">

Firstname: <input type="text" name="fname" value=" "><br>

Lastname: <input type="text" name="lname" value=" ">

<br><br>

<input type="reset" value="Reset">

</form>

<script>

function myFunction()

alert("The form will be reset. Enter Again ");

</script>

</body>

</html>

87 | P a g e